IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Table of Contents

Table of contents
Abbreviations and Keywords Table................................................................. 1
Section 1. Introduction................................................................................. 14
1.1 THE STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMMING MANUAL........................................ 14
1.2 MANUAL USAGE............................................................................................. 15
Section 2. System Feature ........................................................................... 16
2.1 HOW TO GET INCOMING CALL .................................................................... 16
2.1.1 Ring Assignment ............................................................................................... 16
2.1.2 PLA (Preferred Line Answer) ............................................................................. 18
2.1.3 DID(Direct Inward Dialing)................................................................................. 19
2.1.4 DISA(Direct Inward System Access) ................................................................. 22
2.1.5 CCR(Customer Call Routing) with VMIB ........................................................... 24
2.1.6 CO Line Name................................................................................................... 26
2.1.7 UNA (UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER) ............................................................... 27
2.2 HOW TO ACCESS OUTGOING CALL............................................................ 28
2.2.1 Basic access ..................................................................................................... 28
2.2.2 Call time restriction............................................................................................ 30
2.2.3 CO Line Queuing............................................................................................... 31
2.2.4 CO Step Call – Analog Only .............................................................................. 32
2.2.5 Emergency Call service..................................................................................... 32
2.2.6 Hot Line & Warm Line ....................................................................................... 33
2.2.7 LCR (Least Cost Routing) ................................................................................. 34
2.2.8 Memory dialing .................................................................................................. 40
2.2.9 Private Line ....................................................................................................... 47
2.3 REROUTING FEATURE.................................................................................. 48
2.3.1 Call Forward ...................................................................................................... 48
2.3.2 Call Transfer ...................................................................................................... 59
2.3.3 Holding and Parking .......................................................................................... 63
2.3.4 Pickup ............................................................................................................... 67
2.3.5 Mobile Extension ............................................................................................... 69
2.4 CALL HANDLING............................................................................................. 71
2.4.1 Absent Text Message ........................................................................................ 71
2.4.2 Alarm ................................................................................................................. 74
2.4.3 Automatic Privacy.............................................................................................. 75
2.4.4 BGM (Background Music) ................................................................................. 76
2.4.5 Camp-on............................................................................................................ 77
2.4.6 Change Ring Type............................................................................................. 78
2.4.7 Data Line Security ............................................................................................. 79
2.4.8 Dialing Security ................................................................................................. 80
2.4.9 DND(Do Not Disturb)......................................................................................... 81
2.4.10 DND - One Time DND ..................................................................................... 82
2.4.11 Flash................................................................................................................ 83
2.4.12 Flexible Button................................................................................................. 84
2.4.13 Headset ........................................................................................................... 85
2.4.14 Intercom Signal Mode ..................................................................................... 86
2.4.15 Intercom Tenancy Group ................................................................................. 87
2.4.16 Message Wait / Call Back................................................................................ 89
2.4.17 MOH (Music On Hold) ..................................................................................... 91
2.4.18 Mute ................................................................................................................ 93

i
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Table of Contents

2.4.19 MWI (Message Wait Indication) – SLT Feature ............................................... 94

2.4.20 On-Hook dialing............................................................................................... 94
2.4.21 Station Name................................................................................................... 95
2.4.22 Station Program............................................................................................... 97
2.4.23 Station Relocation ........................................................................................... 99
2.4.24 Station Serial Call ............................................................................................ 99
2.4.25 Time & Date setup by digital network ............................................................ 100
2.4.26 Voice Over..................................................................................................... 101
2.4.27 Wakeup ......................................................................................................... 102
2.4.28 Extend CO-to-CO Connection ....................................................................... 103
2.4.29 Forced Hands free Mode............................................................................... 104
2.4.30 Hot Desk........................................................................................................ 105
2.4.31 Call Log ......................................................................................................... 107
2.4.32 In-Room Indication ........................................................................................ 111
2.4.33 Chime Bell ..................................................................................................... 112
2.4.34 Emergency Intrusion ..................................................................................... 113
2.5 CALL BARRING FEATURE........................................................................... 114
2.5.1 Account Code .................................................................................................. 114
2.5.2 Authorization Code .......................................................................................... 115
2.5.3 Automatic Call Release ................................................................................... 116
2.5.4 COS (Class Of Service)................................................................................... 117
2.5.5 System Speed Zone ........................................................................................ 119
2.5.6 Walking COS ................................................................................................... 120
2.6 HUNT GROUP ............................................................................................... 121
2.6.1 Common features for Hunt Group ................................................................... 121
2.6.2 Terminal Group................................................................................................ 123
2.6.3 Circular Group ................................................................................................. 124
2.6.4 Ring Group ...................................................................................................... 125
2.6.5 Voice Mail Group ............................................................................................. 125
2.6.6 UCD Group(Unified Call Distribution Group) ................................................... 126
2.6.7 ACD (Automatic Call Distribution).................................................................... 127
2.7 CONFERENCE FEATURE ............................................................................ 129
2.7.1 Conference – SLT (BROKERS Call)................................................................ 130
2.7.2 Paging Conference.......................................................................................... 131
2.7.3 Conference Room ........................................................................................... 132
2.8 PAGING FEATURE ....................................................................................... 134
2.8.1 Internal page / External page / All-Call page / Meet-me Page ......................... 134
2.8.2 Pre-recorded MSG .......................................................................................... 136
2.8.3 SOS Paging..................................................................................................... 137
2.9 LINKED STATIONS ....................................................................................... 138
2.9.1 Executive/Secretary ........................................................................................ 138
2.9.2 Linked-Pair Station .......................................................................................... 140
2.10 EXTERNAL DEVICE CONTROL.................................................................... 142
2.10.1 Door Open..................................................................................................... 142
2.10.2 Door Phone ................................................................................................... 143
2.10.3 Loud Bell ....................................................................................................... 144
2.11 VOICE SERVICE............................................................................................ 145
2.11.1 Recording System VMIB Announcement....................................................... 145
2.11.2 Remote Control ............................................................................................. 148
2.11.3 Two-way Recording ....................................................................................... 150
2.11.4 Recording User VMIB Announcement ........................................................... 152

ii
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Table of Contents

2.11.5 VMIB Announcement for Auto Attendant........................................................ 154

2.11.6 VMIB Message Transfer ................................................................................ 154
2.11.7 VMIB Message with CLI ................................................................................ 155
2.12 SMDR(STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING).................................... 156
2.12.1 AOC (Advice Of Charge) ............................................................................... 158
2.12.2 Display .......................................................................................................... 159
2.12.3 Print-out......................................................................................................... 160
2.13 ATTENDANT SERVICE ................................................................................. 162
2.13.1 Assign Attendant............................................................................................ 163
2.13.2 Attendant Call & Queuing .............................................................................. 163
2.13.3 Attendant Forward ......................................................................................... 164
2.13.4 Attendant Intrusion ........................................................................................ 165
2.13.5 Attendant Override ........................................................................................ 166
2.13.6 Attendant Recall ............................................................................................ 167
2.13.7 Change LCD Date/Time display .................................................................... 167
2.13.8 Day/Night service .......................................................................................... 168
2.13.9 Disable Outgoing Access............................................................................... 169
2.13.10 ICM Box Music Selection............................................................................. 170
2.13.11 Station Feature Cancel ................................................................................ 170
2.13.12 DSS/DLS Consoles ..................................................................................... 171
2.14 ISDN SERVICE .............................................................................................. 172
2.14.1 Call Deflection ............................................................................................... 172
2.14.2 CLI(Calling Line Identification Presentation).................................................. 173
2.14.3 CLIR/COLR ................................................................................................... 179
2.14.4 COLP(Connected Line Identification Presentation) ....................................... 179
2.14.5 Key Pad......................................................................................................... 180
2.14.6 Malicious Call ID............................................................................................ 181
2.14.7 MSN/Sub-Addressing .................................................................................... 182
2.15 VOIP SERVICE .............................................................................................. 184
2.15.1 Call by IP address ......................................................................................... 184
2.15.2 Call by routing table....................................................................................... 184
2.16 QSIG OVER ISDN & H.450 OVER IP ............................................................ 186
2.16.1 Net Call.......................................................................................................... 189
2.16.2 Identification Service ..................................................................................... 193
2.16.3 Net Transfer................................................................................................... 194
2.16.4 Net Call Forward - Unconditional................................................................... 197
2.16.5 Net Call Forward - Busy ................................................................................ 200
2.16.6 Net Call Forward – Busy / No Answer ........................................................... 201
2.16.7 Net Call Forward – No Answer ...................................................................... 202
2.16.8 Net Conference ............................................................................................. 203
2.16.9 Call Offer ....................................................................................................... 204
2.16.10 Call Completion ........................................................................................... 206
2.16.11 Do-Not-Disturb (DND).................................................................................. 207
2.16.12 CO Transit - In ............................................................................................. 208
2.16.13 CO Transit - Out .......................................................................................... 210
2.16.14 Message Waiting Indication (MWI) .............................................................. 212
2.16.15 Absent Text Message .................................................................................. 213
2.16.16 Attendant Call Service(CAS) ....................................................................... 214
2.16.17 DECT Mobility ............................................................................................. 215
2.16.18 Centralized VMS ......................................................................................... 215
2.16.19 BLF(Busy Lamp Field) Presentation............................................................ 216

iii
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Table of Contents

2.16.20 Net Follow-Me Forward ............................................................................... 217

2.17 2B FUNCTION................................................................................................ 218
2.18 TRAFFIC ANALYSIS ...................................................................................... 219
2.18.1 Traffic Analysis - Attendant ............................................................................ 220
2.18.2 Traffic Analysis - Calls ................................................................................... 221
2.18.3 Traffic Analysis - CO ...................................................................................... 222
2.18.4 Traffic Analysis – H/W Unit ............................................................................ 223
2.19 SOFTWARE UPGRADE ................................................................................ 224
2.19.1 ISDN.............................................................................................................. 224
2.19.2 LAN ............................................................................................................... 226
2.19.3 SERIAL(COM port)........................................................................................ 228
2.19.4 MODEM......................................................................................................... 230
Section 3. System Basic ADMIN programming........................................ 233
3.1 BEFORE ADMIN PROGRAMMING............................................................... 233
3.2 BUTTON EXPLANATION .............................................................................. 234
3.3 HOW TO ENTER THE PROGRAMMING MODE .......................................... 235
3.4 PERMANENT UPDATE PROCEDURE......................................................... 235
3.5 HOW TO RESET THE SYSTEM ................................................................... 235
3.6 PRE-PROGRAMMING................................................................................... 236
3.6.1 Location PGM-Nation code & Site Name (PGM100)....................................... 238
3.6.2 RACK SLOT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 101)....................................................... 240
3.6.3 WTIB PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT (PGM 102)....................................... 241
3.6.4 LOGICAL SLOT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 103) ................................................. 241
3.6.5 NUMBERING PLAN TYPE (PGM 104)......................................................... 242
3.6.6 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN – Station Number (PGM 105) ....................... 243
3.6.7 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN A,B,C (PGM 106-107, 109)........................... 244
3.6.8 IP setting for MPB (PGM 108) ......................................................................... 246
3.6.9 HOT DESK AGENT ATTRIBUTE (PGM 250) .................................................. 247
Section 4. ADMIN programming ................................................................ 249
4.1 STATION PROGRAMMING .......................................................................... 251
4.1.1 STATION & DSS/DLS MAP ID (PGM 110).................................................... 251
4.1.2 STATION ATTRIBUTE – I (PGM 111) ........................................................... 253
4.1.3 STATION ATTRIBUTE –Ⅱ (PGM 112) ........................................................... 261
4.1.4 STATION ATTRIBUTE – Ⅲ (PGM 113) ........................................................ 269
4.1.5 ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTE (PGM 114)....................................................... 273
4.1.6 FLEX BUTTON ASSIGNMENT (PGM 115)................................................... 282
4.1.7 STATION COS (PGM 116)............................................................................ 283
4.1.8 CO LINE GROUP ACCESS (PGM 117)........................................................ 284
4.1.9 INTERNAL PAGE ZONE (PGM 118) ............................................................ 284
4.1.10 CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE (PGM 119)................................................... 285
4.1.11 ICM TENANCY GROUP (PGM 120) ........................................................... 286
4.1.12 ICM PRESET CALL FORWARD (PGM 121) .............................................. 287
4.1.13 IDLE LINE SELECTION(PGM 122)............................................................... 287
4.1.14 CTI STATION ATTRIBUTE (PGM 123) ....................................................... 288
4.1.15 SMDR ACCOUNT GROUP (PGM 124) ...................................................... 288
4.1.16 COPY DSS BUTTON (PGM 125) ............................................................... 289
4.1.17 DISPLAY STATION NUMBER BY COS (PGM 130).................................... 289
4.1.18 DISPLAY STATION NUMBER BY CO ACCESS GROUP (PGM 131) ........ 290
4.2 CO LINE PROGRAMMING............................................................................ 291

iv
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Table of Contents

4.2.1 CO SERVICE TYPE (PGM 140) ................................................................... 291

4.2.2 CO LINE ATTRIBUTE –Ⅰ (PGM 141)............................................................. 293
4.2.3 CO LINE ATTRIBUTE –Ⅱ (PGM 142)............................................................ 297
4.2.4 ISDN CO LINE ATTRIBUTE (PGM 143) ....................................................... 303
4.2.5 CO RING ASSIGNMENT (PGM 144)............................................................ 308
4.2.6 CO LINE ASSIGNMENT DISPLAY (PGM 145)............................................. 310
4.2.7 CO LINE ATTRIBUTE Ⅲ (PGM 146)............................................................ 311
4.3 SLOT PROGRAMMING................................................................................. 313
4.3.1 BOARD ATTRIBUTE (PGM 155) .................................................................. 313
4.4 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMOMG .............................................................. 314
4.4.1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE - Ⅰ (PGM 160) ............................................................. 314
4.4.2 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE - Ⅱ (PGM 161) ............................................................ 321
4.4.3 ADMIN PASSWORD (PGM 162) .................................................................. 328
4.4.4 ALARM ATTRIBUTES (PGM 163) ................................................................ 329
4.4.5 ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 164) ...................................................... 331
4.4.6 AUTO ATTENDANT VMIB ANNC ASSIGNMENT (PGM 165)....................... 332
4.4.7 CO-TO-CO COS (PGM 166) ........................................................................ 333
4.4.8 DID/DISA DESTINATION (PGM 167) ........................................................... 334
4.4.9 EXTERNAL CONTROL CONTACT (PGM 168) ............................................ 339
4.4.10 LCD TIME/DATE/LANGUAGE DISPLAY MODE (PGM 169) ...................... 341
4.4.11 MODEM (PGM 170).................................................................................... 343
4.4.12 MUSIC Assignment (PGM 171) .................................................................. 344
4.4.13 PBX ACCESS CODE (PGM 172) ............................................................... 347
4.4.14 PLA PRIORITY SETTING (PGM 173) ........................................................ 348
4.4.15 RS-232C PORT SETTING (PGM 174) ....................................................... 349
4.4.16 PRINT PORT SELECTION (PGM 175)....................................................... 350
4.4.17 PULSE DIAL PATIO (PGM 176) ................................................................. 355
4.4.18 SMDR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 177) ................................................................ 356
4.4.19 SYSTEM TIME/DATE SETTING (PGM 178) .............................................. 362
4.4.20 LINKED STATION PAIRS TABLE (PGM 179) ............................................. 363
4.4.21 CIDU SETTING (PGM 185) ........................................................................ 364
4.4.22 IN ROOM INDICATION (PGM 183) ............................................................ 367
4.4.23 CHIME BELL (PGM 184)............................................................................... 368
4.5 SYSTEM TIMERS.......................................................................................... 370
4.5.1 SYSTEM TIMERS –Ⅰ (PGM 180) .................................................................. 370
4.5.2 SYSTEM TIMERS –Ⅱ (PGM 181) ................................................................. 378
4.5.3 SYSTEM TIMERS –Ⅲ (PGM 182) ................................................................ 385
4.6 DCOB ATTRIBUTE........................................................................................ 389
4.6.1 DCOB ATTRIBUTE–Ⅰ(PGM 186) ..................................................................... 389
4.6.2 DCOB CO LINE ATTRIBUTE–Ⅱ (PGM 187) ................................................. 395
4.7 STATION GROUP PROGRAMMING (PGM 190 – PGM 191) ...................... 397
4.7.1 STATION GROUP ASSIGN (PGM 190) ........................................................ 397
4.7.2 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTE (PGM 191).................................................. 399
4.8 ISDN PROGRAM ........................................................................................... 421
4.8.1 ISDN ATTRIBUTE (PGM 200) ...................................................................... 422
4.8.2 COLP TABLE (PGM 201).............................................................................. 425

v
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Table of Contents

4.8.3 MSN TABLE (PGM 202) ............................................................................... 425

4.9 LCR ................................................................................................................ 427
4.9.1 LCR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 220) ..................................................................... 428
4.9.2 LEADING DIGIT TABLE (PGM 221) ............................................................. 431
4.9.3 DIGIT MODIFCATION TABLE (PGM 222) .................................................... 434
4.9.4 LCR TABLE INITIALIZATION (PGM 223) ..................................................... 437
4.10 TOLL TABLE .................................................................................................. 440
4.10.1 TOLL EXCEPTION TABLE (PGM 224) ....................................................... 441
4.10.2 CANNED TOLL TABLES (PGM 225) .......................................................... 444
4.10.3 EMERGENCY SERVICE CALL (PGM 226)................................................ 445
4.11 TABLES .......................................................................................................... 446
4.11.1 AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE (PGM 227) ............................................. 447
4.11.2 CUSTOM CALL ROUTING (PGM 228)....................................................... 448
4.11.3 EXECUTIVE / SECRETARY TABLE (PGM 229)......................................... 453
4.11.4 FLEXIBLE DID TABLE (PGM 231).............................................................. 455
4.11.5 SYSTEM SPEED ZONE (PGM 232)........................................................... 459
4.11.6 WEEKLY TIME TABLE (PGM 233) ............................................................. 461
4.11.7 VOICE MAIL DIALING TABLE (PGM 234) .................................................. 462
4.11.8 TIE ROUTING TABLE (PGM 235)............................................................... 463
4.11.9 MOBILE EXTENSION (PGM 236) .............................................................. 464
4.12 NETWORKING ATTRIBUTE.......................................................................... 466
4.12.1 Networking Basic Attribute (PGM 320) ....................................................... 466
4.12.2 Networking Supplementary Attribute (PGM 321) ........................................ 469
4.12.3 Networking CO Line Attribute (PGM 322) ................................................... 472
4.12.4 Networking Routing Table (PGM 324)......................................................... 473
4.13 VOIB ATTRIBUTE .......................................................................................... 476
4.13.1 VOIP IP Setting (PGM 340) ........................................................................ 476
4.13.2 Gatekeeper Setting (PGM 341) .................................................................. 482
4.14 RSG/IP PHONE PROGRAMMING................................................................. 488
4.14.1 VOIB SLOT ASSIGNMENT for RSG/IP Phone (PGM 380)......................... 488
4.14.2 RSG/IP Phone Port Number ASSIGNMENT (PGM 381) ............................ 489
4.14.3 RSG / IP Phone ATTRIBUTE (PGM 382) ................................................... 490
4.14.4 RSGM ATTRIBUTE 1 (PGM 383) ............................................................... 493
4.14.5 RSGM ATTRIBUTE 2 (PGM 384) ............................................................... 496
4.14.6 RSG Alarm Assignment (PGM 385) ............................................................ 501
4.14.7 IP Phone ATTRIBUTE (PGM 386) .............................................................. 503
4.14.8 RSG DKT RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 390) ............................................... 506
4.14.9 RSG DKT TX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 391)................................................ 507
4.14.10 RSG SLT RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 392) .............................................. 508
4.14.11 RSG SLT TX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 393) ............................................... 509
4.14.12 RSG LCO RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 394) ............................................. 510
4.14.13 RSG LCO TX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 395).............................................. 512
4.14.14 RSG IP Phone RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 396)...................................... 513
4.14.15 RSG IP Phone TX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 397) ...................................... 514
4.15 THE OTHERS .............................................................................................. 515
4.15.1 Nation Specific (PGM 400 ~ 424)................................................................ 515
4.15.2 Initialization (PGM 450)............................................................................... 519
4.15.3 Print Prot Database (PGM 451) .................................................................. 520
4.15.4 Init By MPB Version (PGM 452).................................................................. 520
Section 5. Quick Reference ADMIN. Programming Table ....................... 522
5.1 NUMBERING PLAN....................................................................................... 522
vi
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Table of Contents

5.1.1 Flexible Numbering Plan ................................................................................. 522

5.1.2 Station Programming ....................................................................................... 524
5.1.3 Attendant Programming................................................................................... 525
5.1.4 Flexible Button Programming Code................................................................. 526
5.2 ADMIN PROGRAMMING INDEX................................................................... 527
5.3 DEFAULT VALUES........................................................................................ 530
5.3.1 LOCATION PROGRAM................................................................................... 530
5.3.2 RACK SLOT ASSIGNMENT............................................................................ 530
5.3.3 WTIB PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT............................................................ 530
5.3.4 LOGICAL SLOT ASSIGNMENT ...................................................................... 531
5.3.5 NUMBERING PLAN TYPE.............................................................................. 531
5.3.6 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ...................................................................... 532
5.3.7 IP SETTING .................................................................................................... 535
5.3.8 STATION ID ASSIGNMENT ............................................................................ 535
5.3.9 STATION ATTRIBUTE I/II/III ............................................................................ 535
5.3.10 ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTE ......................................................................... 540
5.3.11 FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT.............................................................. 541
5.3.12 STATION BASE PROGRAM ......................................................................... 542
5.3.13 CO LINE BASE PROGRAM .......................................................................... 544
5.3.14 SLOT BASE PROGRAM ............................................................................... 549
5.3.15 SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM.......................................................................... 549
5.3.16 SYSTEM TIMER PROGRAM ........................................................................ 560
5.3.17 DCOB ATTRIBUTE........................................................................................ 565
5.3.18 STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT................................................................. 566
5.3.19 STATION GROUP PROGRAM...................................................................... 567
5.3.20 ISDN ATTRIBUTES ....................................................................................... 573
5.3.21 LCR TABLE ASSIGNMENT........................................................................... 575
5.3.22 TOLL TABLE ASSIGNMENT ......................................................................... 579
5.3.23 OTHER TABLES ........................................................................................... 580
5.3.24 NETWORKING ATTRIBUTE ......................................................................... 584
5.3.25 VOIB NET ATTRUBUTE................................................................................ 587
5.3.26 SIP Setting (PC Admin Only)......................................................................... 589
5.3.27 RSG/IP Phone Setting................................................................................... 590
5.3.28 NATION SPECIFIC........................................................................................ 595
5.3.29 INITIALIZATION ............................................................................................ 599
5.3.30 PRINT PROT DATABASE ............................................................................. 600

vii
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Abbreviation and Keywords Table

Abbreviations and Keywords Table

Abbreviation / Keywords Full Spelling Description
[CALLBK] or [CB] or [CALLBACK] - The fixed button for the call back function.
[CONF] - The fixed button for the conference function.
[DND] or [FWD] or [CFW] or [FOR] or
- The fixed button for the DND and call forward function.
[DND/FWD]
[FLASH] - The fixed button for the flash function
[HOLD] or [SAVE] or [HOLD/SAVE] - The fixed button for the hold and save function.
[ICM] or [Intercom] - The fixed button for the intercom function
[MON] - The fixed button for the on-hook and off-hook function.
[MUTE] - The fixed button for the (speech) mute function.
[REDIAL] - The fixed button for the redial function.
[SPD] or [SPEED] - The fixed button for the speed function.
[TRANS] or [TRANS/PGM] - The fixed button for the transfer and ADMIN program function.
[UP]/[DOWN] or [VOLUME UP]/[VOLUME
- The fixed button for the volume up and down function.
DOWN]
{COL} - The flexible button for CO line access function about one CO line
{LOOP} or LOOP - The flexible button for CO line access function about all accessible CO lines
{POOL} or {CO Group} - The flexible button for CO line access function about CO group
Absent Text Message - The software service of displaying the absent reason of person on station LCD
The password to check the authority of user.
Account Code or Authorization Code -
'Authorization Code' is used as a synonym in this document
ACD Automatic Call Distribution The software service of hunt call distribution method
ACNR Auto Call Number Redial The software service that makes a redial call automatically
ADMIN (program) Administration The data base programming mode of the keyphone system.
AOC Advice Of Charge The outgoing call cost charging service in the public ISDN
Assign Attendant - The operator station assignment
ATD or Attendant (Station) Attendant Station A telephone operator of IP LDK
Attendant Recall - The software service of the call routing to attendant about the unanswered call

1
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Abbreviation and Keywords Table

2
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Abbreviation and Keywords Table

Abbreviation / Keywords Full Spelling Description

BGM Back Ground Music The software service of providing BGM through the station speaker
BLF Busy Lamp Field The software service of presentation of the network station status via button LED
BRI Basic Rate Interface ISDN BRI CO line
BRIB Basic Rate Interface Board BRI CO line board for IP LDK
FLEX Button The Abbreviated presentation of 'button'
The software service that the caller can leave a message to unanswered station,
Call Back -
and the station user can check the leaved message
Call Park - The software service that hold a call to retrieve by any other station
Called Party - The opposite side of the caller
Calling Party - The caller
Camp On - The software service of indicating the another call waiting signal
Common ISDN Application
CAPI ISDN protocol
Programming Interface
CAS Centralized Attendant Service The software service of attendant call on network connection
CCBS Completion of Call to Busy Subscriber The call back service protocol of QSIG and H.450
CCNR Completion of Call to No Reply The call back service protocol of QSIG and H.450
CCR Customer Call Routing The software service of CO incoming call via multi-level VMIB announcement
CFW Call Forward The Abbreviated presentation of 'call forward'
CID Caller ID The analog CO line caller ID
CIDU Caller ID Unit IP LDK board to serve the analog CO line caller ID
Circular Group - The call distribution method of hunt group.
CLI Calling Line Identification The telephone number of the caller
CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation The software service of CLI display
CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction Prohibit the transmission of CLI
CMU Call Metering Unit IP LDK hardware board to detects call metering signals from CO line
CO Group or CO GRP or CO Line Group Central Office Line Group The truck line group of analog, ISDN, IP, etc
CO or COL or CO Line Central Office Line The truck line of analog, ISDN, IP, etc

3
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Abbreviation and Keywords Table

4
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Abbreviation and Keywords Table

Abbreviation / Keywords Full Spelling Description

Connected Line Identification
COLP The software service of the answerer's CLI display
Presentation
Connected Line Identification
COLR Prohibit the transmission of answerer's CLI
Restriction
CONP Connected Line Name Presentation The software service of the answerer's name display
CONV Conversion The Abbreviated presentation of 'conversion'
COS Class Of Service The separated accessibility class about keyphone system service
CPN Called Party Number The destination number of the call
CPSN Called Party Sub-address The destination sub-address number of the call
CPTU Call Progress Tone detection Unit IP LDK hardware board to detect the call progress tone from CO line
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check The digital data error check protocol
CTI Computer Telephony Integration The telephone network protocol for PC telephone
CTIU Computer Telephony Integration Unit IP LDK hardware module to serve CTI
Day/Night/Weekend/On Demand (Service
- The separated IP LDK software manage service according the time and date
or Mode)
DCOB Digital Central Office Board IP LDK hardware board to serve R2-DCO line
DECT Digital European Cordless Telephone The protocol of European digital cordless telephone
DEST Destination The Abbreviated presentation of 'destination'
The destination of the call routing. The destination type may be a station, a hunt
Destination - group, VMIB announcement, system speed dial bin, internal/external page zone,
network station
DGT Digit The Abbreviated presentation of 'digit'
DID or DDI Direct Inward Dialing The public telephone network service of CO incoming call to specific destination
DID Type 0/1/2 - The software service of the received DID digit conversion service type.
DISA Direct Inward System Access The software service of CO incoming call via VMIB announcement
DKTU Digital Key Telephone Unit Digital keyset terminal
DLS Direct CO Line Selection The flexible button that is assigned for seizing CO line
DMT Digit Modification Table The table that is saved the digit modification data of LCR

5
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Abbreviation and Keywords Table

6
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Abbreviation and Keywords Table

Abbreviation / Keywords Full Spelling Description

DND Do Not Disturb The software service of prohibiting the call receiving
DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service The CLI service protocol of R2-DCO line
DNS Domain Name System Domain Name System of the Internet protocol
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory Hardware memory
DSS Direct Station Selection The flexible button that is assigned for ICM call to specific station.
DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency The tone signaling protocol of the telephone network
E&M Ear & Mouth E&M CO line
EMIB Ear & Mouth Interface Board E&M Co line board for IP LDK
Exception Table A - The table that is saved the toll restriction digits data about COS 2 & 4
Exception Table B - The table that is saved the toll restriction digits data about COS 3 & 4
EXE/SEC Executive/Secretary The software service of secretary station
EXT External The Abbreviated presentation of 'external'
Facility IE Facility Information Element ISDN information element message
FLEX Flexible (Button) The user programmable button on DKTU
Flexible DID Table - The DID call routing table of DID type 2 case.
GRP Group The Abbreviated presentation of 'group'
HF Hands Free The intercom answer mode of hands free
Hunt Group or Hunt - The group of stations
ICM Intercom The Abbreviated presentation of 'intercom'
ICM Box Intercom Box The telephone terminal that can be used only intercom call
ICM Call Intercom Call The call between two stations.
ICM Tenancy Group or Intercom Tenancy
- The software service of separating the station zone
Group
INT Internal The Abbreviated presentation of 'internal'
Intrusion - The software service of intruding in the intercom call or CO call conversation
IP Internet Protocol The Abbreviated presentation of 'Internet protocol'
ISDN Integrated Service Digital Network ISDN protocol
ISDN-SS ISDN Supplementary Service The protocol of ISDN supplementary service

7
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Abbreviation and Keywords Table

8
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Abbreviation and Keywords Table

Abbreviation / Keywords Full Spelling Description

Telephone that is served as keyphone terminal.
Keyset -
DKTU, SLT, WHTU, ISDN Phone, IP Phone, ICM Box, etc.
LAN Local Area Network LAN protocol
LBC Loud Bell Control The software service of serving the external loud bell device
LCD Liquid Crystal Display -
LCO Loop start CO line (interface Board) Loop start CO line. Analog CO line.
LCOB Loop start CO line interface Board Loop start CO line interface board
LCR Least Cost Routing The software service of CO outgoing call to the least cost path
LDK - Digital key telephone system
LDT Leading Digit Table The table that is saved the LCR activation code data
LED Light Emitting Diode -
LNR Last Number Redial The software service that makes a redial call of the last dialed
MAX Maximum The Abbreviated presentation of 'maximum'
MCID Malicious Caller ID ISDN supplementary service
MIN Minute The Abbreviated presentation of 'minute'
MOH Music On Hold The software service of providing a music to the held caller
MPB Main Process Board IP LDK hardware board to serve main process
MSG Message The Abbreviated presentation of 'message'
MSN Multiple Subscriber Number The public ISDN network service of multiple ISDN numbers to a single interface
Multi Line Conference - The conference communication more than 2 members
MWI Message Wait Indication The software service of indicating the leaved message existing
My Area Code - The local area number of telephone network
NET Network(ing) The software service of QSIG and H.450 networking
Net Call - The intercom call on the network connection
NO. Number The Abbreviated presentation of 'number'
On Hook Dialing - The software service of dialing the dial pad without lifting handset
Overflow Destination - The new call routing destination of unanswered hunt call
Override - The software service of overriding the status of DND

9
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Abbreviation and Keywords Table

10
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Abbreviation and Keywords Table

Abbreviation / Keywords Full Spelling Description

PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange The private switch system or network
Paging Conference - The software service of one way speech conference
PC ADMIN (program) - ADMIN program mode via IP LDK PC application software
PGM Program The abbreviated presentation of 'ADMIN program' or 'station program'
Pick Up - The software service that a station can answer about the ringing call at other station
The software service of choosing the first answer call among the multiple incoming
PLA Preferred Line Answer
calls
PRI Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI CO line
PRIB Primary Rate Interface Board PRI CO line board for IP LDK
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network The public switched telephone network that is served by the central office
PV Call announcing with privacy -
PX Public Exchange The central office switching system
QSIG Q Signaling ISDN Q signaling protocol
R2 Register 2 R2 signaling protocol
RBT Ring Back Tone The Abbreviated presentation of 'ring back tone'
RCV Receive The Abbreviated presentation of 'receive'
Ring Group - The call distribution method of hunt group.
RS-232C - The serial communication interface protocol
SCRL Scroll The Abbreviated presentation of 'scroll'
SETUP (Message) - ISDN SETUP message. The call start request signaling message.
SLT Single Line Telephone Single line telephone terminal
SMDI Simplified Message Desk Interface The interface message of voice mail device
The software service of the detail station log information about incoming/outgoing
SMDR Station Message Detail Record
CO call
SNR Save Number Redial The software service that makes a redial call of the saved dial
SOS Paging - The software service of emergency help paging
SPD Speed The Abbreviated presentation of 'speed'
Speed Bin - The index value among the saved speed dial data

11
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Abbreviation and Keywords Table

12
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Abbreviation and Keywords Table

Abbreviation / Keywords Full Spelling Description

STA Station An extension (terminal) of IP LDK
Station - An extension (terminal) of IP LDK
Station Speed Dial - The speed dial data that is saved by each station
Sub-address - ISDN supplementary service
System Attendant - The first programmed attendant among the main attendant
System Speed Dial - The speed dial data that is saved by attendant station
TEL Telephone The Abbreviated presentation of 'telephone'
Terminal Group - The call distribution method of hunt group.
TN Tone ring
UCD (Group) Uniform Call Distribution The call distribution method of hunt group.
UNA Universal Night Answer The software service that allows the pickup by any station at night mode
Unsupervised Conference - The supervisor omitted conference communication
VM or VM Group or Voice Mail Group Voice Mail Group The hunt group that the call is distributed to voice mail device
VMIB Voice Mail Interface Board IP LDK hardware board to serve the voice mail service
VOIB Voice Over IP Interface Board IP LDK hardware board to serve the voice over IP
Weekly Time Table - The table that is saved the day working time and work finish time during week
WHTU Wireless Hand Telephone Unit Wireless DECT telephone terminal
Wrap Up Timer - The guarantee timer that remains the station status busy

13
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Introduction

Section 1. Introduction
This programming manual is designed to provide as general features for the IP LDK-100/300/
300E System.
It also explains the procedure of ADMIN Programming of the IP LDK-100/300/300E System
using DKTU and PC.

1.1 The structure of programming manual

This manual contains the following sections :

Section 1. Introduction
Introduces the structure of this manual and usage of this programming manual.

Section 2. System features

Describes details about the system features.

Section 3. System Basic ADMIN Programming

Describes the procedures about IP LDK-100/300/300E System.

Section 4. ADMIN programming

Provides the procedure of ADMIN Programming.

Section 5. Quick reference ADMIN Programming table

Provides the quick ADMIN Programming table for expert.

14
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Introduction

1.2 Manual usage

As you can see from the introduction, this manual is divided into 6 parts.

Abbreviation table

Before getting started, you understand the terms and abbreviations in contents. Therefore we
summarized the abbreviations and keyword table using this programming manual on first
page.

Section 2. system feature

In section 2, the feature is grouped according to the situation. The structure is divided into 5
parts : Description, Operation, Condition, Reference, Admin programming.
Each part briefly describes as below :

¾ Description : explains the feature.

¾ Operation : operates the feature.
¾ Condition : explains the condition of feature according to the configuration.
¾ Reference : to help reader understand the contents, link to the related part.
¾ Admin programming : to operate the feature, the list of admin programming must be
set.※ link to the section 4 admin programming.

Section 3. System basic programming

This section explains the function of each button used for ADMIN programming in section 3
and section 4. Also describes basic programming from 100 to 108 when the IP LDK system is
installed.
Some PGM have already been programmed at factory. Others are needed to ADMIN
programming to operate normally. The detailed information is described in section 3.

Section 4. ADMIN Programming

This section is related to the section 2 “ADMIN programming” to operate the feature.
This section focuses on the procedure of ADMIN programming. And briefly explains the item
of ADMIN programming on description. To help the item understand, link to the related
feature and contents on reference. The detailed information is described in section 4.

Section 5. Quick ADMIN Programming table for expert

This section provide the table for expert. So beginner or intermediate refer to the section 3 or
section 4 in ADMIN programming.

15
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Section 2. System Feature

2.1 How to get incoming call

2.1.1 Ring Assignment

Description
If there is an incoming call through CO Line which is ring assigned, the pre-assigned destination gets the
call. The destination can be Station, Hunt Group(see Ref.1), or VMIB announcement(see Ref.2).
If a destination station is busy, the incoming call gives muted ring signal, so the station user can notice
the incoming CO Call.
Following Figure 2.1.1 describes the Ring Assignment of incoming CO call. The ring can be assigned to
stations, hunt group or VMIB announcement.

IP LDK System

Station A Station B

PSTN

Hunt Group

VMIB announcement

Figure 2.1.1 Ring Assignment Destination

Operation
Example
Make Station 100 ~ 105 ring at the incoming call from CO Line 1~8 at Day Mode, and station 110 start to
ring after 9 seconds.
1. Set CO Service type as Normal at ADMIN 140.
2. At ADMIN 144, select CO Line range 001~008 and press FLEX 1 (Day Mode).
3. Dial 1 (Station), and enter station range 100105.
4. To make the stations ring instantly, dial delay value 0 (without delay).
5. Save the changed setting by pressing [HOLD/SAVE] button.
6. Press FLEX 1(Day Mode) again without exiting ADMIN 144, and press 1 (Station) again.
7. Enter station range as 110110, and dial 3 as delay value. Save it again.
→ When there’s an incoming CO Call through CO Line 1 ~ 8 at Day mode, the station 100 ~ 105
starts to ring instantly. If one of the station answer the call, other stations stop to ring. After 9
seconds, if the call is still not answered, station 110 starts to ring.

Make Hunt group 620 ring at the incoming call from CO Line 1~8 at Night Mode.
1. Check if CO Service type is set to Normal at ADMIN 140.
2. Check if Hunt group 620 is assigned properly at ADMIN 190.
3. At ADMIN 144, select CO Line range 001~008 and press FLEX 2 (Night Mode).
4. Dial 2 (Hunt), and enter Hunt group number 620.
5. Save the changed setting by pressing [HOLD/SAVE] button.

16
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

→ When there’s an incoming CO Call through CO Line 1 ~ 8 at Night mode, the Hunt group starts to
ring. The ringing station is decided by hunt group type. (see Ref.4)

Make the VMIB announcement 01 played at the incoming call from CO Line 1~8 at Weekend Mode.
1. Check if CO Service type is set to Normal at ADMIN 140.
2. Check if VMIB announcement 01 is recorded properly at system attendant’s station (see Ref.4).
3. At ADMIN 144, select CO Line range 001~008 and press FLEX 3 (Weekend Mode).
4. Dial 3 (VMIB), and enter VMIB announcement number 01.
5. To make the CO Line released after VMIB announcement, enter #.
6. Save the changed setting by pressing [HOLD/SAVE] button.
→ When there’s an incoming CO Call through CO Line 1 ~ 8 at Weekend mode, the VMIB
announcement played. If # is entered, the line is released.

Condition
1. Any CO Line Ring can be assigned to multiple stations. (All CO Line Ring may be assigned to all
station.)
2. Each ring to station can be delayed by ADMIN programming.
3. The ring assignment is individually applied to Day, Night, weekend or On-demand ring mode(see
Ref.3).
4. To receive incoming CO Call, the DKTU should have {CO} button or {LOOP} button.
5. Every CO Line ring is assigned to Attendant station by default.

Reference
1. Hunt Group : 2.6
2. VMIB announcement : 2.11.5
3. Ring Mode : 2.13.8
4. System Attendant : 2.13 ( description - main Attendant )

Admin Programming
„ CO Service Type 4.2.1 (PGM 140 – FLEX 9)
„ CO Line Ring Assignment 4.2.5 (PGM 144)
„ Weekly Time Table 4.11.6 (PGM 233)
„ Hunt Group 4.7 (PGM 190)

17
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.1.2 PLA (Preferred Line Answer)

Description
If PLA service is enabled and there’re several incoming CO Calls(type of Transferred Call, Recalled Call,
queued Call, and Normal Incoming Call) at the same time, the first answered Call is chosen by PLA
priority.

Default :
Transferred Call → Recalled Call → Normal Incoming Call → CO Line Queued Call

Operation
Example
If there’s multiple CO Call is ringing at a station and the station answers the call, the call which has
the highest priority is answered first. Refer to Figure 2.1.2.

CO Line Recalling

CO Line Transfer Call

Answered : CO Line Transfer Call

CO Line Incoming Call Off-hook

CO Line Queued Call

Figure 2.1.2 Preferred Line Answer

Condition
1. When more than one line is ringing at a station and Preferred Line Answer is enabled, the priority of
answer is as follows by default;
CO Line Transfer Call → CO Line Recalling → CO Line Incoming Call → CO Line Queued Call
2. “Automatic Speaker Select” feature should be enabled for Preferred Line Answer.
3. The priority of CO Line for preferred line answer can be changed by Admin Programming.

Admin Programming
„ Preferred Line Answer 4.1.3.7 (PGM 112 – FLEX 7)
„ Automatic Speaker Selection 4.1.2.1 (PGM 111 – FLEX 1)
„ PLA Priority 4.4.14 (PGM 173)

18
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.1.3 DID(Direct Inward Dialing)

Description
This feature allows CO incoming calls to access to specific destination. There is no relation with
Attendant, and this feature enables direct access to desired station, Hunt group, VMIB announcement,
Speed, and Page.

There are 3 types of DID Conversion and it can be set by ADMIN Programming (ADMIN 143-FLEX 4).
- Type 0: In an incoming DID digits, select some digits which are received digits by ADMIN Programming. The
selected digits will be converted by DID Conversion type(ADMIN 146 – FLEX 5/FLEX 6).
- Type 1: The incoming DID digits are the destination number. There is no conversion.
- Type 2: With result of DID Conversion type 0, convert by the Flexible DID table (ADMIN 231) additionally.

Operation
Example . 1
To make DID call by DID Digit Conversion as the figure 2.1.3 below,

IP LDK System 100

850 2600

PSTN 850 2601

101

850 2629

129
Figure 2.1.3. DID call routing by Digit Conversion

1. Check if DID Digit Receive number is set to 3 at ADMIN 146.

2. Set DID Conversion Type as 0 (using Digit Mask) at ADMIN 143 – FLEX 4.
3. Set DID Digit Mask as #1**. Then the first digit 2 is ignored and second digit 6 is converted to 1
and the last two digits are bypassed (see Ref.1).

Example . 2
To make DID call by Flexible DID Table as the figure 2.1.4 below,

IP LDK System 200

850 2000

PST 850 2001

101 102
Hunt 620
850 2010

129

Figure 2.1.4 DID call routing by Flexible DID Table

19
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

1. Check if DID Digit Receive number is set to 3 at ADMIN 146.

2. Set DID Conversion Type as 2 (using Flexible DID Table) at ADMIN 143 – FLEX 4.
3. Program Flexible DID Table as below at ADMIN 231.

ADMIN 231 FLEX DID CONVERSION TABLE

000 DAY : Station 200 NIGHT WEEKEND : …

001 DAY : Hunt 620 NIGHT WEEKEND
: : : :
010 DAY : Station 129 NIGHT WEEKEND

Condition
1. When a DID is received at unanswered station, the call is waited in the station for DID/DISA No
Answer timer.
2. Flexible DID Table is applied according to Day/Night Ring Mode (see Ref.2)
3. Destination of Flexible DID Table can be station, Hunt group, VMIB announcement, Drop after VMIB
announcement, System Speed(see Ref.3), Internal Page, External Page or, Internal/External/All Call
Page(see Ref.4).
4. If the call is not answered or the number was invalid, the call is routed by DID/DISA Destination.
5. The DID call to a busy station can be placed on a waiting stage according to admin programming to
KTU and SLT.

Reference
1. DID Digit Conversion Mask 4.2.7.6
2. Weekly Time Table 4.11.6
3. System Speed Dialing 2.2.8.5
4. Paging Features 2.8

Admin Programming
„ DID Conversion Type 4.2.4.4 (PGM 143 – FLEX 4)
„ DID Digit Conversion Mask 4.2. (PGM 146 – FLEX 2)
„ Automatic Speaker Selection 4.1.2.1 (PGM 111 – FLEX 1)
„ DID/DISA Destination 4.2. (PGM 167)
„ DID Call Wait 4.1.5.16 (PGM 114 – FLEX 17)
„ DID Restriction 4.1.5.16 (PGM 114 – FLEX 16)

20
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

[Flow chart]

RING ON or SETUP

NO Normal ring service

DID LINE ?
PGM 144
YES

DIGIT INPUT

NO

ISDN LINE ?

YES

Is there the matched

format ADMIN202 MSN TBL? YES
1.CO&Called No
2. Called No

NO

NO
ADM 143
(DID_RM) ?

YES

ADM 201
Ignore digit until DID_RM
(COLP TBL) ?
NO

YES

Ignore matched digit

TYPE_0 TYPE_1
DID Dgt Conversion Ring on
ADM 146
DID Conversion type
to the valid extension

TYPE_2

DID Dgt Conversion

ADM 146

Flex DIDTBL
ADM 231

Station Hunt Grp VMIB SPD PAGE(int/ext/all)

21
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.1.4 DISA(Direct Inward System Access)

Description
This feature allows CO incoming calls to access to specific destination without attendant’s answering.
Compared with DID(see Ref.1), there is no digit conversion in DISA.
On seizing incoming CO Line, system gives VMIB announcement(see Ref.2) or dial tone. Then the caller
dials additional digit to access desired destination.

VMIB capability(With Option)

- Voice Announcement channel : 4 channel(8 channel)
- Recording Time : 5 hours(10 hours)
- Number of voice announcement : 00~70

Operation
DISA Line Assignment
1. [TRAN/PGM] + 140
2. Enter the CO Line range to be assigned to DISA Line.
3. [FLEX 2] + Ring type + [FLEX 1] + ‘1’ + [HOLD/SAVE] : DISA Activate
- Ring type : FLEX 1-Day, FLEX 2-Night, FLEX 3-Weekend, FLEX 4-On-demand
4. [FLEX 2] + Ring type + [FLEX 2] + ‘01~70’ + [HOLD/SAVE] : VMIB Greeting Assign

To use DISA,
1. Seize the DISA Line of the system.
2. When the tone or announcement is heard, dial the desired station/ hunt group number then the
station/hunt group receives the call .
3. After connected with the system, user can dial the CO Access Code(e.g : 88001) to call outside of
the system again by seizing another CO Line.

Condition
1. You can assign VMIB announcement instead of intercom dial tone for DISA line.
2. If the DISA Authorization Code is enabled for a DISA Line, DND warning tone or VMIB
announcement, guiding to enter DISA Authorization Code, is heard and the Authorization Code(see
Ref.3) should be entered. And the dial tone will be heard.
3. Each DISA Line may be assigned as a full-time DISA or night mode only. Night mode DISA operates
as normal CO Line in the Day mode.
4. If the VMIB announcement number is stored with “#”, the CO Line will be dropped after the VMIB
announcement is played.
5. If the DISA Authorization Code is enabled for a DISA CO Line, the user should enter DISA
Authorization Code to access the CO Line.
6. If the DISA Authorization Code is disabled, the permission is determined by “CO to CO COS” & “CO
COS” (see Ref.4).
7. If the DISA Authorization Code is enabled, the Authorization Code should be entered to access
outgoing CO Line. If the Authorization Code is matched with the Authorization Code of station, the
user may access the CO Line depending on “STA COS” & “CO COS”. If the Authorization Code is
matched with the Authorization Code of system, it is determined by “CO to CO COS” and “CO COS”.

22
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Reference
1. DID : 2.1.3
2. VMIB announcement : 2.11
3. Authorization Code : 2.5.2
4. COS : 2.5.4

Admin Programming
„ DISA Line Assignment 4.2.1 (PGM 140 – FLEX 1)
„ DISA Account Code 4.2.2.3 (PGM 141 – FLEX 3)
„ DISA Retry Count 4.4.1.4 (PGM 160 – FLEX 4)
„ CO to CO COS Assignment 4.4.7 (PGM 166)
„ Weekly Time Table 4.11.6 (PGM 233)
„ DISA Restriction 4.1.5.16 (PGM 114 – FLEX 10)

23
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.1.5 CCR(Customer Call Routing) with VMIB

Description
CCR is incoming CO Call type of DISA/DID(see Ref.1, Ref.2), the user can route the destination by
pressing only one digit. If user press a certain digit, corresponding VMIB announcement is played. Then,
user press the desired digit again. In that way, call routing is established.
Or a user may access the desired destination directly by dialing the station number, hunt group number
or VMIB announcement (see Ref.3).
The Figure 2.1.5 below describes the CO incoming call using CCR with VMIB announcement.

IP LDK System

PSTN
0. Operator :Station 101

1. Sales Dept. : Hunt 620

“Hello, this is LG-Nortel. Please dial

desired station number.

“Hello, This is Technical Department ...“
Or, if you don’t know,

dial 1 for Sales Department, 2. Technical Dept. : VMIB Announcement 02

dial 2 for Technical Department

Figure 2.1.5 CCR Call

Operation
1. When a call is answered by a system programmed with CCR, system gives a VMIB announcement
to caller. VMIB announcement gives a choice of destination.
2. The caller may select a destination by dialing according to VMIB announcement.

To Use DISA CCR as described at Figure 2.1.5,

1. Check if the CO Service Type is set to Normal at ADMIN 140 – FLEX 1.
2. Check if the DISA Service is set to ON at ADMIN 140 – FLEX 2 (see Ref.4).
3. Set VMIB Message Number 01 ADMIN 140 – FLEX 2 (see Ref.4).

To Use DID CCR as described at Figure 2.1.5,

1. Check if the CO Service Type is set to DID/MSN at ADMIN 140 – FLEX 1.
2. Check if DID Digit Receive number is set to 3 at ADMIN 146.
3. Set DID Conversion Type as 2(using Flexible DID Table) at ADMIN 143 – FLEX 4.
4. Set destination type as 3(VMIB) and enter announcement number 01 at Flexible DID Table at ADMIN
231.

24
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

To Program CCR Table as described at Figure 2.1.5,

1. Select CCR Table 01(match with VMIB announcement number) at ADMIN 228.
2. Press FLEX 1 to set Sales Dept. The Flexible button number should be same with the dialing digit
number.
3. Select destination type as Hunt group by dialing 2. Enter desired Hunt group number 620.
4. Press FLEX 2 to set Technical Dept. Select destination type as VMIB by dialing 2 or 3 and enter
announcement number 02. If type 3(VMIB Drop) is selected, the call will be dropped after
announcement. If type 2(VMIB) is selected and CCR Table 02 is programmed, CCR for Technical
Dept. is applied.
5. Press FLEX 10 to set Operator. Select destination type as Station by dialing 1 and enter Desired
station number 101.

Condition
1. The CCR feature is only supported for DID and DISA.
2. To use CCR feature for DID, VMIB should be assigned for Flexible DID Destination (ADMIN 231).
3. If a caller dials full destination number, the call will be routed to the destination directly by system
numbering plan.
4. If a caller dials one digit and wait for a while, the LDK system will compare the digit with CCR Table.
If the digit is matched with CCR Table, of which the bin number is same with VMIB announcement,
the call is routed to programmed destination.
5. If the dialed digit is invalid, the caller can retry to enter digit for 3 times. DISA Retry counter is also
programmable. If the caller fails until the counter expired, the call is routed to error destination or
disconnected after error tone.
6. VMIB announcement 01~70 may be used for CCR.
7. Call routing will be operated with current VMIB announcement.
8. The maximum CCR depth is 10.
9. The external user can dial digit while the VMIB announcement is being played or the digit should be
entered within inter-digit time (5sec) after the announcement is ended.
10. If the caller does not dial any digit within inter-digit time (5sec), the call will be routed to the ring
assigned stations or disconnected after error tone.
11. If a user presses ‘#’ button while CCR is operated, CCR goes to the first step.
12. If a user presses ‘＊’ button, CCR goes to the previous step.
13. The call can be dropped directly after VMIB announcement if VMIB drop is selected at CCR Table.
14. If a call is routed to System Speed Dial, the call is routed to the Speed Dial destination. If the CO
Call is assigned at the System Speed Dial, the routing is same as Incoming CO Off-net Call Forward.

Reference
1. DID : 2.1.3
2. DISA : 2.1.4
3. VMIB announcement : 2.11
4. DISA Account Code : 4.2.2.3
5. System Speed Dial : 2.2.8.5

Admin Programming
„ Flexible DID Table 4.11.4 (PGM 231)
„ DID Digit Conversion Table 4.2.7.5 / 4.2.7.6 (PGM 146 – FLEX 5/ FLEX 6)
„ DISA Retry Counter 4.4.1.4 (PGM 160 – FLEX 4)
„ CCR Inter-digit Timer 4.5.1.15 (PGM 180 – FLEX 15)
„ Inter-digit Timer 4.5.2.8 (PGM 181 – FLEX 8)
„ DID/DISA Destination 4.4.8 (PGM 167)

25
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

„ CCR Table 4.11.2 (PGM 228)

2.1.6 CO Line Name

Description
This feature assign name to each CO Line. The stations with LCD, including the attendant, display the
programmed CO Line name in place of the ‘LINE XXX’ message.
This is applied to all conditions where the ‘LINE XXX’ message is displayed. However, SMDR (see
Ref.1) continues to print out the line number in place of the programmed name. If the CO Line name is
not programmed, the ‘LINE XXX’ display is default.

Condition
1. CO Line name can be assigned to each CO Line.
2. Each CO Line name can be assigned up to 12 characters.
3. If CO Line Name Display is set to OFF at ADMIN 142 – FLEX 1, the CO Line Name is not displayed
even if the name is programmed.

Reference
1. SMDR : 2.12

Admin Programming
„ CO Line Name Display 4.2.3.1(PGM 142 – FLEX 1)
„ CO Line Name Assignment 4.2.3.2(PGM 142 – FLEX 2)

26
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.1.7 UNA (UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER)

Description
If the CO Line is Programmed to UNA, user can pick up incoming CO Calls by dialing Night Answer code
569 (see Ref.1) regardless of the pick-up group.
Figure 2.1.6 below describes the UNA service. If there’s incoming CO Call at Night Mode (see Ref.2), the
station B can pick up the call although station A and B is not belong to a pick up group.

IP LDK System

PSTN
STA A STA B
: Dial 569(UNA Code)

Figure 2.1.6 Universal Night Answer

Operation
To pick-up a call in night mode,
1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button then intercom dial tone will be heard.
2. Dial 5 6 9 (UNA code).
3. The call is connected.

Condition
1. UNA feature is activated when the Ring Mode is night. (In case of Korea, UNA code is applied in Day
Mode)
2. UNA feature is activated in case of NET Call.
3. If there’s no ringing CO Call when the station dialed Night Answer Code, error tone will be heard.
4. The connected CO Line may be transferred or disconnected in the usual manner.
5. If External Night Ringing is set to On, the call is routed to External Page (see Ref.3) by LBC1(see
Ref.4).

Reference
1. Night Answer Code : 3.2.7
2. Ring Mode : 2.13.8
3. External Page : 4.11.2.7
4. LBC : 4.4.9.1

Admin Programming
„ UNA 4.2.2.8 (PGM 141 – FLEX 8)
„ External Night Ring 4.4.1.7 (PGM 160 – FLEX 7)

27
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.2 How to Access outgoing call

2.2.1 Basic access

Description
Each station is allowed or denied to access particular CO Lines or CO Groups. Station user may use
flexible buttons which are assigned as a {CO} button or {CO Group} button including {POOL} button
and {LOOP} button. By Numbering Plan, station users can access individual CO Lines by dialing CO
Access codes.

Feature Description Accessing method Access code

Idle Line Access Selects an idle CO Line Dial the idle Line Access number. 88001~88200(IP LDK-300)
( 88 + CO Line automatically from the Or press a CO Line button. 8801~8840(IP LDK-100)
number ) assigned CO Groups. Dial the idle Line Access Code : 9 88001~88400(IP LDK-300E)
CO Group Access Selects an idle CO Line Dial the CO Group Access 801~872(IP LDK-300/300E)
( 8 + CO Group from the corresponding number and a CO Group number. 801~824(IP LDK-100)
number ) CO Group. Or press a CO Group button.

Figure 2.2.1 describes to access CO Lines by dialing CO Access codes.

By dialing 9 (see Ref.1), the user can seize the first idle line among CO groups permitted to access (see
Ref.4). And if Dial 88001 (see Ref.2), the user can seize the CO Line 001 if it is idle. Or, by dialing 801
(see Ref.3), the user can seize the first idle CO Line among CO Group 1.

IP LDK System
9 4501234

88001
4501234
PSTN
801
4501234
4501234

Figure 2.2.1 Accessing CO Line

Operation
CO Line Access
To access a CO Line from a DKTU,
1. Lift the Handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the desired CO Line, {POOL} button, or {LOOP} button.
3. Or, dial the individual CO Line access code, CO group access code, or the first CO Line access
code from the accessible group.

To access a CO Line from a SLT,

1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the individual CO Line, CO group access code, or the first CO Line access code from the
accessible group.

28
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

To access a CO Line Group,

The number of CO Group in each system is 72 (24) in IP LDK-300/300E(100) system. You can access
a CO Group by dialing 8, 8 and the CO Group number. (see Ref.1)

Condition
1. To assign the {LOOP} button,
[TRAN/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRAN/PGM] + 8 4 + [HOLD/SAVE]
2. When the Override 1st CO Line Group is enabled, the system will search for the next accessible
CO group until a CO Line is available if there is no available CO Line by dialing CO Line group
access code (‘9’ or ‘0’).
3. A station which is not permitted to access a CO Line will hear error while trying to access a CO
Line, but the station can receive a transferred CO Line call.
4. The CO Line choice (Round-robin or Last Choice) is determined by Admin Programming (ADMIN
160-FLEX 3)
5. If the CO Line is BRI, when a user tries to seize B1 but the network requests to serve B2, the
system can change CO Line to B2. (There is a {B2 CO} button or {LOOP} button.)
6. Unused CO Lines should be assigned to unused CO group (IP LDK-300/300E : 73, IP LDK-100 :
25) to prevent to be accessed by a station.
7. The first CO Line group (00) is directed line group and it can be used with {CO Line} button
(Private Line).

Reference
1. Access CO in 1st CO Group Code : 3.6.7 (PGM 107 – FLEX 12)
2. Access Individual CO Code : 3.6.7 (PGM 107 – FLEX 8)
3. Access CO Group Code : 3.6.7 (PGM 107 – FLEX 7)
4. CO Line Group Access : 4.1.8

Admin Programming
„ CO Line Choice 4.4.1.3 (PGM 160 – FLEX 3)
„ Inter-digit Timer 4.5.2.8 (PGM 181 – FLEX 8)
„ CO Line Group Access 4.1.8 (PGM 117)
„ CO Line Group 4.2.2.1 (PGM 141 – FLEX 1)
„ Override 1st CO Line Group 4.4.2.3 (PGM 161 – FLEX 3)

29
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.2.2 Call time restriction

Description
This feature is used to restrict an outgoing CO call time. In a station programming, user set the CO Call
Drop Timer, the call will be disconnected automatically when the timer is expired. The caller and called
parties will hear warning tone 15sec before the CO call is disconnected.

Condition
1. This feature can be assigned on a station base.
2. It is applied to just outgoing CO call.
3. If the CO Call Drop timer enabled in a station, the timer is still applied even a call is transferred to
another station.
4. On the add-on conference, the CO Call Drop timer enabled station will be restricted to the
outgoing CO call time.
5. The CO Call Drop timer is not released even the caller holds, transfers, or flashes the CO Line.

Admin Programming
„ CO Call Time Restriction 4.1.3.3 (PGM 112 – FLEX 3)
„ CO Call Restriction Timer 4.5.1.17 (PGM 180 – FLEX 17)

30
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.2.3 CO Line Queuing

Description
When station user receives a busy tone during an attempt to access a CO Line, the user may request a
call back(queue). The station will receive a call back when the busy CO Line becomes available.

Operation
To activate queuing while receiving busy tone,
1. Press and release hook-switch if the station is SLT.
2. Dial 5 5 6(see Ref.1) or press [CALL BK] button.
3. Confirmation tone is heard and then replace the handset.
4. When the CO Line becomes idle, callback ring is received at the station. On Lifting handset, CO dial
tone is heard to make a call.

Condition
1. A CO Line may have any number of queues at one time.
2. When the queued CO Line becomes idle or a CO Line becomes available in the group, the oldest
queued station will receive signal.
3. A station can make only one CO Line queuing request at one time. If the station tries to make another
CO Line queuing, the previous one is canceled and the later one is available.
4. If the waiting station is busy and the queued CO Line is available, the available CO Line will be
directed to the next station which is idle.
5. If the waiting station is idle, the queued CO Line will give signal to the station for 15 seconds. If the
signal is not received at the station, the queue is canceled and the next station in the queue will
receive signal.
6. In case of IP phone, CO queuing is not allowed.

Reference
1. Message Wait Enable Code : 3.6.7

Admin Programming
„ CO Line Queuing 4.1.3.5 (PGM 112 – FLEX 5)

31
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.2.4 CO Step Call – Analog Only

Description
When a station receives a busy tone after accessing a CO Line, the user can dial a CO Line number
which has the same first digits as the called busy CO Line without dialing the full number.

Operation
To use CO Step Call when receiving busy tone, press the [SPEED] button and dial the last 1 digit. Then
the previous call is terminated and new call is established.

2.2.5 Emergency Call service

Description
The user can dial the emergency service code regardless of lower station COS.

Condition
1. An emergency call can be dialed by pressing CO Line though the station which is assigned to COS 7.
2. If the dialed number for emergency code is the same with station number or LCR number, the call is
operated as an emergency call. The preference of programmed dial number which is sent to external
CO Line is, Emergency Call code → LCR Table → Station Number.

Admin Programming
„ Emergency Call 4.10.3.1 (PGM 226)

32
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.2.6 Hot Line & Warm Line

Description
A station user can make an outgoing call by only going off-hook, if the user has previously stored the
destination.
The following figure 2.2.2 describes Hot Line / Warm Line operation. The destination can be CO Line /
CO Line Group, the function which is set at Flexible button, or another station.
Hot Line can be activated immediately upon an off-hook, Warm Line can be activated after Warm Line
Timer expired. If the user dial other number within Warm Line Time, the call activates as normal call, not
as Warm Line call.

[Hot Line] [Warm Line]

Immediately CO Line or Off-hook CO Line or

CO Group CO Group
Off-hook
ICM Dial Tone

Flexible Enter Dial Flexible

Button No Digit Button
(Warm Line Time)

Station Station
Normal Call

Figure 2.2.2 Hot Line & Warm Line

Operation
To activate Hot Line,
1. Lift the handset at a station, which is assigned to Hot Line.
2. The assigned hot line feature is activated immediately.

To activate Warm Line,

1. Lift the handset at a station, which is assigned to Warm Line.
2. If no dialing for assigned warm line timer, the assigned warm line feature is activated.

Condition
1. A station can be assigned to Hot line or Warm line by Admin Programming (ADMIN 113-FLEX 7).
2. If there is no flexible button in a station, the number is operated as speed dial number.
3. The setting value of Warm Line timer should be less than that of Dial Tone timer.
4. A flexible button may be assigned as {Idle Line Selection} button. When lifting handset or pressing
the [MON] button, the system will be activated as a predefined button is pressed.
5. It is possible to activate in SLT station.

Admin Programming
„ Warm Line Timer 4.5.3.8 (PGM 182 – FLEX 8)
„ Warm Line 4.1.4.7 (PGM 113 – FLEX 7)
„ Idle Line Selection 4.1.13 (PGM 122)

33
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.2.7 LCR (Least Cost Routing)

Description
LCR is a system programmable feature that is automatically selected the least expensive available route
when an outgoing CO call is made. This programming eliminates the necessity for the user to dial the
access code of the least expensive carrier. There are three types of operation to activate LCR;

Internal LCR - It can be activated during internal dial tone. If the dialed digits are matched with internal
LCR code, the system will seize a CO Line from the programmed CO group and send the modified digits
according to LCR programming.

Loop LCR - It can be activated by dialing the first accessible CO group code ('9' or '0') or by pressing
Loop button. If the dialed digits are matched with COL LCR code, the system will seize a CO Line from
the programmed CO group and send the modified digits according to LCR programming.

Direct CO LCR - It can be activated during CO dial tone. After dialing CO Line or CO group code, or
pressing CO Line or CO group button, it can be activated. If the dialed digits are matched with COL LCR
code, the system will seize a CO Line from the programmed CO group and send the modified digits
according to LCR programming.

The following figure 2.2.3 describes LCR.

When a user seizes CO Line and dial destination number, the system checks the LCR programming
and send the call to least cost route according to the ADMIN program.
Assuming LCR code is ‘9’, the 001 network is least cost during the daytime, and the 002 network is
least cost during the night. Caller dials same number and system routes it through least cost network.

IP LDK System
Network A
001

002
Network B
Network
Caller dials ‘9’
008
and phone no
Network C

(850 1234)

Figure 2.2.3 LCR

Operation
Internal LCR
1. Dial internal LCR code after lifting handset or pressing the [MON] button. On-hook dialing can also
activate LCR call.
2. It is an internal LCR code if the code is programmed with internal or both in Leading Digit Table.

Loop LCR
1. Dial COL LCR code after dialing the first accessible CO Line or CO group access code ('0' or '9') or
press the Loop button.

34
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2. It is a COL LCR code if the code is programmed with COL or BOTH in Leading Digit Table.

Direct CO LCR
1. Dial COL LCR code after dialing CO or CO group access code or pressing CO or CO group button.
2. It is a COL LCR code if the code is programmed with COL or BOTH in Leading Digit Table.

Flow Chart

User off-hook
& Hear internal dial tone

User dial a number

YES

NO
Is dialed digit matched
with LDT? (INT/BOTH)

YES

Is dialed digit matched NO

Choose CO group & send
with LDK numbering
modified digit using DMT
PLAN?

YES

User dial more digits or talk with Activate numbering feature

CO

Internal LCR

35
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

User off-hook

Press CO access code & Hear internal dial-tone Press CO Button

or LOOP key or LOOP key when LCR Mode : M13
(LOOP LCR) (CO LCR)

Hear real dial-tone

Hear dummy dial-tone

User dial digit

User dial digit

Is dialed digit NO NO
Is dialed digit
matched with LDT? matched with LDT?
(COL/BOTH) (COL/BOTH)

YES
YES

Choose CO group & Choose available CO Send modified digit using Send dialed digit
send modified digit using group & send dialed digit DMT
DMT

User dial more digits or talk with

CO

LOOP & CO LCR

36
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Condition
1. There are 6 LCR modes. The mode is determined by ADMIN 220 – FLEX 1.
- LCR Access Mode 00 (M00): LCR call is disabled.
- LCR Access Mode 01 (M01): Only Loop LCR is activated.
- LCR Access Mode 02 (M02): Internal LCR and Loop LCR are activated.
- LCR Access Mode 11 (M11): Loop LCR and CO LCR are activated.
- LCR Access Mode 12 (M12): All types of LCR are activated.
(When dialing ‘9’ or pressing Loop key, the system will wait next digits to compare LCR table
without seizing CO Line.)
- LCR Access Mode 13 (M13): All types of LCR are activated.
(When dial ‘9’ or press Loop key, the system will seize the first available CO Line and wait next
digits to compare LCR table.)
2. The leading digits can be duplicated. FLEX 2 and DMT index make each entry unique.
3. Leading digit table is sorted by leading digits, FLEX 2 in LDT (INT, COL, BOTH) and DMT index.
4. Internal LCR is applied if the dialed digits are matched with one of leading digits and FLEX 2 is INT
or BOTH.
5. Loop LCR is applied if the dialed digits are matched with one of leading digits and FLEX 2 is COL or
BOTH.
6. Direct CO LCR is applied if the dialed digits are matched with one of leading digits and FLEX 2 is
COL or BOTH and the seized CO Line belongs to the programmed CO group in DMT.
7. To work Loop LCR and Direct CO LCR differently with the same leading digits, there should be the
leading digit entry for loop LCR prior to the leading digits for direct CO LCR. It is possible if the DMT
index for loop LCR is smaller than the DMT index for direct CO LCR.
8. While direct CO LCR is applied to ISDN CO, an ISDN Information message with called party IE,
which includes only numbering plan and numbering type, is sent to the network when a user dials a
digit. It is for the network not to disconnect the line.
9. For direct CO LCR, leading digits should be programmed in consideration for the dial tone time
provided by network.
10. Direct CO LCR does not use an alternative DMT index because a CO Line is already seized.
11. LCR always has the higher precedence than flexible numbering plan table.
12. LCR can be applied to the following cases;
- Dialing after seizing CO Line by dialing CO Line access code (0 or 9) only
- Dialing after seizing CO Line by {LOOP} button
- Dialing without seizing CO Line
- Speed Dial
- Off-net Call Forward
- Redial (if the previous call is LCR applied)
- ACNR (If the call is LCR applied when activating ACNR)
13. Any leading digit string at the LDT table can be sub-string another leading digit string as ‘012’ and
‘0123’.
14. Capacity for LCR Table:
- 3 Day Zones
- 3 Time Zones
- Number of ‘Dialed Code Bins’: 250 bins
- Number of ‘Modification Code Bins’: 100 bins
- Maximum number of ‘Dialed digits’: 12 digits
- Maximum number of ‘Added digits’: 25 digits
- Alternative DMT index: 1EA

37
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Admin Programming
„ LCR Attributes 4.9.1 (PGM 220)
„ LCR – LDT Table 4.9.2 (PGM 221)
„ LCR – DMT Table 4.9.3 (PGM 222)
„ LCR Table Initialization 4.9.4 (PGM 223)

[LCR Admin Example]

1) Situation 1 (add prefix digit)

The long distance call access code starts with ‘0’. example) 02, 031, 051
There is a cheaper carrier exist, user can access it with carrier access code ‘082’ and long distance
access code without ‘0’.
IP LDK system administrator wants to use this cheaper carrier for all long distance call.

ADMIN 220 ADMIN 221 (LDT) ADMIN 222 (DMT)

LCR MODE Bin 000 Bin 00
M01, M02, M11, M12 LCR TYPE : COL Remove Position : 01
(LOOP LCR enabled) LCR CODE : 0 Remove Number : 01
DMT : 00 00 00 Add Position : 01
Add Digit : 082

example) user dial 0314502628, 082314504628

2) Situation 2 (select CO group)

IP LDK system is connected with two carrier.
(Let assume one carrier is carrier ‘A’, the other carrier is carrier ‘B’)
The carrier ‘B’ is used for international calls, and the carrier ‘A’ is used for normal calls.
The international call access code is ‘001’.
IP LDK system administrator wants to use the carrier ‘B’ only for international calls.

ADMIN 141 ADMIN 117 ADMIN 161-3

set CO Lines from the carrier ‘A’ to CO group 1 enable access CO group Override 1st CO Group :
set CO Lines from the carrier ‘B’ to CO group 2 01, 02 OFF

ADMIN 220 ADMIN 221 (LDT) ADMIN 222 (DMT)

LCR MODE Bin 000 Bin 00
M01, M02, M11, M12 LCR TYPE : COL Co Group : 02
(LOOP LCR enabled) LCR CODE : 001
DMT : 00 00 00

3) Situation 3 (make another co access code)

IP LDK system has VOIP CO Lines and normal CO Lines.
IP LDK system administrator wants to access VOIP CO using code ‘7’.
and access normal CO Lines using code ‘9’ (let assume this is a default co access code)

ADMIN 106
remove / change numbering plan which starts with ‘7’

38
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

ADMIN 141 ADMIN 117 ADMIN 161-3

set normal CO Lines to CO group 1 enable access CO group 01, Override 1st CO Group : OFF
set VOIP CO Lines to CO group 2 02

ADMIN 220 ADMIN 221 (LDT) ADMIN 222 (DMT)

LCR MODE Bin 000 Bin 00
M02, M12, M13 LCR TYPE : INT Remove Position : 01
(Internal LCR enabled) LCR CODE : 7 Remove Number : 01
DMT : 00 00 00 Co Group : 02

4) Situation 4 (password for specific dial number)

The international access code is ‘001’
IP LDK system administrator allows international calls only who knows system password.

ADMIN 220 ADMIN 221 (LDT) ADMIN 222 (DMT)

LCR MODE Bin 000 Bin 00
M12, M13 LCR TYPE : COL Co Group : 01
(LOOP/CO LCR enabled) LCR CODE : 001
DMT : 00 00 00
Check Password : ON

39
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.2.8 Memory dialing

2.2.8.1 ACNR (Auto Call Number Redial)

Description
If Call destination is busy or no answer, Redialing is operated repeatedly within ACNR retry counter. The
system will retry the number based on programming with appropriate pauses in between dialing. (default:
3 times)

Operation
To use ACNR while receiving busy/no answer on a CO Line,
1. Press the [REDIAL] button.
2. Replace the handset or go on-hook.
3. The system will automatically retry the call at programmed intervals.
4. When the called party answers, lift handset or press [MUTE] button to make the call.

To cancel,
Press the flashing [REDIAL] button. Or, Lift handset or press [MUTE] button while a CO Line is
seized to make ACNR.

Condition
1. A DKTU which doesn't have [REDIAL] button, should be programmed with a [REDIAL] Flexible
Button to use ACNR.
[TRAN/PGM] + Flex. FLEX + [TRAN/PGM] + 9 7 + [HOLD/SAVE] (2/8 Button only)
2. The analog CO Lines in the system should be equipped with Call Progress Tone detection Units
(CPTU).
3. When predefined CO Line is busy in ACNR mode, an available CO Line in the same group will be
seized.

Admin Programming
„ ACNR Pause Timer 4.5.1.10 (PGM 180 – FLEX 10)
„ ACNR Delay Timer 4.5.1.8 (PGM 180 – FLEX 8)
„ ACNR Tone Detect Timer 4.5.1.13 (PGM 180 – FLEX 13) – applicable to analog CO Line only
„ ACNR No Answer Timer 4.5.1.9 (PGM 180 – FLEX 9)
„ ACNR Retry Counter 4.5.1.11 (PGM 180 – FLEX 11)
„ ACNR Tone Cadence 4.15.1 (PGM 423)

40
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.2.8.2 Last Number Redialing

Description
The last dialed number with CO Line can be stored (up to 48 digits) in the station's Last Number Redial
buffer. The user may request the system redial the last number without redialing the full number. Each
DKTU with LCD in the system has 10 individual last dialed number directory.

Operation
To use Last Number Redial at DKTU,
1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [REDIAL] button. Or, press the [SPEED] button and dial *.
3. Press [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To use one of dialed number in the Last Number Directory by scrolling at DKTU with LCD),
1. When last dialed number is displayed, press [UP] or [DOWN] button to find a phone number.
(Max. 10 last dialed number can be stored in the directory.)
2. To make a call, press [HOLD/SAVE] button when the phone number is displayed.

To use Last Number Redial at SLT,

1. Lift handset on the SLT.
2. Dial 5 5 2(see Ref.1). Or, press the [REDIAL] button on the SLT.

Condition
1. When the used CO Line is busy, an idle CO Line in the group is seized and the last dialed number
is dialed.
2. The last dialed number directory allows a duplicated phone number.
3. If you use Last Number Redial while the Auto-redial is activated, the auto-redial is canceled.

Reference
1. SLT Last Speed Dial Code : 3.6.7 (PGM 106 – FLEX 12)

41
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.2.8.3 Save Number Redialing

Description
Any dialed number can be saved temporarily and used at any time. This number is saved until a new
number is stored

Operation
To save a number in the Save Number Redial buffer from a DKTU,
1. Press the [SPEED] button twice, while conversation with external party.
2. Replace the handset and go on-hook.

To dial a number from the Save Number Redial buffer from a DKTU,
1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial # button.

Condition
1. When the used CO Line is busy, an idle CO Line in the group is seized and the saved number is
dialed.
2. The stored save number is not deleted at when the system power is off.

42
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.2.8.4 Station Speed Dialing

Description
A DKTU user can store frequently used station number to station Speed Bin(000~099) up to 100. Station
numbers are saved up to 24 digits including pauses, Flash commands, pulse-to-tone switchover, and no-
display characters. A pause is automatically inserted after a flash. There are 1500(500 in IP LDK-100)
speed locations available in IP LDK-300 system.

Operation
To make a call using Station Speed Dial from a DKTU,
1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the station speed dial bin (000~099).

To store Station Speed Dial numbers from a DKTU,

1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the station speed dial bin (000~099).
4. If desired, press the CO Line or group button.
5. Dial the desired telephone number and include these special codes:
[CALLBK] – Insert Pause
‘*’ – Display Security.
If it is stored as the first digit, its function is Display Security. Otherwise, its function is Pulse to
DTMF Switchover.
[DND/FOR] – If CO Dial Tone Detect(see Ref.1) is set to ON and it is stored as the first or second
digit and the seized CO Line is behind PBX mode, its function is Dial Tone Detect. Otherwise,
its function is ‘*’.
[FLASH] – Inserts a Flash into the speed number.
If seized CO Line is analog line, its function is Flash to PX (or PBX). If seized CO Line is
ISDN(2.14) line and it is stored as the first digit, it makes remaining digits sent with enveloped
not in calling party number IE but in keypad facility IE
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
7. If desired, enter the name (Max. 12 characters) by dialing 2-digit for each character.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
* Note : To store continuously, repeat the above procedure from 3.

To delete a Station Speed Dial bin,

1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the speed bin number to be erased.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button. Then, the stored speed number is erased in the speed bin.

To display and enter a speed dial bin by scrolling,

1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the speed bin number.
4. Press the [UP] or [DOWN] key to display the next/previous speed dial number.

43
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

To store Station Speed Dial numbers from a SLT,

1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the Speed Dial program code 5 5 5(see Ref.2).
3. Dial the Speed Dial bin number (000~099).
4. Dial the desired phone number (max.24 digits).
5. Press and release the hook-switch.

To make a call using Station Speed Dial from a SLT,

1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the Speed Dial access code 5 5 8(see Ref.3).
3. Dial the Station Speed dial bin (000~099).

To delete a Station Speed Dial from a SLT,

1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the Speed Dial access code 5 5 5.(see Ref.2)
3. Dial the Station Speed dial bin (000~099).
4. Press and release the hook-switch.

Condition
1. CPTU should be installed to detect dial tone.
2. The Station Speed Dial is secured in data protect mode when the power is off.
3. There can be max. 24 digits in a station speed dial number including some digits and special function
codes.
4. If you dial an empty station speed bin, error tone will be heard.
5. If you select a CO Line before dialing speed bin number, the selected CO Line is used though there
is programmed CO Line in the speed bin number.
6. You can program a station name (max. 12 characters) in the DKTU to be presented instead of station
number. The name is programmed in the speed bin 000. When the station name is programmed, the
speed bin is not used as a station speed bin.
7. If a speed dial save the telephone number assigned to Flex. Button or Offnet call forward, the speed
dial cannot be erased and edited from the normal speed bin programming mode.

Reference
1. CO Dial Tone Detect : 4.4.1.6 (ADMIN 160 – FLEX 6)
2. Speed Dial program code 3.6.7 (ADMIN 106 – FLEX 15)
3. Speed Dial access code 3.6.7 (ADMIN 106 – FLEX 18)

Admin Programming
„ Speed Dial Access 4.1.3.9 (PGM 112 - FLEX 9)
„ CO Dial Tone Detect 4.4.1.6 (PGM 160 – FLEX 6)

44
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.2.8.5 System Speed Dialing

Description
The system speed dial bins are programmed by system attendant. These numbers are available for easy
access by all stations allowed in the system. Max. system speed dial capacity is 3000 (2000~4999) in IP
LDK-300 system. and 1500 in IP LDK-100 system.

[Flow chart]

Registration
Station Speed Dial Attendant

Use Station Speed

Each Station
Dial

2200~4999
Speed Dial
Range Check
2000~2199 Restricted by
Station COS

CO Outgoing

Speed Dial Range Description

2000 ~ 2199 Unrestricted
2200 ~ 4999(IP LDK-300)
2200 ~ 3499(IP LDK-100) Restricted by Station COS
2200 ~ 6999(IP LDK-300E)

Station COS
COS 1 There is no restriction to dial.
COS 2 Monitored by Exception Table A
COS 3 Monitored by Exception Table B
COS 4 Monitored by Exception Table A & B
COS 5 Long distance call is not allowed. (The dialed digits can be longer than 7 digits.)
COS 6 Long distance call is not allowed. Only max. 7 digits may be dialed.
COS 7 Only intercom, paging and emergency call are allowed. No dialing allowed on CO
Lines.
COS 8 Monitored by Exception Table C
COS 9 Monitored by Exception Table D

45
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Operation
To store a number in a System Speed Dial from the system attendant,
1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the system speed dial bin.
4. If desired, press the CO Line or Group button.
5. Dial the desired phone number and include these special codes.(max. 24 digits)
[CALLBK] – Insert Pause
‘*’ – Display Security.
If it is stored as the first digit, its function is Display Security. Otherwise, its function is Pulse to
DTMF Switchover.
[DND/FOR] – If CO Dial Tone Detect (see Ref.1) is set to ON and it is stored as the first or second
digit and the seized CO Line is behind PBX mode, its function is Dial Tone Detect. Otherwise, its
function is ‘*’.
[FLASH] – Inserts a Flash into the speed number.
If seized CO Line is analog line, its function is Flash to PX (or PBX). If seized CO Line is
ISDN(2.14) line and it is stored as the first digit, it makes remaining digits sent with enveloped
not in calling party number IE but in keypad facility IE
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
7. If desired, enter the name (Max. 12 characters) by dialing 2-digit for each character.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
* Note: To store continuously, repeat the above procedure from 3.

To make a call using System Speed Dial from a DKTU,

1. Lift the Handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the System Speed Dial bin.

To make a call using System Speed Dial from a SLT,

1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the Speed Dial access code 5 5 8(see Ref.2).
3. Dial the System Speed dial bin.

Condition
1. The CPTU should be installed for dial tone detect.
2. System Speed Dial is restricted by Station COS.
3. There can be max. 24 digits in a system speed dial number including some digits and special
function codes.
4. If you dial an empty system speed bin, error tone will be heard.
5. If you select a CO Line before dialing system speed bin number, the selected CO Line is used though
there is programmed CO Line in the system speed bin number.
6. If all CO Lines in the group are busy, busy tone will be received when accessing a system speed
number.
7. System Speed numbers are protected when the system power is off.

Reference
1. CO Dial Tone Detect : 4.4.1.6 (ADMIN 160 – FLEX 6)
2. Speed Dial access code 3.6.7 (ADMIN 106 – FLEX 18)

46
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Admin Programming
„ Speed Dial Access 4.1.3.9 (PGM 112 – FLEX 9)
„ System Speed Zone Access 4.11.5 (PGM 232)
„ CO Dial Tone Detect 4.4.1.6 (PGM 160 - FLEX 6)

2.2.9 Private Line

Description
CO Lines in the system can be assigned for exclusive use by one or more DKTU users. Private lines are
assigned to CO Line Group 00 and an appearance (Flexible CO button) is required at the DKTU. (Loop
or Pool keys cannot be used.)

Operation
A private line will operate as a normal CO Line except access is limited to assigned stations.

Condition
1. Private line cannot be picked up.

Admin Programming
„ CO Line Group 4.2.2.1 (PGM 141 – FLEX 1)

47
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3 Rerouting feature

2.3.1 Call Forward

Description
A station user can forward calls to any station, station group or VMIB in the system, by activating feature
codes. Figure 2.3.1 Describes destination types of Call Forwarding. Each Call forwarding is decided by
Call Forward type.

CO Incoming Call or ICM Call

[Forward Type]
Station off-net Forward „ Unconditional Forward
„ Busy

STA A „ No Answer STA B

„ Busy / No Answer

Forward

VMIB Announcement
Hunt Group

Figure 2.3.1 Call Forwarding

Figure 2.3.2 Describes Forwarded, Forwarding, Forwarded-to stations.

Call forward

Forwarded Station Forwarding Station Forwarded- to Station

Figure 2.3.2 Forwarded, Forwarding, Forwarded-to stations

Condition
1. To use Call Forward, a station should be permitted at ADMIN programming.
2. The DSS of extension which is activating Call Forward will be flashing.
3. There’re several types of call forwarding ; Unconditional, Busy, No Answer, Busy/No Answer,
Unconditional Station Off-net Call Forward, No Answer Station Off-net Call Forward, Incoming CO
Off-net Call Forward and Follow Me Call Forward.
4. To deactivating Call Forward, set call forward type # which means to remove call forward setting.
5. Station can not activate a call forward to ISDN Phone (S0 Station).

Admin Programming
„ Allow Off-net FWD 4.1.2.18 (PGM 111 – FLEX 18)
„ Authorization Code Table 4.11.1 (PGM 227)

48
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.1.1 Call Forward, Unconditional

Description
A user forwards all calls immediately to other station, Hunt Group or VMIB.

Operation
To activate Unconditional Call Forward,
1. Lift the Handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Code 1.
4. Dial station or group pilot number to receive the calls.
5. Replace the handset and go on-hook.

To assign {CALL FORWARD} button at a flexible button,

1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Press a flexible button.
3. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
4. Assign Call Forward Type (1).
5. Dial the destination to receive the call.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To deactivate Call Forward,

1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Cancel Code #.

49
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.1.2 Call Forward, Busy

Description
When the station user’s line is busy.

Operation
To make call forward,
1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial a Call Forward type code: 2
4. Dial station, group number or # (VMIB) to receive the call.

To assign {CALL FORWARD} button at a flexible button,

1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Press a flexible button.
3. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
4. Assign Call Forward Type (2).
5. Dial the destination to receive the call.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To activate Call Forward,

1. Press the assigned flexible button.
2. The LED of [DND/FOR] button is flashing and the function assigned to the flexible button is
activated.

To activate Call Forward to VMIB,

1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Code (1~4).
4. Dial VMIB selection code # to receive the call.
5. Replace the handset and go on-hook.

To deactivate Unconditional Call Forward,

1. In idle state;
Press [DND/FOR] button.
2. In off-hook state,
Press [DND/FOR] button and dial #.

To deactivate Call Forward,

1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Cancel Code #.

50
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.1.3 Call Forward, No Answer

Description
When the station user does not answer within a predetermined timer
(Call Forward No Answer Timer 4.5.2.1 (ADMIN 181 – FLEX 1)

Operation
To make call forward,
1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial a Call Forward type code: 3
4. Dial station, group number or VMIB number to receive the call.

To assign {CALL FORWARD} button at a flexible button,

1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Press a flexible button.
3. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
4. Assign Call Forward Type (3).
5. Dial the destination to receive the call.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To activate Call Forward,

1. Press the assigned flexible button.
2. The LED of [DND/FOR] button is flashing and the function assigned to the flexible button is
activated.

To deactivate Call Forward,

1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Cancel Code #.

51
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.1.4 Call Forward, Busy/No Answer

Description
A user can direct the system to re-route call to other station, group or VMIB when the user's station is
busy and/or does not answer in a predefined 'No Answer' time. Incoming CO Line, transferred CO Line
and ringing Intercom calls are forwarded.

Operation
To make call forward,
1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial a Call Forward type code: 4
4. Dial station, group number or VMIB number to receive the call.

To assign {CALL FORWARD} button at a flexible button,

1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Press a flexible button.
3. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
4. Assign Call Forward Type (4).
5. Dial the destination to receive the call.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To activate Call Forward,

1. Press the assigned flexible button.
2. The LED of [DND/FOR] button is flashing and the function assigned to the flexible button is
activated.

To deactivate Call Forward,

1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Cancel Code #.

52
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.1.5 Call Forward, Station Off-net (Unconditional, No answer)

Description
Stations allowed call forward access can forward intercom and transferred CO Line calls to a directory
number (telephone number) outside of the system. When a call is received, the system will access an
outgoing CO Line and dial the telephone number entered by the user.

If a station assigned off-net call forward received a call from internal caller and external caller, the call is
forwarded to off-net unconditionally (Code 5) or after No Answer Ring timer is expired (Code 6).

Operation
To activate unconditional Off-Net Call Forward,
1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Code 5.
4. Seize a CO Line, if required.
5. Dial the Speed Dial bin number with the desired phone number.
6. Replace the handset and go on-hook.

To activate no answer off-net call forward,

1. Lift handset or press [MON] button.
2. Press [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Code 6.
4. Seize a CO Line, if required.
5. Dial a speed bin number with the desired phone number.
6. Replace the handset and go on-hook.

To deactivate Call Forward,

1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Cancel Code #.

53
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.1.6 Call Forward, Station Off-net with Tel Num (Unconditional, No answer)

Description
Stations allowed call forward access can forward intercom and transferred CO Line calls to a directory
number (telephone number) outside of the system. When a call is received, the system will access an
outgoing CO Line and dial the telephone number entered by the user.

If a station assigned off-net call forward received a call from internal caller and external caller, the call is
forwarded to off-net unconditionally (Code 8) or after No Answer Ring timer is expired (Code 9).

Operation
To activate unconditional Off-Net Call Forward,
1. Lift handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Code 8.
4. Seize a CO Line, if required.
5. Dial the desired phone number instead of speed bin.
6. Replace the handset and go on-hook.

To activate no answer off-net call forward,

1. Lift handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Code 9.
4. Seize a CO Line, if required.
5. Dial the desired phone number instead of speed bin.
6. Replace the handset and go on-hook.

To deactivate Call Forward,

1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Cancel Code #.

Condition
1. The entered telephone number will be automatically assigned to a station speed bin, but the
telephone number cannot be erased or edited from the normal speed bin programming mode.
2. The assigned station speed bin will be deleted automatically when the user cancel this function.

54
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.1.7 Call Forward, Incoming CO Off-net (ATD only)

Description
The system attendant can direct the system to re-route(forward) incoming CO Line calls to a directory
(telephone) number outside the system. When a call is received, the system will access an outgoing CO
Line and dial the telephone number assigned by the attendant. Note that the system will automatically
disconnect the call after the Unsupervised Conference Timer has expired.

Field IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100

CO Group Access 801~872 801~824
Individual CO Access 88XXX 88XX
Retrieve Held CO Line 8Ü 8Ü

Operation
To activate Follow-me Call Forward from any station,
1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward code ‘7’.
4. Dial CO Line/group access code (9, 801-8xx, 88001-88xxx, or 8* for all CO Lines) or press {CO
Line} button.
5. Dial the Speed Dial bin number with the desired telephone number.
6. Replace the Handset and go on-hook.

To deactivate CO Line Off-Net Call Forward from the attendant;

1. Lift the Handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward code ‘7’.
4. Dial CO Line/group access code (9, 801-8xx, 88001-88xxx, or 8*) or press {CO Line} button.
5. Dial #.

Condition
1. If there is no idle CO Line, Off-net Call Forward is not activated.
2. This feature is not applicable for DID line.
3. It is unconditional and forwarded immediately when the CO Line rings in the system.
4. If a speed bin is programmed in a Flexible button, you may press the Flexible button instead of
dialing the speed bin number.
5. Toll restriction will be based on the COS of outgoing CO Line. But, it doesn’t care CO authorization
code.

55
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.1.8 Call Forward, Follow Me

Description
Follow-Me Call Forward can be activated at the user's station or from any other station in the system
allowed access to Call Forward. It must be programmed from the station that you will be forwarded to
and a user password must be entered at the user's station first.

Operation
To activate Follow-me Call Forward from any station,
1. Lift the Handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Code ‘0’.
4. Dial forwarding station number.
5. Dial forwarding station authorization code.
6. Replace the Handset and go on-hook.

To deactivate Follow-me Call Forward from the station,

(only the user's station, not at any other station)
1. In idle state;
Press the [DND/FOR] button.
2. In off-hook state,
Press the [DND/FOR] button and dial #.

To register the authorization code in a station

1. Press [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Dial 31 and Enter desired Authorization Code(5 digits)
3. Press [HOLD/SAVE] button to Save.

Condition
1. Authorization code should be registered to use Follow-me Call Forward.

Admin Programming
„ Allow Off-net FWD 4.1.2.18 (PGM 111 – FLEX 18)
„ Authorization Code Table 4.11.1 (PGM 227)
„ Call Forward 4.1.2.2 (PGM 111 – FLEX 2)
„ Call Forward No Answer Timer 4.5.2.1 (PGM 181 – FLEX 1)
„ Off-net Call Mode 4.1.3.12 (PGM 112 – FLEX 12)
„ Unsupervised Conference Timer 4.5.3.6 (PGM 182 – FLEX 6)

56
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.1.9 SLT Call Forward

Description
A user of single line telephone can forward a call to other stations, CO Lines or VMIB in the system.

Operation
To activate call forward from a SLT,
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial call forward code 5 5 4 (see Ref.1).
3. Dial call forward type.
4. Dial station number or Group speed number to receive call. Or, press # key to forward to VMIB.
5. Replace the handset and go on-hook.

To deactivate call forward from a SLT,

1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial call forward code 5 5 4 and #. Or, dial 5 5 9(see Ref.2).
3. Confirmation tone is heard and replace the handset.

Condition
1. Call forward is maintained until it is released.
2. A call cannot be forwarded to a station which is in DND. When trying to forward to the station, error
tone will be heard.
3. A call forwarding station cannot make a message wait.
4. The call forward feature may be canceled by code 5 5 9. It is unified cancel code for DND/Call
Forward/Message for SLT.
5. Dial pulse SLT cannot be forwarded to VMIB.

Reference
1. Call forward Code : 3.6.7 (ADMIN 106 – FLEX 14)
2. DND/FWD Cancel Code : 3.6.7 (ADMIN 106 – FLEX 19)

Admin Programming
„ Call Forward 4.1.2.2 (PGM 111 – FLEX 2)
„ VMIB Access 4.1.4.2 (PGM 113 – FLEX 2)

57
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.1.10 Preset Call Forward

Description
When a station receives incoming CO Call and the station is programmed to Preset Call Forward, the call
is routed to Preset Call Forward destination if the station does not answer within Preset Call Forward
Timer.
The destination can be other station or hunt group.

Condition
1. In Preset Call Forward, a busy station will not receive a CO Line ring and the next assigned station
will receive the CO Line ring. If the station is not forwarded to other destination, then the call will not
be forwarded and continue to ring at the station until answered.
2. The loop of Preset Call Forward is not available. (A → B → C → A)
3. When a CO Line is forwarded with Preset Call Forward, the original station will stop ringing. (The
LED of {CO } button will be flashing continuously.)
4. If there is no direct {CO} button or {LOOP} button at destination station, the station will be bypassed.

Admin Programming
„ Preset Call Forward 4.1.12 (PGM 121)
„ Preset Call Forward Timer 4.5.2.12 (PGM 181 – FLEX 12)

58
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.2 Call Transfer

Description
An Intercom Call or CO Call can be transferred to other station or CO Line during conversation.
There are 2 kinds of call transfer ; Screened Transfer and Unscreened Transfer.
If the transferring user(originator) makes a conversation with transferred-to user(destination) before Call
Transfer completed, it is Screened Transfer. Otherwise if the transferring user replaces the handset while
listening ring back tone just after dialing transferred-to destination, it is Unscreened Transfer.

Feature Transferring method

Screened Transfer
Transfer is completed after announcing the destination party.
(With Announcement)
Transfer is completed without an announcement.
Unscreened Transfer
After dialing the destination, while hearing a ring back tone, the
(Without Announcement)
originator can replace the handset.

Figure 2.3.3 Describes Transferred, Transferring, Transferred-to stations.

Call Transfer

Transferred Station Transferring Station Transferred-to Station

Figure 2.3.3 Transferred, Transferring, Transferred-to stations

59
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.2.1 Call Transfer to CO Line

Description
A station user may transfer connected Call to new CO Call. If an external party on ISDN does not
answer the transferred call within Transfer Hold Recall time, the transferring station will receive recall
ring. If the call remains unanswered, the attendant will receive recall ring for Attendant Recall time. After
that, the CO Line will be disconnected and returned to idle state.

Operation
Unscreened CO Line Call Transfer;
1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Intercom dial tone is heard and the previous call is placed on hold.
3. Seize a CO Line and dial the number of external party to receive the call.
4. Replace the handset and go on-hook.

Screened CO Line Call Transfer;

1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Intercom dial tone is heard and the previous call is placed on hold.
3. Seize a CO Line and dial the number of external party to receive the call.
4. When the called party answers, announce the call transfer.
5. Replace the handset and go on-hook.

Condition
1. For this feature, CO Lines (transferred CO Line and transferring CO Line) must be able to detect loop
lost or disconnection condition.
2. If the transferred CO Line doesn’t have answer information (analog CO), recalling will not be
presented when it is not answered. And, the call will be disconnected after Unsupervised Conference
timer.
3. If the transferred line is ISDN CO, recall ring will be presented to the CO Line after Transfer Hold
Recall time while the line is released.
4. If you press the original incoming CO Line button while making transfer to an external number
(Screened Transfer), the outgoing call is disconnected and the original incoming call is connected.

Admin Programming
„ Transfer Recall Timer 4.5.1.7 (PGM 180 – FLEX 7)
„ I-Hold Recall Timer 4.5.1.5 (PGM 180 – FLEX 5)
„ Attendant Recall Timer 4.5.1.1 (PGM 180 – FLEX 1)
„ Open Loop Detect Timer 4.2.3.13 (PGM N 142 – FLEX 13)
„ Unsupervised Conference timer 4.5.3.6(PGM 182 – FLEX 6)

60
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.2.2 Call Transfer to Station

Description
A Call can be transferred to another station within the system. The transfer can be screened(announced)
or unscreened to an idle/busy station or Hunt Group. The transferred call rings and provides Exclusive
Hold flashing indication to the receiving party’s DKTU.

If the receiving station does not answer the call in the Transfer Recall time, the transferring station and
the transferred station will receive recall. If the call still remains unanswered, the attendant will also
receive a recall for the Attendant Recall time. After that, the transferred call will be disconnected.

Operation
To transfer to an idle station,
To make an unscreened transfer,
1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Intercom dial tone is heard and the previous call is placed on exclusive hold.
3. Dial the station number to receive the transfer.
4. Replace the handset or go on-hook.

To make a screened transfer by DKTU,

1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Intercom dial tone is heard and the previous call is placed on exclusive hold.
3. Dial the station number to receive the transfer.
4. When the station answers, announce transfer.
5. Replace the handset or go on-hook.

To transfer to a busy station,

1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. The CO Line is automatically placed on exclusive hold and ICM busy tone is heard.
3. The transferred station will receive muted transferred CO Line ring.
4. If the call is not answered within Transfer Recall time, the CO Line will be recalled to the
transferring station and the attendant will receive recall ring if the call remains unanswered.

To make an unscreened transfer by SLT

1. Press and release the hook-switch and intercom dial tone is heard.
2. The CO Line is placed on exclusive hold and the Transfer Recall timer is activated.
3. Dial the station number to be transferred.
4. Replace the handset and go on-hook.

To make a screened transfer by SLT

1. Press and release the hook-switch and intercom dial tone is heard.
2. The CO Line is placed on exclusive hold and the Recall timer is activated.
3. Dial the station number to be transferred.
4. When the station answers, announce transfer.

61
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

5. Replace the handset and go on-hook.

Condition
1. When the attendant has a DSS and a station of programmed in DSS receives transferred call, the
LED of DSS button in attendant will flashing.
2. When the SLT user is in the screened transfer mode and tries to converse both transferred station
and CO Line, the user can activate brokers call with hook-flash.
3. It is impossible to transfer a call to another busy SLT from a SLT. When receiving busy tone, SLT
user can be connected to the CO Line with hook-flash.

Admin Programming
„ Transfer Recall Timer 4.5.1.7 (PGM 180 – FLEX 7)
„ I-Hold Recall Timer 4.5.1.5 (PGM 180 – FLEX 5)
„ Attendant Recall Timer 4.5.1.1 (PGM 180 – FLEX 1)
„ No Touch Answer 4.1.2.7 (PGM 111 – FLEX 7)

62
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.3 Holding and Parking

Description
A station user can hold a call. The following features are available depending on the result.

Feature Description
Any Station can retrieve a held call.
System Hold
Other station in the group can seize the CO Line and answer.
Only the station user who held the call can retrieve it.
Exclusive Hold
Other station in the group cannot seize the CO Line.

The result of the holding operation can be determined by ADMIN programming.

63
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.3.1 Hold

Description
There are 2 kinds of Hold ; System Hold and Exclusive Hold.
If a Call is held by System hold, the call may be retrieved by any station. Otherwise if it is held by
Exclusive Hold, only the station who has held the call can retrieve.

Operation
To make a CO Line on Exclusive/System Hold from a DKTU,
Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button once or twice. (It depends on Hold Preference.)

To make a CO Line on Exclusive/System Hold from a SLT (depends on Hold Preference),

Make hook-flash and dial 5 6 0(System Hold Code (Ref.1)).

To access a CO Line on Exclusive/System Hold from the holding DKTU,

1. Lift the handset.
2. Press the {CO} button.
3. Or dial 8 # and the CO Line number(Access Held Individual CO Line Code (Ref.2)).

To access a CO Line on Exclusive/System Hold from the holding SLT,

1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial 8 ＊(Access Held CO Group Code (Ref.3))

Condition
1. The CO Line placed on Exclusive Hold will flash in the station and the LED of CO Line will light in
other stations.
2. The CO Line placed on System Hold will flash in all stations.
3. When Exclusive Hold is set in a station, Exclusive Hold Recall Timer is initiated. After Exclusive Hold
Recall Timer is expired, the original station will receive recall for I-Hold Recall Timer. Also, When
System Hold is set in a station, System Hold Recall Timer is initiated. After System Hold Recall Timer
is expired, the original station will receive recall for I-Recall Timer.
4. When the I-Hold Recall Timer is expired, attendant will also receive a recall for Attendant Recall
Timer. If the call remains unanswered for Attendant Recall time, the call is disconnected.

Reference
1. System Hold Code : 3.6.7 (ADMIN106 – FLEX 20)
2. Held Individual CO Line Code : 3.6.7 (ADMIN107 – FLEX 11)
3. Access Held CO Group Code : 3.6.7 (ADMIN107 – FLEX 10)

Admin Programming
„ Hold Preference 4.4.1.8 (PGM 160 – FLEX 8)
„ Attendant Recall Timer 4.5.1.1 (PGM 180 – FLEX 1)
„ Exclusive Hold Recall Timer 4.5.1.4 (PGM 180 – FLEX 4)
„ I-Hold Recall Timer 4.5.1.5 (PGM 180 – FLEX 5)
„ System Hold Recall Timer 4.5.1.6 (PGM 180 – FLEX 6)

64
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

„ Transfer Recall Timer 4.5.1.7 (PGM 180 – FLEX 7)

2.3.3.2 Hold Preference

Description
Preferred Hold type is set by ADMIN programming. When user presses [HOLD] button, the preferred
type of Hold is activated. If the user presses [HOLD] button twice, the other type is activated.
That is, if System Hold is set as preferred Hold and the user held the call by pressing [HOLD] button
once, the call can be retrieved by any user who access the held call. Otherwise System Hold is set as
preferred hold and the original user held the call by pressing [HOLD] button twice, the hold type is
Exclusive at this time and other users are not permitted to access the held call.

Operation
1. If System Hold is set as preferred Hold and the user presses the held the [HOLD] button once, the
call is held by System Hold (Ref.1).
2. If System Hold is set as preferred Hold and the user presses the held the [HOLD] button twice, the
call is held by Exclusive Hold (Ref.1).
3. When the Exclusive Hold is assigned, other station in the group cannot seize the held call.
4. When the System Hold is assigned, other station in the group can seize the held call and answer.

Reference
1. System Hold / Exclusive Hold : 2.3.3

Admin Programming
„ Hold Preference 4.4.1.8 (PGM 160 – FLEX 8)

2.3.3.3 Automatic Hold

Description
When a station is connected to a CO Call, the station user can make another intercom call just by
pressing DSS button. In this case, the previous CO Call is held automatically.
It is also able to applied to CO Call to CO Call. That is, when a station user makes another CO call by
pressing {CO} button without disconnecting previous CO Call, the previous Call is holed by Auto Hold
ADMIN programming. The held CO line follows preferred hold type by ADMIN programming.

Operation
To use Automatic Hold while on a CO Line call,
1. Press a {CO} button.
2. When the new CO Line is connected, the previous CO Call is placed on preferred hold state.

Admin Programming

65
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

„ Automatic Hold 4.1.3.2 (PGM 112 – FLEX 2)

„ Hold Preference 4.4.1.8 (PGM 160 – FLEX 8)

2.3.3.4 Park

Description
A user can park a ICM or CO call in a virtual location. The user may make a page announcement for the
desired user to pick-up the parked call. The call retrieve the call by dialing the location number.
If the call remains unanswered for the Call Park Recall time, the original station which parking the call
receives recall. If the CO call is still unanswered, then the attendant will receive recall at this time. If
attendant doesn’t answer again in the Attendant Recall time, the CO Line call will be disconnected and
returned to idle. In case of ICM call parking, the attendant will not receive recall.

Operation
To park a call,
1. Press the [TRAN/PGM] button.
2. Dial the parking location 601~619(Call Park Location Code (Ref.1)).
3. Replace the handset or go on-hook
4. If desired, page to the desired user to retrieve the call.

To retrieve the parked call from a DKTU,

1. Lift the Handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Dial the parking location to retrieve the parked call.

Condition

Reference
1. Call Park Location Code : 3.6.7 (ADMIN107 – FLEX 5)

Admin Programming
„ Call Park Recall Timer 4.5.1.2 (PGM 180 – FLEX 2)

66
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.4 Pickup

Description
A station user can pick up other station’s call.
In intercom Calls, incoming CO Calls, recalling CO Calls and transferred CO Calls can be picked up
instead of the ringing station.

The following pick-up types are available.

Type Description
To pick up a call ringing at other station within accessible Intercom
Directed Call Pick up
Tenancy Group (Ref.1).
Group Call Pick up To pick up a call ringing other station in the same pick-up group (Ref.2).

Reference
1. Intercom Tenancy Group : 4.1.11 (ADMIN120)
2. Pick up Attribute : 4.7.1.2

2.3.4.1 Directed Call Pick Up

Description

A station can pick up a call ringing other station by dialing the direct call pick up code (Ref.1) and the
ringing station number.

Operation
To answer a call ringing at another station,
1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Dial Direct Call Pick-up code 7 (Ref. 1). Or, press {Direct Call Pick-up} button.
3. Dial the intercom number of the ringing station.

Condition
1. To assign {DIRECT CALL PICK-UP} button at a flexible button,
[TRAN/PGM] + FLEX button + ‘7’ + [HOLD/SAVE]
2. You should have a {CO Line} button, {POOL} button or {LOOP} button to pick up a CO Line call.
3. When several calls are queued at a station or hunt group, the pick-up depends on the Pick-up Priority
(ADMIN 173).
4. Queued callback and private line cannot be picked up.
5. An intercom call to ‘H’ or ‘P’ mode station cannot be picked up.
6. When the same type of CO Lines are queued, the first queued CO Line is picked up.
7. Direct call pick-up is allowed within the intercom tenancy group. A station cannot pick up any call to
the station which belongs to denied intercom tenancy group (ADMIN 120).

67
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

8. A station can answer an intercom call placed to an ICM box using directed call pick-up.

Reference
1. Intercom Tenancy Group : 4.1.11 (ADMIN120)
2. Pick up Attribute : 4.7.1.2
3. Direct Call Pick up Code : 3.6.7 (ADMIN107 – FLEX 6)

Admin Programming
„ PLA Priority Setting 4.4.14 (PGM 173) - Pick-up Priority

2.3.4.2 Group Call Pick Up

Description
A station can pick up a call ringing at other station in the same pick-up group. Ringing intercom calls,
incoming CO Lines, recalling CO Lines and transferred CO Lines can be answered by a station instead
of the ringing station if the stations belong to the same pick-up group (Ref.1).

Operation
To answer a call ringing at a station in your Pick-up group,
1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Dial Group Pick-up code 5 6 6 (Ref.2).

Condition
1. To assign {GROUP CALL PICK-UP} button at a flexible button,
[TRAN/PGM] + FLEX + 5 6 6 (Ref.2) + [HOLD/SAVE]
2. An intercom call to ‘H’ or ‘P’ mode station cannot be picked up.
3. You should have {CO Line} button, {LOOP} or {POOL} button to pick-up a CO Line call.
4. Queued callback and private line cannot be picked up.
5. A station can answer an intercom call placed to an ICM box using group call pick-up.
6. When several calls are queued at a station or hunt group, the pick-up depends on the Pick-up Priority
(ADMIN 173).
7. When the same type of CO Lines are queued, the first queued CO Line is picked up.
8. Group call pick-up is allowed within the intercom tenancy group. A station cannot pick up any call to
the station which belongs to denied intercom tenancy group (Ref.3).

Reference
1. Pick up Attribute : 4.7.1.2
2. Group Call Pick Up Code : 3.6.7 (ADMIN107 – FLEX2)
3. Intercom Tenancy Group : 4.1.11

Admin Programming
„ Pick-up Attribute 4.7.1.2 (PGM 190 – FLEX 2)
„ Pick-up Group Attributes 4.7.2.5 (PGM 191)
„ PLA Priority Setting 4.4.14 (PGM 173) - Pick-up Priority

68
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.3.5 Mobile Extension

Description
A mobile user is able to use the phone as extension of IP LDK system. So he can receive the incoming
call and make the outgoing call when a user registers the mobile phone number to IP LDK system.

Operation
To register the mobile extension number in DKT.
1. Press the [PGM] + 33.
2. Dial the mobile number
3. Press the [HOLD] button.

To activate(deactivate) Mobile extension feature.

1. Press the [PGM] + 34 .
2. Dial the ‘1’ to activate, or ‘0’ to deactivate
3. Press the [HOLD] button.

To register the mobile extension CLI number in DKT.

1. Press the [PGM] + 35.
2. Dial the mobile CLI number
3. Press the [HOLD] button.

Incoming call through DID, ICM or Transferring call,

1. The call to the extension which has the preprogrammed mobile extension is routed to both an
extension and a mobile extension.
2. When incoming call is answered at an extension or a mobile extension, the other will stop ringing.
3. If mobile answer, extension go to Mobile-Ext In Used State [IN USE AT MOBILE EXT].
3. Under the Mobile-Ext In Used Sate, extension could not receive any digit.
4. If another extension tries to call the extension of Mobile-Ext In Used State, busy tone is heard. Call
Waiting is not supported at the circumstance, but user can leave a message wait to extension of
Mobile-Ext In Used State.

Transferring call from the mobile extension through IP LDK system,

1. Dial the transfer code (*) during the talk state in Mobile extension.
2. The mobile extension user hears the internal dial tone and the calling party hears the MOH.
3. Dial the extension number.
4. The call will be transferred after the mobile extension user goes on-hook state.
5. The mobile extension user can reconnect the call by pressing the code (#) in case extension does
not answer.

Outgoing call from the mobile extension through IP LDK system,

1. The mobile extension user dials his DID number of IP LDK system.
2. Then he receives the internal dial tone
3. He can do internal call or outgoing call with CLI of extension.

69
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Condition
1. If the extension is busy, FWD or DND state, a call is not routed to the mobile extension.
2. If the mobile extension does the external call through IP LDK system, it sends the CLI number of
extension.
3. After no answer timer, a call is routed to DID no answer destination. (In case the no answer timer of
IP LDK system is shorter than GSM)
4. This feature is applied to incoming DID call, ICM call and transferred call.
5. The Call Back feature is not supported to the mobile extension.
6. In case of transferring from mobile phone to another mobile extension, the transferred call will be
routed to only internal phone.
7. If mobile extension converse through IP LDK, DTMF receiver is dedicated for mobile extension.
8. Mobile extension can transfer the call to the other extension. If he try to seize CO line or to dial the
Hunt Gr or dial other destination except extension, an error tone will be provided.
9. If the “Transfer recall” timer is expired, a call is not routed to the extension associated with mobile
extension.
10. Outgoing call from mobile extension is restricted by internal station’s COS.
11. Mobile extension can receive the Calling Party number or his own extension CLI number as CLI
(according to PGM 143-Flex7-CLI Transit: ORI / CFW)
12. To use “Transferring call / outgoing call from mobile extension” feature, CO line connected with the
mobile extension should be set to DID line.
13. When a mobile extension calls his own DID number of IP LDK system to make CO call, IP LDK
system checks the CLI of the mobile extension number. If the CLI is matched with ‘Mobile Extension
Number’ or ‘Mobile CLI’ which registered to his extension, the system provides CO dial tone and
allows to make CO outgoing call through IP LDK system.
14. To assign the {Mobile Extension Activation} button,
TRAN/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRAN/PGM] + 3 4 + [HOLD/SAVE]
15. Though the extension is member of Hunt Gr. (except Ring Hunt Gr.), a call is routed to the mobile
extension.

Admin Programming
„ Mobile extension register 4.11.9 (PGM 236)
„ CLI Transit 4.2.4.7 (PGM143 - FLEX7)

70
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4 Call Handling

2.4.1 Absent Text Message

2.4.1.1 Custom Message

Description
Each station can select from ten(11~20) possible custom message to display on the LCD of DKTU.
These messages are programmed from the system attendant(see Ref.1) for system-wide use. Individual
users may program message 00 as it’s own custom message.
When set, the chosen message is displayed on LCD of the caller.

Operation
To program Custom Message 00 from a station,
Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
1. Dial 5 2. (see Ref.2)
2. Enter the message (see Figure 2.4.1).
3. The message can be entered up to 24 characters.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button and confirmation tone is heard.

Q – 11 A - 21 D - 31
Z – 12 B - 22 E - 32
. – 13 C - 23 F - 33
1 – 10 2 - 20 3 - 30

G – 41 J - 51 M - 61
H - 42 K - 52 N - 62
I - 43 L - 53 O - 63
4 – 40 5 - 50 6 - 60

P - 71 W - 91
T - 81
R - 72 X - 92
U - 82
S - 73 Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7* Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 – 70 9 - 90

*1 - Blank
*2 - : 0-00 #
*3 - ,

Figure 2.4.1 Entering Character with Dial Pad

To program Custom Messages 11~20 from the system attendant,

Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
1. Dial 0 5 3 and the message number (11~20).
2. Enter the message(see Figure 2.4.1).
3. The message can be entered up to 24 characters.

71
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button and confirmation tone is heard.

To activate LCD Messages (Custom/Pre-selected) from a station or from the system attendant,
Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
1. Dial 5 1.
2. Dial the 2-digit message code 00 or 11~20.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To cancel LCD Messages (Custom/Pre-selected) from a station,

Press the flashing [DND/FOR] button or, Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
1. Dial 5 1and #.
2. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To cancel LCD Messages (Custom/Pre-selected) from the system attendant,

Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
1. Dial 0 5 2.
2. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Reference
1. Attendant : 2.13
2. Numbering Plan : 5.1 (set custom message)

72
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.1.2 Pre-selected Message

Description
A user can select pre-assigned messages from 1 to 10 to be shown on the LCD of the calling party.
Detail information is entered by each user (e.g. Time, Date or Station number )

The Pre-selected Messages are as follows:

Message 01: LUNCH, RETURN AT HH:MM
Message 02: ON VACATION /RETURN AT DATE MM:DD
Message 03: OUT OF OFFICE/RETURN TIME HH:MM
Message 04: OUT OF OFFICE/RETURN AT DATE MM:DD
Message 05: OUT OF OFFICE/RETURN UNKNOWN
Message 06: CALL: (Telephone No: Up to 17 digits)
Message 07: IN OFFICE: STA XXXX
Message 08: IN A MEETING/RETURN TIME HH:MM
Message 09: AT HOME
Message 10: AT BRANCH OFFICE

Operation
To program Custom Message 00 from a station,
Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
1. Dial 5 2.(see Ref.2)
2. Enter the message(see Figure 2.4.1).
3. The message can be entered up to 24 characters.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button and confirmation tone is heard.

To activate LCD Messages (Custom/Pre-selected) from a station or from the system attendant,
Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
1. Dial 5 1.
2. Dial the 2-digit message code 00 or 01~10.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To cancel LCD Messages (Custom/Pre-selected) from a station,

Press the flashing [DND/FOR] button or, Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
1. Dial 5 1and #.
2. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Condition
1. If a station assigns call forward while pre-selected message is activated, the pre-selected message
is canceled automatically(see Ref.1).
2. User can leave a message in DKTU and SLT. When leave a message in SLT, DND warning tone will
be heard to notify it as soon as the handset is lifted.
3. When a pre-selected message is selected in a DKTU, the [DND/FOR] button will be flashing if exists

Reference

73
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

1. Call Forward : 2.3.1

2. Numbering Plan : 5.1 (set custom message)

2.4.2 Alarm

Description
The system can be programmed to recognize the status of an external contact (normally open or closed)
from a relay. When activated, the system will signal programmed stations with a single tone repeated per
1-min. interval or a continuous tone. This capability is commonly employed to provide remote alarm
signals. When used as an alarm, the assigned stations receive the programmed signal. To stop the signal,
the alarm should be deactivated (reset) from a station assigned to receive the alarm signal.

Operation
At detecting the Alarm contact, the system sends the appropriate alarm signal to assigned stations.

To terminate the alarm signal while idle status;

1. Dial 5 6 5 and confirmation tone is heard. The alarm signal is terminated at all assigned stations.

To reset alarm;
1. Clear the alarm condition and reset (terminate) the alarm signal. The proceeding steps can be done
in any order to reset.

Condition
1. An external contact should be connected to the alarm input on the MISB or RAU.
2. The alarm contacts should be “dry” (no voltage/current source connected).
3. SLT cannot receive alarm signal.
4. Alarm reset can be programmed in a flexible button.

Reference
1. RAU, MISB : refer to the installation manual

Admin Programming
„ Alarm Enable 4.4.4.1 (PGM 163 – FLEX 1)
„ Alarm Contact Type 4.4.4.2 (PGM 163 – FLEX 2)
„ Alarm Mode 4.4.4.3 (PGM163 – FLEX 3)
„ Alarm Signal Mode 4.4.4.4 (PGM 163 – FLEX 4)

74
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.3 Automatic Privacy

Description
By default, all conversation which take place on CO lines, intercom, and conference are protected by
privacy(Automatic privacy).
Automatic privacy allows a station user to suspend automatic privacy for an existing CO line conversation
without invitation.
ADMIN programming(ADMIN program 161 – FLEX 5) is required to enable or disable this feature.

If automatic privacy is set “enable” by ADMIN programming and press a busy CO line button, busy tone
will be heard.
If automatic privacy is set “disabled” by ADMIN programming and press a busy CO line button, the
station is connected to the conversation.

Condition
1. A station cannot override the other station during a conference though the privacy of conference
station is disabled.
2. While Automatic Privacy is disabled, privacy is still assured for intercom and conference calls.
3. A station can only override privacy-disabled station.
4. the station is heard Intrusion tone when another station accesses the line.

Admin Programming
„ Auto Privacy 4.4.2.5 (PGM 161 – FLEX 5)
„ Privacy Warning Tone 4.4.2.6 (PGM 161 – FLEX 6)
„ Override Privilege 4.1.4.4 (PGM 113 – FLEX 4)

75
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.4 BGM (Background Music)

Description
A user can listen to BGM through the speaker while on-hook and idle.
Music from the source is heard over the station speaker and will be shut-off during ringing, paging
announcement or when the station is off-hook.

Operation
To assign background music at a station,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 7 3 and the music is heard.

To transmit a background music with external page port at attendant station,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0 7 6 (External port 1), 0 7 7 (External port 2) or 0 7 8 (External port 3).
3. Dial the background music channel number and the selected background music is heard.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button. After confirmation tone, the station will go to idle state and the
selected background music is transferred to external port.

To transmit a background music through intercom box at attendant station,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0 7 5.
3. Dial the background music channel number and the selected background music is heard.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button. After confirmation tone, the station will go to idle state and the
selected background music is transferred to intercom box.

Condition
1. When lifting handset or pressing [MON] button at a station, the music is not heard.
2. When an external music is assigned, the music source should be connected to MISB or MPB.
3. The same music source can be used with MOH.
4. Press the [VOLUME] button to adjust volume while the background music is heard.
5. The BGM may be blocked in an intercom box by pressing [DND/FOR] button.

Reference
1. MOH : 2.4.17

Admin Programming
„ Background Music Type 4.4.12.1 (PGM 171 – FLEX 1)

76
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.5 Camp-on

Description
When a user calls a busy station, busy tone is heard and the user can give a signal to the busy station.
The busy station (off-hook or on speakerphone) is notified of the call waiting by a camp-on tone and
flashing LED of the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

A user of SLT(single line telephone) may notify a busy station that an outside CO call or internal call is
waiting. The busy station is notified of the call by a camp-on tone.

Operation
To activate Call Wait while receiving intercom busy tone,
1. Dial ＊or the last digit of the busy station or press the busy DSS flexible button, or flexible button
assigned as {Camp-On}.

To answer a Call Wait while receiving intercom busy tone,

1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, the active CO line is placed on exclusive hold and the call waiting
is connected. By pressing [HOLD/SAVE] button, you can talk two parties in turns.

¾ In case of SLT
To activate Call Waiting while receiving intercom busy tone,
1. Dial * or the last digit of the dialed station number.
2. Await answer to announce the call.
3. Or, replace the handset and go on-hook.

To answer the call waiting/camp-on,

1. A SLT station is busy and camp-on tone is heard.
2. Make hook-flash and dial 5 6 0(System Hold Code : see Ref.1).
3. Then the SLT station is connected to the station which made call waiting/camp-on.
4. Make hook-flash and dial 5 6 0 again, then the station is connected to the original station.

Condition
1. To assign the {Camp-On} button at a flexible button,
[TRANS/PGM] + Flex. FLEX(to be assigned) + [TRANS/ PGM] + 8 5 + [HOLD/SAVE]
2. During a conference or paging, Call Waiting is not activated.(see Ref 2, Ref 3)
3. Camp-on is not applied to a station which is in DND.(see Ref.4)
4. The attendant can override a station using Camp-on feature.(see Ref.5)
5. If the ‘Stop Camp-on Tone’(ADMIN program 112 – FLEX 15) is set to ‘ENABLE’, the camp-on tone
will not be heard.

Reference
1. System Hold Code : 3.6.7(ADMIN 106 – FLEX 20)
2. Conference : 2.7
3. Paging : 2.8
4. DND : 2.4.9

77
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

5. Attendant Override : 2.13.5

Admin Programming
„ Stop Camp-on Tone 4.1.3.15 (PGM 112 – FLEX 15)
„ Voice Over 4.1.4.6 (PGM 113 – FLEX 6) : Voice over is also applied to SLT.
„ Caller Voice Over 4.1.2.22 (PGM 111 - FLEX 22)

2.4.6 Change Ring Type

Description
The ring tone signal used to notify stations of an incoming call can be changed in ADMIN programming to
provide distinctive ringing on per CO line basis. A distinctive ring tone can be programmed for each CO
line that is used to ring each station.

FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REAMRK

T1: -
1 Ring 1 0000 - 9999 Nation specific
T2: -
T1: -
2 Ring 2 0000 - 9999 Nation specific
T2: -
T1: -
3 Ring 3 0000 – 9999 Nation specific
T2: -
T1: -
4 Ring 4 0000 – 9999 Nation specific
T2: -
(PGM 422) Button Configuration for Distinct Ring Frequency

Admin Programming
„ CO Distinct Ring 4.2.3.5 (PGM 142 – FLEX 5)
„ Ring Frequency 4.15 (PGM 422)

78
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.7 Data Line Security

Description
Once Data Line Security(ADMIN program 11 – FLEX 4) is set on an station, communication between the
station and the other party is protected from signals such as overriding, Camp-on to the station(see
Ref.1).
Modems and fax stations should usually be given this status.

[Example]
Recalling/Transferring
Attendant Overriding

X
X
Make Call
Camp-On
Data Line X
Security On

Figure 2.4.1 Data Line Security.

The figure 2.4.1 describes that the station which is set Data Line Security to ON can be protected
from Recalling, Transferring, Attendant Overriding, Camp-On.(see Ref.2, Ref.3)
Condition
1. If an analog extension (Data, Fax, Modem), which is assigned to data line security, makes an
external call via ISDN line, 3.1KHz Setup message will be sent to ISDN CO line instead of speech
Setup message.
2. If a busy station, which is assigned to data line security, receives an incoming CO call, the call is
disconnected with cause busy regardless of the DID/DISA Destination setting.

Reference
1. Camp-On : 2.4.5
2. Attendant Overriding : 2.13.5
3. Call Transfer : 2.3.2

Admin Programming
„ Data Line Security 4.1.2.4 (PGM 111 – FLEX 4)

79
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.8 Dialing Security

Description
The dialed phone number may not be displayed on the LCD of called station in calling with a speed
dial(see Ref.1).

Operation
To activate Dialing Security in calling with a speed dial
If pressing ‘＊’ button in front of the first digit in calling with a speed dial, it is operated with dialing
security.
1. Lift the Handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press [SPEED] button.
3. Press ‘*’ button.
4. Dial speed number.

Ex) in case calling with speed number 001

[SPEED] button + ‘*’ button + 001

Condition
1. Dialed phone numbers with Dialing Security are included in the SMDR information(see Ref.2).
2. This feature applies to the transferred or recalled CO calls.
3. This feature applies to Redial operation(see Ref.3).

Reference
1. Speed Dialing : 2.2.8.4, 2.2.8.5
2. SMDR : 2.12
3. Redial : 2.2.8.1, 2.2.8.2, 2.2.8.3

80
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.9 DND(Do Not Disturb)

Description
Placing a station in DND eliminates incoming outside line ringing, intercom calls, transfers and paging
announcements. While in DND, the station will not receive ring for CO lines. The Attendant can override
a station in DND(see Ref.1). Stations in DND can continue to make normal outgoing calls. Station users
can individually have the ability to place their station in DND(ADMIN program 114 – FLEX 3). By default,
DND is enabled at all stations.

Operation
To activate DND from a DKTU,
1. Press the [DND/FOR] button.

To deactivate DND from a DKTU,

1. Press the [DND/FOR] button again.

Condition
1. Pressing the [DND/FOR] button during call forward or pre-selected message, DND is not activated
and call forward or pre-selected message is released.
2. When a station, which is assigned to preset call forward, is in DND, an incoming call is received to
the next station by ring assignment(see Ref.2).
3. Attendant can override a station which is in DND by Camp-on or Intrusion(see Ref.1).
4. Attendant may cancel DND for a station or all stations.

Reference
1. Attendant Intrusion, Override : 2.13.4, 2.13.5
2. Ring Assignment : 2.1.1

Admin Programming
„ Do-Not-Disturb 4.1.2.3 (PGM 111 – FLEX 3)

81
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.10 DND - One Time DND

Description
One Time DND allows a station user to turn off muted ringing that occurs while off hook(handset or
[MON]) on another call. Useful when having an important conversation and do not wish to be disturbed
by ringing. The station, while off hook, depresses the DND button which eliminates muted ringing. When
the station goes on-hook the DND button is extinguished and DND is cancelled.

Operation
To activate One-time DND from a DKTU,
1. While off-hook state or connecting a CO line or intercom call, press the [DND/FOR] button.
2. The station is in DND. (The LED of [DND/FOR] button will light.)
3. When the station goes to idle state, DND is released in the station. (The LED of [DND/FOR] button
will be extinguished.)

Admin Programming
„ Do-Not-Disturb 4.1.2.3 (PGM 111 – FLEX 3)

82
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.11 Flash

Description
CO Flash
Provides station users with the ability to terminate an outside call or transfer a call behind a key phone
system and restore dial tone without hanging up. A [FLASH] button is located on each DKTU.
The flash type and duration time of each CO line are assigned by the system.

FLASH ON ICM CALL

This feature enables station users to utilize the [FLASH] button to terminate pages and intercom calls.
While paging or intercom call pressing the [FLASH] button will terminate the call and return intercom dial
tone.

Operation
To generate a flash while on a CO line;
1. Press the [FLASH] button.

To generate a flash while on a CO line from a SLT;

1. Press the hook-switch slightly and dial 5 5 1 (Flash Command to CO Line Code : see Ref.1).

Condition
1. The Flash command is not activated in ISDN CO line.
2. A station that isn’t permitted to access CO line cannot initiate a flash.
3. During a flash, the LED of CO line will be flashing.

Reference
1. Flash Command to CO Line Code : 3.6.7(ADMIN 106 – FLEX 11)

Admin Programming
„ Flash Type 4.2.2.7 (PGM 141 – FLEX 7)
„ CO Flash Timer 4.2.3.12 (PGM 142 - FLEX 12)
„ SLT Hook-switch Bounce Timer 4.5.3.1 (PGM 182 – FLEX 1)
„ SLT Maximum Hook-switch Flash Timer 4.5.3.2 (PGM 182 – FLEX 2)
„ SLT Minimum Hook-switch Flash Timer 4.5.3.3 (PGM 182 – FLEX 3)

83
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.12 Flexible Button

Description
Flexible buttons are customized by either ADMIN or station programming.
The list of programmable functions are summarized below:
¾ CO Line – Automatically accesses assigned line.(User Programmable)
¾ DSS/BLF – Automatically signal assigned station and provides BLF for off-hook and DND.(User
Programmable)
¾ Flexible Numbering Plan Code – Any Feature with a dialing code(Paging, Account code, Call
Park, etc) can be assigned to a flexible button. (User Programmable)
¾ Speed Dial – Automatically dials Speed Number.(System, Station, Saved Number Redial, Last
number Redial)(User Programmable)
¾ Group Access – Hunt Group pilot number.(User Programmable)
¾ Pool Group Access – Some or all outside lines can be grouped; pressing this button accesses
the highest numbered unused CO line in that group.(User Programmable)
¾ Loop – Used to answer a transferred call on l line for which a user does not have a button
assigned.(User Programmable)
¾ Station Assignment – Allows assignment of stations and complete flexibility within the system
numbering plan. A station can be assigned a number between 100-399.
¾ Telephone Number Assignment - Automatically dials outside Telephone Number.
(It can be possible LDP-6000/7000 which has 3 soft key.)
¾ 4/8 button – Feature code assign

Feature Button Feature Code

Conference 91
Call Back 92
DND/Forward 93
Flash 94
Mute 95
MON 96
Redial 97

Operation
The Flexible buttons are programmable individually at each keyset as follows;
1. DSS/BLF: Pressing the flexible button, it signals automatically the assigned station. (The LED will
light or flash in DND state.)
2. Features: Pressing the flexible button, it activates as dialing a feature code. (The LED will
illuminate.)
3. Speed Dial: Pressing the flexible button, CO line is seized and the stored phone number in the bin
is dialed.
4. POOL button: Pressing the flexible button, a CO line based on last choice or round robin in the
group is selected.
5. LOOP button: Pressing the flexible button, a CO line may be accessed
6. Telephone Number: Pressing the flexible button, it activates

Condition

84
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

1. A flexible button that is not assigned as {CO Line} button is considered as “Feature” button and is
programmable at each station. When ADMIN program 112 - FLEX 6 (CO Line Programming) is
enabled, the flexible button that is assigned as {CO line} button can be programmed.
2. To assign flexible button,
[TRANS/PGM] + Flex. BTN + [TRANS/PGM] + Feature Code + [HOLD/SAVE]
(Refer to 3.2.6: Flex Button Programming Code)
3. To assign direct button, (e.g. CO button or DSS button)
[TRANS/PGM] + Flex. BTN + Desired Code + [HOLD/SAVE]
4. To assign Telephone Number, (It can be possible LDP-6000/7000 which has 3 soft key.)
[TRANS/PGM] + Flex. BTN + [TEL NUM] + Desired Code + [HOLD/SAVE]

Admin Programming
„ Flexible Button Assignment 4.1.6 (PGM 115)
„ CO Line Programming 4.1.3.6 (PGM 112 – FLEX 6)

2.4.13 Headset

Description
An industry standard headset can be connected to a station instead of handset. The station is
programmed for headset operation in place of speakerphone operation. A user can use headset instead
of handset to make or answer a call.

Operation
To change the station mode between Speakerphone or Headset,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial code 7 5.
3. The Station Answer mode is displayed on the LCD.
4. Dial code 1 (Speaker mode) or 2 (Headset mode).

To change the Headset Ring mode,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial code 7 6.
3. The Station Answer mode is displayed on the LCD.
4. Dial code 1 (Speaker ring only), code 2 (Headset only) or 3 (Both).

Condition
1. The intercom signaling mode (HF/TN/PV – [TRANS/PGM]+1+2) can be set in headset mode keyset
as the Speakerphone mode keyset.
2. In Headset mode, user can select an incoming ring mode to hear ring with speaker, headset or both
by Admin programming.
3. The station will receive paging with speaker of the station.
4. To answer an intercom call in Tone mode, user should press the [MON] button.
5. When an intercom call is received in Privacy mode, the station will be mute state automatically. User
should press the [MUTE] button to answer the intercom call.

Admin Programming

85
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

„ Headset Ring Mode 4.1.2.10 (PGM 111 – FLEX 10)

„ Speakerphone/Headset 4.1.2.11 (PGM 111 – FLEX 11)
2.4.14 Intercom Signal Mode

Description
Users can control the method by which they receive intercom calls and signals.
stations equipped with the speakerphone can select one from the 3 signaling modes as below;

HF - Call announcing with hands free answer-back

The station user, upon hearing a tone burst and voice announcement over the speaker, can reply hands
free.

TN - Tone ringing
A standard tone ring notifies the party of an incoming intercom call. The called party answers by lifting the
handset or press [MON] button.

PV - Call announcing with privacy

The station user receives a burst of tone and a voice announcement over their speaker. The microphone
is deactivated for privacy. The called party must lift the handset or press the [MUTE] button to answer the
call.

Operation
To assign the Intercom Signal mode from a keyset,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 1 2 and confirmation tone is heard.
3. Dial the signal mode type (1 = HF/2 =TN/3 = PV).
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button and confirmation tone is heard.

Condition
1. In Message Wait/ICM Queuing/Call Transfer/ Attendant Override, the ring is received with TN mode
regardless of the assigned Intercom Signal mode(see Ref.1, Ref.2, Ref.3).
2. Intercom signal mode will not affect the voice announcements from internal/all call paging(see Ref.4).

Reference
1. Message Wait : 2.4.16
2. Call Transfer : 2.3.2
3. Attendant Override : 2.13.5
4. Paging : 2.8

86
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.15 Intercom Tenancy Group

Description
A station can be assigned to one of the Intercom Tenancy Groups. Each Intercom Tenancy Group can be
operated independently and the stations in the group can be assigned an individual CO group to use.
Maximum 15 for IP LDK-300/300E and 5 for IP LDK-100 Intercom Tenancy Groups can be assigned in
the system.

Each group can be assigned with attendant(intercom tenancy group attendant) and can be programmed
to allow or deny calls to other groups (allowed access groups). Stations in a group are allowed access to
other stations based on the allowed access of the calling group (setting with station base).

IP LDK-300/300E system supports 15(IP LDK-100 : 5) Intercom Tenancy Groups and attendants.
FLEX DEFAULT RANGE REMARK
Attendant station of assigned Intercom tenancy
1 - STA No.
group
FLEX 01-15
Intercom tenancy groups allow to access for
2 GROUP 01 (IP LDK-300/300E)
assigned group
FLEX 1-5 (IP LDK-100)

Intercom Tenancy Group 1 Intercom Tenancy Group 2

Intercom Tenancy Group 3

Figure 2.4.2 Don’t allow to access of among Intercom Tenancy Groups

The figure 2.4.2 describes that when a call to other intercom tenancy group is not allowed, CO line
call or Station call, pick-up or transfer cannot be activated and each group will be operated as
different system.

87
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Intercom Tenancy Group 1 Intercom Tenancy Group 2

Intercom Tenancy Group 3

Figure 2.4.3 Allow to access of among Intercom Tenancy Groups

The figure 2.4.3 describes that when a call to other intercom tenancy group is allowed, CO line call or
Station call, pick-up or transfer is activated.

Condition
1. When a call to other Intercom Tenancy Group is denied, pick-up cannot be activated.
2. It is not allowed to stations to have the same station numbers though they belong to different intercom
tenancy group.
3. The attendant of Intercom Tenancy Group can be any station in the system and it is not affected by
Intercom Tenancy Group access.
4. When the attendant of Intercom Tenancy Group sets Day/Night/Weekend mode, it will affect only the
Intercom Tenancy Group.

Reference
1. Pick-Up : 2.3.4

Admin Programming
„ Intercom Group Number 4.1.2.13 (PGM 111 – FLEX 13)
„ Intercom Tenancy Group 4.1.11 (PGM 120)

88
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.16 Message Wait / Call Back

Description
Message Wait
A station user can notify another station user that he wishes to talk to the user. The notified station user
can return the call or the message left on the station. when responding to the station, the user can
answer the message left on the station in sequential order. There are up to 5 messages left at one station.

Call Back
A station can initiate a call back request to busy station. Once that station becomes idle. The station that
left the call back request is signaled.

A station with a message waiting can receive a periodic audible reminder of the message waiting. This
tone is sent to stations only while idle and is presented over the speaker.

Operation
To leave a message wait to an idle station that does not answer,
1. Press the [CALLBK] button and receive confirmation tone.
2. The LED of the [CALLBK] button at the receiving station will flash.

To leave a message wait to a station in DND,

1. Press the [CALLBK] button and receive confirmation tone.
2. The LED of the [CALLBK] button at the receiving station will flash.

To answer a message wait,

1. Press the flashing [CALLBK] button.
2. The station which left the message will receive intercom ring

To leave a call back to a busy station,

1. Press the [CALLBK] button and receive confirmation tone.
2. Hang up.
3. When the receiving station hangs up the current call, the station leaving the message will receive
intercom ring.
4. When the intercom call is answered, the callback request is removed.

¾ In case of SLT
To leave a message wait,
1. Press hook-switch.
2. Dial 5 5 6(Message Wait/Callback Enable : see Ref.1).
3. Confirmation tone is heard and replace the handset.

To answer the message wait,

1. Lift the handset. (Indication tone is heard.)
2. Dial 5 5 7(Message Wait/Callback Return : see Ref.2)..
3. The station leaving the message will receive intercom ring.

To leave a call back to a busy SLT,

89
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

1. Make hook flash.

2. Dial 5 5 6 while busy tone is heard.
3. Confirmation tone is heard and replace the handset.
4. When the SLT becomes idle state, intercom ring is received.

Condition
1. The callback will ring with Tone mode regardless of intercom signaling mode(see Ref.3).
2. A station can leave only one callback or message. A new request will override the previous one.
3. Message wait data will be protected with power failure.
4. When dialing the station number instead of pressing the [CALLBK] button to answer a message wait,
the message wait will be canceled in the calling station.
5. Message wait reminder tone is programmable from 00 to 60 min. If you don’t want to present the tone,
the timer may be set to 00.
6. Message wait reminder tone is not heard at a busy station.
7. Message wait reminder tone will continue until all the messages are retrieved.
When a station attempts to leave a message at a station which has already 5 messages and one of
those is not equal to the attempting station, error tone will be heard. When VMIB access is allowed in
the station, after recording VMIB message, it turns to normal message in the station. In this case,
error tone will not be provided in the attempting station.

¾ In case of SLT
1. If a voice message is recorded in a SLT, the recorded message will be played by dialing message
wait retrieval code (5 5 7). The played message will be deleted automatically after being played.
2. When user dials 5 5 7 to retrieve voice message wait, the only one message is played. After the
first message is played, warning tone will be heard to indicate remained messages. To retrieve
another message, dial 5 5 7 again.

Reference
1. Message Wait/Callback Enable Code : 3.6.7(ADMIN 106 – FLEX 16)
2. Message Wait/Callback Enable Code : 3.6.7(ADMIN 106 – FLEX 17)
3. Intercom Signaling Mode : 2.4.14
4. DND : 2.4.9

90
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.17 MOH (Music On Hold)

Description
When a CO call is placed on hold (system, exclusive, transfer, conference, etc), the external party will
hear music. In this way, the CO line party can be notified that the connection is still established.

[Example]
IP LDK System

„ MOHU
„
„
„ „ „
„ „
„

S M M
L I P
I S B
B B
Figure 2.4.4 MOH

The figure 2.4.4 describes that MOH is supplied through various music sources.

Music can be played to any party on hold. The following music sources are available:
¾ Internal Music
¾ External Music(MPB : 1 Channel, MISB : 2 Channel)
¾ SLT MOH
¾ VMIB MOH (VMIB MOH Recording 2.4.17.2)

IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
0: Not assigned by this field. 0: Not assigned by this field.
1: Internal Music 1: Internal Music
2 - 4: External Music 2 - 4: External Music
5 - 7: VMIB MOH 5 - 6: VMIB MOH
8 - 12: SLT MOH 7 - 11: SLT MOH
13: Hold Tone 12: Hold Tone

Condition
1. Max. 13 in IP LDK-300/300E and 12 in IP LDK-100 MOH channels are supported.
2. There are one external MOH port in the MPB and two MOH ports in the MISB.
3. SLT ports connected with MOHU can provide MOH channels.
4. MOHU supports 2 MOH channels.

Reference
1. Hold : 2.3.3.1

Admin Programming

91
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

„ CO Line MOH 4.2.3.6 (PGN 142 – FLEX 6)

„ MOH Type 4.4.12.2 (PGM 171 – FLEX 2)
2.4.17.1 SLT MOH

Description
When a CO line call is placed in the hold state (system, exclusive, transfer, conference, etc), the external
party will hear music. In this way, the CO line party can be notified that the connection is still established.

IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
0: Not assigned by this field. 0: Not assigned by this field.
8 - 12: SLT MOH 7 - 11: SLT MOH
13: Hold Tone 12: Hold Tone

Operation
1. MOH Type Assign
[TRANS/PGM] + 171 + [FLEX 4] + Enter SLT Station Number. + [HOLD/SAVE]
[TRANS/PGM] + 171 + [FLEX 2] + Enter SLT Port Number.(08 ~ 12) + [HOLD/SAVE]

Condition
1. SLT ports connected with MOHU can provide MOH channels.
2. Up to 5 SLT ports can be used as MOH channel.
3. To use SLT port as a MOH channel, assign desired SLT port with MOH channel and then connect
MOHU to the SLT port.

Admin Programming
„ CO Line MOH 4.2.3.6 (PGN 142 – FLEX 6)
„ MOH Type 4.4.12.2 (PGM 171 – FLEX 2)
„ Assign SLT MOH 4.4.12.4 (PGM 171 – FLEX 4)

92
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.17.2 VMIB MOH

Description
Attendant can record VMIB MOH announcement and it can be used as the MOH source of the system.
IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
0: Not assigned by this field. 0: Not assigned by this field.
5 - 7: VMIB MOH 5 - 6: VMIB MOH
13: Hold Tone 12: Hold Tone

Operation
To set the VMIB MOH as MOH source,
1. Set the MOH type as VMIB MOH type by Admin programming.
[TRANS/PGM] + 171 + [FLEX 2] + Enter VMIB Port No.(05 ~ 07) + [HOLD/SAVE]

Condition
1. VMIB MOH message should be recorded before setting VMIB MOH as system MOH source.
2. While attendant operates system greetings and prompt including VMIB MOH, VMIB MOH is stopped.
3. When VMIB MOH is used as system MOH, 1 port of VMIB should be always reserved for MOH even
though MOH is not used.

Admin Programming
„ VMIB Slot Assignment 3.6.4 (PGM 103)
„ MOH Type 4.4.12.2 (PGM 171 – FLEX 2)

2.4.18 Mute

Description
During a conversation, if pressing the [MUTE] button, a station user can disable the handset or the
speakerphone to consult privately with others while listening to the other party on the phone through the
handset or speaker. If pressing the [MUTE] button again, it reactivates the microphone.

Operation
To mute the transmitting audio,
1. Press the [MUTE] button, and LED of the [MUTE] button is illuminated. The connected party cannot
hear the voice of muted station.

To restore transmission,
1. Press the illuminated [MUTE] button. LED of [MUTE] button is extinguished and transmission is
restored.

Condition
1. Changing from the speakerphone to handset, the mute is released.

93
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2. Selecting another DSS button, mute state will not be changed.

2.4.19 MWI (Message Wait Indication) – SLT Feature

Description
If the SLT station that has the message wait indication lamp receives message from another users, then
the lamp of SLT will flash. It indicates that it has the waiting message.

Condition
1. When lifting handset, user will hear DND warning tone for indicating message waiting.
2. When message waiting indication prompt is recorded in system greeting 097, voice announcement
will be heard instead of DND warning tone.

Admin Programming
„ Station ID Assignment 4.1.1 (PGM 110 - FLEX 1)

2.4.20 On-Hook dialing

Description
A station can make a call without lifting the handset by using a speakerphone or monitor mode.
If this feature dose not operate, check the speakerphone “able” or “enable”. the station without
speakerphone dose not operate.

Operation
When Auto Speaker Selection(ADMIN program 111 – FLEX 1) is ON,
Assign CO line/Intercom/Speed Dial to a flexible button and press the flexible button. Then it is operated
immediately.

When Auto Speaker Selection(ADMIN program 111 – FLEX 1) is OFF,

Assign CO line/Intercom/Speed Dial to a flexible button and press the flexible button. Then 'LIFT
HANDSET' is displayed on the LCD. Lift handset or press the [MON] button to operate.

Admin Programming
„ Auto Speaker Selection 4.1.2.1 (PGM 111 – FLEX 1)

94
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.21 Station Name

Description
The system will allow station users to dial station numbers by entering a name that has been
programmed for the station (intercom). Also each station may be assigned with a name up to 12
characters and speed dial (system and station) number may be assigned with a name of up to 16
characters. When the names are programmed in the digital display keyset, “NAME XXX” is displayed to
the LCD instead of Idle message ”STATION XXX” and the user may select a station or speed dial
number by the name. The user selects from one of three directories (intercom, user speed dial or system
speed dial) and enters alpha-numeric data with 2 dial pad keystrokes per character. The system finds
and displays the first matched name based on the characters stored. The user may at any point scroll
using [▲]/[▼] buttons through the names in the directory and select a name to call. If user wants to display
the matched phone number to the selected name, press [FLASH] button.

Operation
To register Station Name
[TRANS/PGM] + 74 + Enter Name(12 Characters) + [HOLD/SAVE]

Q – 11 A - 21 D – 31
Z – 12 B - 22 E - 32
. – 13 C - 23 F - 33
1 – 10 2 – 20 3 – 30

G – 41 J - 51 M – 61
H - 42 K - 52 N - 62
I - 43 L - 53 O - 63
4 – 40 5 – 50 6 – 60

P - 71 W – 91
T - 81
R - 72 X - 92
U - 82
S - 73 Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7* Z - 9#
8 – 80
7 – 70 9 – 90

*1 - Blank
*2 - : 0-00 #
*3 - ,

To access Dial by Name,

1. Press the [SPEED] button twice.
2. Dial the desired directory (1, 2, or 3) and confirmation tone is heard.
1 = Intercom / 2 = Station Speed Dial / 3 = System Speed Dial
3. The stored names in the speed bin are displayed in alphabetical order.

To search a name by entering a character,

1. While two names are displayed on the LCD, enter alpha-numeric data with 2-dial keypad strokes
per the character.
2. The LCD displays 2 names which are started with the entered character. (The cursor points to
the first name in the LCD.)

95
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

3. Entering another alpha-numeric data, then LCD will display names started with the updated input.
It will be continued until you stops entering the character.
4. When the matched name is displayed, move the cursor to the name (The cursor points to the first
name in the LCD.) and press [HOLD/SAVE] button to make a call.

To search a name by scrolling,

1. While two names are displayed on the LCD,
2. Press the [▼] key with the cursor on the first line and the cursor points to the second line on the
LCD.
3. Press the [▲] key with the cursor on the second line, then the cursor points to the first line on the
LCD.
4. Press the [▼] key with the cursor on the second line, the next two lists are displayed on the LCD.
5. When the matched name is displayed, move the cursor and press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to
make a call.

To register the name in SLT,

1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial 5 6 3( Programming Mode Enter Code : see Ref.1). And confirmation tone will be heard.
3. Dial 7 4 (Name Register code).
4. Enter the name. (Up to 7 letters; Refer to the below English Character Set)
5. Make hook-flash to save.

Condition
1. Dial by name is only available to a DKTU with LCD for programmed names.
2. The name should be registered to use 'Dial By Name'.
3. If you dial a group (I/S/U) which has no entry, error tone will be heard.
4. In SLT and DKTU with no LCD, only the station name can be entered.
5. The speed dial which has only phone number without name will not be listed by Dial By Name.
6. Pressing the [CALLBK] button, the last letter of user input is deleted and the previous matched
name is displayed. Pressing the [CALLBK] button without entering any letter, there is no action in
the system.
7. For entering alpha-numeric data, see the English Character Set.(24 Character station basis)

Reference
1. Programming Mode Enter Code : 3.6.7(ADMIN 106 – FLEX 23)

96
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.22 Station Program

Description
The system supports multiple hierarchical menus based on station programming. User can make station
programming by selecting desired menu. Attendant also can make station programming and attendant
programming with the same way. (Ref.1).

2.4.22.1 Station Program Menu

Main Menu Sub Menu Sub Menu-2 Selection Remark
[1] TYPE 1,2,3,4 DKTU
[2] ANSWER MODE H(1)/T(2)/P(3)
[1] RING
[3] SMS MSG DISPLAY
[4] ENBLOCK MODE 1:ON/0OFF
[1] COS DOWN ICM/COS7
[2] COS RESTORE ENTER AUTHO CODE
[2] COS
[3] WALKING COS ENTER AUTHO CODE
[4] COS CHANGE India Only
[1] AUTH REGISTER
[3] AUTHORIZATION [2] AUTH CHANGE
/ MOBILE-EXT [3] REG MOBILE-EXT
[4] ACTIVE MOBILE-EXT
[1] SET WAKE UP TIME ONCE/PERMANENT
[4] TIME [2] WAKE UP DISABLE
/ CONF-ROOM [3] ACTIVE CONF-ROOM
[4] DEACTIVE CONF-ROOM
[5] MESSAGE [1] SET PRESELECTED MSG 00 – 10
[2] SET CUSTOM MSG None
[1] RECORD USER GREETING
[2] LISTEN TIME / DATE
[3] LISTEN STA NUMBER
[6] ANNOUNCEMENT [4] LISTEN STA STATUS
[5] RECORD PAGE MSG
[6] ERASE USER GREETING
[7] ERASE PAGE MSG
[1] LCD DISPLAY LANGUAGE DOMESTIC/ENGLISH DKTU
[2] MPB VERSION DISPLAY
[3] BGM
2/8
[4] REGISTER STA NAME
FLEX/SLT
[7] SUPPLEMENTARY [5] SPK/HEADSET SPEAKER/HEADSET
SPEAKER/HEADSET
[6]HEADSET RING MODE
/BOTH
[7] WTU STA NUM RCVR
[8] SERIAL NUMBER
[9] PC-PHONE LOCK KEY
[0] ATTENDANT ATD ONLY

97
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

ADMIN
[*] SYSTEM [#] ENTER ADMIN
ONLY
Operation
To enter programming mode,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. You may find the following menu;(Description : 2.4.22.1)

To search other programming menu,

1. With [UP]/[DOWN] key, you can search the previous/next menu.

To select a menu,
1. Dial the number of desired menu item to select the menu.
2. If the selected menu is programming item, it enters to programming mode.
3. If there is available sub-menu, selectable menu is displayed on the LCD.

Condition
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button to move the top menu.
2. Press the [REDIAL] button to move the previous menu.
3. After a menu is programmed, the previous menu list is displayed on the LCD.
4. Pressing a flexible button in main menu mode, it enters flexible button programming mode.

Reference
1. Station Programming : 5.1.2
2. Attendant Programming : 5.1.3

98
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.23 Station Relocation

Description
The Station Relocation Feature lets a user unplug their station and plug it into another location. Dialing a
code followed by the old station number brings all the station attributes including station number, button
mapping, speed dial, and class of service(see Ref.3) to the new location.

Operation
To store the station attributes to a temporary buffer,
1. Press [TRANS/PGM] and dial * 1.
2. Unplug the station.

To retrieve stored station attributes,

1. Plugging it at another properly wired jack, press [TRANS/PGM] and dial * 2
2. The station will be relocated. Then, the all station attributes are copied to the current station.

Condition
1. All information for the port of destination station will be retained so that it may be copied or relocated
to another port.
2. It is possible for the same station type.
3. If a different station type is plugged, preprogrammed {DSS} buttons are not guaranteed.
4. DKTUs must be relocated to another digital port, DKTUs cannot be relocated to an SLT port.

Reference
1. Class of Service : 2.5.4

2.4.24 Station Serial Call

Description
With DSS flexible buttons, users can place consecutive intercom calls without the need for regaining
intercom dial tone (no need to hang-up) between calls. The user can simply press the appropriate DSS
flexible button.

Operation
To use serial calling,
1. Press the appropriate DSS flexible button, the old call is disconnected and the new call will be
established.

99
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.25 Time & Date setup by digital network

Description
In an outgoing call, the ISDN network will send time & date in CONNECT message when the called party
answers. The time & date of the system may be modified by next time & date optionally one time in a day.

Operation
To set the time & date by Digital Network,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0 4 6 and 1 (Yes).
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Condition
1. This feature may be set at Attendant station and by Admin Programming.
2. It may set time & date to default value or be useful to assign summer time.

100
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.26 Voice Over

Description
This feature provides voice announcements for a busy station without interrupting the existing
conversation. The announcement is received over the existing conversation so that only the busy station
hears both incoming parties. The user can talk back to other party and alternate conversation between
the parties.

Operation
1. A busy station is called and camped-on by a new caller(see Ref.1)
2. The busy station hears a warning tone over the current voice path.
3. The busy station is connected with both a current caller and a new caller. (the busy station can send
and receive voice to both simultaneously (both mean the current caller and the new caller), in other
words both hear the voice of the busy station simultaneously and the busy station hear the voice of
both simultaneously. But a new caller and a current caller can not send and receive voice each other).
4. The [HOLD/SAVE] LED flashes at 60 ipm.
5. Press the flashing [HOLD/SAVE] button of the busy station.
6. A current caller hears MOH if provided.
7. The busy station is connected with a new caller.
8. Alternate between calls by pressing [HOLD/SAVE] button again.

Condition
1. Placing a station in DND disables Voice over.
2. Attendant can activate Voice over for the station in DND.
3. After Voice over is activated, the calls will be dropped if Voice over master which receives voice over
request hangs up. If one party except Voice over master hangs up, the [HOLD/SAVE] LED is
extinguished and the call is connected as normal talking state preceded by confirmation tone.
4. The holding party will receive MOH if provided(see Ref.2).
5. The recall timer is not activated at Voice over state.
6. Every time Voice partner is switched, confirmation tone should be provided.
7. If a busy station’s voice channel is handset, voice over is activated via handset. It is same in the
case of speaker.
8. Voice over is operated when busy station has an allowance to receive voice –over (PGM 113 –Flex
6) and a new caller has an privilege to make voice-over (PGM 111-Flex 22).

Reference
1. Camp-On : 2.4.5
2. MOH : 2.4.17

Admin Programming
„ Voice Over 4.1.4.6 (PGM 113 – FLEX 6)
„ Caller Voice Over 4.1.2.22 (PGM 111 - FLEX 22)

101
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.27 Wakeup

Description
Each attendant or station user can set an alarm for any time as a wake-up call or reminder. This feature
can be programmed to activate only once or daily. If the user goes off-hook during the alarm, he hears
special dial tone.

Operation
To register a wake-up time from the attendant station,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0 4 2.
3. Dial the station range to be alerted, if a single station is to receive alarm, enter '＊' instead of the
second station.
4. Dial 2-digit hour and minute for alerting (24-hour mode).
5. Dial '#' for wake-up alarm until canceled, if not it is canceled automatically after the first wake-up
alarm ringing.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To cancel a wake-up alarm from the attendant,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0 4 3.
3. Dial the station range to be alerted, if a single station is to receive alarm, enter '＊' instead of the
second station.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To register wake-up time from a station,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 4 1.
3. Dial 2-digit hour and minute to for alerting.
4. Dial '#' for wake-up alarm until canceled, if not it is canceled automatically after the first wake-up
alarm ringing.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To cancel a wake-up time from a station,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 4 2.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Condition
1. If the wake-up alarm is registered at a station, '＊' is displayed in front of the present time on the LCD.
2. If the VMIB is installed, voice message for the wake-up time is heard 3 times and MOH is heard
3. If the wake-up ring is not answered for 3 times, it is canceled.
4. If system attendant dials to wake-up fail station to erase wake-up fail ring, the fail ring will disappear
with confirmation tone. But when the Wake-up Fail Ring timer expires, confirmation tone will not be
provided and just the fail ring will disappear.

102
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

5. If [Wake-up Fail Ring Timer] is 0, wake-up fail ring will not disappear automatically.
6. If [Wake-up Fail Ring Timer] is 99, the fail ring is not given to attendant station.
7. If [Wake-up Fail Ring Timer] is 1~98, after Wake-up Fail Ring Timer expires, the wake-up fail ring will
disappear automatically.
Admin Programming
„ Wake-up Fail Ring Timer 4.5.3.7 (PGM 182 - FLEX 7)

2.4.28 Extend CO-to-CO Connection

Description
When call is made between two analog CO lines by DISA or Off-net call forward, the call duration is
limited by unsupervised conference timer. After the unsupervised conference timer, the call is dropped by
LDK system. This feature enable to extend unsupervised conference time as long as the caller or
called user wanted. If this feature is activated, DTMF receiver device is assigned at both caller and
called side CO lines.

Operation
When ‘CO to CO unsupervised conference timer extend’ feature is activated, two analog CO lines on
connection hears warning tone before 15 seconds of the unsupervised conference timer expired. the
warning tone is provided to indicate the disconnection.

To extend call duration

Dial unsupervised conference timer extension code(##) and the extension time multiple digit data(1~9).
IP LDK system re-assigns the unsupervised conference timer to multiple of entered digit. For example,
the unsupervised conference timer is set to 10 minute and the entered digit is 3, then the timer is
extended to 30 minutes.

Condition
To use this feature, at least one IDLE DTMF devices must be existed.
This feature is only available at analog CO-to-CO connection by DISA or off-net call forward.

Admin Programming
„ Unsupervised Conference Timer Extend Enable 4.4.1 (PGM160 – FLEX18)
„ Unsupervised Conference Timer Extend Code 4.4.1 (PGM160 – FLEX19)
„ Unsupervised Conference Timer 4.5.3 (PGM182 – FLEX6)

103
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.29 Forced Hands free Mode

Description
A DKTU caller can make called party DKT with tone mode to answer forcibly like hands free mode.

Operation
To activate forced hands free mode
1. Call to DKT which is a tone mode.
2. When user hears a ring back tone, dial Forced hands free Code ( ‘#’ )
3. Called party DKT stop ringing and speaker and microphone are activated. (Operate as hands free
mode)

Condition
1. If Forced hands free Code(‘#’) is pushed, the connection tone is provided and the voice path is
connected.
2. If called party DKT is set a linked-pair station, this feature will be not applied.
3. If calling party DKT is set a linked-pair station, this feature will be not applied.
4. If called party DKT is set a Mobile-Ext, this feature will be not applied.
5. Only the calling party DKT of which value of PGM 111-19 is ON can use this feature.
6. After connection, related feature with hands free mode is not applied.( ex. call back ).

Admin Programming
„ Forced hands free mode enable/disable issue for Caller 4.1.2.19 (PGM111 - FLEX19)

104
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.30 Hot Desk

Description
A hot desk enables that user can dynamically select a station by login / logout operation without having a
fixed station. For a call center, marketing department people can share working place with one another.
A user can use dummy station using log-in operation. And a user log-out when station becomes useless

Operation
Login operation at dummy station
1. User off hook or press [MON] button.
2. Dial the authorization code and ‘#’ (end mark of authorization code).
3. Station restore user database (station number, COS, ring assign, etc...) and can receive incoming ring

Logout operation
1. Press [PGM] + * + * (User Logout) or press [Agent Logout] flex button.
2. User select call forward type using volume up/down key.
Supported forward type : offnet speed 000, Mobile extension, VMIB or VM group.
3. Press [HOLD] button.
4. Backup user database and station becomes to dummy station.

Condition
1. A dummy station shows “DUMMY STATION (xxx)”. (“xxx” is the physical station number)
2. A dummy station only allows login operation. all other operations are not allowed.
3. A logout operation is only allowed for dummy station which a user has logged-in.
4. Total number of user is restricted by system station capacity.
(Total number of hot-desk user = Total number of station(28 : including S0 port, two dummy port) -
Total number of station installed)
-. For example in LDK-616;
If DTIB8 is installed, the total station number installed are 16, then maximum number of hot-desk
User is 12 ( 28 – 16)

5. A hot-desk user must have their own password.

6. Saved user database are;
z Station Number
z Station Attribute (PGM 111-124)
z CO routing ( Ring Assign, DID routing )
z Hunt membership
z Voice Mail

7. If user tries to log-in to another station without log-out operation, the previous used station become to
dummy station automatically.
8. The hot-desk will be automatically log-off if the KTU does not operate any action within “Auto Log-Out
Timer”
9. The button map of hot-desk will not be changed even though he log-on to the different type of DKTU.
(Recommend to connect the same type of DKTU for Hot-Desk station due to the button map.)

105
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

10. Only DKT (has more than 12 button) and WKT can be used as a dummy station
11. Modem associated station cannot log in. (which is set at PGM [170])
12. When system reset happens, all login agents are logout automatically.

Admin Programming
„ Dummy station on / off 4.1.3 (PGM112 – FLEX23)
„ Number of agents 3.6.9 (PGM250 - FLEX1)
„ View Assigned station number of agents 3.6.9 (PGM250 - FLEX2)
„ Agent auto logout timer 3.6.9 (PGM250 - FLEX3)

106
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.31 Call Log

Description
The call log feature enables the LDP series or LKD series user to view a log of the last (15-50) incoming
and outgoing calls. The user can scroll through the list of numbers stored, select the desired number
and activate a redial to that number.

The log includes the CLI (or dialed number), the time, the date and station/system speed name of the
call, it is stored on the MPB and so is retained if the Key Station is unplugged or replaced.

The following call-logs are available: (call log list number per station: PGM160-Flex19, range15-50)
Incoming call log for the last 15-50 incoming calls
Outgoing call log for the last 15-50 outgoing calls (same as REDIAL list)
Lost call log for the CLI MSG-Waits. (In case of LD, same as CLI MSG_WAIT)

To program a flexible button as the “call log button”

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and the flexible button to be assigned.
2. Dial the Call log code (TRANS/PGM + 5 7)
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button

Operation
In case of 3 line LDP terminal,
To use Call log feature
1. Press the flexible button that has been programmed as the CALL LOG button, the following will
be displayed on the LCD: -

1. RECEIVED CALL
2. DIALED CALL
OK

To select the call type, press {UP} or {DOWN} of navigation(for LDP-7000) or Volume(for LDP-
6000) key.

3. LOST CALL
^
OK

2. Select the ‘1. RECEIVED CALL’ Menu, to view the last 15-50 numbers received. (According to
System Call log list number: PGM190-Flex19 )
Example of LCD: -

01991234567
04/11 12:50 SJPARK
BACK DELETE OK

The user can scroll through the numbers by pressing the Navigation (for LDP-7000) or Volume
(for LDP-6000) Up/Down buttons.
When the CLI of the desired number is displayed, press the OK key and the system will

107
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

establish a call to that number, or press the DELETE key and the list is deleted.

3. Select the ‘2. DIALED CALL’ Menu to view the last 15-50 numbers dialed. (According to System
Call log list number: PGM190-Flex19 ).
Example of LCD: -

01991234567
04/11 12:50 SJPARK
BACK DELETE OK

The user can scroll through the numbers by pressing the Navigation (for LDP-7000) or Volume
(for LDP-6000) Up/Down buttons.
When the desired number is displayed, press the OK key and the system will establish a call to
that number, or press the DELETE key and the list is deleted.

4. Select the ‘3. LOST CALL’ Menu to view the CLI MSG-Wait numbers; this is the same as using
the {MSG} soft key when there is a CLI MSG-Wait displayed.
Example of LCD:

123456789
04/11 12:50 CNT: 01
BACK SELECT> ANSWER

The user can scroll from ANSWER/ DELETE CURRENT/DELETE ALL/ SAVE/ NAME-TEL, by
repeatedly pressing the SELECT key.
Note that the LCD displays the number of CLI MSG-Waits for this CLI (CNT).

In case of LKD terminal,

To use Call log feature
1. Press the flexible button that has been programmed as the CALL LOG button, the following will
be displayed on the LCD: -

1. RECEIVED CALL
2. DIALED CALL

To select the call type, press {Up} or {Down} of Volume key

3. LOST CALL
^

2. Select the ‘1. RECEIVED CALL’ Menu, to view the last 15-50 numbers received. (According to
System Call log list number: PGM190-Flex19 )
Example of LCD: -

01991234567
04/11 12:50 SJPARK

The user can scroll through the numbers by pressing the Volume Up/Down buttons.
When the CLI of the desired number is displayed, press the {HOLD} key and the system will
establish a call to that number, or press the {SPEED} key and the list is deleted.

3. Select the ‘2. DIALED CALL’ Menu to view the last 15-50 numbers dialed. (According to System

108
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Call log list number: PGM190-Flex19 ).

Example of LCD: -
01991234567
04/11 12:50 SJPARK
The user can scroll through the numbers by pressing the Volume Up/Down buttons.
When the CLI of the desired number is displayed, press the {HOLD} key and the system will
establish a call to that number, or press the {SPEED} key and the list is deleted..

4. Select the ‘3. LOST CALL’ Menu to view the CLI MSG-Wait numbers; this is the same as using
the CLI MSG-Wait feature.
Example of LCD:

123456789
04/11 12:50 CNT: 01

Note that the LCD displays the number of CLI MSG-Waits for this CLI (CNT).

In case of LDP-LD terminal,

To use Call log feature
1. Press the flexible button that has been programmed as the CALL LOG button, the following will
be displayed on the LCD:
Example of LCD: -

1. RECEIVED CALL
2. DIALED CALL
3. LOST CALL

OK

select the call type, press {UP} or {DOWN}of navigation key

2. Select DIALED CALLS to view the last 15-50 numbers dialed, the LCD will list the last 15-50
dialed numbers (this is the same as pressing the REDIAL button when in the normal on-hook
state).
Example of LCD: -

DIALLED CALLS
111111111
22222222
33333333
44444444

BACK DETAIL SEND

The user can select the desired number and press SEND to establish a call to that number or
press DETAIL to display the time and date of the selected call before pressing SEND.

DIALLED CALL -01

14/12 12:00
SJPARK
11111111

109
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

BACK DELETE SEND

The user can press DELETE to delete a list.
3. Select RECEIVED CALLS to view the last 15-50 numbers received, the LCD will list the last 15-
50 CLI numbers received.
Example of LCD: -

RECEIVED CALLS
12345678
23456789

BACK DETAIL SEND

The user can select the desired number and press SEND to establish a call to that number or
press DETAIL to display the time and date of the selected call before pressing SEND.

RECEIVED CALL -01

14/12 12:00
SJPARK
12345678

BACK DELETE SEND

The user can press DELETE to delete a list

4. Select the ‘3. LOST CALL’ Menu to view the CLI MSG-Wait numbers; this is the same as using
the {MSG} soft key when there is a CLI MSG-Wait displayed.
Example of LCD:

LOST CALL
12345678
23456789

BACK DETAIL SEND

The user can select the desired number and press SEND to establish a call to that number or
press DETAIL to display the time and date of the selected call before pressing SEND.

LOST CALL
12345678
23456789

123456789
04/11 12:50 CNT: 01
BACK SELECT> ANSWER

110
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

The user can scroll from ANSWER/ DELETE CURRENT/DELETE ALL/ SAVE/ NAME-TEL, by
repeatedly pressing the SELECT key.
Note that the LCD displays the number of CLI MSG-Waits for this CLI (CNT).
Condition
1. To use this feature, a user should program ‘Call Log button’ in flexible button.
2. A user can program ‘Call log list number’ per station. (PGM160-Flex19, Range 15-50)
3. In case a user program ‘call log list number’, all call log database will be initialized.
4. Maximum call log list per system is ‘5000’ for IP LDK-300, ‘10000’ for IP LDK-600, ‘2000’ for IP LDK-
100.
5. The system assigns the call log list from the physical port 1 in order.
6. Must enable CLI MSG-Wait for the LOST call log.

Admin Programming
„ CLI MSG-Wait 4.1.5 (PGM 114 - FLEX4)
„ Call Log list Number 4.4.1 (PGM160 - FLEX19)

2.4.32 In-Room Indication

Description
A supervisor press In-Room Indication button and [HOLD/SAVE] button at the idle state. Then each
LED of In-Room Indication buttons of every members turned ON.
10 groups can be programmed. Each group has at most 20 members excluding Supervisor.

To program a flexible button as the “In-Room Indication button”

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and the flexible button to be assigned.
2. Dial the code (TRANS/PGM + *8 )
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Operation
To Active or Deactivate In-Room Ind button,
1. Check if Supervisor station is the idle state and In-Room Ind button is programmed.
2. Press In-Room Ind button and press [HOLD/SAVE button].

Condition
1. If Supervisor station is not Idle, In-Room Ind button does not work.
2. If a station press the In-Room Ind button but the station is not supervisor, an error tone is heard.
3. If [HOLD/SAVE] button is not pressed within 5 seconds after In-Room Ind button pressed, the station
goes back to the Idle state.

Admin Programming
„ In-Room Indication Supervisor 4.4.22.1(PGM183 – FLEX1)
„ In-Room Indication Member 4.4.22.2(PGM183 – FLEX2)

111
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.33 Chime Bell

Description
If Chime Bell Activate Station press Chime Bell button, Chime Bell Receive Station starts to ring.

To program a flexible button as the “Chime Bell button”

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and the flexible button to be assigned.
2. Dial the code (TRANS/PGM + *9 )
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Operation
To Active or Chime Bell,
1. Press Chime Bell button at the Chime Bell Activate station

Condition
1. The ring stops when Chime Bell Timer expires.
2. Chime Bell Ring Cannot be answered.
3. If Chime Bell Receive station is busy or Off-Hook state, the station gets Mute ring instead.
4. Max 100 pairs can be assigned at IP LDK-300/300E.(50 at IP LDK-100).

Admin Programming
„ Chime Bell Station Pair 4.4.23.1(PGM184 – FLEX1)
„ Chime Bell Relay 4.4.23.2(PGM184 – FLEX2)
„ Chime Bell Timer 4.4.23.3(PGM184 – FLEX3)
„ Chime Bell Frequency 4.4.23.4(PGM184 – FLEX4)

112
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.4.34 Emergency Intrusion

Description
If Emergency Supervisor Station calls other station and the Supervisor is heard busy tone, the Supervisor
can dial Emergency Intrusion code and makes conversation directly with the called station.

Operation
To activate Emergency Intrusion,
1. Just dial Emergency Intrusion code ‘#’ while listening busy tone.

Condition
1. Emergency Intrusion call is only possible when calling station is set to Emergency Supervisor.
2. If the station was talking to other station or CO line, the call is disconnected when the station
receives Emergency Intrusion call.
3. The busy station is connected to Emergency supervisor only after short indication with beep tone.
4. Emergency Intrusion call is not possible to a station in DND state.
5. Emergency Intrusion call is not possible to attendant.
6. Emergency Intrusion call is not possible to Net DSS.
7. Emergency supervisor is connected to Master station of Linked pair if both of Master and Slave are
busy.
8. Emergency supervisor is connected to Secretary station instead of Executive station.

Admin Programming
„ Emergency Supervisor 4.1.3.24 (PGM 112 – FLEX 24)

113
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.5 Call Barring Feature

2.5.1 Account Code

Description
An account code is used to identify outgoing call for accounting and billing purposes, the account code is
appended to SMDR Call record. So company use account code for each station user so that the
company can determine what calls were made for station users, and can submit a bill to the station users
according to the station user’s account code on the SMDR call record.
An account code may use the digits “0” through “11”(Maximum 12).

Operation
1. An account code is used to identify outgoing call for accounting and billing purposes, the account
code is Press the {ACCOUNT CODE} flexible button.
2. Dial the account code (max. 12 digits) or mark ＊, then reconnected to the external party.
3. Intercom dial tone is heard.
4. Seize a CO line to make a call.

To enter an account code during a conversation with an external party;

1. Press the {ACCOUNT CODE} flexible button.
2. Dial the account code (max. 12 digits).
3. Press the {ACCOUNT CODE} flexible button, the user is reconnected to the external party.

To enter an account code without {ACCOUNT CODE} flexible button during a conversation with an
external party,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 5 5 0(SMDR Account Enter Code : see Ref.1).
3. Dial the account code (maximum 12 digits) or mark ＊, then reconnected to the external party.

Condition
1. For DKTUs, you may assign a flexible button as {ACCOUNT CODE} to access the account code
feature.
[TRANS/PGM] + Flex. BTN + [TRANS/PGM] + 8 0 + [HOLD/SAVE]
2. While entering account code, it is impossible to talk to the other party.
3. The user may enter the account code before a call conversation is established.

Reference
1. SMDR Account Enter Code : 3.6.7(ADMIN 106 – FLEX 10)

114
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.5.2 Authorization Code

Description
When a station user can make a CO line call, if the station is programmed to enter the authorization code
by ADMIN programming, the authorization code must be entered. An authorization code must be
assigned through ADMIN programming.

An authorization code can be used for SMDR, a DISA account code.

If a third party discovers the personal authorization code, there will be a risk that they will make
fraudulent phone calls using the telephone, and the cost will be charged to your account. In order to
avoid this problem, 1) specify a complicated authorization code as random as you can make it, 2) change
the authorization code frequently.

An authorization code is assigned from 3 digits to 11 digits flexibly. It can not be duplicated.
The following table is the available number of authorization code according to the system;

IP LDK-100 IP LDK-300 IP LDK-300E

001-500 0001-1000 0001-2000

Operation
To access a CO line when authorization codes are required,
1. Attempt a CO line access, and DND warning tone is heard.
2. Enter the authorization code and ‘#’ (end mark of authorization code).
3. If valid, the CO line is connected and if not valid, you will hear error tone.

Condition
1. The same authorization code cannot be assigned.
2. To register the authorization code in a station,
[TRANS/PGM] + 3 1 + authorization code + [HOLD/SAVE]
3. To change the authorization code in a station,
[TRANS/PGM] + 3 2 + current authorization code + ‘#’ + new authorization code +
[HOLD/SAVE]
4. If Loop LCR ACNT is set about a station, the authorization code is required when the station dials
Loop LCR CO Access code(see Ref.1).

Reference
1. LCR : 2.2.7

Admin Programming
„ Authorization Code 4.11.1 (PGM 227)
„ DISA Account Code 4.2.2.3 (PGM 141 – FLEX 3)
„ CO Line Group Account 4.2.2.9 (PGM 141 – FLEX 9)

115
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

„ Loop LCR Account Code 4.1.2.16 (PGM111 – FLEX 16)

2.5.3 Automatic Call Release

Description
When a station does not initiate dialing on an outgoing CO line or receive no answer on an intercom call,
the system will return the CO line or the called station to idle based on the assigned Auto Release
Timer(ADMIN program 180 – FLEX 14). If on the speaker phone or monitor mode, the station will return
to idle, otherwise the station will receive error tone if using the handset.

Condition
1. Intercom call in H/P mode(see Ref.1) is regarded that it is answered and Station Auto Release is not
activated.
2. When the Automatic Release time is assigned to 0, Auto Call Release is not activated.
3. While making a call without lifting handset and Auto Release timer is expired, the call is canceled and
the station will go idle state automatically.
4. While making a call with lifting handset and the Auto Release timer is expired, the call is canceled and
the station will receive error tone.

Reference
1. Intercom Signal Mode : 2.4.14

Admin Programming
„ Automatic CO Release Timer 4.5.1.14 (PGM 180 – FLEX 14)
„ Station Auto Release Timer 4.5.3.5 (PGM 182 – FLEX 5)

116
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.5.4 COS (Class Of Service)

Description
Each station and CO line may be assigned to have different class to allow or restrict call service. The
level of COS assignments are programmed to each station and CO line. Applied dialing restrictions are
the result of the interaction of COS assignments as shown below.

¾ Class of service

CO Line COS
1 2 3 4 5
Canned
1 Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted
Restricted
Unrestricted Canned
2 Table A Table A Unrestricted
Restricted
Canned
S 3 Table B Unrestricted Table B Unrestricted
Restricted
T
Canned
A 4 Table A,B Table A Table B Unrestricted
Restricted
C Canned Canned Canned Canned
5 Unrestricted
O Restricted2 Restricted2 Restricted2 Restricted2
S Canned Canned Canned Canned
6 Unrestricted
Restricted1 Restricted1 Restricted1 Restricted1
Intercom Intercom
7 Intercom Only Intercom Only Intercom Only
Only Only
Table C Table C Unrestricted Canned
8 Unrestricted
Restricted
Table D Table D Unrestricted Canned
9 Unrestricted
Restricted
z Canned, Restricted1 : Long distance call is not allowed.(allows 7 digits dialing maximum)
z Canned, Restricted2 : Long distance call is not allowed.
(The dialed digits can be longer then 7 digits)

¾ Station COS
COS 1 There is no restriction to dial.
COS 2 Monitored by Exception Table A
COS 3 Monitored by Exception Table B
COS 4 Monitored by Exception Table A & B
COS 5 Long distance call is not allowed. (The dialed digits can be longer than 8 digits.)
COS 6 Long distance call is not allowed.
Only max. 8 digits may be dialed.
COS 7 Only intercom, paging and emergency call are allowed. No dialing allowed on CO lines.
COS 8 Monitored by Exception Table C

117
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

COS 9 Monitored by Exception Table D

¾ CO COS
COS 1 There is no restriction. Monitored by STA COS.
COS 2 Monitored by Exception Table A & STA COS 2/4.
COS 3 Monitored by Exception Table B & STA COS 2/4.
COS 4 Long distance call is not allowed for all STA COS. Max. 8 digits may be dialed.
COS 5 Overrides STA COS 2,3,4,5,6. (No COS restriction)

¾ CO to CO line COS
COS 1 There is no restriction to dial.
COS 2 Monitored by Exception Table A
COS 3 Monitored by Exception Table B
COS 4 Monitored by Exception Table A & B
COS 5 Long distance call is not allowed. (The dialed digits can be longer than 8 digits.)
COS 6 Long distance call is not allowed. Only max. 8 digits may be dialed.
COS 7 Only intercom, paging and emergency call are allowed. No dialing allowed on CO lines.
COS 8 Monitored by Exception Table C
COS 9 Monitored by Exception Table D

¾ PBX Dialing Codes

There are 5 PBX access codes (2 digits) to enter the system and access a CO line via PBX. A CO line
marked as a PBX line will not be governed by any station or CO line COS until a recognized PBX code
is dialed.

¾ Exception Table A & B

There are two exception tables with COS. Each table has 20 allow codes and 10 deny codes and a
code may have eight entries.

Condition
1. Rule of COS
① In STA COS 7, no dialing is allowed to CO line.
② In CO COS 5, STA COS 1~6 is ignored and there is no restriction to access CO line.
③ In CO COS 4, STA COS 1~6 is ignored. The long distance call is not allowed and max. 7 digits
may be dialed.
④ In CO COS 1, it is restricted by STA COS.
⑤ In CO COS 2 and STA COS 2/4, it is restricted by Exception Table A. There is no restriction in
STA COS 1/3. In STA COS 5, long distance call is not allowed and max. 7 digits can be dialed.

2. Rule of CO line Allow/Deny Restriction

① If there is no entries, no restriction is provided by the table.
② If there are entries in the Deny table, then restriction is on a 'Deny Only' basis.
③ If there are entries in the Allow table, then restriction is on a 'Allow Only' basis.
④ If there are entries in both the Allow and Deny Tables, the Allow Table is searched, if the dialed
number matches an entry in the Allow Table, the call is allowed. If a match is not found the Deny
Table is searched and, if a match is found in the Deny Table, the number is restricted otherwise,

118
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

the number is allowed.

3. General Conditions
If ‘Incoming CO Call Toll Check’ is set, the COS rule is applied when the station dials digits after
answering the incoming CO call.
Admin Programming
„ Station COS 4.1.7 (PGM 116)
„ CO line COS 4.2.2.2 (PGM 141 – FLEX 2)
„ CO to CO COS 4.4.7 (PGM 166)
„ Toll Exception Table 4.10.1 (PGM 224)
„ Canned Toll Exception Tables 4.10.2 (PGM 225)
„ Incoming Toll Check 4.4.2.16 (PGM 161 – FLEX 16)

2.5.5 System Speed Zone

Description
Up to 10 speed number zones can be defined. Speed bins & stations can be allocated to these zones.
Toll checks based on COS can be applied to zones(see Ref.1). Only stations allocated to zones can
access these bins. Speed bins not allocated to zones can be accessed by all stations and no toll checks
are applied

Reference
1. COS : 2.5.4

Admin Programming
„ Speed Dial Access 4.1.3.9 (PGM 112 – FLEX 9)
„ System Speed Zone Range 4.11.5.1 (PGM 232)
„ System Speed Zone Access 4.11.5.2 (PGM 232)
„ CO Dial Tone Detect 4.4.1.6 (PGM 160 – FLEX 6)

119
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.5.6 Walking COS

Description
This feature allows to temporarily override toll restriction and makes a toll call from toll restricted phone. It
is activated by entering a feature code or pressing programmed {Walking COS} flexible button and the
authorization code before accessing a CO line. The authorization code(see Ref.1) can be used as a
verified account code for SMDR(see Ref.2).

Operation
To activate this feature from a DKTU,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 2 3.
3. Confirmation tone will be heard and enter the authorization code.
4. If the authorization code is accorded, intercom dial tone will be heard. (At this time, the used
extension COS(see Ref.3) is changed to the station’s COS that is accorded to the entered
authorization code temporarily.)
5. You can place a CO line call only one time.

Condition
1. To program {Walking COS} flexible button,
[TRANS/PGM] + Flex. BTN + [TRANS/PGM] + 2 3 + [HOLD/SAVE]
2. This feature can be used at DKTU and SLT.
3. This feature is available for only one time. While you are activating this feature, if you hang up or
press the [TRANS/PGM] button to hold the call and seize other line, then the COS of station used is
recovered to original COS.
4. When you dialed wrong number, press the [FLASH] button to dial again without changing CO line.
5. The fee for a call with Walking COS will be charged to the station which is accorded to the
authorization code, not the actual using station.
6. When a user tries to make Walking COS to a station which is set to COS 7 with temporary COS, COS
of the call will follow the original COS of the station.

Reference
1. Authorization : 2.5.2
2. SMDR : 2.12
3. COS : 2.5.4

Admin Programming
„ Authorization Code 4.11.1 (PGM 227)

120
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.6 Hunt Group

Description
Stations can be grouped so that incoming calls may be routed to an idle station in the group.
The number of Hunt group and the number of station in a group as follows;

Model Hunt Group Station in a Hunt Group

IP LDK-300 48 64
IP LDK-100 15 32
IP LDK-300E 48 64

Several VMIB announcements may be provided to the Hunt group. If a call is not answered until the 1st
Announcement Timer expires. The second announcement will be provided if the call continues to wait
beyond the queue to the 2nd Announcement Timer. The second announcement may be repeated until
the call is answered or disconnected by user’s choice.

Hunt group may be assigned as one of the following 5 types;

These Types are described in detail below.
A call is routed to hunt group. If first destination is unavailable or unanswered, the
Circular
call is routed to the next station in the group.
If the call is unanswered or unavailable, it is directed to the next listed station in the
Terminal
group. The call will continue to be routed until reaching the last station in the group.
UCD
(Unified Call Calls are routed to the station in the group that has been idle for the longest time.
Distribution)
All stations in the group will receive ring for a call of Hunt group when a call is
Ring
received.
VM This group is assigned for Voice Mail and only SLT is assigned as the member of
(Voice Mail) the VM group.

2.6.1 Common features for Hunt Group

The common features for hunt group are as followings:

[ VMIB announcement ]
IP LDK system supports first and secondary VMIB announcements for hunt group. When a call is
arrived to hunt group, pre-assigned VMIB announcement will be played to the caller, if VMIB
announcement is set and its timer is expired. Furthermore if the call is not answered until second
announcement timer is expired, this announcement will be played. Also, this secondary announcement
can be repeated as its programming.(see Ref.1)

[ Overflow destination ]
If overflow timer is expired and nobody answers a call, the call will be diverted to overflow destination.
This overflow destination can be a extension, a group, VMIB announcement, and system speed.

121
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

[ Wrap-up Timer ]
When a member of hunt group goes to idle, IP LDK system will not give a call to that member. After
wrap-up timer goes, the member goes to real idle state which can serve a hunt call.
[ Music source ]
IP LDK system supports 12 kinds of music source for hunt group instead of ring back tone. When a call
goes to queue, a caller will hear any music source which is pre-assigned. (see Ref.2)

[ Multiple member assignment ]

A station can be a member of one or more hunt groups. But a kind of hunt groups which a member
belongs to should be same.

[ Hunt Call DND(Do Not Disturb) ]

Hunt Call can receive or cannot receive by Hunt DND feature. This feature is applied to Circular /
Terminal / Ring / UCD group.

Condition
1. A station can be a member of plural Hunt groups and the group should be the same type of Hunt
group.
2. A station in DND/Forward state will not receive group call.
3. Transferred ring to Hunt group is not recalled.
4. When a call is received in a Hunt group, the call will be in the ring process before receiving the
announcement for Hunt group Announcement time. If no Hunt group announcement is assigned, the
timer is ignored. If the timer is set to 0, the call will receive the announcement prior to the ring
process.
5. When a Hunt group has guaranteed announcement (the 1st announcement timer is set to 0),
Overflow timer is stated and ring is provided after the announcement is completely played.
6. Only the 1st announcement may be used for guaranteed announcement.
7. If all stations in the group are busy when a call is received, the call continues to wait for an available
station in the group. If queued, the call may be sent to MOH until the call is answered or
disconnected.
8. If there is no available member in a group because every member sets DND, UCD DND, or call
forward, all new calls to the group and all queued calls in the group are rerouted to another
destination. One of the following is determined as to destination in the listed order;
a. Overflow destination if assigned.
b. Alternative destination if the group is UCD group and it is assigned.
9. If a call is not answered until Overflow Timer expires, it will be sent to overflow destination while the
VMIB announcement is being played.
10. If overflow destination is not assigned, the call will be dropped when overflow timer expires.
11. If an Announcement Timer is set and no VMIB number is assigned, the announcement is ignored.
12. When the number of queued incoming calls are over the pre-defined in UCD group, the incoming
CO calls will be dropped. If alternative destination is set and all members are busy, incoming calls
are not queued. All calls are routed to alternative destination. If overflow destination is programmed,
the queued call is re-routed to overflow destination after overflow timer is expired.
13. Pick-up Hunt group is for only intercom call.
14. ISDN phone can be a member of Hunt group. But, it only works for answering a hunt call.
15. ISDN phone can not be the first hunt group member. And two number entrance for one ISDN phone
does not permit.

Reference
1. Recording System VMIB Announcement : 2.11.1
2. ICM Box Music Selection : 2.13.10

122
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Admin Programming
„ Hunt group Assign 4.7.1 (PGM 190)
„ Hunt group Attribute 4.7.2 (PGM 191)
2.6.2 Terminal Group

Calls to a station in the group or a pilot number will go to the first station in the group. If unanswered or
unavailable, the call proceeds to the next listed station in the group. The call will continue to be rerouted
until reaching the last station in the group where the call will remain or can be sent to an overflow
station/group. A terminal Hunt group can be assigned with a pilot number (Hunt group number) and only
calls to the pilot number will hunt.
The member of Terminal group can assign DND. The station assigned HUNT-DND will not receive ring.
To assign HUNT-DND button,
[TRANS/PGM] + Flex. BTN + [TRANS/PGM] + 8 7 + Hunt Group No. + [HOLD/SAVE]

[Example]

CO
LINE 1 STA111
Hunt Group Call
(1st)
STA112

STA110
CO Hunt Group Call
LINE 2 (2nd) STA113

STA115

STA114

Figure 2.6.1 Terminal Group

123
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.6.3 Circular Group

In Circular Hunt, calls to a station in the group or a pilot number will go to the station or an idle station in
the group. If unavailable or unanswered in the hunt no answer time, the call is directed to the next
station in the group. The call will continue to route until each station in the group has been tried. The call
will remain at the last station in the group or will be passed to the assigned overflow station or the
assigned overflow group. A circular Hunt group can be assigned with a pilot number (Hunt group
number) and only calls to the pilot number will hunt.
The member of Circular group can assign DND. The station assigned HUNT-DND will not receive ring.
To assign HUNT-DND button,
[TRANS/PGM] + Flex. BTN + [TRANS/PGM] + 8 7 + Hunt Group No. + [HOLD/SAVE]

[Example]

Hunt Group Call

CO (2nd)
LINE 2 STA111

STA112

Hunt Group Call

STA110
(1st)
CO
LINE 1 STA113

STA115

STA114

Figure 2.6.2 Circular Group

124
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.6.4 Ring Group

All the stations in the group receive ring simultaneously for a call of Hunt group until one of stations
received ring answers the call. If call is not answered until overflow timer, it will be sent to an overflow
destination, if assigned.
The member of RING group can assign DND. The station assigned HUNT-DND will not receive ring.
To assign HUNT-DND button,
[TRANS/PGM] + Flex. BTN + [TRANS/PGM] + 8 7 + Hunt Group No. + [HOLD/SAVE]

[Example]

CO
LINE 1 Hunt Group Call
(1st) STA111

STA112

Hunt Group Call

CO (2nd) STA110
LINE 2 STA113

Hunt Group Call STA115

(3rd) STA114
CO
LINE 3

Figure 2.6.3 Ring Group

2.6.5 Voice Mail Group

This group is assigned for voice mail and only SLT can be assigned as a member of Hunt group. Calling
VM group, the system will search an idle member in the calling VM group with Terminal type or Circular
type.

125
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.6.6 UCD Group(Unified Call Distribution Group)

Calls are sent to the group by dialing the pilot number (Hunt group Number) or assigning CO lines to
directly terminate to the group. Calls are directed to the station in the group that has been idle for the
longest time. If all stations in the group are busy when a call is received for the group, the call may be
routed to an alternate location, or may continue to wait (queue) for an available station in the group.
Based on programming, the queued call may be taken out of the group and directed to an overflow
station.
The member of UCD group can assign DND. The station assigned UCD-DND will not receive ring.
To assign UCD-DND button,
[TRANS/PGM] + Flex. BTN + [TRANS/PGM] + 8 7 + Hunt Group No. + [HOLD/SAVE]

* Note: Do not make a loop with UCD group alternative destination.

[Example]

CO
Hunt Group Call
LINE 1 (1st) STA111

STA112

STA110
CO Hunt Group Call
LINE 2 (2nd) STA113

STA115

STA114
CO
LINE 3 Hunt Group Call
(3rd)

Figure 2.6.4 UCD Group

Condition
1. IP LDK system supports the VMIB announcements for hunt group. And when a call is arrived to
secondary VMIB announcements, caller can be connected another station by the entered number
with CCR service. (PGM 228)

126
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.6.7 ACD (Automatic Call Distribution)

Description
A separate supervisor or common supervisor can be assigned in UCD group. And, the supervisor can
monitor the status of the group. When a call is queued to a group for longer than a predefined time or
when a predefined number of calls are queued, the supervisor's LCD will indicate the number of calls in
queue, and the queued time for the longest queue. The supervisor can change overflow destination and
timing. The system will provide traffic (see Ref.1) and on line status reports, based on the supervisor's
request for the UCD group including the following group statistics:
- Total calls
- Number of unanswered calls
- Average and the longest queued calls
- Number and total time when all agents are busy
- Average ringing time before answer
- Average service time after answer

ACD Supervisor can activate two way recording when monitoring agent’s conversation.
Queue Information of Queuing Call count is automatically displayed at Supervisor LCD as well as Agent
LCD.

Operation
To monitor an agent's conversation at ACD supervisor,
1. Call the busy agent and receive busy tone.
2. Press {ACD} flexible button.
3. The supervisor can monitor the agent, but will not send audio to the agent.

To Record an agent's conversation at ACD supervisor,

1. Call the busy agent and receive busy tone.
2. Press {ACD} flexible button.
3. The supervisor can monitor the agent, but will not send audio to the agent.
4. Supervisor press [Two Way Recording] button.
5. When Two way record is stopped, recorded VMIB message is leaved at supervisor station.

To reroute the queuing call,

1. Dial ACD Reroute Code.
2. Dial a station number to receive the queued call.
3. Then the queued call will be routing to another station.

To report ACD status,

1. Press the {ACD} flexible button.
2. Dial ACD Status Feature code.
(1-Status / 2-Database / 3-Duty / #-Print)
In the Status mode, the supervisor can initialize the group statistics by pressing the [MUTE] button.

Condition
1. The supervisor should assign a flexible button for {ACD}.
[TRANS/PGM] + Flex. BTN + [TRANS/PGM] + 8＊ + ACD Group No + [HOLD/SAVE]
2. The user can see the group status by ACD supervisor or by printing periodically to RS-232C print.
3. To print ACD statistics periodically, set the ACD Print Timer (PGM 161-FLEX 10: 10sec base).

127
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

4. The agents can also print and view the ACD statistics as the supervisor.
5. The agent can login and logout using Hot Desk feature.
Reference
1. Traffic Analysis : 2.18

Admin Programming
„ Hunt group Assign 4.7.1 (PGM 190)
„ Hunt group Program 4.7.2 (PGM 191)
„ ACD Print Enable 4.4.2.9 (PGM 161 – FLEX 9)
„ ACD Print Timer 4.4.2.10 (PGM 161 – FLEX 10)
„ ACD Clear Database after Print 4.4.2.11 (PGM 161 – FLEX 11)

128
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.7 Conference Feature

Description
A station user(Supervisor) can make a call with intercom stations and CO Lines. Supervisor invite station
user or CO Line user one by one with [CONF] button. Connected users can speak and hear with each
other at the same time.
In Multi-Line conference, Max. 15 parties(intercom/CO Line) can enter a conference. Max. 14 CO Lines
can be have a conference with one intercom station.
Unsupervised Conference is that leaved members are still preserve conference status, though the
conference initiator(supervisor) may exit a conference.

Conference Type Description

Conference A station user can make a call with internal STA and CO lines.
In Multi-line conference, max. 14 CO lines can make a conference with
Multi Line Conference
one internal party.
In unsupervised conference, it is restricted to Unsupervised Conference
Unsupervised Conference
timer if there is no internal station in the conference. (Default: 10min)
It is possible for the second originator to page with the first originator
Paging Conference
during the paging announcement.

[Add On Conference] [Multi Line Conference]

Supervisor Supervisor
CO
CO
or
or

CO
CO
or or or
or
CO CO

Figure 2.7.1 Add On Conference Figure 2.7.2 Multi Line Conference

Operation
To establish an Add-on Conference,
1. With established the first call, press the [CONF] button. The existing call is on hold and intercom
dial tone is heard.
2. Make a call to internal party.
3. When answered, press the [CONF] button.
4. When all parties have been called, press the [CONF] button again. And all parties can converse.

To make a Multi-line Conference,

1. With established the first call with a CO line, press the [CONF] button. The existing call is on hold

129
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

and intercom dial tone is heard.

2. Place a call to an external party.
3. When answered, press the [CONF] button.
4. When all parties have been called, press the [CONF] button again. And all parties can converse.

To make Unsupervised Conference,

1. During a conference, press the [CONF] button in supervisor.
2. The conference is still connected and the LED of [CONF] button of supervisor is flashing.
3. To re-enter the conference, lift handset and flashing [CONF] button in supervisor.

Condition
1. In unsupervised conference, it is restricted to Unsupervised Conference timer if there is no internal
station in the conference. (Default: 10min.)
2. The Unsupervised Conference timer will be reset if the internal party re-enters the conference.
3. Max. 15 parties (internal/external) can enter a conference, but the voice level will be decreased when
a member joins the conference.
4. In Multi-line conference, max. 14 CO lines can make a conference with one internal party.
5. If the supervisor in a conference receives error or busy tone from the internal party while making a
conference, he can receive intercom dial tone again by pressing the [CONF] button.

Admin Programming
„ Unsupervised Conference Timer 4.5.3.6 (PGM 182 – FLEX 6)
„ Multi-line Conference 4.4.1.9 (PGM 160 – FLEX 9)

2.7.1 Conference – SLT (BROKERS Call)

Description
A single line telephone user can initiate a 3-way conference with any combination of CO line or internal
users.
A single line telephone user can alternate between two calls maintaining private conversations with both
parties. The parties may be either internal (stations connected to the system) or external CO line calls,
and may be incoming or outgoing.

Operation
To set up a conference from SLT,
1. Make the first call.
2. Press and release hook switch and intercom dial tone will be heard. The existing call is placed on
exclusive hold and the recall timer is activated.
3. Place the second call and announce conference.
4. Press and release hook switch and you will be connected to the first call.
5. Within 2 seconds, press hook switch to establish a conference.

Condition
1. If you make hook-flash after 2 seconds, brokers call will be initiated.

130
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.7.2 Paging Conference

Description
During the Paging by conference page zone(at this manual, Paging means broadcast to pre-assigned
destination), second originator can page with first originator together. It is possible for any paged station
user to be the second page originator by off-hook and pressing the [CONF] button. If SLT user, make
Hook flash and dial conference join code(58).

At that time, if another second page originator exist, then the previous second originator goes to idle
status and the new second originator can page with the first originator.

Operation
During the conference Page is being activated

Keyset user.
Lift handset and press [CONF] button.

SLT user.
Lift handset to answer the page.
Hook flash and dial conference page join code(58).

Condition
1. Page Timer is not applied to Paging Conference Group.
2. If there is the second page originator, it is impossible to “Meet Me Page”.
3. If the first originator goes on-hook, the conference group paging connection is released.
4. The second originator can make paging regardless of page access privilege.

Admin Programming
„ Paging Warning Tone 4.4.2.4 (PGM 161 – FLEX 4)
„ Paging Access 4.1.2.8 (PGM 111 – FLEX 8)
„ Conference Page Zone 4.1.10 (PGM 119)
„ SLT Conference Page Join Code. 3.6.7 (PGM109-FLEX 5)

131
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.7.3 Conference Room

Description
This feature allows internal users or CO callers to join a conference without being invited by the
conference supervisor. This conference feature has the conference join codes, and each conference
room has an own join code (room number). A DID and transferred CO call can be a member of
conference. This feature terminates when deactivation code is dialed or Forced Delete PGM code by
Attendant.

Operation
To Activate a conference room
1. Press the [PGM] + 4 + 3 + Room Number (1~9)
2. Dial 5-digit password (It is optional)
3. Press the [HOLD] button.

To Deactivate a conference room

1. Press the [PGM] + 4 + 4 + Room Number (1~9)
2. Press the [HOLD] button.

To join a conference room in case of internal call

1. Dial the activated conference room number. (571 ~ 579)
2. Enter 5 digits password for entering conference room if password is enabled.

To join a conference room in case of DID call

(In using of DID type 2, DID destination is assigned conference room. And DID type 0, 1 is also
supported.)
1. DID call is routed to conference room

To Transfer CO Call to conference room

1. Press the Trans/PGM button at attendant.
2. Dial the activated conference room number. (571 ~ 579)
3. Enter password for entering conference room by the transferring station.

To check room status by ATD

1. At ATD, dial a conference room status code [PGM] + 047.
2. ATD’s LCD is indicated how many members are joining the conference room.

To delete room forcedly by ATD

1. At ATD, dial a conference room forced delete code [PGM] + 048.
2. Enter the Room no and press [HOLD]
3. When Erasing Conference room at ATD station, password is not needed.

Condition
1. The Maximum number of conference room is 9.
2. UP to Maximum 15 members can enter each room. (Same present conference feature)
3. Assigning and entering PASSWORD is Optional.
4. CONF ROOM status can be checked by ATD.(How many members are joining the conference room)

132
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

5. For CO party, Only ISDN line can enter a conference room. LCO line cannot be a member of
conference room.
6. If system attendant has a conference room button, she can check the status of conference room with
LED;
-. ON – Conference room is activated, but there is no member..
-. OFF – The conference room is deactivated.
-. Flash 60 IPM – The number of members are 1 to 3.
-. Flash 120 IPM – The number of members are 4 to 6.
-. Flash 240 IPM – The number of members are more than 7.

Admin

133
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.8 Paging feature

2.8.1 Internal page / External page / All-Call page / Meet-me Page

Description
Stations can individually be allowed or denied the ability to make pages. This applies to all internal zone
paging and all external zone paging. A station denied access to paging may still answer a Meet-Me Page
announcement.

There are three External Paging Zones available. External paging requires a three-digit dialing code and
an externally provided amplifier and paging system. Each zone can have a relay contact associated to it.

There are thirty internal paging zones available. A station can be in any or all zones or in no zone at all.
Stations not assigned to a page group can still make page announcements, if allowed in station
programming. Stations can be assigned to a page group in order to receive pages but not allowed to
make page announcements.

Stations to receive pages for a given zone are assigned to the zone. A page warning tone, if assigned,
will be provided to the page zone(s) prior to the audio connection. The user is allowed to continue the
page for a specified period. After the time is expired, the user is disconnected and the page zone(s) is
returned to idle.

A user can respond to a page from any station and connect to the paging party for a private conversation.
The user should respond to the page in the Page Time-out duration to connect the paging party.

Paging Code:
IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100 ITEM
501 – 535 501-515 Internal Page Zone
543 543 Internal All Call Page
544 544 Meet Me Page
545 545 External Page Zone 1
546 546 External Page Zone 2
547 547 External Page Zone 3
548 548 External All Call Page
549 549 All Call Page (Internal & External)

Operation
To make a page,
1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Dial the desired paging code.
3. If assigned, after page warning tone, make announcement.
4. Replace the handset and go on-hook.

To respond a Meet-me Page,

1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.

134
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2. Dial Meet-me Page code 5 4 4 or press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

3. The call with paging party is established and the zone returns to idle.

Condition
make a page,
1. When external paging is required, appropriate external equipment should be attached to the
proper external page connections on the MPB (port 1) or MISB (port 2 & 3).
2. A station which is in DND or busy, it cannot receive a page.
3. A station which is not allowed to page cannot make a page.
4. When a paging is used in the system, another paging is not allowed.
5. Page warning tone may be controlled by Admin. Programming.
6. When the page timer is expired, paging connection is automatically released and ICM busy tone is
presented to the paging station.
7. You should lift the handset to make a page. When trying to make a page without lifting handset,
“LIFT HANDSET TO PAGE” is displayed on the LCD.
8. Paging can be programmed to a Flex. button.
9. If an intercom call is received while paging, the caller will hear intercom busy tone.
10. If a CO line call is received while paging, the station will receive off-hook ring.

Meet-me Page
1. To assign {MEET-ME PAGE} at a flexible button,
[TRANS/PGM] + Flex. BTN + 5 4 4 + [HOLD/SAVE]
2. A station may respond meet me page regardless of assignment of pick-up/paging group
assignment/page access.
3. Page from CO line can’t be answered by pressing the [HOLD/SAVE] button or the code of meet-
me answer. If a user tries to answer a meet me page request from CO line, error tone is heard and
LCD message for error will be displayed.

Admin Programming
„ Paging Timeout Timer 4.5.2.10 (PGM 181 – FLEX 10)
„ Page Warning Tone 4.4.2.4 (PGM 161 – FLEX 4)
„ Page Access 4.1.2.8 (PGM 111 – FLEX 8)
„ Internal Page Zone 4.1.9 (PGM 118)
„ External Control Contact 4.4.9 (PGM 168)

135
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.8.2 Pre-recorded MSG

Description
User can record VMIB message for paging.

Operation
To record VMIB paging message,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 6 5.
3. You will hear the announcement “Press # button to record” If there is already a recorded message
in the number dialed, the recorded message will be played.
4. Dial # to start recording. Start the recording after hearing the announcement “Record your
message” and confirmation tone.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button or the [MON] button to finish the recording. Then confirmation tone
is heard.
6. Pressing the [SPEED] button while playing, then the announcement is deleted and confirmation
tone is heard.

To activate VMIB message for paging,

1. Dial the page code (5xx) and lift handset.
2. The recorded VMIB message is paged.

To delete VMIB message for paging,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 6 7.
3. Then the recorded message is deleted.
4. Or, press the [SPEED] button while playing, then the message is deleted and confirmation tone is
heard.

Condition
1. You should lift handset to make a page.
2. If there is any recorded message, it is paged and if there is no recorded message, user’s voice is
paged.

Admin Programming
„ Paging Timeout Timer 4.5.2.10 (PGM 181 – FLEX 10)

136
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.8.3 SOS Paging

Description
The system allows of being recorded multiple VMIB messages for pre-recorded paging. Depending on
circumstance, user can use pre-recorded messages for paging. Recorded VMIB message is paged to a
page zone at emergency.

Operation
To assign {VMIB SOS Paging} at a flexible button,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Press a flexible button to assign.
3. Dial paging code (5xx).
4. Dial Message number (001~070)
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To activate VMIB SOS paging,

1. Press the assigned {VMIB SOS Paging} flexible button.

Condition
1. This feature can be only activated by pressing assigned flexible button on a DKTU in idle state.
2. The VMIB message for SOS Paging can be recorded only at attendant station.
3. Paging zone includes internal, external and all call paging area.
4. VMIB SOS paging is not restricted by VMIB Paging timer. The whole VMIB SOS paging can be
paged even though Paging Timeout timer expires.

137
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.9 Linked Stations

2.9.1 Executive/Secretary
Description
Stations can be assigned as Executive and Secretary pairs. ICM or CO Call to Executive station can be
routed automatically to the paired secretary.

Calls Exec
CO / STA 110
ICM Exec STA 110

Sec STA 111

Executive/Secretary pairs

Figure 2.9.1 Ringing in Executive/Secretary pairs

The figure 2.9.1 describes that there is CO/ICM call to executive station in Executive/Secretary pairs;
If Exec/Sec Transfer is activated, designated secretary station will receive the incoming call.

Every Executive has grades. When an Executive of high or same grade calls other Executive, that call
is not forwarded to attendant if called Executive is in idle state.

Operation
1. To transfer every calls to a Secretary unconditionally, press the [DND/FOR] button from the
Executive's DKTU.
2. In Korea, every ICM call to an Executive is forwarded to his Secretary automatically even if the
Executive is in idle state.
3. If ‘CO Call To SEC’ feature is set to ON, CO incoming call is automatically forwarded to Secretary.
4. If ‘Call EXEC If SEC DND’ feature is set to ON and the secretary is in DND state(see Ref.1),
incoming call is not forwarded(see Ref.4) to Secretary.

Condition
1. One Executive can have multiple Secretaries, and one secretary can be assigned to multiple
executives within maximum pairs.
2. If an Executive has multiple secretaries and the first secretary is busy, a call will be forwarded to the
next Secretary.
3. It is possible to make a chain of Executive/Secretary pairs. It means that a Secretary may be an
Executive of other Secretary.

138
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

If a Secretary(A) is busy and this Secretary(A) has his Secretary(B), a call will be forwarded to
Secretary(B).
However, a loop-chain cannot be assigned.
4. A Secretary can pass a call to his Executive in DND state by using camp-on feature(see Ref.2).
5. Even though an executive is in DND state, his secretary can transfer a CO call or activate camp-
on.(see Ref.3)
6. If an Secretary set a call forward to other station, a call to Secretary is forwarded to designated
station.
7. When both Executive and Secretary are busy, camp-on / transferred calls / voice messages are
remained at the last Secretary station of the Executive / Secretary chain.

Reference
1. DND : 2.4.9
2. Camp-On : 2.4.5
3. Call transfer : 2.3.2
4. Call forward : 2.3.1

Admin Programming
„ Do Not Disturb 4.1.2.3 (PGM 111 – FLEX 3)
„ Executive/Secretary Pair 4.11.3.1 (PGM 229)
„ CO Call To SEC 4.11.3.2 (PGM 229 – FLEX2)
„ Call EXEC If SEC DND 4.11.3.3 (PGM 229 – FLEX3)
„ EXEC grade 4.11.3.4 (PGM 229 – FLEX4)

139
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.9.2 Linked-Pair Station

Description
Two stations can be linked with each other by programming. Linking with a DKTU and a wireless
terminal(DECT), the user can use them alternatively. When two stations are linked, the following
functions are supported;

[Example]

Call to STA 110 CO

STA 110 STA 110 LINE

Linked Pair

STA 210 STA 110

When the linked stations are idle.

Figure 2.9.2 Ringing in Linked-Pair when two linked stations are idle.

CO Busy state
LINE
STA 110

Call to STA 110

-> Busy Tone

STA 110

When the linked stations are busy.

Figure 2.9.3 Ringing in Linked-Pair when one linked station is busy.

The figure 2.9.2 describes that if two linked stations in Linked-Pair are idle and a CO call arrives, two
linked stations ring. But the figure 2.9.3 describes that if one linked station in Linked-Pair is busy and a
new CO call arrives, the caller will hear the busy tone.

¾ If one of two linked stations receives intercom calls/CO incoming calls (DISA/DID)/recall
ring(system/exclusive hold / transfer), then the other linked station will receive ring together.(see
Ref.1, Ref.2)
¾ If one station of linked pair goes to DND or call forward or pre-selected message display state(see

140
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Ref.3, Ref.4), then linked station goes to the same state automatically. Also, if any station in a
linked pair comes out of this state, then the other comes out simultaneously.
¾ If one of linked stations is busy, the LCD of the other station will display “IN USE AT LINK STA”.
¾ When a linked station is busy, the other idle linked station will not receive ring for CO lines,
transferred ring or intercom calls.

Condition
1. It is available to make 64 linked station pairs.
2. A station can be linked with only one station.
3. The intercom number of two linked stations is operated as one number for all features.
4. The presented number of linked pair is the first station number (Master) which is assigned by Admin
Programming.
5. The station attributes of the second station (Slave) will follow the attributes of Master’s. (Ex.
Day/Night COS, CO Warning Tone, CO Auto Hold, CO Call Drop, Alarm…)
6. intercom box, DSS/DLS or ISDN phone cannot be linked with a station.
7. It is operated with Tone mode in linked station pair regardless of intercom Answer mode(STA program
1 2).
8. Attendant station can be linked with the other station. But, the linked station cannot use attendant
features(see Ref.5).
9. A linked station can call his pair station by dialing his own number. It is possible to make CO
line/Intercom Transfer between two pairs.

Reference
1. HOLD : 2.3.3
2. Call transfer : 2.3.2
3. DND : 2.4.9
4. Call forward : 2.3.1
5. Attendant : 2.13

Admin Programming
„ Linked Station Pairs 4.4.20 (PGM 179)

141
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.10 External Device Control

2.10.1 Door Open

Description
Maximum 7 relays in IP LDK-300/300E, 6 relays in IP LDK-100 can be used for Door Open feature.

Model Remark
IP LDK-300 RAU : 3 relays
IP LDK-300E MISB : 4 relays
MPB : 2 relays
IP LDK-100
MISB : 4 relays

Door Open Code

ITEM REMARK
IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
#*1 #*1 1st Door Open
#*2 #*2 2nd Door Open
#*3 #*3 3rd Door Open
#*4 #*4 4th Door Open
#*5 #*5 5th Door Open
#*6 #*6 6th Door Open
#*7 N/A 7th Door Open IP LDK-300/300E Only

Operation
1. Dial the door open code, or press the programmed {DOOR OPEN} button.

To Registered Door Open

[TRANS/PGM] + FLEX button(to be assigned) + #*1 (1st Door open) + [HOLD/SAVE]

Admin Programming
„ Door Open 4.1.3.22 (PGM 112 – FLEX 22)
„ External Control Contact 4.4.9 (PGM 168)
„ Door Open Timer 4.5.2.5 (PGM 181 – FLEX 5)

142
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.10.2 Door Phone

Description
A convenient intercom box can be connected to the system. The intercom box can receive page
announcements and intercom calls. And the intercom box can signal assigned stations in the system.
Any combination of DKTUs or intercom boxes can be arranged in the system.

[Example]
ICM BOX
(Door Phone) Reception
Reception Call
①
② Conversation

Call Button
Door Open(2.10.1)

Door

Figure 2.10.1 Door Phone

The figure 2.10.1 describes the operation of Door phone.

Operation
To call an intercom box,
1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Dial station number of intercom box or press the flexible button for the intercom box.
3. After warning tone, announce the call.

To place a call from an intercom box,

1. Press the [CALL] button and assigned station will ring.

To answer an intercom call at a station assigned for intercom box signals,

1. Press flexible button for intercom box.

To place intercom box to DND mode(see Ref.1),

1. Press the [DND] button.

Condition
1. While hearing music at intercom box, press the [DND] button to stop the music.
2. intercom Box cannot attend a conference(see Ref.2).
3. The CO call is not received at intercom box.
4. An intercom box can be a member of page zone group(see Ref.3).
5. To receive intercom box call at SLT or WHTU, set intercom Box Signaling value 111 to ON (ADMIN
program – FLEX 6).
6. SLT and WHTU can receive only one call from intercom box.

143
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Reference
1. DND : 2.4.9
2. Conference : 2.7
3. Paging : 2.8

Admin Programming
„ ICM Box Signaling 4.1.2.6 (PGM 111 – FLEX 6)
„ Station ID Assignment 4.1.1 (PGM 110)
„ ICM Box Music Channel 4.4.12.3 (PGM 171 – FLEX 3)
„ ICM Box Timer 4.5.2.6 (PGM 181 – FLEX 6)

2.10.3 Loud Bell

Description
The LBC(Loud Bell Control) contacts are activated when the assigned station receives ringing from an
incoming CO line (if assigned ring), transferred CO line, or intercom call.

Model Remark
IP LDK-300 RAU : 3 relays
IP LDK-300E MISB : 4 relays
MPB : 2 relays
IP LDK-100
MISB : 4 relays

Condition
1. There are 7 LBC contacts and they can be assigned individually to the station. All the contacts may
be assigned to the same station but, only the first contact will be activated in the intercom call.
2. The LBC 1 can be programmed to be operated as an external night ring contact as well as a LBC
contact.
3. In the night mode, LBC 1 will follow UNA(see Ref.1) ring assignment and will ignore the station ring.
4. An external ringing device should be attached to the contacts.
5. The MISB should be installed to use LBC.

Reference
1. UNA(Universal Night Answer) : 2.1.7
2. RAU, MISB : refer to the installation manual

Admin Programming
„ External Night Ring 4.4.1.7 (PGM 160 – FLEX 7)
„ Universal Night Answer 4.2.2.8 (PGM 141 – FLEX 8)
„ External Control Contacts 4.4.9 (PGM 168)

144
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.11 Voice Service

2.11.1 Recording System VMIB Announcement

Description
Attendant station in the system can record the voice announcements as system greetings and prompts.
System greetings should be recorded before use.
System prompts in user’s language are contained as default in VMIB. But users can also modify those
prompts.
Prompts for date and time are contained in VMIB to be used for date and time stamping. With the help of
these prompts, users can understand when the voice message has arrived. Prompts for date and time
are also built-in and recorded in user’s language.

Operation
To record system greetings from Attendant;
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial 0 6.
2. Dial the message number. Then you will hear the announcement “Press # button to record” If there
is already a recorded message in the number dialed, the recorded message will be played.
3. Dial # to start recording. Start the recording after hearing the announcement “Record your
message” and confirmation tone.
4. Or, dial * to record using external music port on the MPB.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to finish recording. Then confirmation tone is heard and you can
record the next one.
6. Pressing the [MON] button while recording, then the recording is stopped and the recorded
message is saved.

To delete system greetings from Attendant;

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and Code 0 6.
2. Dial message number. Only when there is a recorded message in the number dialed, the recorded
message is played.
3. Press the [SPEED] button while the message is playing to delete it.

145
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

System Prompt Messages (Fixed)

No Messages
071 VMIB MOH
072 Reserved
073 Invalid Number Prompt
074 Time Out Prompt
075 Retry Prompt
076 Transfer to Attendant Prompt
077 Reserved
078 Leave Message Prompt
079 Record Start Prompt
080 Authorization Code Prompt
081 Busy Prompt
082 Reserved (for Office version)
Wakeup Prompt (only for Hotel version)
083 Station Off-net Forward Prompt
084 DND Prompt
085 No Answer Prompt
086 Reserved
087 Reserved
088 Remote VMIB Control Main Menu Prompt
089 Remote VMIB Sub-menu for digit 1 in Main Menu
090 Reserved
091 Reserved
092 Reserved
093 Remote VMIB Sub-menu for digit 2 in Main Menu
094 Remote VMIB Sub-menu for digit 3 in Main Menu
095 Remote VMIB Sub-menu for digit * in Main Menu
096 Leave Message after Tone Prompt
097 Message waiting indication Prompt
098 Default User Greeting Prompt
099~
100

Condition
1. System Greetings message are 001~070 as default value. User can select one of 70 messages.
2. System Prompt messages are 071~100 as default value. The number is message and user cannot
change the numbering plan arbitrarily, but users can also modify those prompts by recording their
own messages in the number.
3. System greetings and prompts can be recorded only at system attendant station.
4. There is no time limit to record system greetings and prompts at attendant station.
5. If the VMIB is not installed in the system, it is impossible to record system greetings and prompts.
Error tone will be heard.
6. If there is a recorded message in the bin, the already recorded message is played when user dials
the message number.

146
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

7. If user stops recording by pressing the [MON] button or on-hook the receiver while recording, the
already recorded message is saved. User should delete the recorded message to cancel the
recording.
8. To record or delete a message at attendant station, all the VMIB ports should be idle state.
9. When a call is transferred to the attendant, ‘Transfer to Attendant’ Prompt will be provided to the
caller and ring-back tone will be heard after the announcement.
10. If there is no recorded greetings or prompts, the corresponding tone will be heard.
11. Max. 2000 user messages are available in a VMIB in IP LDK-100/300/300E system. It is possible to
install 3/2 VMIB so, you may have 6000/4000 user messages as user greeting, user VMIB messages,
or message wait in the system.
12. It is possible to use only 100 messages for system greetings (system greetings, system prompt,
VMIB MOH).
13. If you use VMIB MOH as the source of system MOH, a port of VMIB should be always reserved for
MOH though MOH is not used now.
14. Only 1 VMIB MOH can be recorded on a VMIB, so you may have max. 3 or 2 VMIB MOH according
to your system. (Max. 3 VMIB for IP LDK-300/300E and 2 VMIB for IP LDK-100 can be installed.)
15. When the memory is full while recording a system greeting, the recorded message before message
full will be saved.
16. It is available for station groups to have different system greetings.
17. When recording system greetings and prompts at attendant station, they will be saved at all VMIB in
the system except VMIB MOH.
18. If only one VMIB is installed in the system, user can record the VMIB MOH with system prompt
message number ‘071’, but more than one VMIB are installed, user should enter the system prompt
number from ‘071’ to ‘073’. VMIB MOH channel numbers are assigned sequentially by Slot
Assignment of VMIB.
19. The system supports system prompts (072~100) basically. But users may use their own prompts by
recording the prompts at attendant station.

Admin Programming
„ Board Assignment 3.6.2 (PGM 101)
„ VMIB Slot Assignment 3.6.4.3 (PGM 103)
„ VMIB Access 4.1.4.2 (PGM 113 – FLEX 2)
„ VMIB User Record Timer 4.5.2.3 (PGM 181 – FLEX 3)
„ VMIB Valid User Message Timer 4.5.2.4 (PGM 181 – FLEX 4)
„ Station Group Attribute Assign 4.7.1 (PGM 190) / 4.7.2 (PGM 191)

147
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.11.2 Remote Control

Description
An outside caller through DID/DISA(see Ref.1) can access VMIB after calling a station which is in VMIB
Forward mode. Entering VMIB controlling mode, the user can retrieve received messages, change user
greeting, release Call Forward to VMIB , etc.

Operation
To enter Remote VMIB Control mode,
1. Dial the station number which is forwarded to VMIB from external party with DID/DISA.
2. User greeting is heard.
3. While user greeting is played, press * key.
4. “Enter your password” is heard.
5. Enter the password (authorization code).
6. “Listed messages xx” is heard. (xx: the number of listed messages)
7. Press the appropriate dial number with the followings;
- Dial 1 to retrieve the received voice messages
- Dial 2 to listen or change user greeting
- Dial 3 to release Call Forward to VMIB mode
- Dial * to exit remote VMIB Control mode

To listen to the received messages,

1. Dial 1 in the main menu of Remote VMIB control mode.
2. The recorded time & date and recorded message are heard.
3. At this time, the followings are available;
- Dial 1 to listen to the current message again
- Dial 2 to listen to the next message
- Dial 3 to delete the current message
- Dial 4 to delete all received messages

To change the user greeting,

1. Dial 2 in the main menu of Remote VMIB control mode.
2. While the user greeting is being played, press the # key to record new user greeting.
3. Record new user greeting.
4. Press * key when the recording is finished and then the step will go to the main menu.

To release Call Forward to VMIB mode,

1. Dial 3 in the main menu of Remote VMIB control mode.
2. The VMIB forward mode of the station is released.

To exit VMIB Control mode,

Dial * in the main menu of Remote VMIB control mode.

Reference
1. DID : 2.1.3
2. DISA : 2.1.4

148
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Condition
1. Pressing * key while operating in a sub-menu, the system will go to the main control menu.
2. If the user doesn’t enter any digit while Inter-digit time, the connection is dropped automatically.
3. If VMIB User Record Timer expires while recording user greeting, the recording is finished and will go
to main menu.

Admin Programming
„ VMIB User Record Timer 4.5.2.3 (PGM 181 – FLEX 3)
„ Inter-digit Timer 4.5.2.8 (PGM 181 – FLEX 8)

149
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.11.3 Two-way Recording

2.11.3.1 Two-way Recording via SMDI

Description
This feature allows a station to record a conversation on the mailbox by pressing a {RECORD} button
while the station is talking with CO party.

Operation
To set a flexible button programmed for 2-way record feature,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial flexible button(to be assigned).
3. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial ‘54’.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

While a station user is the conversation with the CO line caller, the user press the {RECORD} button,
then the conversation will be recorded on user’s mailbox. The user press the {RECORD} button again or
hang up, then the recording will be canceled.

Protocol;
When user press the {RECORD} button,
LDK-100/300/300E system send SMDI message for this feature to Voice Mail PC through RS-232C cable.
The format is same as follows.

=>”crlfMD0010mmmmH0xxxxxxxxxbbcrlf^Y”
cr : carriage return,
lf : line feed,
mmmm : VM port number,
H : Action code for recording,
xxxxxxxxx : extension which try to record,
b : ascii space.

If VM receive above message, VM goes recording mode.

Condition
1. During the recording feature is enabled, the {RECORD} button will flash at 240 ipm and if it is
disabled, the {RECORD} button will be extinguished.
2. It is not available to SLT.
3. Recording operation is canceled when station goes off-hook, press {RECORD} button again,
press [FLASH] button or CO party hangs up.
4. This feature is available on SMDI mode only not DTMF mode.
5. Not available to intercom call recording.
6. If DIP switch 5 of MPB is set to ON(right position) and system has VMIB, the conversation will
be recorded to VMIB.

Admin Programming

150
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

„ Two Way Recording 4.1.3.10 (PGM112 – FLEX 10)

2.11.3.2 Two-way Recording via VMIB

Description
This feature allows a station to record a conversation on the mailbox by pressing a {RECORD} button
while the station is talking with CO party.

[Example]
IP LDK System
(Press Record button)
CO Incoming Call Conversation

STA A (Record)
Extension
CO

STA B

(Do not Record)

Figure 2.11.1 Two-way Recording

The figure 2.11.1 describes the operation of Two-way Recording.

Operation
To set a flexible button programmed for 2-way record feature,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial flexible button(to be assigned).
3. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial ‘54’.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

While a station user is the conversation with the CO line caller, the user press the {RECORD} button,
then the conversation will be recorded on user’s mailbox. The user presses the {RECORD} button again
or hangs up, then the recording will be canceled.

Condition
1. During the recording feature is enabled, the {RECORD} button will flash at 240 ipm and if it is
disabled, the {RECORD} button will be extinguished.
2. Not available to SLT.
3. Recording operation is canceled when station goes off-hook, press {RECORD} button again, press
[FLASH] button or CO party hangs up.
4. Not available to intercom call recording.
5. If DIP switch 5 of MPB is set to OFF(left position) and system has an external voice mail system, the
conversation will be recorded to the external voice mail system.

Admin Programming

151
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

„ Two Way Recording 4.1.3.10 (PGM 112 – FLEX 10)

2.11.4 Recording User VMIB Announcement

Description
If the access to the VMIB is allowed, user can record User Greeting and make a call be forwarded to
VMIB port according to forward condition type if user enables forward. And the caller can leave a voice
message wait at the station after hearing user greeting.

Record a Activate Call Leave voice Retrieve recorded

user Greeting Forward to VMIB message wait voice message wait

STA A STA A STA B STA A

Operation
To record a user greeting at a station,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 6 1.
3. Dial the message number. Then you will hear the announcement “Press # button to record” If there
is already a recorded message in the number dialed, the recorded message will be played.
4. Dial # to start recording. Start the recording after hearing the announcement “Record your
message” and confirmation tone.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button or the [MON] button to finish the recording. Then confirmation
tone is heard.

To delete a user greeting at a station,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 6 6.
3. The user greeting is deleted and forward is deactivated.

To activate call forward to VMIB from a station,

1. Off-hook or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial the forward type (1~4).
4. Dial # key.
5. Confirmation tone is heard.

To deactivate call forward to VMIB from a station,

1. Press the [DND/FOR] button.

To leave voice message wait,

1. The caller will hear user greeting and “Record your message” announcement.
2. After beep tone, record your message with normal voice.
3. Hang up to finish the recording.

To retrieve recorded voice message wait,

1. Press the flashing [CALLBK] button. For SLT and 2/8 BTN DKTU, dial 557(Message
Wait/Callback Return : see Ref.1).

152
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2. The message number prompt is heard and the voice message (FIFO or LIFO) and Time & Date
prompt for the message is played.
3. Pressing the [CONF] button, the current message is deleted and the next message is heard. For
SLT and 2/8 BTN DKTU, dial #1.
4. Pressing the [HOLD/SAVE] button, the current message is saved and the next message is heard.
For SLT and 2/8 BTN DKTU, dial #2.
5. Pressing the [CALLBK] button, the current message is played again. For SLT and 2/8 BTN DKTU,
dial #3.
6. Pressing the [ADD] soft button, you can record the additional message.
(It can be possible LDP-6000/7000 which has 3 soft key.)
7. Pressing the [REWIND] soft button, you can rewound the current message with VM MSG Rewind
Timer. (It can be possible LDP-6000/7000 which has 3 soft key.)

Condition
1. There is no time limit to record user greeting in a station.
2. When a caller leaves a voice message wait, the recording time is controlled by Valid User Message
Timer (ADMIN program 181 – FLEX 4) and VMIB User Record Timer (ADMIN program 181 – FLEX
3). When the recorded message shorter than Valid User Message time, the message is not saved.
Also, the User Record Timer expires, confirmation tone is heard and the message is saved in the
station.
3. If the station has several messages to be retrieved by pressing the [CALLBK] button, the message
only with station number will be retrieved at first. (Message wait with station number -> VMIB
Message wait -> CLI Message wait -> VM group Message wait)
4. Pressing the [CALLBK] button at the calling station before user greeting is played, the message wait
with only station number is saved in the called station.
5. When a user calls a station which is forwarded to VMIB, he will hear user greeting and beep tone.
After beep tone, user can leave a voice message.
6. Each station may has max.2000 VMIB message waits.
7. If all the VMIB ports are busy, ring-back tone will be provided instead of user greeting. And VMIB
Station Forward Timer is started to retry to answer.
8. User can leave and receive message wait using SLT with message wait lamp.
9. Individual user greeting and VMIB message wait are protected with system reset.
10. With multiple VMIB cards, stations must be assigned to each VMIB in ADMIN program 111 – FLEX
12.
11. To retrieve left message wait, the order of playing is changeable. Originally, TIME, DATE, and a left
message are played. If the ADMIN is set, DATE, TIME, and a left message are played.
12. To retrieve left message wait, the Message Wait Retrieve Password would be used by ADMIN. If
ADMIN PGM 113 & FLEX 8 is set, a user should enter that stations’ AUTHORIZE CODE to retrieve.
13. When user listen to the message, user can rewind the message. Rewound Time is controlled by
Rewind Message Timer (PGM 181 – Flex 17)

Reference
1. Message Wait/Callback Return Code : 3.6.7(ADMIN 106 – FLEX 17)

Admin Programming
„ VMIB Message Type 4.1.2.17 (PGM 111 – FLEX 17)
„ VMIB Access 4.1.4.2 (PGM 113 – FLEX 2)
„ VMIB MSG Retrieve PASSWORD 4.1.4.8 (PGM 113 – FLEX 8)
„ VMIB MSG Retrieve Date/Time 4.1.4.9 (PGM 113 – FLEX 9)
„ VMIB Forward No Answer Timer 4.5.2.1 (PGM 181 – FLEX 1)

153
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

„ VMIB User Record Timer 4.5.2.3 (PGM 181 – FLEX 3)

„ VMIB Valid User Message Timer 4.5.2.4 (PGM 181 – FLEX 4)
„ VMIB Message Rewind Timer 4.5.2.17 (PGM 181 – FLEX 17)

2.11.5 VMIB Announcement for Auto Attendant

Description
Incoming CO calls may be answered by VMIB and rerouted to another station with CCR when attendant
does not answer the call until No Answer Timer expires or attendant is busy.

Operation
To operate Auto Attendant,
1. When an incoming call is received at attendant,
2. The call is not answered until No Answer Timer expires by attendant or attendant is busy.
3. The call is forwarded to Auto attendant. The caller will hear VMIB message and can reroute the
other user with CCR.

Condition
1. It is for no answered incoming call and not available for recall and transferred call.

Admin Programming
„ Auto Attendant VMIB Announce # 4.4.6 (PGM 165)

2.11.6 VMIB Message Transfer

Description
The received message in a station may be transferred to the other station.

Operation
To transfer a message to the other station,
1. While hearing a message, dial the station number to be transferred.
2. The message will be transferred to the station.

Condition
1. If a transferring station is empty, user will hear error tone and can retry to the other station within 3
seconds.
2. SLT with MSG wait lamp can also transfer VMIB messages.
3. The transferred station should have allowance of VMIB access.
4. A user has a possibility to add an additional voice message when he transfers a voice message to
another station. (It can be possible LDP-6000/7000 which has 3 soft key.)

Admin Programming
„ VMIB Access 4.1.4.2 (PGM 113 – FLEX 2)

154
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.11.7 VMIB Message with CLI

Description
When an outside caller leaves a message, the CLI is saved with message. The CLI will be displayed
during hearing the message, and the station user can make a callback for the CLI.

Operation
Call back during hearing a message;
1. Press the soft button [CALLBACK]
2. Then system dials the displayed CLI automatically.

Condition
1. It is possible only DKTU that has a 3 soft-button.
2. Though a user makes the callback for the CLI, the VMIB message is not deleted.

155
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.12 SMDR(Station Message Detail Recording)

Description
The IP LDK System SMDR(station message detail recording) provides details information about both
incoming calls and outgoing calls. In this feature, it is programmable to record all calls or just outgoing
long distance calls. SMDR information includes outgoing CO Line, dialed number, time, date, station that
answer the call, duration of call and etc. Authorization codes may also be entered and recorded.

[Example]
IP LDK System

„
Attendant

„
RS-232C

D M
T P
I B
B
Figure 2.12.1 Connection of SMDR

The figure 2.12.1 describes that there are IP LDK system, PC, attendant station as elements of SMDR
and IP LDK system connects with Attendant through DTIB or DSIB Board and with PC through RS-232C.

Operation
To print SMDR,
1. Activate PC utility program on PC.
2. Connect serial port of MPB to the serial port of PC with the cable of RS-232C.
3. At the attendant station, press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
4. At the attendant station, dial 0111 (Station Base) or 0113 (Group Base).
5. At the attendant station, enter the station or group range.
6. The SMDR is printed to PC.

To delete SMDR,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0112 (Station Base) or 0114 (Group Base).

To abort SMDR printing,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0116.

Condition
1. There is an assignable SMDR record option ADMIN program(PGM177 – FLEX 3). If SMDR – LONG
DISTANCE ONLY is selected, only outgoing toll call will be printed, and If SMDR – ALL CALL is

156
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

selected, incoming and outgoing local and long distance call are printed.
2. If user dials any number with a programmed long distance code as the first and second digit dialed or
any number with more than maximum local call digit count, it will be regarded as long distance call.
(Max. local call digit count is programmable and the default value is 7.)
3. The SMDR output records contain the followings;
- 5-digit station call originator (terminating for incoming) filed
- 3-digit used CO line field
- 8-digit call duration field (HH:MM:SS)
- 8-digit year, month, and day (YY/MM/DD)
- 5-digit time of day call originator field
- 1 digit call identification digit-first digit in digit dial field
- 18-digit collected dial digit field
- 2-digit account group number field
- 5-digit pulse metering count field
- 10-digit call cost field
- 12-digit account code field
4. When the SMDR storage pools are almost exhausted, the system gives “Buffer full” warning signal to
the attendant. And the LCD of attendant station will indicate how many SMDR records are remained
to store for some intervals.
5. Some stations can be grouped to count the billing with a SMDR receipt using a SMDR account group.
6. ‘SLT DTMF RLS TMR’ should be adjusted to reasonable value in order to print all digits that SLT
dialed.

Admin Programming
„ SMDR Attribute 4.4.18 (PGM 177)
„ Metering Unit 4.2.3.3 (PGM 142 – FLEX 3)
„ SLT DTMF RLS Timer 4.5.2.13 ( PGM 181 – FLEX 13)

157
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.12.1 AOC (Advice Of Charge)

Description
The AOC service provides outgoing call charging to the user in public ISDN. According to the ADMIN
programming, the saved and printed information is provided to the PC or user's LCD. This function is
applicable to the most European countries.

Operation
During the conversation or after release a CO call, the ISDN facility IE carry the AOC information. User
can see it with SMDR print after a call.

* CHARGE NOT AVAILABLE

al 08 02 01 ** 02 01 23 05 00

* FREE OF CHARGE
al 0a 02 01 ** 02 01 23 30 02 81 00

* NORMAL CHARGING
al 20 02 01 ** 02 01 23 30 18 30 16 al 05
81 03 @@ @@ @@ a2 07 81 05 %% %% %% %% %%
82 01 01 82 01 01

[**] : The rule is changed in each call.

[@@ @@ @@] : It means charging current unit. (IA5)
[%% %% %% %% %%] : It means real current value displayed with
You can see it with SMDR print after the call.

Condition
1. It is displayed on the LCD instead of call timer and changed based on the receipt of each call
charging information.
2. The information of AOC includes the Unit or Currency.

Admin Programming
„ Advice Of Charge 4.8.1.1 (PGM 200 – FLEX 1)
„ SMDR Attribute 4.4.18 (PGM 177)

158
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.12.2 Display

Description
With installed the CMU(Call Metering Unit), the system can be programmed to display an estimated cost
for outside calls on a fixed charge per call metering pulse, as assigned in the system. The cost is shown
in the LCD instead of the call timer and is updated based on receipt of each call metering pulse.

Condition
1. The call cost is displayed based on “Call Metering Pulse”.
2. When a call is in hold, the holding time is included in the call cost display.
3. If the cost per call metering pulse is set to 0.00, the display for outgoing calls will show the call
duration.

Admin Programming
„ Metering Unit 4.2.3.3 (PGM 142 – FLEX 3)
„ SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse 4.4.18.10 (PGM 177 – FLEX 10)
„ SMDR Fraction 4.4.18.11 (PGM 177 – FLEX 11)

159
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.12.3 Print-out

Description
Lost call means that the caller gives up and terminates the call before the call is answered. The format of
the individual call record is illustrated below, and the contents are focused on each case about the types
of lost call.

NO STA CO TIME START DIALED

----- ---- --- ------ ----------------- -----------------------
0001 EXT 031 00:00:10 24/05/99 11:55 R RING 00:05
Normal incoming call is received at an assigned stations of CO 031 during 5 sec.
0002 101 003 00:01:20 25/05/99 16:23 R RNG 00:09
DID call is disconnected during it is being forwarded to ATD STA 101, because the dialed station does not exist.
0003 100 001 00:00:20 25/05/99 18:11 R100 RING 00:04
DID call is received at STA 100 during 4sec and disconnected.
0004 102002 00:01:20 26/05/99 18:37 R103 RING 00:04
DID call is received at STA 102 via unconditional call forward to STA 103 during 4 sec and disconnected.
0005 621008 00:00:20 26/05/99 13:02 G620 RING 00:06
DID call is received at Ring Group 621 during 6sec and disconnected.
0006 100001 00:00:04 06/05/99 16:04 H100 RING 00:02
DID call is disconnected while STA 100 is being held it.
0007 102001 00:00:07 06/05/99 17:04 H100 RING 00:02
DID call is disconnected while it is being transferred from STA 100 to STA 102.

z G: Incoming call to hunt group(see Ref.1), but the caller hangs up before answer
z H: Answered incoming call was transferred to another station, but the caller hangs up before
answer. And incoming call placed on hold state and cleared down in hold state.
z R: Direct call (DID) to a station, but the call was disconnected before the station answers. Or
direct call to station (A), but station (A) does not answer and the call was forwarded to station (B).
The call was disconnected before station (B) answers.

Operation
To print the lost call count of record,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0117 at Attendant station.
3. The lost call count of record is printed in the PC connected in the system.

To clear the lost call count of record,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0118 at Attendant station.
3. “The lost call count is cleared” is printed and the lost call count time is restarted.

Condition
1. This SMDR record is sent to RS-232C automatically as soon as the event takes place.
2. The SMDR record about lost call is not saved. Only the records are counted.
3. To activate this SMDR record, the SMDR field must be set in ADMIN programming.

160
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Reference
1. Hunt group : 2.6

Admin Programming
„ SMDR Print Enable 4.4.18.2 (PGM 177 – FLEX 2)
„ Long distance/ All Call Recorded 4.4.18.3 (PGM 177 – FLEX 3)
„ Print Lost Call 4.4.18.6 (PGM 177 – FLEX 6)

161
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.13 Attendant Service

Description
An attendant properly controls the incoming calls by transferring calls and accessing the unanswered
calls, etc. And an attendant can change simple setting of whole system or intercom tenancy group which
belongs to. – changing LCD date/time format, etc.

There are 2 types of attendant in the IP LDK system. The types of attendant and feature of each
attendant type are :

Main Attendant - max. 5 stations can be defined as main attendants. Main attendants control the whole
system. And operation of main attendants effects on whole system. The first main attendant is called
the system attendant. The system attendant can be changed, but can’t be removed.
Intercom tenancy Group Attendant - each intercom tenancy group(see Ref.1) can have its own
attendant. The intercom tenancy group attendant controls the stations belonging to the intercom tenancy
group. And operation of intercom tenancy group attendants can effects on only intercom tenancy group
which belongs to.
Generally, the attendant of a station is the intercom tenancy group attendant which the station belongs to.
If the intercom tenancy group attendant of the station doesn’t exist, the main attendants will supply the
station with attendant services.
IP LDK System
Main Attendant 1
( System attendant )
STA 101(Default)

Main Attendant 2
STA a

Main Attendant 3
STA b

Main Attendant 4
STA c

Main Attendant 5
STA d
intercom tenancy group
Main Attendant Assignment

intercom tenancy group attendant

Figure 2.13.1 Attendants of IP LDK-300 system

The figure 2.13.1 describes the arrangement of attendants of IP LDK-300 system generally.

162
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Reference
1. Intercom tenancy Group : 2.4.15
2.13.1 Assign Attendant

Description
As default, first station( e.g. station 100 in IP LDK-300, station 1000 in IP LDK-300E ) is assigned as the
system attendant, and other attendants are not assigned.
Main attendants can be assigned ADMIN program 164, but Intercom tenancy group attendant can be
assigned ADMIN program 120 – FLEX 1.

Reference
1. Intercom tenancy Group : 2.4.15

Admin Programming
„ Main Attendant Assignment 4.4.5.1 (PGM 164)
„ Intercom tenancy Group Attendant Assignment 4.1.11.1(PGM 120 – FLEX 1)

Condition
1. IP phone cannot be assigned as an attendant.

2.13.2 Attendant Call & Queuing

Description
Attendant call is the intercom call and CO call to an attendant.
In order to make an intercom call to the attendant, a user enters the station number of the attendant or
dials ‘0’ button.
If a user dials ‘0’ button, it rings at the assigned attendant of the intercom tenancy group which the station
belongs to. If there is no assigned station as attendant, it rings at main attendant.
Call to any attendant will be queued, if the attendant is busy. Then, ring-back tone or MOH(see Ref.2) will
be provided to the calling party.(ADMIN program 160 – FLEX 1)

Operation
To call an attendant,
1. Lift handset or press [MON] button.
2. Dial ‘0’ button or enter the station number of the attendant.

Condition
1. When an attendant calls another attendant which is busy, the calling attendant will hear the busy
tone and can make camp-on(see Ref.3) to called attendant.
2. If attendant activates unconditional call forward(see Ref.4), the calls to attendant will follow the call
forward process.

Reference
1. Intercom tenancy Group : 2.4.15

163
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2. MOH(Music On Hold) : 2.4.17

3. Camp-on : 2.4.5
4. Unconditional Call Forward : 2.3.1.4
Admin Programming
„ Main Attendant Assignment 4.4.5 (PGM 164)
„ MOH Type 4.4.12.2 (PGM 171 – FLEX 2)
„ Intercom Group Attendant Assignment 4.1.11.1 (PGM 120 – FLEX 1)
„ Attendant Call Queuing RBT/MOH 4.4.1.1 (PGM 160 – FLEX 1)

2.13.3 Attendant Forward

Description
The attendant can forward (Unconditional Call Forward) a call to the other station.(see Ref.1)
the forwarded-to station will substitute for the attendant temporarily, while the attendant is in forwarding
state.

unconditional call forward

attendant Forwarded-to station

: serve attendant functions, temporarily

Figure 2.13.2 Attendant Forward

The figure 2.13.2 describes that forwarded-to station serves attendant functions during Attendant Forward.

Operation
It is the same procedure as the Unconditional Call Forward.

To activate Attendant Forward,

1. Lift the Handset or press the [MON] button.
2. Press the [DND/FOR] button.
3. Dial Call Forward Code 1 ( Unconditional Call Forward ).
4. Dial station number.
5. Hang up the handset and go on-hook.

To deactivate Attendant Forward,

1. In idle state; Press [DND/FOR] button.
2. In off-hook state, Press [DND/FOR] button and dial #.

Condition
If the attendant assigns unconditional call forward to SLT or WHTU, the forwarded-to station only serve
incoming calls as attendant call, attendant recall and others. The forwarded-to SLT or WHTU cannot
activate attendant features.

Reference
1. Unconditional Call Forward : 2.3.1.4

164
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.13.4 Attendant Intrusion

Description
When an attendant have a urgent message to a station which is conversing with a CO party, the
attendant can intrude upon the conversation and converse with the station and the CO line.

conversation
conversation
CO line
CO line
intrusion conversion
conversion

attendant
attendant

Figure 2.13.3 Attendant Intrusion

The figure 2.13.3 describes that the attendant converses with the other two CO party after attendant
intrusion.

Operation
To intrude on a CO call while the attendant is receive intercom busy tone,
1. Press the programmed {ATD INTRUSION} FLEX button.
2. After intrusion tone, converse with the CO party.

Condition
1. To assign {ATD INTRUSION} FLEX button,
[TRANS/PGM] + FLEX button ( to be assigned )+ [TRANS/PGM] + 8 6 + [HOLD/SAVE]
2. In order to use this feature, The Auto Privacy should be OFF( ADMIN program 161 – FLEX 5) and
Override Privilege(ADMIN program 113 – FLEX 4) of the attendant should be Enable.

Admin Programming
„ Auto Privacy 4.4.2.5 (PGM161 – FLEX 5)
„ Privacy Warning Tone 4.4.2.6 (PGM 161 – FLEX 6)
„ Override Privilege 4.1.4.4.(PGM 113 – FLEX 4)

165
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.13.5 Attendant Override

Description
A station in DND state(see Ref.1) can not generally receive an incoming call.
The attendant, however, can temporarily invalidate the DND state. Therefore, the attendant can call and
transfer to the station in DND state.

In DND In DND ringing

Intercom call,
transfer, etc. DND tone override

attendant attendant attendant

Figure 2.13.4 Attendant Override

The figure 2.13.4 describes that the attendant can call the station in DND state after Attendant Override.

Operation
To override DND state at a station while the attendant is received DND tone,
1. Dial ＊or the last digit of the dialed station number.
Or, press the programmed {Camp-On} FLEX button.
2. DND warning tone will be changed to intercom ring-back tone at attendant.
3. Attendant can call a station in DND state as a normal call.

Condition
1. To assign {Camp-On} FLEX button,
[TRANS/PGM] + FLEX. BTN(to be assigned) + [TRANS/PGM] + 8 5 + [HOLD/SAVE]
2. If the attendant with a transferred CO call overrides a station in DND state, and the station has the
{CO} or {LOOP} button, attendant can transfer the CO call to the station in DND state.
But, If the transferred-to station has no the {CO} or {LOOP} button, the CO call will be recalled to the
attendant immediately.

Reference
1. DND : 2.4.9

166
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.13.6 Attendant Recall

Description
If the recalled CO call(transfer, hold) is unanswered by destination station, the CO call will be directed to
the attendant.(see Ref.1,2) This is attendant recall. The attendant will receive the recall ring for a time
equal to the Attendant Recall Timer(ADMIN program 180 – FLEX 1). If the attendant doesn’t answer the
CO call for a time equal to the Attendant Recall Timer, the CO call will be disconnected.

Condition
1. If the attendant of intercom tenancy group is not assigned, the CO call is recalled to the system
attendant.
2. When a call in exclusive hold is recalled to attendant, the call is changed to a call in system hold.(see
Ref.1)
3. Private CO line will not be recalled to attendant.(see Ref.4)

Reference
1. Hold : 2.3.3.2
2. Call Transfer : 2.3.2
3. Intercom Tenancy Group : 2.4.15
4. Private Line : 2.2.9

Admin Programming
„ Attendant Recall Timer 4.5.1.1 (PGM 180 – FLEX 1)
„ I-Hold Recall Timer 4.5.1.5 (PGM 180 – FLEX 5)

2.13.7 Change LCD Date/Time display

Description
The attendant can change the LCD Date/Time display format of stations in system.
-. Date : MM-DD-YY / DD-MM-YY ( ex. August 4, 2004 -> 08-04-03 / 04-08-03 )
-. Time : 12H / 24H ( ex. eight thirty P.M. -> 08:30 PM / 20:30 )

Operation
To change LCD Date format (toggle),
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0 4 4.

To change LCD Time format (toggle),

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0 4 5.

Admin Programming

167
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

„ LCD Time Display Mode 4.4.10.1 (PGM 169 – FLEX 1)

„ LCD Date Display Mode 4.4.10.2 (PGM 169 – FLEX 2)

2.13.8 Day/Night service

Description
When a CO call come in the system, the destination of CO call can be changed according to the time.
Such event is happened because the ring mode can be changed according to the time.
There are 5 ring modes – Day mode/Night mode/Weekend mode/On-demand mode/Automatic Ring
mode. The destination of CO call can be set differently at each ring mode, while a user sets the
destination of CO call with ADMIN program(see Ref.1). At Day mode/Night mode/Weekend mode, the
user set the appropriate destination of CO call according to the situation( day or night or weekend ).
On-demand mode among the ring mode is used to supply a different destination of CO call except Day
mode/Night mode/Weekend mode.
The ring mode in Automatic Ring mode is classified as Day mode or Night mode or Weekend mode
according to Weekly Time Table(ADMIN program 233).

Operation
To change Day/Night Service,
1. Press the [DND/FWD] button.
2. Dial one digit
(1:Day / 2:Night / 3:Weekend / 4:On-demand / 5:Auto Ring Mode)
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Condition
1. The default value of Weekly Time Table is as follows( entry number : 00 ). The first table entry (00) is
for main attendants and others (01~15) are for intercom tenancy group attendants.

Date Day Start Time Night Start Time Weekend Start Time
Mon 09:00 18:00 -- : --
Tue 09:00 18:00 -- : --
Wed 09:00 18:00 -- : --
Thu 09:00 18:00 -- : --
Fri 09:00 -- : -- 18:00
Sat -- : -- -- : -- 00:00
Sun -- : -- -- : -- 00:00

2. On-demand mode is not available in the Automatic Ring mode.

3. The attendants of intercom tenancy group can change ring mode as well as main attendants. If an
attendant of intercom tenancy group changes ring mode, only the ring mode of intercom tenancy
group which the attendant belongs to is changed. But if a main attendant changes the ring mode, ring
mode of the system will be changed.
4. When the ring mode is set to Automatic Ring mode by main attendant, the ring mode of the system
will follow the first table entry ( entry number : 00 ) of Weekly Time Table .
5. If the system ring mode is changed from the night/weekend/on-demand/auto ring mode to day mode,
the ring mode of all intercom tenancy group will change to the previous ring mode.
6. If external night ring is enabled and the system is in night mode, the LBC 1 Contact will follow the
incoming UNA assigned CO lines.

Reference

168
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

1. Ring assignment : 2.1.1

Admin Programming
„ CO Line Ring Assignment 4.2.5 (PGM 144)
„ External Control Contact 4.4.9 (PGM 168)
„ Weekly Time Table 4.11.6 (PGM 233)

2.13.9 Disable Outgoing Access

Description
The attendant can make a particular CO line out-of-outgoing-service. Then a user can’t make a CO call
through the CO line. Incoming CO call is not affected..

Operation
To set a CO line in/out-of-outgoing service from the attendant,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0 7 3.
3. Press the desired {CO line} FLEX button. Confirmation tone will be heard when the status(in or
out-of-outgoing-service) of the selected CO line is changed.
4. Press the [MON] button to return to idle.

Condition
1. Any attendant can use this feature.
2. The LED of {CO line} FLEX button which is out-of-outgoing-service is flashing in attendant station but
lightening in other stations.
3. To release the-out-of-outgoing-service, press the flashing {CO line} FLEX button in attendant station.
4. Though the desired CO line is busy, the attendant can still make the CO line out-of-outgoing-service.
The out-of-outgoing-service feature will take effect after the CO line goes to idle.

169
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.13.10 ICM Box Music Selection

Description
The attendant can select the music channel source to provide the intercom Box.

Operation
To select the music source from the attendant,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0 7 5.
3. Dial the music source (00~12).

Channel 00 : Music is not used.

Channel 01 : internal music
Channel 02 ~ 04 : external music 1~3
Channel 05 ~ 07 : VMIB BGM 1~3 ( LDK-100 : channel 05 ~ 06 : VMIB BGM 1 ~ 2 ) (see Ref.1)
Channel 08 ~ 12 : SLT MOH( LDK-100 : channel 07 ~ 11 : SLT MOH ) (see Ref.2)

And music source will be heard. But if the music channel has no music source, no music is heard
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Reference
1. BGM(Background Music) : 2.4.4
2. MOH(Music On Hold) : 2.4.17

Admin Programming
„ Intercom Box Music Channel 4.4.12.3 (PGM 171 – FLEX 3)

2.13.11 Station Feature Cancel

Description
The attendants can cancel features - such as DND, Call Forward and pre-selected messages - of other
stations.(see Ref.1, Ref.2, Ref.3)

Operation
To disable active features at a station from the attendant,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0 7 1.
3. Dial the desired station range.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Reference
1. DND : 2.4.9
2. Call Forward : 2.3.1
3. Pre-selected Message : 2.4.1.2

170
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.13.12 DSS/DLS Consoles

Description
Attendants and other DKTU may be equipped with DSS/DLS consoles which provide additional buttons
for more convenient operation. The consoles are arranged as flexible mapped units. The DSS/DLS
consoles are assigned with programming as one of the 8 maps. All buttons of any map are
programmable.
The DSS/DLS consoles each require a separate line connection to the KSU, and take up a station
number.

Condition
1. There is no limit to the number of DSS/DLS consoles in a system.
2. The default value for DSS/DLS is as follows;

MAP 1 Flex 1 – Intrusion

Flex 2 – All Call Page
Flex 3 – Call Park 01
Flex 4 – Station Group 1
Flex 5 – Camp-on
Flex 6 – Internal All Call Page
Flex 7 – Call Park 02
Flex 8 – Station Group 2
Flex 9 – Group Call Pick-up
Flex 10 – External All Call Page
Flex 11 – Call Park 03
Flex 12 – Station Group 3
Station 100-135
MAP 2 Station 136-183
MAP 3 Station 184-231 (*IP LDK100 : 184-227)
MAP 4 Station 232-279 (*IP LDK100 : MAP 4-8 N/A)
MAP 5 Station 280-327
MAP 6 CO line 01-48
MAP 7 CO line 49-96
MAP 8 CO line 97-144

Admin Programming
„ Station ID Assignment 4.1.1.1 (PGM 110 – FLEX 1)
„ DSS/DLS ID Assignment 4.1.1.2 (PGM 110 – FLEX 2)

171
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.14 ISDN service

Current IP LDK system software supports Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) circuits. The PRI provides 30 bearer channels and two data
channel (30B+2D). The BRI provides two bearer channels and one data channel (2B+D).

Calling Number and Called Number services are supported with the PRI and BRI. Calling Number
services will be routed in the same way as ANI(automatic number identification) calls using the DID route
table .

The rules and conditions of ANI are the same, and still apply to Calling Number service on ISDN lines.
Called Number services will be routed using the DID route table. The rules and conditions of DID and still
apply to ISDN Called Number service on ISDN lines.

Channels
- The bearer channels (B channels) transport voice information to and from the Central

Office.
- The data channel (D channel) controls all signaling information for the bearer channels.

2.14.1 Call Deflection

Description
IP LDK system is supporting ISDN-SS-CD (ISDN Supplementary Service – Call Deflection). The protocol
standard about CD can be referred the ETS 300-202/206/207.

Operation
To activate ISDN-SS-CD about CO lines:
1. In ADMIN program 143, enter CO lines range that serve ISDN-SS CD.
2. Press the flexible button 9, and set ISDN-SS CD field value as ENABLE.

Station Off-net Call Forward at Station:

1. Set the station off-net call forward at station according to the following step: [On/Off] +
[DND/FWD] + ‘5’ + ‘Speed Dial Bin’ + [Hold].
2. If there is ISDN incoming call through CO line that set ISDN-SS CD ADMIN program 143 – FLEX 9
enabled, then the call deflection request message is sent with the station number that is saved in
the speed dial bin to use new divert destination.

Condition
This feature can be used within only ISDN network that supports ISDN-SS CD service.

Admin Programming
„ ISDN-SS Call Deflection 4.2.4.9 (PGM 143 – FLEX 9)

172
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.14.2 CLI(Calling Line Identification Presentation)

Description
The term of CLI is the telephone number of caller. By using of this, IP LDK station user can recognize the
incoming CO caller’s information and send the telephone number of the caller when he make an
outgoing CO call.

2.14.2.1 Incoming CLI Service

Description
When a station of IP LDK system receives an incoming CO call that has a telephone number of the caller,
the station user can see the telephone number of incoming CO caller on LCD of station.

The figure 2.14.1 describes an example of incoming CLI process in IP LDK system. In the figure, the
outside CO caller defines the CALLING PARTY, and the station of IP LDK system defines the called party.
The calling party makes a call to IP LDK system and IP LDK system receives the CLI of this call as
‘04318502824’. At first step, IP LDK system check whether the start digits information is matched with the
MY AREA CODE(ADMIN program 200 – FLEX 9). In this example, my area code of ‘0431’ is matched
with the incoming CLI. So, IP LDK system is removing ‘0431’ automatically from CLI data, and the rest
CLI data is sent to the called party, station 100. The station 100 displays the incoming CLI ‘8502824’ on
the LCD, if the ADMIN program of CLI display is set to ON(see Operation.1). If the station 100 has the
same speed dial data as the incoming CLI data ‘8502824’, then the matched speed dial data name can
be displayed on LCD according to the ADMIN program of CLI NAME DISPLAY(see Operation.2).

PGM114-FLEX1 : ON
PGM114-FLEX11 : OFF or ON
LCD of USER A LCD of USER A PGM200-FLEX9 : 0431(My Area Code)

Or
8502824 LG-Nortel
If speed 001(8502824 – LG-Nortel) is programmed.

Called party Area Code Removed

by PGM200 FLEX9

Calling party
USER A(100) 0431 8502824

ISDN
USER B(101)

Figure 2.14.1 The example of incoming CLI process in IP LDK system.

173
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Operation
In LDK system, the various operations about the incoming CLI is provided according to the ADMIN
program setting.
1. If the CLIP DISPLAY(ADMIN program 114 – FLEX 1) is set to ON, the incoming CLI is displayed on
station LCD.
2. If the CLI NAME DISPLAY(ADMIN program 114 – FLEX 11) is set to ON, the incoming CLI digit
display can be replaced to the matched station speed dial data name.
3. If the CLI print(ADMIN program 200 – FLEX 6) is set to ON, the incoming CLI can be printed to RS-
232C port.
4. If the MY AREA CODE(ADMIN program 200 – FLEX 9) is set, and this value is matched with the start
digits of the incoming CLI, then the matched digits are removed automatically.
5. If the MY AREA PREFIX CODE(ADMIN program 200 – FLEX 10) is set, it can be used at the
operation 4 with combination of MY AREA CODE.
6. If the CLI MESSAGE WAIT(ADMIN program 114 – FLEX 4) is set to ON, the unanswered CLI data
will be save at the station memory. (see Ref.1)

Condition
1. Max. 15 digits will be displayed as a CLI number.
2. Though the power of system is off, the stored CLI messages is not erased.
3. The CLI can be shown at SLT which has a CLI display LCD with CSLIB board.

Reference
1. CLI Message Wait : 2.14.2.3

Admin Programming
„ CLIP LCD Display 4.1.5.1 (PGM 114 – FLEX 1)
„ CLI Name Display 4.1.5.10 (PGM 114 – FLEX 11)
„ CLI Message Wait 4.1.5.4 (PGM 114 – FLEX 4)
„ CLI Print 4.8.1.3 (PGM 200 – FLEX 3)
„ My Area Code 4.8.1.5 (PGM 200 – FLEX 9)
„ My Area Prefix Code 4.8.1.6 (PGM 200 – FLEX 10)

174
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.14.2.2 Outgoing CLI Service

Description
When a station of IP LDK system makes an outgoing CO call, it can send the telephone number.

The figure 2.14.2 describes an example of outgoing CLI process in IP LDK system. In the figure, the
outside CO caller is defined the called party, and the station 100 of IP LDK system is defined the calling
party. The calling party, station 100, makes an outgoing CO call to the called party, and IP LDK
generates the CLI of station 100 and transmit it to the called party.
At this example, the CLI of station 100 is ‘04313283100’. This CLI data is combined with three parts. The
start digits of CLI is ‘0431’. It is generated from the MY AREA CODE(ADMIN program 200 – FLEX 9).
The insertion/omission of this value is managed by the CALL TYPE(ADMIN program 143 – FLEX 3). The
end digits of CLI is ‘100’. It generated from the ISDN CLI of station(ADMIN program 114 – FLEX 12). At
default, this ADMIN value is set as the same value as the station number. The middle digits of CLI is
‘3283’. It is generated from the CLIP/COLP TABLE value of CO line(ADMIN program 201, and 143 –
FLEX 2).

PGM114-FLEX12 : 100(CLI of Station)

PGM143-FLEX3 : 2(National No.)
PGM200-FLEX9 : 0431(My Area Code)
PGM143-FLEX2 : 00(Index 00 of PGM201)
Calling party PGM201 ENTRY00 : “3283”

USER A(100) Called party

ISDN

USER B(101)
0431 3283 100

Area Code BIN 00 Station

of PGM201 Number

Figure 2.14.2 The example of outgoing CLI process in IP LDK system

Operation
In LDK system, if the CALL TYPE(ADMIN program 143 – FLEX 3) is set to NATIONAL, the outgoing CLI
is generated as illustrated figure 2.14.2, according to the ADMIN program setting.
1. If the ISDN CLI of STATION(ADMIN program 114 – FLEX 12) is set, this value is used as the end
part of CLI when the outgoing CLI is generated.
2. If the MY AREA CODE(ADMIN program 200 – FLEX 9) is set, and this value is used as the first part
of CLI when the outgoing CLI is generated.
3. If the entry of CLIP/COLP TABLE(ADMIN program 201) is set, and if the CLIP TABLE INDEX(ADMIN
program 143 – FLEX 2) is set to the front entry number, then it can be used as the middle part of CLI
when the outgoing CLI is generated.

175
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

4. If the CLI RESTRICTION(ADMIN program 114 – FLEX 14) is set to ON, CLI transmission is
restricted.
Condition
1. Max. 15 digits will be displayed as a CLI number.
2. Though the power of system is off, the stored CLI messages is not erased.

Admin Programming
„ CLIP/COLP Table 4.8.2 (PGM 201)
„ CLIP Table Index 4.2.4.2 (PGM 143 – FLEX 2)
„ Call Type 4.2.4.3 (PGM 143 – FLEX 3)
„ ISDN CLI of STATION 4.1.5.11 (PGM 114 – FLEX 12)
„ ISDN CLIR 4.1.5.13 (PGM 114 – FLEX 14)
„ My Area Code 4.8.1.5 (PGM 200 – FLEX 9)
„ My Area Prefix Code 4.8.1.6 (PGM 200 – FLEX 10)

176
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.14.2.3 CLI Message Wait

Description
When a call exists through ISDN DID line, calling line identification (CLI) of the incoming call will be
displayed on the LCD of the station. And if the DID external party hangs up before an Attendant or called
station answer, the CLI provided by digital network will be stored in the CO message wait queue of the
original called station.

Operation
CLI message wait feature summary
[CALLBK] ⎯┬⎯ None - Retrieve CLI message.
⎯├⎯ [VOL UP/DOWN] - See next CLI message.
⎯├⎯ [HOLD] - Make a recall according to CLI message.
⎯├⎯ [CALLBK] - Toggle CLI message and SPEED Name.
⎯├⎯ [SPEED] + Bin# + [CONF] - Store CLI message in SPEED dial bin.
⎯├⎯ [CONF] - Delete current CLI message.
⎯├⎯ [DND] - Delete all CLI message.
⎯└⎯ At ATD: [TRANS/PGM]+055 - Delete all CLI message at ATD station.

To activate CLI Message Wait

1. CLIP should be programmed as ON(1).
2. Then message contents will be shown on LCD.
MSG: CLI(3)

To retrieve CLI Message

1. Press [CALLBK] button.
2. Then message contents (CLI number, date and time, the calling count from the same CLI) will be
shown on LCD. According to admin date LCD display format, DATE will be display as MM/DD or
DD/MM. But, TIME is always displayed the 24-hour mode.
03434507902
DATE TIME CNT:xx

To delete the current CLI Message and see the next one
1. Press [CONF] button.
2. Then the station user can see the next CLI message and current CLI message will be deleted.

To delete all CLI messages

1. Press [CALLBK] button
2. Press [DND] button and [HOLD] button.

To make a call back

1. Press [HOLD] button.
2. Then system seizes an available CO line in a first accessible CO group and dials it like speed dialing.

To see the next or previous CLI message

1. Press [UP/DOWN] button

177
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

To delete all CLI messages at attendant

1. Press [TRANS/PGM] button
2. Dial 055 and station range.
3. Press [HOLD] button.

To program the SPEED BIN no. with CLI message

1. At the retrieve CLI message LCD, press [SPEED] button.
2. LCD display message changes as usual station speed dial program, except that displays the CLI
message using indication.
ENTER SPEED BIN NO(001)
CLI MSG USED
3. Then user can press station speed bin number or [HOLD/SAVE] button.
4. After entering speed bin number, CLI message using indication is displayed onto speed dial digit
position. It means that CLI can be entered pressing [CONF] button. If user want to assign the CO
for speed, it must be prior to [CONF] button pressing.
CLI MSG USED
ENTER CO-BTN/DIGIT(001)
5. Press [HOLD/SAVE] button to store the speed dial number.

Condition
1. CLI display works about any type of co service, if co line is ISDN. But CLI message wait only works
about DID/MSN co service type of ISDN line.
2. The total number of CLI message wait is 2000. (on System base)
3. Station without LCD can not receive CLI message wait even though CLIP is set to ON.
4. CLI messages are saved against power failure.
5. When the call is routed to Ring Group, CLI Message is waited only the first member of Ring Group.
6. When the call is routed to a member of UCD/ Circular/ Terminal station group, the CLI Message Wait
will be provided to the first ringing station.
7. If the external party release the line during the VMIB announcement, the CLI Message Wait is not
saved to any stations. But the external party release the line during that a station is ringing after the
VMIB announcement, the CLI Message Wait will be remained at the first ringing station.
8. Though the call is routed to the station(A) that is forwarded to the other station(B), the CLI Message
Wait is provided to the original station(A). The basic rule for CLI Message Wait follows the rule of
“Message Wait” feature.
9. If there is no buffer, following warning message will be printed out through RS-232C.
“WARNING: CLI MESSAGE WAITING BUFFER FULL”
10. If the CLI number is programmed in the SPEED BIN No. Table with the “name” and the CLI name
display ADMIN programmed, then the name will be displayed in the LCD. The CLI number and CLI
user name is toggled by pressing [CALLBK] button.
11. When a user try to delete the all CLI message at his station and some VMIB voice message wait
exist together with CLI message, the “all CLI delete” feature can not be activated. Because the
priority of the message wait is as following:
VMIB message wait -> CLI message wait -> VM Group message wait
12. If the duplicated CLI messages are left at a station, LCD of the station will display the CLI message
with the CLI duplicated counter (max 15) and the latest message left time.
13. If CLI print admin program set, CLI and Station Number are printed through RS-232C port.
14. About WHTU, CLI number save as speed dial doesn’t work. Because WHTU doesn’t have [CONF]

178
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

button.

2.14.3 CLIR/COLR

Description
CLIR(Calling Line Identification Restriction) & COLR(Connected Line Identification Restriction) are used,
that calling party & called party inform to the public switching system, that they don’t want to send their
phone number to the other party.
If CLIR or COLR is requested, the PSTN restricts the transmission of CLI. If CLIR is set to ON, calling
party number is not sent to the called party. If COLR is set to ON, the connected party number is not sent
to the calling party.

Admin Programming
„ ISDN CLIR 4.1.5.13 (PGM 114 – FLEX 14)
„ ISDN COLR 4.1.5.14 (PGM 114 – FLEX 15)

2.14.4 COLP(Connected Line Identification Presentation)

Description
COLP is the same service as CLI, except that the transmitted information is the telephone number of the
answered party.

Admin Programming
„ COLP LCD Display 4.1.5.2 (PGM 114 – FLEX 2)
„ ISDN COLR 4.1.5.14 (PGM 114 – FLEX 5)
„ COLP Table 4.8.2 (PGM 201)
„ COLP Table Index 4.2.4.1 (PGM 143 – FLEX 1)

179
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.14.5 Key Pad

Description
The IP LDK system supports the key pad dialing feature. The key pad facility dialing is the feature that
the dialed digit information is sent through the key pad facility IE(Information Element) instead of the
called party IE. The key pad facility dialing is executed when pressing the programmed flexible button as
{Keypad Facility}.

Operation
1. When pressing the programmed {Keypad Facility} flexible button after seizing a CO line (ISDN), the
system will send the dialed digits as Keypad Facility IE instead of Called Party Number IE in
INFORMATION message to the network.
2. When a ISDN terminal user sends "#" using Keypad Facility IE with subsequent digits after seizing a
CO line (ISDN), the system will send all dialed digits as Keypad Facility IE to network even if the
codes are matched with internal supplementary service code (Ex. "*#" to hold CO line).
3. Keypad Facility IE Sending will be stopped automatically, when user releases the CO line (ISDN), or
pressing the programmed {Keypad Facility} flexible button during dialing digits.

Condition
1. To assign {Keypad Facility} flexible button,
[TRANS/PGM] + Flex. BTN + [TRANS/PGM] + 8 9 + [HOLD/SAVE]
2. The Keypad Facility Access Authority (ADMIN program 114 – FLEX 6) should be set to ON to use
this feature.
3. This feature can be activated by pressing the {Keypad Facility} flexible button after seizing a ISDN
CO line.
4. When this feature is activated, the system starts to send Keypad Facility IE instead of Called Party
Number IE regardless of CONNECT message from the network unless pressing {Keypad Facility}
button to deactivate it. So the system will continue to send Keypad Facility IE instead of DTMF tone
even after CONNECT message is received from the network.
5. If the Speed Dial is stored with [FLASH] as the first digit for ISDN line and the station has the Keypad
Facility Access authority, the digits after [FLASH] command will be sent as Keypad Facility and the
feature will be deactivated after sending all digits.
6. When any of the following features are encountered after the Keypad Facility is activated, the feature
will be deactivated automatically;
- Pressing function keys as [REDIAL], [TRANS/PGM], [FLASH], [HOLD/SAVE], [CONF]
- Pressing CO keys as CO, CO Group, Loop
- Pressing Flex. Buttons assigned some features as {SPEED}, {DSS}, {Call Park}, {Keypad
Facility}
- Making On-hook
- When DISCONNECT message is received from the network
7. This feature may not be operated depending on the services that require to handle two call
references at the same time after B channel connection is made as Hold & Retrieving, Conference,
etc.
8. The Speed Dial Numbers started with [FLASH] (display “D”) send saved digits as Keypad Facility IE
instead of Called Party Number IE. After sending all Speed Dial Numbers, this feature is deactivated
automatically.

180
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

9. When the system receives a Called Party Number IE during sending Keypad Facility IE, the system
will stop sending the Keypad Facility IE.
10. “#” is not printed or saved in SMDR information when sending Keypad Facility IE.
Admin Programming
„ Keypad Facility Access 4.1.5.6 (PGM 114 – FLEX 6)

2.14.6 Malicious Call ID

Description
IP LDK system is supporting ISDN-SS-MCID (ISDN Supplementary Service – Malicious Call ID). The
protocol standard about MCID is referred the EN300-130.

Operation
MCID Request BTN at Station FLEX BTN:
[Trans/PGM] + {Flex. Button} + ‘*0’ + [Hold]

MCID Request Operation Using MCID BTN:

1) A station is answered the incoming ISDN call.
2) While the station is talking or receiving the disconnected tone, press [MCID] button.
3) IP LDK system sends MCID request message to the central office.
4) According to MCID return message value, IP LDK system provides a confirmation tone in the case
of success, or a congestion tone in the case of failure.

Save and Print Out the MCID Request Result:

1) The result of MCID request is printed at SMDR print data.
2) In the case of success, ‘MT’ is printed, and in case of fail, ‘MF’ is printed.
3) If SMDR save ADMIN program is enabled, MCID result is also saved.

Condition
1. It can be used within only ISDN network that supports ISDN-SS MCID service.

Admin Programming
„ MCID Request Code 3.6.9 (PGM 109)

181
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.14.7 MSN/Sub-Addressing

Description
When several ISDN devices are connected to a single ISDN port, the numbering method of each station
is as follows;

MSN (Multiple Subscriber Number)

MSN provides the possibility for assigning multiple ISDN numbers to a single interface. It allows dialing
from a line connected to a public network directly to terminals connected to a basic access which has
subscribed to MSN number. The figure 2.14.3 describes the flow chart of MSN call process in IP LDK
system.

Sub-Addressing
The sub-addressing allows the called user to expand his addressing capacity beyond the one given by
the ISDN number.

Receive CO call via ISDN DID

Search TEL field in PGM202

Matched? Yes
(CO & Tel No)

Yes

Matched w/ Yes
PGM202/B2

Yes
General DID Flow

Search PGM231 Table

and Provide call to valid
destination Provide call to stations which
have same Tel no at MSN

Figure 2.14.3 The flow chart of MSN call process in IP LDK system

Condition
1. To use an ISDN line as MSN, the CO Service type should be set to DID/MSN.
2. The MSN can be assigned up to 250 ISDN numbers with MSN table.
3. MSN is carried from PX in CPN IE (Called Party Number Information Element).
4. If the received CPN is not matched with MSN table, the call will be operated as DID.
5. If a MSN call is received with an ISDN CO line and there are MSN table entries filled with the CO
field value, then only the MSN table entries of MSN CO programmed will be searched. But, if there is

182
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

no MSN table entry filled with the CO field value, then all MSN table entries will be searched.
6. Max. 8 devices can be connected to a S0 part. It is required to have individual ISDN terminal power
feeding to use them.
7. The sub-address is carried from PX in CPSN (Called Party Sub-address Number) IE.
8. Only one digit (0~9) can be used for sub-addressing.

Admin Programming
„ CPN Type 4.1.5.8 (PGM 114 – FLEX 8)
„ S0 Sub-address using Type 4.1.5.9 (PGM 114 – FLEX 9)
„ ISDN Calling Sub-address 4.8.1.8 (PGM 200 – FLEX 8)
„ MSN Table 4.8.3 (PGM 202)
„ Flexible DID Table 4.11.4 (PGM 231)

183
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.15 VoIP Service

2.15.1 Call by IP address

Description
This feature is established by receiving IP numbers or dialing IP numbers directly.

Operation
1. Press the desired {CO} line, {POOL}, or {LOOP} button or dial the CO line or group code
2. When hearing Dial Tone, dial the IP address of Called Party sequentially. In stead of “.”, “*” must be
dialed.
(e.g. IP Address: 156.147.3.201, Dialed number:156*147*3*201)
3. Press “#” button to call.
4. If Called Party is IP LDK system, Ring will follow the Ring Assignment(ADMIN program 144)

Condition
1. When programming Speed Dial for Direct Call, “#” must not be inserted.
(e.g. To assign 156*147*3*139 to Speed Dial, Just enter “156*147*3*139” not “156*147*3*139#”)
2. In DISA Incoming, Co Access is denied if the line seized by dialing Co Access Code is VOIB line

Admin Programming
„ CO Line Service Type 4.2.1 (PGM 140)
„ VOIB IP Setting 4.13.1 (PGM 340)

2.15.2 Call by routing table

Description
This feature is established by dialing Station number programmed in NETWORK ROUTING TABLE
(PGM324)

Operation
1. Dial the station number included in the range from start range to end range in network routing table.
2. System will select one VOIP Co line in the CO Group assigned in network routing table.
3. User will be heard Ring Back Tone if this call is possible.
4. In case of error or busy or no answer, Call will follow DID/DISA destination(ADMIN program 167).

Condition
1. For the call via Network Table, VOIB call follows the ISDN DID Call Procedure.(DID conversion Type,
Digit conversion Table, Flexible DID Table etc)
2. VOIP CO call does not follow Ring Assignment even if DID/DISA destinations are set to attendant.
The call just will be transferred to Attendant directly.
3. If network routing table have more than one table entries that is the same routing number but the

184
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

destination is different, the call is routed to the destination of the front entry of network routing table.
4. To transfer the incoming call to other system via VOIB, transferring user must not drop the call before
hearing Ring Back Tone.
5. CLIP and COLP are not applied in VOIP CO Call.

Admin Programming
„ CO Line Service Type 4.2.1 (PGM 140) –ISDN DID/MSN
„ VOIB IP Setting 4.13.1 (PGM 340)
„ DID Conversion Type 4.2.4.4 (PGM143 – FLEX 4)
„ Flexible DID Table 4.11.4 (PGM231) – (used in case of DID Conversion Type 2)
„ Networking CO Group 4.12.3.1 (PGM322 – FLEX 1)
„ Networking Routing Table 4.12.4 (PGM324)

185
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.16 QSIG over ISDN & H.450 over IP

Description
The IP LDK system supports the networking feature. In the IP LDK system, the networking is defined the
software feature that supports the service of QSIG over ISDN and H.450 over IP(Internet Protocol).
The networking system can link telephone systems together so that they behave like unified
communication network, providing service transparency, cost-efficiency and adaptability to your
organization’s needs.
The system provides interconnection in a variety of corporate network configurations with QSIG over
ISDN and H.450 over IP.

„ Network Configurations
The system can support various network configurations via Internet or ISDN-PRI, and up to 72 systems
(including itself) can be combined on the network. The figure 2.16.1 describes the example of QSIG
over ISDN networking configuration with BLF(Busy Lamp Field: refer to Section 2.16.19) manager.

LAN
MPB

PRI-D

PRI-D PRI-D
ISDN
MPB MPB
PRI-D
LAN LAN

MPB
LAN

BLF Manager

Figure 2.16.1 QSIG over ISDN networking configuration with BLF manager

186
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

The figure 2.16.2 describes the example of H.450 over IP networking configuration with BLF manager.

MPB VoIP
LAN
LAN LAN

MPB MPB

VoIP IP VoIP

LAN
MPB VoIP

BLF Manager

Figure 2.16.2 H.450 over IP networking configuration with BLF manager

„ Networking Protocols
The system can support two kinds of standard protocol – QSIG over ISDN and H.450 over IP – for the
basic networking functions and the proprietary protocol for the advanced networking functions.
notice) QSIG over BRI connection is not supported.
¾ QSIG standard protocol via ISDN PRI
ETS 300 237 / 238 / 256 / 257 / 260 / 261 / 361 / 362 / 363 / 364
¾ IP standard protocolH.323 for Call Control, H.450.1 ~ H.450.12
¾ LG Proprietary protocol
¾ For advanced Function

„ Requirement
To use the networking features, the software lock-key installation is required. There are two types of
software lock-key that related the networking protocols. One is for QSIG based networking protocol, and
another is for VOIP based networking protocol. Each IP LDK system has own unique software lock-key.
To get the software lock-key, contact the distributor of IP LDK system.

„ Numbering Plan
Unified Dialing Plan (UDP) : In the IP LDK networking system, the UDP numbering plan is used. In the
UDP networking, the stations of each system can have a unique station number from 2 digits up to 7
digits. The unique station number is assigned according to the numbering plan of each IP LDK system.
The figure 2.16.3 describes the networking configuration that is configured by UDP numbering plan. In
this figure, the symbol of ‘x’ represents the ranged digit as ‘0 ~ 9’.

187
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Station Station
4xxx 2xxx

IP or ISDN

Station Station
5xxx 3xxx

Figure 2.16.3 The networking configuration via UDP numbering plan.

„ Automatic Routing Service

A dialed number is analyzed and routed to get the right destination according to the Net numbering
table. Furthermore, the system supports an alternative route when the main path is failed. In order to
maximize the use of networking and efficiency of the private network, net numbering table provides a
simple accessibility to the end user.

188
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.16.1 Net Call

Description
In the networking configuration, a station user can make a call to a station in other networking systems
by dialing only a station number just as an intercom call within the same system. This service is defined
as ‘NET CALL’. The figure 2.16.4 describes the net call operation in VOIP networking connection.

Call Flow

Step Flow
1 Station 101 dials 202 that is a station number of other system.
2 System searches Networking Numbering Table.
3 2** matches 202, (2** means ‘200 ~ 299’)
System gets the destination IP address that is assigned for station 202.
4
(For example 10.152.32.67 or 192.168.1.1)
5 VoIP net call goes to destination IP
6 Ringing at the exact destination (202)
7 Destination (202) answers
8 Conversation
* Note : During conversation, all telephony features are available.
For example, call transfer, hold, conference and etc

Figure 2.16.4 The net call operation in VOIP networking connection

189
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Operation
1. To make a net call, lift handset or press the [MON] button. The system provides a user with a dial
tone.
2. Dial the station number of other networking systems, or if station has the [NET DSS] button that
contains the net call station number, then the net call is made by pressing the [NET DSS] button.
3. The station seizes the network CO line according to the net routing table, and the system sends a
digit stream that is modified by the net routing table.
4. The called system receives a digit stream that is sent by calling system, and analyzes it using the net
routing table to determine the right destination station. The destination station receives a ringing
signal.
5. The LED of [COL] flexible button, that is represent the CO line for net call, will be extinguished when
the net call is cleared.

Condition
1. To make a net call, like to intercom call, station user must dial the destination station number without
seizing a CO line.
2. After station user makes a net call, the IP LDK system seizes a idle CO line to send the net call
request to the destination station. But if there is no selectable idle CO line, then user hears an error
tone .
3. The received net call is always ringing as the terminal answer mode, regardless the intercom answer
mode setting(Hands-free/Terminal/Privacy).
4. When system detects the fatal error from the network, system sends the digit stream to the network
using the alternate speed dial bin. In this case, the call is not a networking call.
5. The Net Call is also applied CO Call Restriction Timer (ADMIN program 180 – FLEX 17).

ADMIN Programming
„ Networking Basic Attribute 4.12.1 (PGM 320)
„ Networking CO Line Attribute 4.12.3 (PGM 322)
„ Network Routing Table(Numbering Plan) 4.12.4 (PGM 324)

[Networking ADMIN Example]

1) Situation 1 (QSIG Networking between two LDK systems)

Two IP LDK-300 systems A and B are connected through PRIB. if the customer want to program the
networking between two IP LDK systems, the step is as follows :

First, to enable the networking feature, the ADMIN program 320 – FLEX 1 must be set to ON. at each
system. If the QSIG networking lock-key software is not installed, this ADMIN program can not be
enabled.

Second, to satisfy the UDP condition, the ADMIN program of ‘FLEXIBLE STATION NUMBERING PLAN’
(PGM 105) must be programmed at each system. At this ADMIN program, the station number range of
system A can be changed from 100 to 199 (100 ~ 199), and system B’s also can be changed from 200
to 299 (200 ~ 299). The changed station number must not be conflicted with the flexible number

190
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

plan code of each system. (For example, if system A has a flexible numbering code ‘2’ as PICK-UP
code, then station number, that is started by digit ‘2’, can not be used).
¾ At system A : Enter ADMIN program 105 + [SPEED] + ‘100’ + ‘199’ + [HOLD]
¾ At system B : Enter ADMIN program 105 + [SPEED] + ‘200’ + ‘299’ + [HOLD]
Third, to configure the networking CO line connection, the ADMIN program of ‘CO SERVICE TYPE’
(PGM 140), ‘DID CONVERSION TYPE’ (PGM 143 – FLEX 4), ‘DID RECEIVE DIGIT’ & ‘DID DIGIT
MASK’ (PGM 146 – FLEX 5 & 6), ‘FLEXIBLE DID TABLE’ (PGM 231), ‘NET CO GROUP’ & ‘NET CO
TYPE’ (PGM 322 – FLEX 1 & 4) must be programmed appropriately at each system. The networking
CO line is defined that it connects the networking systems and it is used for the networking signaling
message and voice path. To use the networking CO line, the service type must be set to DID/MSN at
ADMIN program 140. And to receive the net call digit information correctly, the appropriate DID
conversion type must be set at ADMIN program 143 – FLEX 4. In this example, DID TYPE 1 satisfies
the situation. To configure the net CO line connection, the net CO group and type must be set to ‘01’
and ‘NET’ at ADMIN program 322 – FLEX 1 & 4.

At system A & B

PGM RANGE ITEM VALUE

140 about the PRIB CO range CO service type DID/MSN (3)

PGM RANGE FLEX ITEM VALUE

143 about the PRIB CO range 4 DID conversion type 1

PGM RANGE FLEX ITEM VALUE

1 Net CO group 01
322 about the PRIB CO range
4 Net CO type NET(1)

Fourth, to configure the UDP networking numbering plan, the ADMIN program of ‘NET NUMBERING
PLAN TABLE’ (PGM 324) must be programmed at each system. In this example, two kinds of net
numbering plan data must be programmed. The one is the station number of own system, and another
is the station number of another networking system.
In the view of system A, it has the station number ‘100 ~ 199’. So, to represent this, ‘1#¼¼’ must be set
at ADMIN program 324 – FLEX 2. The symbol of ‘#’ has the meaning of own station number. This
symbol must be inserted in front of the first ‘¼’ symbol. And to represent to another system’s station
number ‘200 ~ 299’, ‘2¼¼’ must be set at another table entry of ADMIN program 324 – FLEX 2.
In the view of system B, the same configuration is applied, except switching of the own station number
and opposite station number.

At system A

PGM BIN FLEX ITEM VALUE

1 System usage NET(0)
00 2 Numbering plan code 1#¼¼
3 Numbering plan CO group 00
324
1 System usage NET(0)
01 2 Numbering plan code 2¼¼
3 Numbering plan CO group 01

191
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

At system B

PGM BIN FLEX ITEM VALUE

1 System usage NET(0)
00 2 Numbering plan code 2#¼¼
3 Numbering plan CO group 00
324
1 System usage NET(0)
01 2 Numbering plan code 1¼¼
3 Numbering plan CO group 01

2) Situation 2 (VOIP Networking between two LDK systems)

Two IP LDK-300 systems A and B are connected through VOIB. And the customer want to program the
networking between two IP LDK systems as follows.
In the VOIP networking case, the ADMIN programming is perfectly same as QSIG networking case,
except one thing. In the VOIP network, the destination IP address is needed to route. So, in this case,
the IP address of destination system’s VOIB must be set at ADMIN program 324 – FLEX button 4.
The ADMIN program to configure the VOIP networking between system A & B are summarized like
below.
¾ At system A : Enter ADMIN program 105 + [SPEED] + ‘100’ + ‘199’ + [HOLD]
¾ At system B : Enter ADMIN program 105 + [SPEED] + ‘200’ + ‘299’ + [HOLD]

At system A & B

PGM RANGE ITEM VALUE

140 about the VOIB CO range CO service type DID/MSN (3)

PGM RANGE FLEX ITEM VALUE

143 about the VOIB CO range 4 DID conversion type 1

PGM RANGE FLEX ITEM VALUE

1 Net CO group 01
322 about the VOIB CO range
4 Net CO type NET(1)

At system A

PGM BIN FLEX ITEM VALUE

324 1 System usage NET(0)
2 Numbering plan code 1#¼¼
00
3 Numbering plan CO group 00
4 VOIP Called Party Information 1/2/3/4 0.0.0.0
01 1 System usage NET(0)
2 Numbering plan code 2¼¼

192
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

3 Numbering plan CO group 01

VOIB IP address of
4 VOIP CPN Information 1/2/3/4(note)
system B
note) At the ADMIN program – FLEX 4, maximum 4 VOIP CPN information can be set. The
reason of multiple VOIP CPN is to assign the different IP address per each VOIB, when the
destination networking system has multiple VOIB.
At system B

PGM BIN FLEX ITEM VALUE

1 System usage NET(0)
2 Numbering plan code 2#¼¼
00
3 Numbering plan CO group 00
4 VOIP Called Party Information 1/2/3/4 0.0.0.0
324 1 System usage NET(0)
2 Numbering plan code 1¼¼
01 3 Numbering plan CO group 01
VOIB IP address of
4 VOIP Called Party Information 1/2/3/4
system A

2.16.2 Identification Service

Description
Between the networking systems, the name of station can be transmitted via the networking signaling
messages. In the IP LDK system, the name of station can be programmed at the station program menu
‘74’ ([Trans/PGM] + ‘74’). CNIP(Calling Name Identification Presentation) is defined that the name of
station is transmitted when an outgoing call is made. And CONP(connected Name identification
Presentation) is defined that the name of station is transmitted when an incoming call is answered. If the
opposite side networking system is received the name of station, then it is displayed on LCD.

Operation
CNIP and CONP operation is executed whenever the station of networking system makes a call and it
answers the incoming call.

Condition
1. To used CNIP and CONP service, the name of station and the related ADMIN program 320 – FLEX 3
& 4 must be set properly.

Admin Programming
„ Networking CNIP Enable 4.12.1.3 (PGM 320 – FLEX 3)
„ Networking CONP Enable 4.12.1.4 (PGM 320 – FLEX 4)

193
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.16.3 Net Transfer

Description
A station user of the networking system can use the net transfer service. The net transfer is the call
transfer service that is using the net call. It can transfer any kind of call to a station in other systems by
pressing [TRANS/PGM] button and dialing the station number. The executive operation of net transfer is
the same as the call transfer service within the same system. And it also supports the two kinds of
transfer modes; screened transfer mode and unscreened transfer mode (see Ref.1).

Engineering notice) There are defined two kinds of standard net transfer signaling method in QSIG and
H.450 protocol specification; TRANSFER BY JOIN and TRANSFER BY REROUTING. The main
difference is how the connecting path among the transferring, transferred, transferred-to stations controls.

The term of transferred station is the call originator. In the figure 2.16.5, the outside caller is the
transferred station.
The term of transferred-to station is the new destination of the transferred call. In the figure 2.16.5, the
station 202 is the transferred-to station.
And the term of transferring station is a station transferring a call with transferred station, to transferred-to
station. In the figure 2.16.5, the station 100 is the transferring station.

In case of TRANSFER BY JOIN, additional connecting path will be needed to transfer the call to another
station. In case of TRANSFER BY REROUTING, new connecting path is used to transfer the call and old
connecting path of transferring station will be cleared.
LDK system supports both TRANSFER BY JOIN and TRANSFER BY REROUTING. The signaling
method can be selected by ADMIN program 321 – FLEX 1.

The figure 2.16.5 describes the unscreened net transfer operation on the networking connection
environment. At the first step, the outside caller dials the telephone number of station 100. And station
100 is receiving the incoming ring at the second step. At the third step, station 100 answers and it is
requested the call transfer to the station 202 that is located the another networking system. To execute
the net transfer, the station 100 presses [TRANS/PGM] button and dials ‘202’. After hearing ring back
tone, station 100 goes idle. Station 202 receives the net transfer ring and answers at the fifth step.

194
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Call Flow
Step Flow
1 Outside Caller dials a station in the networking system
2 Call comes in, the station 100 receive a ring.
3 Station 100 answers and converse
Step 1 ~ 2 4 Station 100 transfers the call to 202,and goes idle
5 Station 202 rings and answers
6 Conversation

PSTN or ISDN

Step 3 Step 6

Internet
Step 4
100

Step 5
202

Figure 2.16.5 Unscreened net transfer operation on networking connection environment

Operation
Screened transfer
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button at a transferring station during conversation. The transferred call
is placed on EXCLUSIVE HOLD(see Ref.2).
2. At the transferring station, dial the station number of another networking system to transfer the
call. The transferred-to station of another system receives a ring signal.
3. When the transferred-to station answers, the voice path is connected between the transferring and
the transferred-to stations.

195
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Both stations can make a conversation each other, but the held transferred caller is still in waiting
for an answer.
4. The transferred caller and the transferred-to station can make a conversation when the
transferring station hangs up.

Unscreened transfer
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button at a station during conversation. The transferred call is placed on
EXCLUSIVE HOLD(see Ref.2).
2. At the transferring station, dial the station number of another networking system to transfer the
call, and go on-hook. The transferring station goes idle, and the transferred-to station of another
system receives a ring signal.
3. The transferred caller and the transferred-to station can make a conversation when the
transferred-to station answers the ringing.

Condition
1. If both transferred stations and transferred-to stations are located in the same system, the networking
CO line that is used for transferring voice path is not needed. That is, the transfer call will be setup as
intercom call.
2. The net transfer will be canceled when transferring station user presses the flashing [TRANS/PGM]
button.
3. After the transferring station goes on-hook, the net transfer call doesn’t recall to the transferring
station though the transferred-to station doesn’t answer for long time.
4. If there is no idle networking CO line path for net transfer, the error tone will be heard.
5. If the call is transferred to a busy station, the busy tone will be heard.

Reference
1. Screened and unscreened transfer mode : 2.3.2
2. Exclusive hold : 2.3.3

Admin Programming
„ Networking Basic Attribute 4.12.1 (PGM 320)
„ Networking Transfer Mode 4.12.2.1 (PGM 321 – FLEX 1)
„ Networking CO Line Attribute 4.12.3 (PGM 322)
„ Network Routing Table(Numbering Plan) 4.12.4 (PGM 324)

196
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.16.4 Net Call Forward - Unconditional

Description
It is possible for a user to forward his station remotely and immediately over the network when it receives
a ring signal.

Engineering notice)
There are two kinds of standard net call forward signaling method in QSIG and H.450 protocol
specification defined; JOIN and REROUTING. The main difference is how the connecting path among the
forwarding, forwarded, forwarded-to stations controls.
The term of forwarded station is the call originator. The forwarded station is rerouted to the forwarded-to
station by forwarding station. In the figure 2.16.6, the outside caller is the forwarded station.
The term of forwarded-to station is the new destination of the forwarded call. In the figure 2.16.6, the
station 202 is the forwarded-to station.
And the term of forwarding station is a station forwarding a call, to forwarded-to station. In the figure
2.16.6, the station 100 is the forwarding station.
IP LDK system supports both JOIN and REROUTING. The signaling method can be selected by ADMIN
program 321 – FLEX 1.

The figure 2.16.6 describes the unconditional net call forward operation on the networking connection
environment. At the first step, the station 100 is set the unconditional net call forward to the forwarded-to
destination 202. At the second step, the outside caller is dialed the telephone number of station 100. At
the third step, the networking system of station 100 is forwarding the incoming call to station 202, that is
located the another networking system. At the fourth step, station 202 is receiving a ring signal from the
outside caller. After answering, station 202 can make a conversion with the call forwarded caller at the
fifth step.

197
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Call Flow
Step Flow
1 Station 100 set forward to 202
Step 2 2 Outside Caller dials in Station 100
3 Call is forwarding to Station 202
4 Station 202 rings instead of 100.
5 Conversation

PSTN or ISDN

Step 5

Step 1
Internet
100 Step 3

202
Step 4

Figure 2.16.6 The unconditional net call forward operation on the

networking connection environment

Operation
To activate Net Call Forward
1. Press the [MON] button and the [DND/FOR] button
2. Dial Net Call Forward code “1”, and dial the station number of another networking system.
The [DND/FOR] button will be flashing and a confirmation tone will be provided.
3. If there is incoming call to the net call unconditional forwarding station, the call is routed to a
forwarded-to station immediately, and the forwarded-to station is ringing.
4. When the forwarded-to station is answered, the call forwarded and forwarded-to station can make
a conversation.

198
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

To deactivate Net Call Forward

1. Press the [DND/FOR] button when it is flashing.
The [DND/FOR] button will be extinguished.

Condition
1. If both call forwarded stations and call forwarded-to stations are located in the same system, the
networking path CO line that is used for forward voice path is not needed. That is, the forwarded call
will be setup as intercom call.
2. At the forwarding system, it does not check the status of the forwarded-to station, that is in DND,
CFW or Empty, when it set the net call forward.

Admin Programming
„ Call Forward Attribute 4.1.2.2 (PGM 111 – FLEX 2)
„ Networking Basic Attribute 4.12.1 (PGM 320)
„ Networking Transfer Mode 4.12.2.1 (PGM 321 – FLEX 1)
„ Networking CO Line Attribute 4.12.3 (PGM 322)
„ Network Routing Table(Numbering Plan) 4.12.4 (PGM 324)

199
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.16.5 Net Call Forward - Busy

Description
It is possible for a user to forward his station remotely over the network when it is busy.

Engineering notice)
There are two kinds of standard net call forward signaling method in QSIG and H.450 protocol
specification defined; JOIN and REROUTING. The main difference is how the connecting path among the
forwarding, forwarded, forwarded-to stations controls.
The term of forwarded station is the call originator. The forwarded station is rerouted to the forwarded-to
station by forwarding station.
The term of forwarded-to station is the new destination of the forwarded call.
And the term of forwarding station is a station forwarding a call, to forwarded-to station.
IP LDK system supports both JOIN and REROUTING. The signaling method can be selected by ADMIN
program 321 – FLEX 1.

Operation
To activate Net Call Forward
1. Press the [MON] button and the [DND/FOR] button
2. Dial Net Call Forward code “2”, and dial the station number of another networking system.
The [DND/FOR] button will be flashing and a confirmation tone will be provided.
3. If there is incoming call to the net call busy forwarding station, the call is routed to a forwarded-to
station when the called station is busy, and the forwarded-to station is ringing.
4. When the forwarded-to station is answered, the call forwarded and forwarded-to station can make
a conversation.

To deactivate Net Call Forward

1. Press the [DND/FOR] button when it is flashing.
The [DND/FOR] button will be extinguished.

Condition
1. If both of call forwarded and forwarded-to stations are located in the same system, the networking
path CO line is not needed that is used for forward voice path. That is, the forwarded call will be
setup as intercom call.
2. At the forwarding system, it does not check the status of the forwarded-to station, that is in DND,
CFW or Empty, when it set the net call forward.

Admin Programming
„ Call Forward Attribute 4.1.2.2 (PGM 111 – FLEX 2)
„ Networking Basic Attribute 4.12.1 (PGM 320)
„ Networking Transfer Mode 4.12.2.1 (PGM 321 – FLEX 1)

200
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

„ Networking CO Line Attribute 4.12.3 (PGM 322)

„ Network Routing Table(Numbering Plan) 4.12.4 (PGM 324)

2.16.6 Net Call Forward – Busy / No Answer

Description
It is possible for a user to forward his station remotely over the network when it does not answer within
the CFW NO ANS(Call Forward No Answer) Timer or busy.

Engineering notice)
There are two kinds of standard net call forward signaling method in QSIG and H.450 protocol
specification defined; JOIN and REROUTING. The main difference is how the connecting path among the
forwarding, forwarded, forwarded-to stations controls.
The term of forwarded station is the call originator. The forwarded station is rerouted to the forwarded-to
station by forwarding station.
The term of forwarded-to station is the new destination of the forwarded call.
And the term of forwarding station is a station forwarding a call, to forwarded-to station.
IP LDK system supports both JOIN and REROUTING. The signaling method can be selected by ADMIN
program 321 – FLEX 1.

Operation
To activate Net Call Forward
1. Press the [MON] button and the [DND/FOR] button
2. Dial Net Call Forward code “4”, and dial the station number of another networking system. The
[DND/FOR] button will be flashing and a confirmation tone will be provided.
3. If there is an incoming call to the net call busy/no answer forwarding station, the call is routed to a
forwarded-to station, when the called station is busy or does not answer within a CFW NO ANS
timer, and the forwarded-to station is ringing.
4. When the forwarded-to station is answered, the call forwarded and forwarded-to station can make
a conversation.

To deactivate Net Call Forward

1. Press the [DND/FOR] button when it is flashing.
The [DND/FOR] button will be extinguished.

Condition
1. If both of call forwarded and forwarded-to stations are located in the same system, the networking
path CO line is not needed that is used for forward voice path. That is, the forwarded call will be
setup as intercom call.
2. At the forwarding system, it does not check the status of the forwarded-to station, that is in DND,
CFW or Empty, when it set the net call forward.

Admin Programming
„ Call Forward Attribute 4.1.2.2 (PGM 111 – FLEX 2)
„ Networking Basic Attribute 4.12.1 (PGM 320)

201
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

„ Networking Transfer Mode 4.12.2.1 (PGM 321 – FLEX 1)

„ Networking CO Line Attribute 4.12.3 (PGM 322)
„ Network Routing Table(Numbering Plan) 4.12.4 (PGM 324)

2.16.7 Net Call Forward – No Answer

Description
It is possible for a user to forward his station remotely over the network when it does not answer within
the CFW NO ANS(Call Forward No Answer) Timer.

Engineering notice)
There are two kinds of standard net call forward signaling method in QSIG and H.450 protocol
specification defined; JOIN and REROUTING. The main difference is how the connecting path among
the forwarding, forwarded, forwarded-to stations controls.
The term of forwarded station is the call originator. The forwarded station is rerouted to the forwarded-to
station by forwarding station.
The term of forwarded-to station is the new destination of the forwarded call.
And the term of forwarding station is a station forwarding a call, to forwarded-to station.
IP LDK system supports both JOIN and REROUTING. The signaling method can be selected by ADMIN
program 321 – FLEX 1.

Operation
To activate Net Call Forward
1. Press the [MON] button and the [DND/FOR] button
2. Dial Net Call Forward code “3”, and dial the station number of another networking system. The
[DND/FOR] button will be flashing and a confirmation tone will be provided.
3. If there is an incoming call to the net call no answer forwarding station, the call is routed to a
forwarded-to station, when the called station does not answer within a CFW NO ANS timer, and
the forwarded-to station is ringing.
4. When the forwarded-to station is answered, the call forwarded and forwarded-to station can make
a conversation.

To deactivate Net Call Forward

1. Press the [DND/FOR] button when it is flashing.
The [DND/FOR] button will be extinguished.

Condition
1. If both of call forwarded and forwarded-to stations are located in the same system, the networking
path CO line is not needed that is used for forward voice path. That is, the forwarded call will be
setup as intercom call.
2. At the forwarding system, it does not check the status of the forwarded-to station, that is in DND,
CFW or Empty, when it set the net call forward.

Admin Programming
„ Call Forward Attribute 4.1.2.2 (PGM 111 – FLEX 2)
„ Networking Basic Attribute 4.12.1 (PGM 320)

202
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

„ Networking Transfer Mode 4.12.2.1 (PGM 321 – FLEX 1)

„ Networking CO Line Attribute 4.12.3 (PGM 322)
„ Network Routing Table(Numbering Plan) 4.12.4 (PGM 324)

2.16.8 Net Conference

Description
The net conference is the same service as the conference that is described at Section 2.7(see Ref.1),
except that the networking station can be assigned the conference member.

Operation
To make a Net Conference
1. At the conference master station, press the [CONF] button, during conversation through the
network call. The connected call is on hold and an intercom dial tone is provided.
2. Make a Net Call to a station of other networking system.
3. At the conference master station, press the [CONF] button when second called station is
answered. The second call is on hold and an ICM dial tone is provided.
4. At the conference master station, press the [CONF] button again. Then the conference voice path
to all members are connected, and all members can make a conversation.

To clear a Net Conference

1. Any station in the net conference hangs up during the conference.
The net conference will be ended and the network path will be cleared.

Condition
1. IP phone can not be a master station of the Net Conference.
Engineering notice)
When IP phone sends Invite Setup to Non-IP phone, this message will be rejected.
When Non IP phone is going to invite IP phone, normal Setup message should send to the IP
phone instead of Invite Setup message.

Reference
1. Conference : 2.7

Admin Programming
„ Networking Basic Attribute 4.12.1 (PGM 320)
„ Network Routing Table(Numbering Plan) 4.12.4 (PGM 324)

203
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.16.9 Call Offer

Description
The CALL OFFER is the same service as the CAMP-ON that is described at Section 2.4.5(see Ref.1),
except that the camp on is executed on the networking connection environment. The term of CALL
OFFER is used at QSIG and H.450 protocol standard specification.

When a station user make a net call to a busy station that is located on other networking system, busy
tone is heard. At that time, the caller can give a signal to the busy station by using of CALL OFFER
service. The busy station (through the receiver or on speakerphone) is notified of the call waiting by a
camp-on tone and flashing LED of the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

The figure 2.16.7 describes the call offer operation on the networking connection environment. At the first
step, the station 100 makes a net call to the busy station 202, but it hears the busy tone. To execute the
call offer service, the station 100 dials the camp-on code ‘¼’, at the second step. The call offer request is
sent to station 202, and it receives a camp-on signal tone, at the third and fourth steps. Two stations can
make a conversation, when the station 202 is pressing the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Step 1
Internet

Step 2 Step 3
100

Step 5
BUSY

Step 4 202
Call Flow
Step Flow
1 Station 100 dials 202, but hears BUSY tone
2 100 dials camp-on code “*”
3 Call is routed to Station 202
4 Station 202 gets camp-on signaling
5 Conversation by pressing Hold button

204
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Figure 2.16.7 The call offer operation on the networking connection environment

Operation
To activate Call Offer
1. Dial a busy station number of another networking system. The caller hears a busy tone.
2. Press the camp-on code ‘¼’ during hearing a busy tone. The busy station receives an off-hook
muted ring. The calling station hears a ring-back tone instead of a busy-tone.
To answer the Call Offer
1. Press the flashing CO line button while receiving a muted ring.
Or,
1. The muted ring is changed to normal CO ring when you go on-hook state. Then station user can
answer the offered call.

Condition
1. Call Offer is only applied to a station that is in talk status.
2. During a conference or paging, call offer is not activated.
3. System does not support the path reservation mode of standard QSIG specification.

Reference
1. Camp On : 2.4.5

Admin Programming
„ Networking Basic Attribute 4.12.1 (PGM 320)

205
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.16.10 Call Completion

Description
The call completion is the same service as the call back that is described at Section 2.4.16(see Ref.1),
except that this service is executed on the networking connection environment. The term of call
completion is used at QSIG and H.450 protocol standard specification.

The call completion is separated into two types, CCBS(Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers) and
CCNR(Completion of Calls on No Reply).

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers (CCBS) :

If a station makes a net call to a busy station of another networking system, it will hear a busy tone. A
caller station can be notified when the busy station of another networking system becomes idle. If the
station wants to make a call to the destination on that notification, the new net call is made by lifting
receiver or pressing [MON] button.

Completion of Calls on No Reply (CCNR) :

If a station makes a net call to a absent user station of another networking system, it will be not answered.
The caller can be notified when CCNR requested station is used.

Currently, IP LDK system only supports the CCBS service.

The figure 2.16.8 describes the CCBS operation on the networking connection environment. At the first
step, the station 100 makes a net call to the busy station 202, but it hears the busy tone. To execute the
CCBS service, the station 100 presses the [CALLBK] button, at the second step. After confirmation tone,
the station 100 goes idle automatically. The station 100 is receiving the call back ring when the station
202 goes idle, at the third step. At the fourth step, the new net call request is send to the station 202,
when station 100 lift a receiver. Two stations can make a conversation, when the station 202 is answered.

Step 1
Step 2
Internet
Step 3
100
Step 4

Step 5 BUSY

202
206
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Call Flow
Step Flow
1 Station 100 dials 202, but hears BUSY tone
2 Station 100 press [CALL BK] button, and goes to IDLE
3 Call-back ring to station 100 when 202 is IDLE
4 Station 100 lifts handset, then station 202 is ringing
5 Conversation

Figure 2.16.8 The CCBS operation on the networking connection environment

Operation
To make CCBS (Call Back)
1. Dial the station of another networking system that is busy.
2. Press the [CALLBK] button while a busy tone is provided. The call is cleared after a confirmation
tone.
3. The busy station goes to Idle, the originator receives a call-back ring.
4. When the originator answers to the call-back ring, a new call will be activated to the calling station.

Condition
1. CCBS is not supported for ISDN terminal. But some ISDN terminal that is guarantied by LG-Nortel
may activate CCBS.
2. Stand-alone IP Phone that supports H.450 can activate the Call Completion feature.
3. A station can leave or have only one callback message, and a new request will cancel the previous
callback message.
4. A voice message cannot be left even though the VMIB is installed in a local system.
5. When the originator does not answer the call back ring within net timer, the call will be cleared.
6. There are two modes : One is connection mode and the other is disconnection mode. This can be
selectable at ADMIN program 320 – FLEX button 8.

References
1. Call Back : 2.4.16

Admin Programming
„ Networking Basic Attribute 4.12.1 (PGM 320 – FLEX 8)

2.16.11 Do-Not-Disturb (DND)

Description
A call to a station in DND mode can be denied though it is arrived from a station of other systems. The
calling party will hear a busy tone.

Operation
1. Go to DND mode at a station.
2. From a station of other system, dial the station number in DND mode. The caller hears a busy tone
with LCD display through the network. The DND station does not receive any ring signal.

Condition

207
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

1. When a station is in DND mode, the [NET DSS] of DND station is flashing if BLF(Busy Lamp Field)
manager(see Ref.1) is activated.

Reference
1. BLF Manager : 2.16.19

Admin Programming
„ DND Attribute 4.1.2.3 (PGM 111 – FLEX 3)
2.16.12 CO Transit - In
Description
The CO TRANSIT-IN is the net call routing service about the incoming DID/MSN call. The incoming DID
call can reroute to the net call destination in another networking system.

The figure 2.16.9 describes the CO TRANSIT-IN operation on the networking connection environment. At
the first step, the outside caller makes a DID call to the station 202, so the DID call request is arrived at
the master system. The networking system of station 202 is not connected to PSTN directly, but it can be
connected to PSTN through the another networking system(master system) as illustrated figure 2.16.8.
At the second step, the master system checks the received DID call destination. If the DID destination is
matched with a station of system, the DID call is routed to the station. But, if the DID destination is not
matched, the master system is search the network numbering plan table(see Ref.1), whether the
destination is matched with a station of the registered another networking system. In this case, the
master system transfers the received DID call request to the found networking system, like to the third
step. At the fourth step, the CO transit-in DID call is ringing to the station 202. The caller can make a
conversation when the station 202 is answered.

Call Flow
Step Flow
1 Outside Caller dials a station in slave system
Step 1 Call comes in master system and search networking
2
numbering plan table.
Master transfers the call request to the found networking
3
system.
4 Call is ringing to station 202
PSTN or ISDN 5 Conversation

Step 2

Step 5

Step 3 Internet

Additional Programming
Master :
PGM 143 FLEX 4 (DID Conversion Type) = 208
2
PGM 231 (Flexible DID Table) = Assign Slave
extension
Step 4
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Figure 2.16.9 The CO transit-in operation on the networking connection environment

Operation
1. A DID call is arrived from PABX.
2. Network CO line is seized automatically, and the call is transferred to the network destination.
The destination receives the ringing with CLI from PABX.
The outside user still hears a ring-back tone.
3. Both the outside user and the destination station can make a conversation when the destination
station answers the ringing.

Condition
1. Any timer is not assigned to the transit CO line.
2. Outside caller hears busy tone when a networking path is not available during transit.

Reference
1. Network Numbering Plan Table : 4.12.4

Admin Programming
„ Network Routing Table(Numbering Plan) 4.12.4 (PGM 324)

209
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.16.13 CO Transit - Out

Description
The CO TRANSIT-OUT is the CO line lend service that is executed by the request of the slave
networking system that want to connect PSTN. This service can increase the using efficiency of CO line
and reduce call costs by routing outgoing CO calls to the nearest appropriate point on the network. The
system should provide sufficient digit translation and string analysis options to enable the switch to route
the call correctly.

The figure 2.16.10 describes the CO TRANSIT-OUT operation on the networking connection
environment.
At the first step, the station 202 of the slave system dials the CO TRANSIT-OUT code, that is registered
the network numbering plan table(ADMIN program 324). The term of CO TARNSIT-OUT code is that a
station of slave system can seize the PSTN CO line of the master system.
At the second step, the slave system seizes a CO line that is preprogrammed for transmitting the CO
TRANSIT-OUT code to the master system. And the dialed code is transmitted to the master system.
At the third step, the master system seizes a CO line that is preprogrammed to serve the lend request by
the CO TRANSIT-OUT code. After seizing the PSTN CO line, the master system sends the digit
information to PSTN that is dialed from the station of the slave system.
At the fourth step, the called user of PSTN receives the ring. The caller and called users can make a
conversation when the called user is answered.

Call Flow
Step Flow
1 Station 202 dials CO transit code of PGM 324
2 Dialed digit goes to master system
Step 4 3 Master sizes the real PX CO line and dials
4 Outside party rings
5 Conversation

PSTN or ISDN

Step 3

Step 5

Internet
Step 2

210
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Additional Programming
Master :
PGM 322 BTN 1 (Net Col Group) = 02 for PSTN Lines
BTN 4 (Net CO Type) = PSTN
PGM 324 BIN 10
FLEX 1 (Usage) = PSTN
FLEX 2 (Net Code) = 9 (transit code) ▶ Delete 1st CO Group access code
FLEX 3 (Net CO Group) = 02
Slave :
PGM 324 BIN 10
FLEX 1 (Usage) = PSTN
FLEX 2 (Net Code) = 9 (transit code) ▶ Delete 1st CO Group access code
FLEX 3 (Net CO Group) = 01
FLEX 4 (CPN) = 192.168.23.21
FLEX 7 (DGT Repeat) = YES
Figure 2.16.10 The CO TRANSIT-OUT operation on the networking connection environment

Operation
1. A station of slave system dials the CO TRANSIT-OUT code.
2. The slave system seizes a CO line that is preprogrammed for transmitting the CO TRANSIT-OUT
code to the master system
3. According to the CO Access Method (PGm160/BTN3) of the master system, it seizes a CO line that
is preprogrammed to serve the lend request by the CO TRANSIT-OUT code.
4. After seizing the PSTN CO line, the master system sends the digit information to PSTN that is dialed
from the station of the slave system.
5. The called user of PSTN receives the ring. The caller and called users can make a conversation,
when the called user is answered.

Condition
1. To use CO transit-out service, the slave system user must dial CO transit-out code. If it press CO line
button, the CO transit-out service doesn’t executed.
2. The station COS of slave system is applied for toll restriction.
3. At the master system, the attendant must have the CO access authority about the public connection.
4. For CO transit out, any code will be available using NET routing table (PGM 324). But, if there is a
conflict between NET routing table and system numbering plan, system numbering plan has high
priority.
5. If the CO transit-out code is programmed at an entry of the network numbering plan table, then the
type value of this entry must be set to PSTN (ADMIN program 324 – FLEX 1).
6. If the slave system isn’t connected to the master system directly, the CO transit-out code can be
transmitted through other networking systems transparently by setting the ADMIN program 324 –

211
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

FLEX 7 at each networking systems.

7. At the master system, the PSTN CO lines are must be set the ADMIN program 322 – FLEX 4.

Admin Programming
„ Networking CO Line Type 4.12.3.2 (PGM 322 – FLEX 2)
„ Network Routing Table(Numbering Plan) 4.12.4 (PGM 324)
„ CO line access choice 4.4.1 (PGM 160 – FLEX 3)

2.16.14 Message Waiting Indication (MWI)

Description
The MWI(Message Waiting Indication) is the exactly same service as the CLI(Calling Line Identification)
message wait that is described at Section 2.14.2(see Ref.1).
A station can leave the CLI message of itself, when the station of other networking system doesn’t
answer. In this case, at the system of unanswered station located, the ADMIN program of CLI message
wait(PGM114 – FLEX 4) must be enabled. MWI is indicated by CLI message on station LCD.

Operation
To retrieve MWI message
1. Press the flashing [CALLBK] button.
2. MWI contents (CLI number, date and time, the calling count from the same CLI) will be shown on
LCD.
3. Press the volume up/down [] button. The previous MWI or the next MWI is displayed.

To delete the current CLI Message and see the next one
1. Press [CONF] button.
2. Current MWI message is cleared with a confirmation tone and the next MWI message is displayed.

To make a call back

1. Retrieve MWI with pressing the flashing [CALLBK] button and the volume up/down [] button.
2. Press [HOLD] button.
3. Then system makes a net call according to MWI data.

Condition
1. MWI is applied to LCD panel installed station only.
2. When system makes a call back according to MWI data, the CO line is selected within the network
CO group.

Reference
1. CLI Message Wait : 2.14.2

Admin Programming
„ CLI Message Wait 4.1.5.4 (PGM114 – FLEX 4)
„ Networking Basic Attribute 4.12.1 (PGM 320)
„ Networking CO Line Attribute 4.12.3 (PGM 322)
„ Network Routing Table(Numbering Plan) 4.12.4 (PGM 324)

212
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.16.15 Absent Text Message

Description
The absent text message is the same service, that is described at Section 2.4.1(see Ref.1), except that
this service is executed on the networking connection environment.
If a station user absents his desk with the absent text message on his station LCD, if a station of another
networking system make a net call to this station, then the absent text message of this station is
transmitted to the caller station, and it is displayed on LCD.

Operation
1. Make a Net Call to a station which is selected the pre-selected message or custom message.

Condition
1. A text message is displayed on the LCD of calling station, but the called station over network still
receives ring signal.
2. This feature does not be supported when calling party is WHTU and Large LCD DKTU.

Reference
1. Absent Text Message : 2.4.1

213
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.16.16 Attendant Call Service(CAS)

Description
The attendant call from a station of any networking system can be routed to the CA(Centralized
Attendant) of CAS master system.
This call will be queued when all centralized attendants are busy, like to the normal attendant call and
queuing operation(see Ref.1)

The figure 2.16.11 describes the CAS operation on the networking connection environment. In the figure,
there are four IP LDK networking systems.
IP LDK B, C, D system will be programmed CA in his system and Attendant DND should be set to each
system attendant.

IP LDK-A
(master)

CAS
Dial ATD Call
Dial ATD Call IP LDK-D
(slave)

IP LDK-B
(slave) IP LDK-C
Dial ATD Call (slave)

CO
LINE

Figure 2.16.11 The CAS operation on the networking connection environment

Operation
1. Assign Net DSS to the attendant (except System Attendant).
2. System Attendant presses ATD DND button.
3. Dial Attendant code at any station in the system, then the call will be routed to the Net Attendant.
The system provides Ring Back Tone to calling station and the [NET DSS] button lights.

214
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

Condition
1. ICM Call is routed to Net attendant if system attendant is in ATD_DND mode.
2. CO Call can be routed to Net attendant only if DID/DISA destination is ATD and the ring is not
assigned to any station.

Reference
1. CLI Message Wait : 2.14.2

Admin Programming
„ Attendant DND Button 4.1.6 (PGM 115) - STA PGM Button(Type 6) : 55
„ Net Attendant Assign 4.4.5 (PGM 164) - Net DSS cannot be assigned to the System Attendant.
„ DID/DISA Destination 4.4.8 (PGM 167)
„ CO Ring Assignment 4.2.5 (PGM 144)

2.16.17 DECT Mobility

Description
When one WHTU is registered more than two networked systems at the same time and the user of
WHTU moves to another networking system, the incoming call to WHTU will be routed to another
networking system automatically

Operation
1. Register one WHTU to more than two systems. (see Ref.1)
2. Move WHTU from A system to B system.
3. Call to that WHTU of A system will be routed to the same WHTU of B system.

Condition
1. DECT mobility information is sent through LAN port of MPB.
2. The physical port number of WHTU should be same on whole systems.

Reference
1. Register on WHTU to more than two systems : Refer to ‘DECT INSTALLATION MANUAL’.

Admin Programming
„ Network Destination MPB IP 4.12.4.6 (PGM 324 – FLEX 6)

2.16.18 Centralized VMS

Description
This function can support that all voice mail occurred in all systems can be recorded in an external VMS.

Condition

215
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

1. The centralize VMS should be assigned in slave system, and the number of the centralized VMS
should use the representative number of mail access created in master system.
2. The numbering plan including the representative of mail access assigned in master system should be
included in the numbering plan of QSIG group in slave system.

Admin Programming
„ Network Destination MPB IP 4.12.4.6 (PGM 324 – FLEX 6)
„ Station Group Assign(Centralized VMS Assign) 4.7.1 (PGM 190)

2.16.19 BLF(Busy Lamp Field) Presentation

Description
A station of networking system is able to program a busy lamp appearance of the station status of other
networking system. The Busy Lamp Field (BLF) button can also be used to make a net call the
networking station.
To use BLF service, the BLF manager software, PC application, must be installed at PC. The term of the
GATE KEEPER is the PC server, that is installed the BLF manager software and executing it.

The figure 2.16.12 describes the BLF operation on the networking configuration with the gate keeper. In
the figure, there are four LDK networking systems. Among them, the station 4100, 5111, 6210 have the
BFL button of the station 1100. The networking system of station 1100 is transmit the status of the station
1100 to the gate keeper periodically. And the gate keeper is also multi-cast the status of station 1100 to
other networking system periodically. Then the BLF button of station 4100, 5111, 6210 is updating the
status of station 1100 to its BLF LED.

STN 4100

1100 5111 6210

STN 1100
STN 5111

4100 5111 6210

1100 4100 6210

STN 6210

Gate Keeper

1100 4100 5111

Figure 2.16.12 The BLF operation on the networking configuration with the gate keeper.

Operation
1. The BLF manager software periodically receives the status of station from whole system.

216
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

notice) UDP port will be used to send the status information, and TCP port will be used to send other
information..
2. The BLF manager software sends the broadcast message to whole system when the status is
changed.

Condition
1. The BLF manager should be installed at one system for whole networked systems.
2. The number of Net DSS can be restricted according to the capability of each system.
3. When a flexible button on a station is assigned as the [NET DSS] button of another system, the
system serves as local BLF to indicate the status of the station.
4. CO BLF is not supported, and also ringing signal does not update a status of that station. – ICM / CO
/ Transfer / CO Recall ring.
5. When a station is in DND mode, the [NET DSS] of DND station is flashing.
6. If the BLF manager does not exist, BLF services can be activated between only two systems. The
address of gatekeeper should be registered the address of each other system.

Admin Programming
„ Networking Supplementary Attribute 4.12.2 (PGM 321)
- TCP Port Assign (FLEX 2) 4.12.2.2
- UDP Port Assign (FLEX 3) 4.12.2.3
- BLF manager IP Address Assign (FLEX 4) 4.12.2.4
- Duration of BLF Status (FLEX 5) 4.12.2.5

Application
„ BLF Manager software (PC Application)

2.16.20 Net Follow-Me Forward

Description
A user who is in another system can activate a remote forward to a station over the network. It must be
programmed from the station that it will be forwarded to and her password must be entered at first stage.

Operation
To activate Net Call Forward- Follow-Me
1. Press the [MON] button and the [DND/FOR] button
2. Dial Net Call Forward – follow-me code “0”, and dial the forwarding station number of another
system.
3. Dial the password of the forwarding station.
The [DND/FOR] button will be flashing in the forwarding station and a confirmation tone will be
provided.
4. All call to the forwarding station will be routed to the forwarded station.

To deactivate Net Call Forward – Follow-Me

1. At the user’s own station, Press [DND/FOR] button when it is flashing.
The [DND/FOR] button will be extinguished.

Condition

217
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

1. Authorization code should be registered to use follow-me call forward.

2. The remote Deactivation is not supported.
3. The confirmation tone will provide even though the follow-me forward does not allow by another
system.
4. Net Follow-me forward feature is working only VoIP networking.
5. Among networked systems, the same Authorization code mode(5 Digit Authorization code Usage)
should be programmed.

Admin Programming
„ 5 Digit Authorization code Usage 4.4.2 (PGM 161 - FLEX 21)
2.17 2B Function
Description
This feature allows to connect secondary devices to a primary station. To extend a primary, the additional
device is connected directly to a primary station with a 2B module. There are 3 kinds of 2B module that
can be used with some LKD model stations – DTIU, SLIU, CTIU. One type(DTIU) allows of the addition
of a second DKTU, the other(SLIU) allows of the addition of SLT devices (station, fax, answer
microphone or modem). In order that CTI(computer telephony integration) functions are used, a PC can
be connected to a primary station with a CTIU, the 3rd 2B module type.

Operation
Because the second device required the additional power, a small power supply is needed at the 2B
module when the distance between primary station and second device is long.

IP LDK System
STA 101 STA 102

STA 103 STA 104

STA 105 CTI function

Primary station Second device

Figure 2.17.1 The connection of second devices to primary station

The figure 2.17.1 describes that the second devices connect to primary station with 2B module.
Therefore, second devices become particular station or supply CTI function.

Condition
1. This feature is available at LKD model stations(with 8/30/44 button) and SLIU, DTIU and CTIU 2B
option modules are needed.
2. An external CTIU is available for use with KD/E series model stations.
3. The maximum station capacity of the system is the same even if the 2B phone is used.
4. In IP LDK-300 system, one station is designed as one voice channel. To use 2B feature, the primary

218
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

station should be connected to an odd port.

5. The second station operates as the same with a normal station. But, the second SLT is not
available for the message wait lamp.

Admin Programming
„ CTI station Attribute 4.1.14 (PGM 123)

2.18 Traffic Analysis

Description
The system can monitor and print various system activities based on the main attendant's request(see
Ref.1). The information can be used to;
z Monitor and evaluate system performance
z Observe current usage and take corrective actions, if needed.
z Anticipate possible CO line problems
z Determine system updates and upgrades

The traffic data is output to the RS-232C or LAN. IP LDK system will support the following traffic reports.
z Attendant Traffic Report
z Call Summary Report
z Call Hourly Report
z H/W Unit Usage Summary Report
z CO line Traffic Summary Report
z CO line Traffic Hourly Report

Operation
The traffic analysis is only available at main attendant. Refer to the “Attendant Programming Menu Table”.
The measurement time type can be one of Today’s peak time, Yesterday’s peak time, Last hour,
Yesterday’s total and Today’s total.

To print all summary traffic report,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0121.
3. Select Measurement Time type.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To print all summary traffic report periodically,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0122.
3. Select measurement Time type.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To cancel periodic printing of all summary traffic report,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0123.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

219
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

To print the each traffic report,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0124~0129.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Reference
1. Attendant : 2.13

Condition
1. This feature is available at main attendant.
2. The Printing of all summary service will generate attendant traffic report, call summary report, H/W
unit usage summary report, and CO traffic summary report.

Admin Programming
„ Print Port Selection 4.4.16 (PGM 175)

2.18.1 Traffic Analysis - Attendant

Description
IP LDK system supports the following report to analyze the attendant resource.

Attendant Traffic Report

You may understand attendant’s service status with statistics of all attendants. You can choose one of the
followings; time duration, today’s peak time, yesterday’s peak time, last hour, yesterday’s total and
today’s total. It provides the following information field.
- Analysis Start Hour – Starting time of hour duration which the data is recorded
- Attendant Number – the station number of attendant
- Total Calls – The number of total incoming calls except CO ring group call, hold recall ring
- Calls Answered – The number of answered calls by all active attendants during the measuring hour.
- Calls Abandoned – The number of calls which ring at attendant and is dropped before answering at
attendant.
- Calls Held-Abandoned – The number of calls which is dropped while the call is in hold mode. Held
calls which is time out and recalled are included in this call count.
- Calls Held – The number of calls which answered by attendant and placed on hold state by
attendant.
- Time Available – The time duration which the attendants don’t answer the calls but, are available to
handle new calls. Measured with minutes.
- Time Talk – The total time during measuring interval (the attendants are active or converse with a
CO line). Talk time is not started until the call is answered by attendant. The duration of time between
call termination and answering at attendant is not accumulated as Time Available or Time Talk.
- Time Held – The total amount of time which attendants have calls on hold.
- Time No Answer – The average amount of time that calls in queue and/or ringing at attendant
before the caller hangs up.
- Speed of Answer – The average elapsed time from when a call is terminated by attendant to when
the call is answered by an attendant.

220
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

- Type – Type of attendant ( system or main or intercom tenancy group)

Operation
To print the Attendant Traffic Report at main attendant,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0124.
3. Select Measurement Time type.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Ex)
===========================================================================
Site Name :
Report Type : Attendant Traffic Report - Yesterday Total
Date : 02/12/04 13:14
===========================================================================

Atd Meas --------- Calls --------- ------- Time ------ Time Speed Atd
No Hour Total Ans Abnd H-Abd Held Avail Talk Held NoAns Ans Type

2629 --:-- 9 3 6 0 0 02:02 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 Sys

4807 --:-- 8 6 2 0 0 04:21 00:13 00:00 00:09 00:04 Main

3619 --:-- 4 4 0 0 0 01:04 00:21 00:00 --:-- 00:01 Main
2618 --:-- 0 0 0 0 0 00:05 00:00 00:00 --:-- --:-- Main
3629 --:-- 6 1 5 0 0 02:58 00:23 00:00 00:14 00:03 Main

2.18.2 Traffic Analysis - Calls

Description
IP LDK system supports the following report to analyze the call status of the system.

Call Summary Report

The system may monitor all day’s call traffic and generate this report that shows call status of last hour,
today’s peak time, yesterday’s peak time, yesterday’s total and today’s total.

Call Hourly Report

The system may analyze the call overload by showing the last 24hour’s per hour call.
This report provides the following information field.

- Analysis Start Hour – Starting time of hour duration which the data is recorded
- Number of Calls Completed – The total number of calls completed or answered during the listed
hour.

Operation
To print the Call Summary Report at main Attendant,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0125.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

221
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

To print the Call Hourly Report at main Attendant,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0126.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Ex)
===========================================================================
Site Name :
Report Type : Call Summary Report
Date : 02/12/04 13:14
===========================================================================
Analysis Start Hour Number of Calls Completed
Last Hour 13:00 14
Today Peak 10:00 141
Yesterday Peak 10:00 119
Today Total --:-- 413
Yesterday Total --:-- 970

2.18.3 Traffic Analysis - CO

Description
IP LDK system supports the following report to analyze the traffics of CO line group.

CO Traffic Summary Report

This report helps user to understand the traffic status of CO group by showing their statistics. You can
choose one of the followings; time duration, today’s peak time, yesterday’s peak time, last hour,
yesterday’s total and today’s total. It provides the following information field.
- Peak Hour for All CO Groups – The time duration (hour) in a day that has the largest total usage
when summed over all CO groups.
- Group Number – A number that identifies each CO group associated with the displayed data.
Group numbers are displayed in numeric order, beginning with the lowest number and continuing to
the highest one.
- Number of CO – The number of CO line in the group
- Analysis Start Hour – The time (24-hour mode) taking the measurement.
- Total Usage – Total usage for all CO lines in the CO group. It represents the total time that the CO
lines are busy during the measurement period. Total usage measures each time when a CO line is
seized for use by an incoming call or an outgoing call.
- Total Attempt – The number of incoming and outgoing call attempt in the CO group
- Incoming Attempt – The number of incoming call attempt in the CO group.
- Outgoing Attempt – The number of outgoing call attempt in the CO group.
- Group Overflow – The number of calls offered to a CO group that are not carried. Rejected calls
for authorization will not be included.
- Percentage All CO Busy – The percentage of time that all CO lines in the CO group are
simultaneously in use during the time interval.
- Percentage Fail to Attempt Outgoing – The percentage of offered calls that are not carried on the
CO group. It will not be included unauthorized calls which are denied on the CO group or
uncompleted calls carried on the CO group (unanswered calls).

Operation
CO Traffic Hourly Report
This report may analyze CO traffic patterns by showing the last 24 hour’s per hour CO traffic.

222
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

To print the CO Traffic Summary Report at main Attendant,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0128.
3. Select Measurement Time type.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

To print the CO Traffic Hourly Report at main Attendant,

1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0129.
3. Enter the CO group number.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Ex)
============================================================================
Site Name :
Report Type : CO Group Summary Report - Yesterday Total
Date : 02/12/04 13:15
============================================================================
Peak Hour For All CO: 10:00
Grp Num Anal Total Total Inc. Out. Grp % %
No COs Hour Usage Seize Seize Seize Ovfl ACB FAO
1 62 --:-- 1319 1050 269 781 0 0 ---

2.18.4 Traffic Analysis – H/W Unit

Description
IP LDK system supports the following report to analyze the usage of HW unit resources of the system
such as Tone Receiver, VMIB.

H/W Usage Summary Report

This report helps user to understand whether the system has enough H/W unit resources such as
DTMF Receiver, VMIB, CPTU by showing the statistics. You can choose one of the followings; time
duration, today’s peak time, yesterday’s peak time, last hour, yesterday’s total and today’s total. It
provides the following information field.
- Type – The type of H/W unit being measured.
- Number of Unit – The total number of installed H/W unit.
- Analysis Start Hour – The starting time of the last hour or the hour with the highest Peak Req.
measurement.
- Total Requests – The system-wide total number of requests, by call processing for DTMF, CPTU,
VMIB during the listed hour. It is calculated by incrementing a counter for each request.
- Total Demand – The system-wide total number of requests that are denied because there is no
available H/W unit during the listed hour.

Operation
To print the H/W Unit Usage Summary Report at main Attendant,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 0127.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.

Ex)

223
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

============================================================================
Site Name :
Report Type : H/W Unit Usage Summary Report - Yesterday Total
Date : 02/12/04 13:15
============================================================================
Unit Num Anal Total Total
Type Unit Hour Req Denied
VMIB 4 --:-- 27 0
DTMF 13 --:-- 27 0
CPTU 12 --:-- 27 0

2.19 Software Upgrade

Description
The IP LDK MPB software can be upgraded by IP LDK upgrade program in PC. In order to upgrade by IP
LDK upgrade program, PC and IP LDK system should be connected through SERIAL/ISDN/LAN/
MODEM interface. Then the software file in the PC is sent to the system at first and the MPB software is
upgraded.

[Example]

PSTN
Modem

LAN

RS-232C(Serial)
ISDN

Figure 2.19.1 The connection of IP LDK system and PC for Software Upgrade

The figure 2.19.1 describes that there are 4 types of the connection of IP LDK system and PC for IP LDK
MPB software - SERIAL/ISDN/LAN/MODEM.

2.19.1 ISDN

Description
The IP LDK MPB software can be upgraded through ISDN BRI line interface by IP LDK upgrade program
in remote PC.

Operation

224
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

1. Connect the ISDN phone line to the PC ISDN card.

2. Connect the ISDN T-interface line to a BRI port of IP LDK system.
3. Run IP LDK PC Upgrade program.
4. Select the IP LDK system to be upgraded and press ‘OK’ button.

5. Set the port type to “ISDN Connection”. And press the ‘Select’ button.

6. Enter the ISDN phone number, path of the binary file, and the password for upgrade. And press the
‘Next’ button.

7. In the ‘Next’ window, press ‘Start’ button. You can see the IP LDK MPB software upgrade process.
8. When the ROM file sending is finished in the PC, IP LDK will erase the previous ROM data and start
to fill LDK ROM area with the received ROM file.

Condition
1. The ISDN card in the PC should support CAPI (Common-ISDN Application Programming Interface)
2.0 which is a standard interface specification devised to use ISDN channels in the PC. Also, it
should support HDLC as a B channel protocol. And “CAPI2032.DLL” should be found in the “System”
directory of “Windows” which means that the CAPI driver for Windows is properly installed.
2. If the line is DID type, you should make a call to any station or station group except ISDN station (S
port). Only the call in this case will be accepted by IP LDK system.

225
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

3. When the line is released while upgrading process, just dial the phone number again. If the line was
properly disconnected, it will be connected immediately.
4. While upgrading process, other features do not work in the system.
5. When the IP LDK MPB software upgrade is finished without completing, you can retry to upgrade by
doing the whole process again.
6. If the ROM files you want to send are invalid, IP LDK MPB software upgrade will not be started.
7. DRAM should be installed on the MPB to use this feature.

2.19.2 LAN

Description
The IP LDK MPB software can be upgraded through LAN interface by IP LDK upgrade program in
remote PC.

Operation
1. Connect the LAN cable to the PC LAN-card.
2. Run IP LDK PC Upgrade program.
3. Select the LDK system to be upgraded and press ‘OK’ button.

4. Set the port type to “TCP Connection”. And press the ‘Select’ button.

5. Enter the IP LDK IP address, path of the binary file and the password for upgrade. And press the
‘Next’ button.

226
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

6. In the ‘Next’ window, press ‘Start’ button. You can see the IP LDK MPB software upgrade process.
7. When the ROM file sending is finished in the PC, IP LDK will erase the previous ROM data and start
to fill IP LDK ROM area with the received ROM file.

Condition
1. When the line is released while upgrading process, just dial the phone number again. If the line was
properly disconnected, it will be connected immediately.
2. While upgrading process, other features do not work in the system.
3. When the IP LDK MPB software upgrade is finished without completing, you can retry to upgrade by
doing the whole process again.
4. If the ROM files you want to send are invalid, IP LDK MPB software upgrade will not be started.
5. DRAM should be installed on the MPB to use this feature.

Admin Programming
„ IP Setting for MPB 3.6.8 (PGM 108)

227
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.19.3 SERIAL(COM port)

Description
The IP LDK MPB software can be upgraded through RS-232C interface by IP LDK upgrade program in
the PC.

Operation
1. Connect the RS-232C cable between IP LDK system and PC.
2. Run IP LDK PC Upgrade program.
3. Select the IP LDK system to be upgraded and press ‘OK’ button

4. Set the port type to “Serial Connection”. And press the ‘Select’ button.

5. Enter the path of binary file, serial port number, serial port baud rate, and the password for upgrade.
And press the ‘Next’ button.

228
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

6. In the ‘Next’ window, press ‘Start’ button. You can see the IP LDK MPB software upgrade process.
7. When the ROM file sending is finished in the PC, IP LDK will erase the previous ROM data and start
to fill IP LDK ROM area with the received ROM file.
Condition
1. While upgrading process, other features do not work in the system.
2. When the IP LDK MPB software upgrade is finished without completing, you can retry to upgrade by
doing the whole process again.
3. If the ROM files you want to send are invalid, IP LDK MPB software upgrade will not be started.
4. Serial port should be connected to COM port 2 in the MPB.
5. DRAM should be installed on the MPB to use this feature.

Admin Programming
„ RS-232C Port Setting 4.4.15 (PGM 174)

229
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

2.19.4 MODEM

Description
The IP LDK MPB software can be upgraded through Modem interface by IP LDK upgrade program in
remote PC.

Operation
1. Run IP LDK PC Upgrade program.
2. Select the IP LDK system to be upgraded and press ‘OK’ button.

3. Set the port type to “Modem Connection”. And press the ‘Select’ button.

4. Enter the IP LDK dial number, the path of binary file and the password for upgrade. And press the
‘Next’ button.

230
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

5. Select your Modem type in the Modem Configuration dialog.

6. In the ‘Next’ window, press ‘Start’ button. You can see the IP LDK MPB software upgrade process.
7. When the ROM file sending is finished in the PC, IP LDK will erase the previous ROM data and start
to fill IP LDK ROM area with the received ROM file.

Condition
1. When the line is released while upgrading process, retry the IP LDK PC Upgrade program again.
2. While upgrading process, other features do not work in the system.
3. When the IP LDK MPB software upgrade is finished without completing, you can retry to upgrade by
doing the whole process again.
4. If the ROM files you want to send are invalid, IP LDK MPB software upgrade will not be started.
5. DRAM should be installed on the MPB to use this feature.

Admin Programming
„ Modem ASC Device 4.4.11 (PGM 170)

231
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Feature

232
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

Section 3. System Basic ADMIN programming

The IP LDK System can be programmed to meet each customer's individual need.

This section contains the following topics :

¾ Before ADMIN programming

¾ Button explanation
¾ How to enter the programming mode
¾ Permanent update procedure
¾ How to reset the system

3.1 Before ADMIN programming

The IP LDK System can be programmed to meet each customer's individual need.

There are two ways in ADMIN Programming.

9 PC ADMIN ( Refer to the PC ADMIN programming manual.)

9 DKTU( In this manual we explain DKTU(station 100) in ADMIN Programming):

All programming is done at station 100 (station port # 00) using LDP-
7016D/24D/24LD, KD-36D or LKD-30/44 digital key telephone. (You cannot
program with LKD-30LD, KD-36LD and IP Phone.)

Additional programming stations may be assigned (PGM 113 – FLEX 1), but only 1
DKTU can be active in programming mode at any one time.

Upon entering the program mode, the station 100 cannot operate as a normal telephone
but as a programming instrument with all of the buttons redefined. The keys of the dial
pad are used to enter the various data fields and to enter numerical information. The 24
buttons located at the top of the phone (Flexible Buttons) are used to indicate the
specific data field and to enter information. Sometimes the [SPEED] button and ‘*’ of the
dial pad is used to delete the data or to indicate end of data input and the [REDIAL]
button is used to delete one digit or character from the end of entered digits or
characters.

233
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

3.2 Button explanation

3 Soft button LCD Ring LED

FLEX 1

FLEX 13

.
.
.
.
.
.

FLEX 24

MIC

Speaker phone Fixed button Navigation button Flexible button

Description of LDP-7024D button

There are many kinds of DKTU connecting to the IP LDK system. This model of LDP-7024D is
an sample that just shows each button. The detailed information about DKTU and other keyset
is described in “DKTU USER GUIDE and INSTALLATION MANUAL”.

234
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

3.3 How to enter the programming mode

1. Lift handset or press the [MON] button on the ADMIN station, and hear ICM dial tone
(optional).
2. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial ＊# (Confirmation tone is heard).
※ Enter ADMIN password if the password has been set. This places the station into
the ADMIN programming mode (Confirmation tone is heard).
3. Each program is accessed by pressing the [TRANS/PGM] button and dialing the three-
digit program number. If an error is made while entering data, the [TRANS/PGM]
button can go the previous status. When the [TRANS/PGM] button is pressed, the LCD
will display;
ENTER PGM NUMBER

* NOTE :
1. The step 2, “[TRANS/PGM] Î ＊ Î # ”, is omitted from the procedure in
section 3 and section 4.
2. To return the parent state while ADMIN programming, press the [CONF]
button. Pressing the [CONF] button, temporary data fields are cleared.

3.4 Permanent update procedure

When the data has been entered, the [HOLD/SAVE] button is used to store the
data permanently.
If all data was entered correctly, confirmation tone is heard when pressing the
[HOLD/SAVE] button.
If there were any errors in the entry, then an error tone is presented and data is not
stored in the permanent memory.

3.5 How to reset the system

To reset the system, enter PGM 450 – FLEX 15 and press [HOLD/SAVE] button. Or,
the system will be reset automatically after programming PGM100 – FLEX 1
(Nation Code Assign)

235
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

3.6 Pre-programming
This section describes the pre-programming of the data. When installed, user must program some
database (Ex. Nationality, Numbering Plan Type, and Slot Assignment) first, otherwise system may not
operate properly.

Nation code (PGM 100)

Default Nation code : 7(CIS)

If you want to change nationality of the system, then use ADMIN 100.

*Note: When changing nation code, all data is initialized.

Board Assignment (PGM 101)

To use CO line, extension line, WTIB, and VMIB board, first of all if the code of these boards is
registered on system at PGM101, you can normally use the board.

When registering board, if dip switch number 8 is on, the board is automatically registered. And While
using IP LDK System, in case of adding some of boards, if passively assigning those, you can use it.
When dip switch number 8 is on and board is automatically registered, you must make dip switch
number 8 off and system reset

WTIB PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT (PGM 102)

You can assign WTIB PORT number corresponding to user number using DECT terminal. WTIB PORT
can be assigned from 008 to 192 and by 8 PORT unit.,

WTIB PORT number by system.

IP LDK-300/300E : 008~192
IP LDK-100 : 08~80 If IP LDK-100 has only one rack, it will be like (08-40).

Logical Slot Assignment (PGM 103)

If assignment of each board is end, it is automatically registered by slot number order. User can reassign
slot order of each CO line or extension line to appropriate to user circumstance

For example, if CO line board ISDN is installed at slot 2 and LCOB is installed at slot3, CO line 001
becomes ISDN CO line. But if installing each CO line board on the contrary, CO line 001 becomes LCOB
CO line.

Numbering Plan (PGM 104/105/106/107)

Station number, a cipher of CO line, each feature codes at IP LDK System are assigned for default
value. User can change Station number, a cipher of CO line(2~4 figures), feature codes to appropriate to
user circumstance.
Feature codes of the system can be assigned flexibly via the system programming. Feature Code length
should be in the range of 1(one) digit through 4 digits. Let's say that a feature code conflict has occurred
in such case that a feature code string matches with other longer feature code string, checking from the
first digit of the code. For example, features Code 53 and 536 have a feature code conflict. The system
will not allow any feature code conflict

236
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

* Note: If you change the numbering plan type at ADMIN 104, you have to reload flexible number plan –
Station number (PGM105) information. If you don’t reload that information, you would find some
mis-operation in checking the range.

IP setting for MPB (PGM 108)

IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address should be programmed for trace, remote upgrade, PC
ADMIN, PC Attendant, etc via network.

PROCEDURE FOR PRE-PROGRAMMING

(1) Set DIP switch 8 as ‘ON’

(2) Set Nationality (See Section 3.6.1), and reset the system (PGM 450–FLEX 15). Then slot
assignment is configured.
(3) Set DIP switch 8 as ‘OFF’ to retain current configuration.
(4) Set Rack Slot Assignments (If configuration is not equal to the system default slot assignments,
you must program it manually. See Section 3.6.2)
(5) Set Logical Slot Assignment. (After Logical Slot assignment or Rack Slot assignment, the system
must be reset manually. See Section 3.6.4)
(6) Set Numbering Plan Type. (See Section 3.6.5)
(7) Set Flexible Numbering Plan. (See Section 3.6.6)

237
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

3.6.1 Location PGM-Nation code & Site Name (PGM100)

The Dip switch 8 of the SW3 on the MPB : On

PROCEDURE
3.6.1.1 Nation Code

+ 100 + + Enter Nation Code +

(PGM NUMBER)

3.6.1.2 Site Name

+ 100 + + Enter Site Name +

(PGM NUMBER) (Range: Max 23 digits)

Q – 11 A - 21 D - 31
Z – 12 B - 22 E - 32
. – 13 C - 23 F - 33
1 – 10 2 - 20 3 - 30

G – 41 J - 51 M - 61
H - 42 K - 52 N - 62
I - 43 L - 53 O - 63
4 – 40 5 - 50 6 - 60

P - 71 W - 91
T - 81
R - 72 X - 92
U - 82
S - 73 Y - 93
V - 83
Q - 7* Z - 9#
8 - 80
7 – 70 9 - 90
*1 -
Blank
0-00 #
*2 - :
*3 - ,

238
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

NATION CODE NATION CODE NATION CODE

America 1 Argentina 54 Australia 61
Bahrain 973 Bangladesh 880 Belgium 32
Bolivia 591 Brazil 55 Brunei 673
Burma 95 Cameroon 237 Chile 56
China (Taiwan) 886 CIS 7 Colombia 57
Costa Rica 506 Cyprus 357 Czech 42
Denmark 45 Ecuador 593 Egypt 20
El Salvador 503 Ethiopia 251 Fiji 679
Finland 358 France 33 Gabon 241
Germany 49 Ghana 233 Greece 30
Guam 671 Guatemala 502 Guyana 592
Haiti 509 Honduras 504 Hong Kong 852
India 91 Indonesia 62 Iran 98
Iraq 964 Ireland 353 Israel 972
Italy 39 Japan 81 Jordan 962
Kenya 254 Korea 82 Kuwait 965
Liberia 231 Libya 218 Luxembourg 352
Malaysia 60 Malta 356 Mexico 52
Monaco 377 Morocco 212 Netherlands 31
New Zealand 64 Nigeria 234 Norway 47
Oman 968 Pakistan 92 Panama 507
P.N.G 675 Paraguay 595 Peru 51
Philippines 63 Portugal 351 Qatar 974
Saudi Arabia 966 Senegal 221 Singapore 65
South Africa 27 Spain 34 Sri Lanka 94
Swaziland 268 Sweden 46 Switzerland 41
TELKOM *27 Thailand 66 Tunisia 216
Turkey 90 U.A.E. 971 United Kingdom 44
Uruguay 598 Venezuela 58 Y.A.R. 967

239
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

3.6.2 RACK SLOT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 101)

PROCEDURE

+ 101 + Enter Slot Number + + Enter Board Type Code(2 digits)

(PGM NUMBER)

+ + Enter logical port number(2 digits) +

In case of PRIB,
logical port assignment is possible.

STA CODE COL CODE STA & COL CODE Etc CODE
DTIB12 11 PRIB 31 STIB 51 VMIB 61
DTIB24 12 BRIB 32 MISB 71
SLIB6 13 LCOB4 33
SLIB12 14 LCOB8 34
WTIB 15 DIDB 35
SLIB2E 16 BWDIDB 36
DSIB 18 TLIB 37
CSLIB12 19 EMIB 38
AC15 39
CSIB12E 21 DCOB 40
VOIB 41
NPRIB 42(IP LDK-100)

NBRIB(8) 43(IP LDK-100)

NBRIB(4) 44(IP LDK-100)

CLCOB8 45
RDIB 46
EMIB8 47
CLCOB4 49

240
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

3.6.3 WTIB PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT (PGM 102)

PROCEDURE

+ 102 + Enter WTIB Port Number(Multiple of 8) +

(PGM NUMBER) Range
008~192(IP LDK-300)
08~80(IP LDK-100)

3.6.4 LOGICAL SLOT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 103)

PROCEDURE
3.6.4.1 COL Board

+ 103 + + Enter Logical slot Number(CO Board) +

(PGM NUMBER) Range
IP LDK-300E : 01~54
IP LDK-300 : 01~27
IP LDK-100 : 01~12
99 (RSG Slot)

3.6.4.2 STA Board

+ 103 + + Enter Logical slot Number(STA Board) +

(PGM NUMBER) Range
IP LDK-300E : 01~54
IP LDK-300 : 01~27
IP LDK-100 : 01~12
99 (RSG/IP Phone Slot)

3.6.4.3 VMIB Board

+ 103 + + Enter Logical slot Number(VMIB Board) +

(PGM NUMBER) Range
IP LDK-100 : 01~12 (Max 2 slots)
IP LDK-300 : 01~27 (Max 3 slots),
IP LDK-300E : 01~54 (Max 3 slots)

241
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

3.6.5 NUMBERING PLAN TYPE (PGM 104)

Description
There’re 8 Numbering Plan Type. Each type has different default value at each Numbering Plan Code.
Intercom Range of ADMIN105 is described below. For Flexible Numbering Plan of ADMIN 106 and
ADMIN 107, Refer to 5.3.6.

PROCEDURE

+ 104 + Enter Number Plan Type(1 digit) +

(PGM NUMBER) (Range : 1~8)

ICM Ranges of each Numbering Type

INTERCOM RANGE
FLEX ITEM DEFAULT REMARK
IP LDK-300E IP LDK-300 IP LDK-100
st
As the basic type, the 1
1 Number Set Type 1 1000 – 1599 100 – 399 100 – 227 Yes digit of station number
should be 1 – 4.
The station number can be
2 Number Set Type 2 1000 – 1599 100 – 399 100 – 227 No
changed within 799.
3 Number Set Type 3 1000 – 1599 100 – 399 100 – 227 No
4 Number Set Type 4 7000 - 7599 700-999 7700-7827 No
5 Number Set Type 5 2000 – 2599 200 – 499 200 – 327 No
6 Number Set Type 6 10 – 79 10 – 79 10 – 79 No Max Station Ports: 70
7 Number Set Type 7 1000 – 1299 100 – 299 100 – 227 No Max Station Ports: 200 (IP
LDK-300/300E)
8 Number Set Type 8 1000 – 1599 100 – 399 100 – 227 No The station number can be
changed within 999.

242
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

3.6.6 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN – Station Number (PGM 105)

PROCEDURE

+ 105 + Enter Station Range +

(PGM NUMBER) Dial two station numbers
- Range start station number
& range end station number

LCD
000 001 002 003 (1) [TRANS/PGM] + 105.
100 101 102 103

000 001 002 003 z Station Number Assign. You will see the 4 station numbers
100 101 102 103 corresponding to the 4 port numbers. Station number
length is in the range of 2 digits through 4 digits. There are
two methods for changing station number.

Dial two station numbers - Range start station number & range
end station number, then LCD shows dialed range value. Press
the [HOLD/SAVE] button, then station numbers changed from
the first station number on current LCD to range end (All LEDs
of FELX buttons are off.).

Press one of FLEX 1-4 (Each FLEX 1-4 is assigned to station

number 1- 4 on the current LCD), then LED of pressed Flex
button is steady on. Dial new station number and press the
[HOLD/SAVE] button, or press other Flex button to assign
station number to other station without saving (The LED of
pressed Flex. button is on.).

If you want to delete all station numbers, press the [SPEED]

button and press [HOLD/SAVE] button, then all station numbers
are cleared.

If you want to change next 4 station numbers then press [▼]

button. If you want to change previous 4 station numbers, then
press [▲] button.

000 001 002 003 (2) Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button for saving database
100 400 102 103 permanently. (Ex: Press FLEX 2, dial 400 and press
[HOLD/SAVE] button.)

243
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

3.6.7 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN A,B,C (PGM 106-107, 109)

Description
By dialing Feature Code, the proper feature is activated.

PROCEDURE

+ 106 + Enter FLEXIBLE BUTTON + Enter Code +

(PGM NUMBER) (Range : FLEX1~FLEX24) (TABLE 3.6.7.1)

+ 107 + Enter FLEXIBLE BUTTON + Enter Code +

(PGM NUMBER) (Range : FLEX1~FLEX22) (TABLE 3.6.7.2)

+ 109 + Enter FLEXIBLE BUTTON + Enter Code +

(Range : FLEX1~FLEX6) (TABLE 3.6.7.3)

Table 3.6.7.1 Flex Numbering Plan A (PGM 106)

DEFAULT VALUE
FLEX ITEM
(at Numbering Plan Type 1)
620 – 667 : IP LDK-300/300E
1 Station Group Pilot Number Range
620 – 634 : IP LDK-100
501 – 535 : IP LDK-300/300E
2 Internal Page Zone Number Range
501 – 515 : IP LDK-100
3 Internal All Call Page 543
4 Meet Me Page 544
5 External Page Zone - 1 545
6 External Page Zone - 2 546
7 External Page Zone - 3 547
8 External All Call Page 548
9 All Call Page (Internal/External) 549
10 SMDR Account Code 550
11 Flash Command to CO Line 551
12 Last Number Redial (LNR) 552
13 Do-Not-Disturb 553
14 Call Forward 554
15 Speed Dial Program 555
16 MSG Wait/Call-Back Enable 556
17 MSG Wait/Call-Back Answer 557
18 Speed Dial Access 558
19 Cancel DND/CFW/Pre-selected MSG Features 559
20 System Hold 560
21 Backup STA Relocation 561
22 Retrieve STA Relocation 562
23 SLT Program Mode Select 563
24 ACD Reroute 564

244
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

Table 3.6.7.2 Flex Numbering Plan B (PGM 107)

DEFAULT VALUE
FLEX ITEM
(at Numbering Plan Type 1)
1 Alarm Reset 565
2 Group Call Pick-Up 566
3 UCD Group DND 568
4 Night Answer 569
601 – 619 : IP LDK-300/300E
5 Call Park Location Range
601 – 610 : IP LDK-100
6 Direct Call Pick-Up 7
801 – 872 : IP LDK-300/300E
7 Access CO Line Group 801 – 824 : IP LDK-100
(8 + CO Group Number)
88001 – 88400 : IP LDK-300E
88001 – 88200 : IP LDK-300
8 Access Individual CO Line
8801 – 8840 : IP LDK-100
(88 + CO Line Number)
9 Tie Routing Access 8901
10 Access Held CO Line Group 8*
8#001 – 8#400 : IP LDK-300E
8#001 – 8#200 : IP LDK-300
11 Access Held Individual CO Line
8#01 – 8#40 : IP LDK-100
(8# + CO Line Number)
Access to CO line in the 1st available CO Line 9
12
Group
13 Attendant Call 0
14 Door Open – 1 *1
15 Door Open – 2 *2
16 Door Open – 3 *3
17 Door Open – 4 *4
18 Door Open – 5 *5
19 Door Open – 6 *6
20 Door Open – 7(IP LDK-300/300E Only) *7 : IP LDK-300/300E Only
21 VM MSG Wait Enable *8
22 VM MSG Wait Cancel *9

Table 3.6.7.3 Flex Numbering Plan C (PGM 109)

FLEX ITEM DEFAULT VALUE

(at Numbering Plan Type 1)
1 Malicious Caller ID request *0
2 RSG DOOR OPEN 1 *1
3 RSG DOOR OPEN 2 *2
4 Enter CONF ROOM 57
5 SLT CONF PAGE JOIN 58
6 Unsupervised CONF TMR EXTENSION ##
7 Reserved …

245
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

3.6.8 IP setting for MPB (PGM 108)

PROCEDURE
3.6.8.1 IP Name

+ 108 + + Enter Code +

(PGM NUMBER) (Range : 16 Character)

. – 13 A – 21 D – 31
Q – 11 B – 22 E – 32
Z – 12 C – 23 F – 33
1 – 10 2 – 20 3 – 30
G – 41 J – 51 M – 61
H – 42 K – 52 N – 62
I – 43 L – 53 O – 63
4 – 40 5 – 50 6 – 60
P – 71 W – 91
T – 81
R – 72 X – 92
U – 82
S – 73 Y – 93
V – 83
Q - 7½ Z – 9#
8 – 80
7 – 70 9 – 90
½1–Blank
½2 - : 0 – 00 #
½3 - ,

3.6.8.2 Server IP Address

+ 108 + + Enter Server IP Address +

(PGM NUMBER) (Range : 12 digits)

3.6.8.3 CLI IP Address

+ 108 + + Enter CLI IP Address +

(PGM NUMBER) (Range : 12 digits)

3.6.8.4 Gateway Address

+ 108 + + Enter Gateway Address +

(PGM NUMBER) (Range : 12 digits)

3.6.8.5 Subnet Mask Address

+ 108 + + Enter Subnet Mask +

(PGM NUMBER) (Range : 12 digits)

246
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

3.6.9 HOT DESK AGENT ATTRIBUTE (PGM 250)

PROCEDURE

3.6.9.1 Number of Agent

+ 250 + + Enter Number +

(PGM NUMBER) (Digit : 3 )

3.6.9.2 View Assigned Station Number for Agents

+ 250 +
(PGM NUMBER)

3.6.9.3 Automatic Logout Timer

+ 250 + + Enter Hours +

(PGM NUMBER) (Digit : 2 )

247
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual System Basic ADMIN Programming

248
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Section 4. ADMIN programming

¾ How to enter programming mode

1. Lift handset or press the [MON] button on the ADMIN station, and hear ICM dial tone
(optional).
2. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial ＊ # (Confirmation tone is heard).
※ Enter ADMIN password if the password has been set. This places the station into
the ADMIN programming mode (Confirmation tone is heard).
3. Each program is accessed by pressing the [TRANS/PGM] button and dialing the three-
digit program number. If an error is made while entering data, the [TRANS/PGM]
button can go the previous status. When the [TRANS/PGM] button is pressed, the LCD
will display;

ENTER PGM NUMBER

* NOTE :
1. The step 2, “[TRANS/PGM] Î ＊ Î # ”, is omitted from the procedure in
ADMIN Programming.
2. To return the parent state while ADMIN programming, press the [CONF]
button. Pressing the [CONF] button, temporary data fields are cleared.

¾ System Range(refer to this table in ADMIN Programming)

CO Line Group
System Station Range CO Range Remark
Range
IP LDK-300E 1000 ~ 1599 001-400 01-73
IP LDK-300 100 ~ 399 001-200 01-73
IP LDK-100 100 ~ 227 01-40 00-25

This table is frequently used in ADMIN Programming procedure. As you can see from the
table, there are 3 items “ Station range, CO range, CO Line group Range”.
When entering each range, refer to the table because the range is not mentioned.

249
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

250
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1 STATION PROGRAMMING

In this part, every station can be customized by ADMIN program. Station Program is a tool can adjusts
values of station. To change, enter the program number want to change and then put the station range.
In the sphere of range, every station has same values.

4.1.1 STATION & DSS/DLS MAP ID (PGM 110)

4.1.1.1 Station ID Assignment

Description
At ADMIN program 110 – FLEX 1, Station ID can be set. Then Station ID is changed to the desired
value which is different from default value(i.e : normal DKTU /normal SLT).

PROCEDURE(Station ID)

DKTU ID

+ 110 + STATION RANGE + + 01(Station ID) +

Station ID(IP LDK-300/300E) Station ID(IP LDK-50/100)

01 : DKTU 01 : DKTU
10 : ICM BOX 05 : ICM BOX
11 : WHTU 06 : WHTU
12 : SLT(DTMF) 07 : SLT(DTMF)
13 : SLT(PULSE) 08 : SLT(PULSE)
14 : SLT with MSG Wait Lamp for DTMF 09 : SLT with MSG Wait Lamp for DTMF
15 : SLT with MSG Wait Lamp for PULSE 10 : SLT with MSG Wait Lamp for PULSE
16 : ISDN Phone 11 : ISDN Phone
17 : SLT – CID(FSK) 12 : SLT – CID(FSK)
18 : SLT – CID(DTMF) 13 : SLT – CID(DTMF)
19 : IP - PHONE 14 : IP - PHONE

251
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.1.2 DSS/DLS ID Assignment

Description
To use DSS/DLS, assign its ID after pressing FLEX 1. Then set associated station number after
pressing FLEX 2. One station can have multiple DSS/DLS maps up to 8. These DSS/DLS should have
their ID sequentially (i.e. DSS MAP1, DSS MAP2, …).

PROCEDURE(DSS/DLS MAP ID)

DSS MAP1

+ 110 + STATION RANGE + + 02(DSS/DLS MAP ID)

+ + STATION NUMBER +

DSS/DLS MAP ID(IP LDK-300/300E) DSS/DLS MAP ID(IP LDK-50/100)

02 : DSS MAP 1 02 : DSS MAP 1
03 : DSS MAP 2 03 : DSS MAP 2
04 : DSS MAP 3 04 : DSS MAP 3
05 : DSS MAP 4
06 : DSS MAP 5
07 : DSS MAP 6
08 : DSS MAP 7
09 : DSS MAP 8

ITEM DEFAULT REMARK

DSS/DLS MAP 1 First 12 Buttons
Button 1 : Intrusion Button 2 : All Call Page
Button 3 : Call Park 01 Button 4 : Station Group 1
Button 5 : Camp-On Button 6 : Internal All Call Page
Button 7 : Call Park 02 Button 8 : Station Group 2
Button 9 : Group Call Pickup Button 10 : External All Call Page
Button 11 : Call Park 03 Button 12 : Station Group 3
The rest 36 Buttons
Station Ports 100 – 135
DSS/DLS MAP 2 Station Ports 136 – 183
DSS/DLS MAP 3 Station Ports 184 – 231 (184-227 for IP LDK-100)
DSS/DLS MAP 4 Station Ports 232 – 279
DSS/DLS MAP 5 Station Ports 280 – 327 IP LDK-
DSS/DLS MAP 6 CO Line 01 – 48 300/300E
DSS/DLS MAP 7 CO Line 49 – 96 Only
DSS/DLS MAP 8 CO Line 97 – 144

TABLE Initial Button Configurations for DSS/DLS Map (PGM 110)

252
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.2 STATION ATTRIBUTE – I (PGM 111)

4.1.2.1 Auto Speaker Selection

Description
If this value is set to ON, Station user can access a CO line or make a DSS call by pressing appropriate
{CO} or {DSS} button without lifting handset or pressing the [MON] button.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 0(OFF) +

4.1.2.2 Call Forward

Description
If this value is set to ON, an incoming call can be forwarded to the other destination.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 0(OFF) +

Reference
1. Call Forward : 2.3.1

4.1.2.3 DND

Description
If this value is set to ON, an incoming call can be denied.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 0(OFF) +

253
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.2.4 Data Line Security

Description
If this value is set to ON, override and camp-on from other stations are prohibited when this station is
busy.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

Reference
1. Attendant override : 2.13.5
2. Camp-on : 2.4.5

4.1.2.5 Howling Tone to SLT

Description
If this value is set to ON, System gives howling tone to SLT.
In SLT, user keep off-hook state continually, system gives error tone first, then off-hook state still
continue, system gives very noisy error tone. This noisy error tone is howling tone.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 0(OFF) +

4.1.2.6 Intercom Box Signaling

Description
If this value is set to ON, This station can receive intercom box signal.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

254
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.2.7 No Touch Answer

Description
If this value is set to ON, the station can be responded to the transferred CO call automatically when
station mode is H/P.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 0(OFF) +

Reference
1. Headset : 2.4.13

4.1.2.8 Page Access

Description
If this value is set to ON, This station can page to other station.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

Reference
1. Paging feature : 2.8

4.1.2.9 Ring Type

Description
If ring type is ‘0’, the called party’s ring type assigned by ‘PGM 11’ is heard.
If this value is not 0, this ring type is heard to called party station of intercom call.

Value : 0~4

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Ring Type) +

255
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.2.10 Speaker Ring

Description
This feature determines the ringing path whether Speaker or Headset and even both.

Value : S=1 / H=2 / Both=3

- S : Speaker
- H : Headset
- B : Both

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Speaker) +

4.1.2.11 Speakerphone

Description
If this value is set to ON, Speakerphone can be used.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 0(OFF) +

4.1.2.12 VMIB Slot

Description
Up to 3 VMIB cards could be installed in main system. This ADMIN program can assign the VMIB card
by entering sequential value 0 to 2 according to their slot number order.

Value : 0~2(IP LDK-300E/300) / 0~1(IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 0(Slot Number) +

256
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.2.13 ICM Group (Intercom Tenancy Group)

Description
This feature selects intercom Tenancy Group, which this station belongs to.

Value : 01~15(LDK-300/300E) / 01~05(LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

ICM Group 02

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 02(Group Number) +

Reference
1. Intercom Tenancy Group : 2.4.15

4.1.2.14 Error Tone for TAD (Telephone Answering Device)

Description
If this value is set to ON, and TAD is used in SLT port, when the caller hangs up, busy tone will be
provided to TAD instead of error tone.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

4.1.2.15 SLT Flash Drop

Description
If this value is set to ON, CO Call is dropped by pressing [FLASH] button or Hook Flashing

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

257
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.2.16 Loop LCR Account Code

Description
If this value is set to ON, station user must enter Account Code to use Loop LCR.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON)) +

PROCEDURE
1. LCR(Least Call Routing) : 2.2.7
2. Account Code : 2.5.1

4.1.2.17 VMIB Message Type

Description
In FIFO state, the first recorded VMIB message can play. Oppositely in LIFO state, the latest message
plays.

Value : FIFO=1 / LIFO=0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 1(FIFO) +

4.1.2.18 Off-net Call Forward

Description
If this value is set to ON, Off-net call forward can be used.

Value : DIS=1 / EN=0

- EN : Enable / DIS : Disable

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 0(Enable) +

Reference
1. SLT Call Forward : 2.3.1.8

258
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.2.19 Forced Hand-Free Mode

Description
If this value is set to ON, the calling station can make called station with tone mode to answer forcedly
like hands-free mode.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

- ON : Enable / OFF : Disable

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

4.1.2.20 CID SLT CAS GAIN

Description
The gain of CID CAS data given to SLT can be adjusted.

Value : (00 ~ 20)

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 05 +

4.1.2.21 CID SLT FSK GAIN

Description
The gain of CID FSK data given to SLT can be adjusted

Value : (00 ~ 20)

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 05 +

259
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.2.22 CALLER VOICE OVER

Description
If this value is set to ON, the station can make Voice-Over to busy station.

Value : ON=1/OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 111 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

260
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.3 STATION ATTRIBUTE –Ⅱ (PGM 112)

4.1.3.1 CO Warning Tone

Description
In case of restricting outgoing CO call time, if this value is set to ON, the station user receives warning
tone during CO call after the timer expires(ADMIN 180-FLEX 22).

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

4.1.3.2 Automatic Hold

Description
While seizing a CO line, the station user seizes another CO line by pressing the {CO} button. If this
value is set to ON, the previous seized CO line goes on hold automatically. In case of Attendant ,
default value is ON.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

4.1.3.3 CO Call Time Restriction

Description
If this flag is set to ON, station’s outgoing CO call may be disconnected when CO call restriction timer
(PGM 180-FLEX 17) expires.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

261
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.3.4 Individual CO Line Access

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user can access individual CO line by dialing Individual CO
access code(ADMIN 107-FLEX 8)

Value : ENABLE=1 / DISABLE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 0(Disable) +

4.1.3.5 CO Line Queuing

Description
When a user of station receives a busy signal during an attempt to access a CO line, the user may
request a call back (queue) when the CO Line is available. If this value is set to ENABLE, the user gets
the recalling from the CO Line when it’s available.

Value : ENABLE=1 / DISABLE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 0 +

4.1.3.6 CO PGM

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user can program CO button at its Flexible button.

Value : ENABLE=1 / DISABLE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Enable) +

Reference
1. Flexible Button : 2.4.12

262
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.3.7 PLA

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user can answer calls according to the priority (ADMIN 173).

Value : ENABLE=1 / DISABLE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 0(Disable) +

4.1.3.8 Prepaid Call

Description
If this value is set to ON, the station user can use Prepaid Call feature (ADMIN 180-FLEX 16)

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

4.1.3.9 Speed Dial Access

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user can use system speed dial call.

Value : ENABLE=1 / DISABLE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 0(Disable) +

Reference
1. System Speed Dialing : 2.2.8.5

263
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.3.10 Two-way Record

Description
If this value is set to ON, the station user can record the incoming and outgoing voice during
conversation.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

Reference
1. Two-way Recording: 2.11.3

4.1.3.11 Fax Mode

Description
If this value is set to ON, single ring is provided and Attendant recall is not operated.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

4.1.3.12 Off-net Call Mode

Description
If this value is set to EXT, the station user can only forward CO call to Off-net(ex mobile phone).
Otherwise both CO call and ICM call can be forwarded to Off-net.

Value : EXT=1 / ALL=0

- EXT: (External Off-net Call Fwd is only allowed)
- ALL: (Internal Off-net Call Fwd and External Off-net Call Fwd are allowed.)

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(EXT) +

Reference
1. Call Forward, Station Off-net : 2.3.1.5

264
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.3.13 UCD Group Service

Description
This feature is used when a station gets DID/DISA call.
If this value is set to ON, the UCD Group, which the station belongs to, gets the incoming call and if this
value is set to OFF, the station gets the incoming call directly whether the station is busy or not.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

- ON: (Ring to UCD group, which the station belongs to)
- OFF: (Ring to the station)

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

4.1.3.14 Ring Group Service

Description
This feature is used when a station in Ring Group gets a DID/DISA call.
If this value is set to ON, the Ring Group, which the station belongs to, gets the incoming call and if this
value is set to OFF, the station gets the incoming call directly

Value : ON=1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

4.1.3.15 Stop Camp-on Tone

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE, Camp on Tone is not heard.

Value : ENABLE=1 / DISABEL=0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Enable) +

265
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.3.16 Line Length

Description
This feature is used to distinguish the line length when the distance between the stations and the
station boards is too variable. (SAF only)

Value : Short=0 / Long=1 / Far=2

PROCEDURE

Line Length =Long

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(LONG) +

4.1.3.17 MSG SCRL SPD

Description
This value means the scroll speed of SMS or broadcasting notice message. (Only for LKD-30DH)

Value : 0~7

PROCEDURE

Scroll Speed :0(Fast) ~ 7(Slow)

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 0 +

4.1.3.18 Block Back Call

Description
If this value is set to ON, SLT recalling is blocked after pressing [FLASH] button.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

266
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.3.19 I-TIME RST(Incoming CO call time Restriction)

Description
If this value is set to ON, the conversation time of incoming CO call is limited.
After CO Call Restriction Timer is expired, the call is forced to disconnected.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

Reference
1. CO Call Restriction Timer : 4.5.1.17

4.1.3.20 Forced Station Account Code

Description
If this value is set to ON, the password is needed to access outgoing CO access.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

4.1.3.21 CID Type 2 Service

Description
If this value is set to ON,. busy station can receive call indication if another new call is entered through
analog PSTN line.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

267
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.3.22 Door Open

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE,. Station can open the door with dialing Door Open Code.

Value : ENABLE= 1 / DISABLE= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ENABLE) +

4.1.3.23 Dummy Station

Description
If this value is set to ON, this station goes to a dummy station, so a hot-desk agent can login at the
dummy station.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

Reference
1. Hot Desk : 2.4.30

4.1.3.24 Emergency Supervisor

Description
If this value is set to ON, this station can make emergency intrusion to other station.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 112 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

Reference
1. Emergency Intrusion : 2.4.34

268
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.4 STATION ATTRIBUTE – Ⅲ (PGM 113)

4.1.4.1 ADMIN

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE, the assigned station users can program ADMIN Database. This feature is
only available at DKTU.
(STA 100 : Enabled as default)

Value : ENABLE=1 / DISABLE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 113 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Enable) +

4.1.4.2 VMIB Access

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user can use VMIB.

Value : ENABLE=1 / DISABLE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 113 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Enable) +

4.1.4.3 Group Listening

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user can use group listening. While you are talking on
handset, by pressing the [MON] button, other people around you may hear the conversation through
the speaker. Although the voice of other people is not sent by Mic.

Value : ENABLE=1 / DISABLE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 113 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Enable) +

269
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.4.4 Override Privilege

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user can override CO Call.

Value : ENABLE=1 / DISABLE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 113 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Enable) +

Reference
1. Attendant Override : 2.13.5

4.1.4.5 SMDR Hidden Dialed Digits

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE, Dialed number of CO Call is not showed on SMDR record

Value : ENABLE=1 / DISABLE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 113 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Enable) +

Reference
1. SMDR : 2.12

4.1.4.6 Voice Over

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user can talk alternately a call to the other call.

Value : ENABLE=1 / DISABLE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 113 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Enable) +

Reference
270
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

1. Voice Over : 2.4.26

4.1.4.7 Warm Line

Description
If this value is set to HOT, the station user can use Hot Line. (Ref ADMIN 122).
Otherwise in Warm Line state, Warm Line Timer starts when the user lifts handset or presses the
[MON] button.

Value : HOT=1 / WARM=0

PROCEDURE

+ 113 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Hot) +

4.1.4.8 VMIB MSG Retrieve Password

Description
If this value is set to ON, the station user must enter password to retrieve VMIB Message.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 113 + STATION RANGE + + 1(On) +

Reference
1. Recording System VMIB Announcement : 2.11.1

4.1.4.9 VMIB MSG Retrieve Date/Time

Description
If this value is set to ON, Date and time will be heard when VMIB Message is retrieved.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 113 + STATION RANGE + + 0(Off) +

Reference
1. Recording System VMIB Announcement : 2.11.1

271
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.4.10 Alarm Attribute

Description
If this value is set to ON, the station gets the alarm signal.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE
Alarm MISB (IP LDK-300/300E), Alarm MPB (IP LDK-100)

+ 113 + STATION RANGE + + + 1(On) +

Flex 1 Alarm MISB (IP LDK-300/300E),

Alarm MPB (IP LDK-100)
Flex 2 Alarm RAU 1 (IP LDK-300/300E)
Alarm MISB (IP LDK-100)
Flex 3 Alarm RAU 2 (IP LDK-300/300E only)

Reference
1. Alarm : 2.4.2

* Caution : To move another alarm setting attribute such as RAU, press CONF or BACK key.

4.1.4.11 Mute Ring Service

Description
If this value is set to ON, the station can receive a Mute ring.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 113 + STATION RANGE + + 1(On) +

272
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.5 ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTE (PGM 114)

4.1.5.1 CLIP LCD Display(Calling Line Identification Presentation)

Description
If this value is set to ON, the CLI is displayed on the station’s LCD.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 0(Off) +

Reference
1. CLI(Calling Line Identification Presentation) : 2.14.2

4.1.5.2 COLP LCD Display (COnnected Line identification Presentation)

Description
If this value is set to ON, the connected party’s CLI is displayed on station’s LCD.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(On) +

Reference
1. CLI(Calling Line Identification Presentation) : 2.14.2

273
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.5.3 CLI / Redirect Display

Description
When using networking, If this value is set to RED, the redirected CLI is displayed. Otherwise, the
original CLI is displayed

Value : RED=1 / CLI=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(RED) +

Reference
1. CLI(Calling Line Identification Presentation) : 2.14.2

4.1.5.4 CLI MSG Wait

Description
If this value is set to ON, the station can receive CLI message from CO Incoming call,
when the station doesn’t answer.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(On) +

Reference
1. CLI(Calling Line Identification Presentation) : 2.14.2

274
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.5.5 EXT or CO ATD

Description
If this value is set to ATD, CO ATD code(ADMIN 200) is used to outgoing CLI information. Otherwise,
station number is used as CLI information

Value : ATD=1 / EXT=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ATD) +

Reference
1. CLI(Calling Line Identification Presentation) : 2.14.2

4.1.5.6 Keypad Facility

Description
If this value is set to KEYPAD, ISDN station sends digit in keypad facility after connected. Otherwise
DTMF is used.

Value : KEYPAD=1 / DTMF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Keypad) +

4.1.5.7 Long/Short

Description
If this value is set to LONG, ISDN station acts in LONG passive mode.

Value : LONG=1 / SHORT=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Long) +

275
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.5.8 CPN Type

Description
This value set CPN IE type of SETUP message.
(If this value is set to 0, all S0 stations of the S port get the incoming call. in case of 1 & 2, only one
specific station gets the call.)

Value : 0~2
- 0: Do not send CPN (Called Party Number) to S0. In this case, all S0 stations of the S port will be
ringing.
- 1: Send station number as CPN
- 2: Bypass CPN from the network.

PROCEDURE

Send station number as CPN

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1 +

4.1.5.9 S0 Sub Address

Description
This value indicates how the sub-address is used in SETUP message.
If this value is set to 0, station sub-address not used. Else if set to 1, sub-address is filled in the CPN
field of SETUP message. Otherwise, sub-address is filled in the CPSN (Called Party Sub-address
Number) field of SETUP message.

Value : 0~2
- 0: Station sub-address not used.
- 1: Sub-address is filled in the CPN field of SETUP message.(IN CPN)
- 2: Sub-address is filled in the CPSN (Called Party Sub-address Number) field of SETUP(IN CPSN)

PROCEDURE

Sub-address is filled in the CPN field

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1 +

276
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.5.10 DISA Restriction

Description
If this value is set to ON, the station is restricted to receive the DISA incoming call.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(On) +

4.1.5.11 CLI Name Display

Description
If this field is ON, the system checks whether the received CLI is matched with the speed dial data or
not. If it is matched, the speed dial name is displayed.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(On) +

4.1.5.12 ISDN CLI STA

Description
This value is used as outgoing CLI When outgoing CLI is active and CLI type is EXT(Station)

Value : 0~9 (Max 4 digits)

Default value : Logical Station Number.

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + MAX 4 digits +

277
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.5.13 Progress Indication

Description
If this value is set to ON, the Progress Indicator can notice non-ISDN device.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(On) +

4.1.5.14 ISDN CLIR(CLI Restriction)

Description
If this value is set to ON, the CLI information is restricted by PX .

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(On) +

4.1.5.15 ISDN COLR

Description
If this value is set to ON, the connect party’s CLI information is restricted by PX.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(On) +

278
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.5.16 DID Restriction

Description
If this value is set to ON, the station is restricted to receive the DID incoming call.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(On) +

4.1.5.17 DID Call Wait

Description
If this value is set to ON, when the station is busy, another DID call could be waiting.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(On) +

4.1.5.18 CLI Type

Description
This value selects CLI type.

Value : LONG=1 / SHORT=0

- LONG : Use station Long CLI (Max. 12)
- SHORT : Use station Normal CLI (Max. 4)

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(Long) +

Reference
1. Long Station CLI : 4.1.5.19

279
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

2. ISDN CLI STA : 4.1.5.12

4.1.5.19 Long Station CLI

Description
If outgoing CLI is activated and CLI type is EXT(Station), this value is used as outgoing CLI.

Value : 0~9 (Max 12 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + MAX 12 digits +

4.1.5.20 MSN Wait

Description
If this value is set to ON,. A busy station can receive a call waiting signal when another MSN call is
entered.

Value : ON= 1 / OFF= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + 1(ON) +

4.1.5.21 LONG CLI 1

Description
If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 1, Long CLI 1 is sent.

Value : 0~9 (Max 16 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + MAX 16 digits +

Reference
1. CLI type : 4.2.4.11

280
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.5.22 LONG CLI 2

Description
If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 2, Long CLI 2 is sent.

Value : 0~9 (Max 16 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 114 + STATION RANGE + + MAX 16 digits +

Reference
1. CLI type : 4.2.4.11

281
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.6 FLEX BUTTON ASSIGNMENT (PGM 115)

Description
Each Flexible Button in a station can be assigned as desired.

Value : 1 = F01 ~ F24 / 2 = F25~F48 , Button Type = 01~11

PROCEDURE
In case of the assignment of CO Line Group Button

+ 115 + STATION RANGE + 1 + +

03(TYPE No.) + 02(Group Number) +

RANGE
No. Type REMARK
IP LDK-300E IP LDK-300 IP LDK-100
1 User Key - - - User can program by button
programming procedure. (empty)
2 {CO xx} Button 001 – 400 001 – 200 01 – 40 CO Line
3 {CO Grp xx} 01 – 72 01 – 72 01 – 24 CO Line Group
4 {LOOP}
5 {STAxxxx} 1000 – 1599 100 – 399 100 – 227 Station No.
6 STA PGM Button 11 – 99 11 – 99 11 – 99
7 {STA SPDxx} 00 – 99 00 – 99 00 – 99 Station Speed Bin
8 {SYS SPDxxxx} 2000 –6999 2000 –4999 2000 –3499 System Speed Bin
9 FLEX NUM Num Plan Num Plan Num Plan Numbering Plan Code of ADMIN 106
Code Code Code & 107
10 Net DSS Button When using Networking feature
TABLE Button Type for Flexible Button Assignment (PGM 115)

FLEX 12-Button (Digital) 24-Button (Digital)

1 {CO 1} {CO 1}
2 {CO 2} {CO 2}
3 {CO 3} {CO 3}
4 {CO 4} {CO 4}
5 {CO 5} {CO 5}
6 {CO 6} {CO 6}
7 {CO 7} {CO 7}
8 {CO 8} {CO 8}
9 {CO 9} {CO 9}

282
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

10 {CO 10} {CO 10}

11 {CO 11} {CO 11}
12 {LOOP} {LOOP}
13 - 24 - Not assigned
TABLE Initial Button Configuration (PGM 115)

4.1.7 STATION COS (PGM 116)

Description
Each station is assigned to COS(Class Of Service) which determine station's toll restriction for the day
and night operation. For a particular call, the CO COS is combined with station COS to determine
restriction. All stations’ COS for day and night operation are 1 as default. The weekend COS is the same
as night COS.

Range / Default Value

FLEX DEFAULT VALUE REMARK
1 1 1–9 Day Class-Of-Service
2 1 1–9 Night / Weekend Class-Of-Service
- FLEX 1 : Day
- FLEX 2 : Night

PROCEDURE

The assignment of Station COS 2

+ 116 + STATION RANGE + + 2(COS) +

(DAY)

+ 2(COS) +
(NIGHT)

STA COS 1 No restrictions are placed at the station for dialing.

STA COS 2 The assignments in the Exception Table A are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
STA COS 3 The assignments in the Exception Table B are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
STA COS 4 The assignments in both Exception Tables A & B are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
The leading digit dialed can not be a long distance code. The dialed digits can be longer than 7 digits.
STA COS 5
There is no restriction for the number in Canned Toll Table.
The leading digits can not be a Long Distance code. Only eight digits maximum can be dialed.
STA COS 6
There is no restriction for the number in Canned Toll Table.
Intercom and paging calls are allowed. No dialing allowed on CO lines. ICM boxes are assigned with this
STA COS 7
COS.
STA COS 8 The assignments in the Exception Table C are monitored for allow and deny numbers
STA COS 9 The assignments in the Exception Table D are monitored for allow and deny numbers

283
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.8 CO LINE GROUP ACCESS (PGM 117)

Description
Each stations has a right of accessibility to CO Line group. The right could be changed by ADMIN
programming.
The access ability to CO Line Group1 is offered as default for all stations. Accessibility to multiple CO
Line Group is possible.

Range / Default Value

FLEX DEFAULT RANGE REMARK

1 - 1-24 CO line Group 01-24 (Toggle)
2 - 1-24 CO line Group 25-48 (Toggle) : IP LDK-300/300E Only
3 - 1-24 CO line Group 49-72 (Toggle) : IP LDK-300/300E Only

PROCEDURE

+ 117 + STATION RANGE + + +

FLEX 1 (Group:01~24) (Range: LEX1~FLEX24)
FLEX 2 (Group:25~48) - Toggle
FLEX 3 (Group:49~72)

Reference
1. CO line Group : 4.2.2.1

4.1.9 INTERNAL PAGE ZONE (PGM 118)

Description
Each station can be assigned to internal page zone.
In IP LDK-300/300E(100) system supports 30(10) internal paging zones.

Range / Default Value

All station is assigned to Internal Page Zone1 as default.
FLEX DEFAULT RANGE REMARK
1 1 1 - 24 (IP LDK-300/300E) Internal Page Zone 01 – 24(10) (Toggle)
1 - 10 (IP LDK-100)
2 - 1-6 Internal Page Zone 25 - 30 (Toggle) : IP LDK-300/300E
Only

284
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE
To change the value, user can do as follows. Internal Page Zone 25 - 30 (Toggle) : IP LDK-300/300E Only

+ 118 + STATION RANGE + + (Toggle) +

FLEX 1 (Zone:01~24) (Range: FLEX1~FLEX24)
FLEX 2 (Zone: 25~30)

4.1.10 CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE (PGM 119)

Description
Each station can be assigned to conference page zone.
IP LDK-300/300E and IP LDK-100 support 5 conference page zones.

Range : FLEX1 ~ FLEX5

IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
FLEX1 : CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE 31 FLEX1 : CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE 11
FLEX2 : CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE 32 FLEX2 : CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE 12
FLEX3 : CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE 33 FLEX3 : CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE 13
FLEX4 : CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE 34 FLEX4 : CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE 14
FLEX5 : CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE 35 FLEX5 : CONFERENCE PAGE ZONE 15

Default value :
Default assigns all stations to None.
FLEX DEFAULT VALUE REMARK
- 1-5 Conference Page Zone (Toggle)

PROCEDURE

+ 119 + STATION RANGE + (Toggle) +

(Range: FLEX1~FLEX5)

285
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.11 ICM TENANCY GROUP (PGM 120)

Description
Each Intercom Tenancy Group can be operated independently and the stations in the group can be
assigned an individual CO Line Group to use. Each group can be assigned with attendant and can be
programmed to allow or deny calls to other groups.

IP LDK-300/300E system supports 15(IP LDK-100 5) ICM Tenancy Groups and Tenancy ATDs.
FLEX ITEM RANGE REMARK
1 Attendant STA No. Attendant station of assigned ICM tenancy group
2 Access FLEX 01-15(IP LDK-300/300E) ICM tenancy groups allow to access for assigned group
Group FLEX 1-5 (IP LDK-100)

4.1.11.1 ICM Tenancy Group Attendant assign.

Description
Each ICM group may have one attendant.
Day / Night Mode of ICM Group is set by ICM Group attendant.

PROCEDURE

+ 120 + GROUP NUMBER + + ICM TENCENCY GROUP ATD +

(ATTENDANT)

4.1.11.2 ICM Tenancy Group Access

Description
Each group can be programmed to allow or deny calls to other groups.

PROCEDURE

+ 120 + GROUP NUMBER + + (Toggle) +

(RANGE: FLEX1~FLEX15)

286
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.1.12 ICM PRESET CALL FORWARD (PGM 121)

Description
When this feature is programmed, If the station does not answer the incoming CO call within Preset Call
Forward timer, then this call is forwarded to preset destination.
No station is assigned as default.

Value : 1=Station / 2=Hunt Group

PROCEDURE
Forward to Station.

+ 121 + STATION NUMBER + 1(Station) + STATION NUMBER +

Forward to Hunt Group.

+ 121 + STATION NUMBER + 2(Hunt Group) + Hunt Group Number +

4.1.13 IDLE LINE SELECTION(PGM 122)

Description
This feature assigns the destination of Hot Line and Warm Line.(Ref 2.2.6 Hot Line & Warm Line)

Range : digit 1 ~ digit 4

DGT ITEM RANGE REMARK

1 FLEX 01 - 44 To activate a feature on a flexible button as if pressed.
001 – 400 (IP LDK-300E)
2 CO Line 001 – 200 (IP LDK-300) To seize a CO Line
01 – 40 (IP LDK-100)
CO Line 01 – 72 (IP LDK-300/300E)
3 To seize a CO Line Group
Group 01 – 24 (IP LDK-100)
1000 – 1599 (IP LDK-300E)
4 Station 100 – 399 (IP LDK-300) To call an another station
100 – 227 (IP LDK-100)

287
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 122 + STATION RANGE + 1(ITEM) + FLEX No. +

4.1.14 CTI STATION ATTRIBUTE (PGM 123)

This sets the features/modes when CTIU8/30 or CTI module is connected at a station. (Refer to “User’s
Guide of TAPI-NT”)

4.1.14.1 CTI Station Mode

Description
Determines the CTI Station mode.

Value : 0=Inactive / 1=CTI Mode / 2=At Mode

PROCEDURE

+ 123 + STATION RANGE + + 0(Inactive) +

4.1.14.2 CTI Station’s Baud Rate

Description
Determines the baud rate of the CTI station.

Value : 0=1200 / 1=2400 / 2=4800

PROCEDURE

+ 123 + STATION RANGE + + 1(2400) +

4.1.15 SMDR ACCOUNT GROUP (PGM 124)

Description
Stations can be assigned as a member of call account group on SMDR. A station belongs to only one
group.

Value : 00~99

288
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

- Account Group : 00~99 (IP LDK-300/300E), 00~23 (IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 124 + STATION RANGE + 01(Account Group) +

4.1.16 COPY DSS BUTTON (PGM 125)

Description
The assigned DSS button can be copied to another station or ICM group.

Value : FLEX1=Station / FLEX2=ICM Group

- ICM Group : 01~15(IP LDK-300/300E), 1~5(IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE
Copy DSS from Station.

+ 125 + STATION NUMBER + + STATION NUMBER +

* DELETE : [CONF] Button

Copy DSS from ICM Group

+ 125 + STATION NUMBER + + ICM GROUP +

(PGM NUMBER)

* DELETE : [CONF] Button

4.1.17 DISPLAY STATION NUMBER BY COS (PGM 130)

Description
COS stands for Class of Service. It means, defends on the grade of COS, the service could be limited.
The certain COS of station could be checked.

Range : FLEX1=Day / FLEX2=Night

- Station COS : 1~7

PROCEDURE
Show Station by assigned Day COS

(LCD shows stations that are assigned COS 1)

+ 130 + + 1(COS)
Next page : Volume Down
(DAY COS) Previous step : [CONF]

289
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Show Station by assigned Night COS

(LCD shows stations that are assigned COS 1)
+ 130 + + 1(COS) Next page : Volume Down
Previous step : [CONF]
(NIGHT COS)

4.1.18 DISPLAY STATION NUMBER BY CO ACCESS GROUP (PGM 131)

Description
Station Numbers which can access in certain CO Line Group could be checked.

Range : 01~72 (CO Line Group)

- CO Line Group : 00~72 (IP LDK-300/300E), 00~24 (IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE
To change the value, user can do as follows.

+ 131 + 01( CO LINE GROUP) (LCD shows stations that are assigned to
access CO Line Group 1)
Next page : Volume Down
Previous step: [CONF]

290
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.2 CO LINE PROGRAMMING

If user would like to change CO line features, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial 140-144 in
ADMIN Programming Mode. When programming, LCD and LEDs indicate current programmed data and
programming status. If the programmer enters correct data, then LCD and LEDs show the entered data
and the data is stored in the temporary buffer area. To save the data permanently, press the
[HOLD/SAVE] button, then all data in the temporary buffer is stored into system memory.

4.2.1 CO SERVICE TYPE (PGM 140)

Description
In this program mode, you can program the following items.

FLEX TYPE FLEX 2 DEFAULT SUB ATTR REMARK

DISA Attributes For each Item;
-Flex 1 (Day) Flex 1 - DISA Service: ON/OFF
1 Normal CO
-Flex 2 (Night) Flex 2 - VMIB MSG (00- 70)
-Flex 3 (Weekend) (00: not assigned)
Flex 1 Signal Type –1: Immediate Start
: (Signal Type) 2: Wink Start
2 ANALOG DID Flex 2 - 3: Delayed Dial Start
: (INFO NO) INFO NO : 00 – 70
(00: not assigned)
ISDN DID /
3
MSN
1:RD -
2:LD 1:RD: Korea only
Not
4 TIE 3:EM-C 2:LD: India
assigned
4:EM-D Enter digit
5:EM-I
5 DCO DID

4.2.1.1 Normal CO

PROCEDURE

+ 140 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1 +

291
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.2.1.2 Analog DID

PROCEDURE

+ 140 + CO LINE RANGE + + 2 +

4.2.1.3 ISDN DID/MSN

PROCEDURE

+ 140 + CO LINE RANGE + + 3 +

4.2.1.4 TIE

PROCEDURE

+ 140 + CO LINE RANGE + + 4 +

4.2.1.5 DCO DID

PROCEDURE

+ 140 + CO LINE RANGE + + 5 +

4.2.1.6 DISA (SUB ATT)

Description
To use DISA Service, previously, CO type is set to only Normal CO. Then, execute below procedure
continually.

PROCEDURE . 1 (DISA Service On)

+ 140 + CO LINE RANGE + + +

(F1: DAY, (F1: DISA SERVICE,
F2: NIGHT, F2: VMIB)
F3: WEEKEND)
+ 1 +
(RANGE: ON/OFF)

PROCEDURE . 2 (use DISA VMIB Announcement)

292
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 140 + ENTER CO LINE RANGE + + +

(F1: DAY, (F1: DISA SERVICE,
F2: NIGHT, F2: VMIB)
F3: WEEKEND)

+ ENTER VMIB MESSAGE(00~70) +

Reference
1. Normal CO : 4.2.1.1
2. VMIB announcement : 2.11

4.2.2 CO LINE ATTRIBUTE –Ⅰ (PGM 141)

4.2.2.1 CO line Group

Description
Each CO Line must be a member of CO Line Group.
Groups may be assigned according to CO type and Class-Of-Service.
Group 00 means private group, and group 73(25 in IP LDK-100) means not used group.

PROCEDURE

+ 141 + CO LINE RANGE + + 02(CO Line Group) +

4.2.2.2 CO COS

Description
COS is assigned to each CO lines.

Value : 1~5(CO COS)

- CO COS 1: no restriction
- CO COS 2: Exception Table A governs
- CO COS 3: Exception Table B governs
- CO COS 4: restricts Long Distance Code
- CO COS 5: overrides STA. COS 2,3,4 and 5, 6.

PROCEDURE

+ 141 + CO LINE RANGE + + 2(COS) +

Reference
1. COS(Class Of Service) : 2.5.4

293
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.2.2.3 DISA Account Code

Description
If this value is set to ON, when the incoming CO caller tries to access another CO Line by dialing CO
Line access code, the caller should enter authorization code.
This is applied only when this CO Service type is DISA.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 141 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(On) +

Reference
1. CO SERVICE TYPE : 4.2.1
2. DISA(Direct Inward System Access) : 2.1.4
3. Authorization Code : 2.5.2

4.2.2.4 CO Line Assign

Description
If this value is set to ON, Polarity Reverse is applied to the CO Line, otherwise, Loop Start is applied to.

Value : Pol=1 / Loop=0

- Pol: Polarity Reverse
- Loop: Loop Start

PROCEDURE

+ 141 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(Pol) +

4.2.2.5 CO Line Type

Description
294
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

If this value is set to PBX, the opposite system is PBX. Oppositely if it is set to CO, the system is
Central Office.

Value : PBX=1 / CO=0

PROCEDURE

+ 141 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(PBX) +

4.2.2.6 CO Line Signal Type

Description
If this value is set to DTMF, the CO Line signaling type is set to DTMF.
Otherwise, signaling type is set to Pulse.

Value : DTMF=1 / PULSE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 141 + CO LINE RANGE + + 0(Pulse) +

4.2.2.7 Flash Type

Description
This value is applied to analogue CO Line only.

Value : GROUND=1 / LOOP=0

PROCEDURE

+ 141 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(GROUND) +

4.2.2.8 UNA(Universal Night Answer)

Description
If this feature is set to ON, Universal Night Answer service is applied to this CO Line.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 141 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(On) +

295
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Reference
1. UNA (UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER) : 2.1.7

4.2.2.9 CO Line Group Account

Description
If this value is set to ON, the CO Line user should enter authorization code to access this CO Line.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 141 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(On) +

Reference
1. Authorization Code : 2.5.2

4.2.2.10 Tenancy Group

Description
This value means ICM Tenancy group number the station belongs to. This station receives the CO Call.
If this value is set, separated Day/Night ring mode is applied to the incoming CO Call according to each
ICM tenancy group attendant’s Day/Night ring mode.

Value : 00~15(IP LDK-300/300E) / 0~5(IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 141 + CO LINE RANGE + + 01(Tenancy Group) +

Reference
1. Day/Night service : 2.13.8

296
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.2.3 CO LINE ATTRIBUTE –Ⅱ (PGM 142)

4.2.3.1 CO Line Name Display

Description
If this value is set to ON and the CO Line Name is assigned, the Name is displayed on the station LCD
when the station gets the CO incoming call through this CO Line.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(On) +

Reference
1. CO Line Name Assign : 4.2.3.2

4.2.3.2 CO Line Name Assign

Description
This value means the name of the CO Line.

Value : MAX 12 Characters

. – 13 A – 21 D – 31
Q – 11 B – 22 E – 32
Z – 12 C – 23 F – 33
1 – 10 2 – 20 3 – 30
G – 41 J – 51 M – 61
H – 42 K – 52 N – 62
I – 43 L – 53 O – 63
4 – 40 5 – 50 6 – 60
P – 71 W – 91
T – 81
R – 72 X – 92
U – 82
S – 73 Y – 93
V – 83
Q - 7½ Z – 9#
8 – 80
7 – 70 9 – 90

297
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

½1–Blank
½2 - : 0 – 00 #
½3 - ,

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + CO LINE NAME +

Reference
1. CO Line Name Display : 4.2.3.1
4.2.3.3 Metering Unit
Description
This value determines the Unit used to perceive a pulse from CO Line.

Value : 00 ~ 06 (Metering signal type)

There are 7 metering signal types:
- 00: None
- 01: 50 Hz
- 02: 12 KHz
- 03: 16 KHz
- 04: Singular Polarity Reverse (SPR)
- 05: Plural Polarity Reverse (PPR)
- 06: No Polarity Reverse (NPR)

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + METERING SIGNAL TYPE +

4.2.3.4 Line Drop using CPT(Call Progress Tone)

Description
If this value is set to ON, CPT checks the incoming CO Line when answered and if CPT detects dial
tone, then system drops the line for toll restriction.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(On) +

4.2.3.5 CO Distinct Ring

298
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Description
If this value is not set to 0, the designated ring tone is heard to the station when the station gets the
incoming CO Call so that the user can distinguish incoming CO Call and ICM Call with its different ring
tone.
Each ring tone can be adjusted at ADMIN 422

Value : 0~4

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1 +

4.2.3.6 CO Line MOH

Description
This value is used at MOH of the CO Line.

Value : 00~13(IP LDK-300) / 00~12(IP LDK-100)

IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
0: Not assigned by this field. 0: Not assigned by this field.
1: Internal Music 1: Internal Music
2 - 4: External Music 2 - 4: External Music
5 - 7: VMIB MOH 5 - 6: VMIB MOH
8 - 12: SLT MOH 7 - 11: SLT MOH
13: Hold Tone 12: Hold Tone

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + 02(External Music) +

Reference
1. MOH (Music On Hold) : 2.4.17

4.2.3.7 PABX CO Dial Tone

Description
If this value is set to YES, PX or PABX provides CO Dial Tone.
Otherwise PX or PABX does not provide CO Dial Tone. Instead, IP LDK system provides it.

Value : YES=1 / NO=0

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + 0(No) +

299
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.2.3.8 PABX CO Ring Back Tone

Description
If this value is set to YES, PX or PABX provides CO Ring Back Tone.
Otherwise PX or PABX does not provide CO Ring Back Tone. Instead, IP LDK system provides it.

Value : YES=1 / NO=0

- YES: PBX
- NO: System

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(Yes) +

4.2.3.9 PABX CO Error Tone

Description
If this value is set to YES, PX or PABX provides CO Error Tone.
Otherwise PX or PABX does not provide CO Error Tone. Instead, IP LDK system provides it.

Value : YES=1 / NO=0

- YES: PBX
- NO: System

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(Yes) +

4.2.3.10 PABX CO Busy Tone

Description

300
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

If this value is set to YES, PX or PABX provides CO Busy Tone.

Otherwise PX or PABX does not provide CO Busy Tone. Instead, IP LDK system provides it.

Value : YES=1 / NO=0

- YES: PBX
- NO: System

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(Yes) +

4.2.3.11 PABX CO Announce Tone

Description
If this value is set to YES, PX or PABX provides CO Announce Tone.
Otherwise PX or PABX does not provide CO Announce Tone. Instead, IP LDK system provides it.

Value : YES=1 / NO=0

- YES: PBX
- NO: System

Default value : No

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(Yes) +

4.2.3.12 CO Flash Timer

Description
This value provides the length of time limit of CO Flash.
CO Flashing is available within this timer. Otherwise, the CO Line is released.
10msec base

Value : 000~300

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + 010(100msec) +

301
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.2.3.13 Open Loop Detect Timer

Description
This value provides the time limit of CO Open Loop.
100msec base

Value : 00~20

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + 10(1000msec) +

4.2.3.14 Line Length

Description
This feature is used to distinguish the line length when the CO Line length is too variable. (SAF only)

Value : LONG=1 / SHORT=0

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(Long) +

4.2.3.15 DISA Answer Timer

Description
This timer is used to delay before answer when system receives DISA call.

Value : 1 ~ 9(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + 5 +

4.2.3.16 DISA Delay TIMER

Description
This timer is used to delay before connect DTMF receiver after DISA line answered.

Value : 1 ~ 9(SEC)

302
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 142 + CO LINE RANGE + + Value +

4.2.4 ISDN CO LINE ATTRIBUTE (PGM 143)

4.2.4.1 COLP Table Index

Description
To know connected party number information, CLI refer this value.
If this value is set to 50, the CLI of this CO Line refers to ADMIN114-FLEX5.
Else if this value is set to 00 ~ 49, the CLI of this CO Line refers COLP Table(ADMIN201).

Value : 00~50
- 00 ~49: PGM 201 Bin No
- 50: PGM 114-FLEX 5

PROCEDURE

+ 143 + CO LINE RANGE + + 00 +

4.2.4.2 CLIP Table Index

Description
To know calling party number information, CLI refer this value.
If this value is set to 50, the CLI of this CO Line refers to ADMIN114-FLEX5.
Else if this value is set to 00 ~ 49, the CLI of this CO Line refers COLP Table(ADMIN201).

Value : 00~50
- 00 ~49: PGM 201 Bin No
- 50: PGM 114-FLEX 5

PROCEDURE

+ 143 + CO LINE RANGE + + 00 +

303
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.2.4.3 Call Type

Description
This value is used to set the call type of ISDN CO line CLI.

Value : 0~4
- 0: Unknown
- 1: International
- 2: National
- 3: Not used
- 4: Subscriber

PROCEDURE

+ 143 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(International) +

4.2.4.4 DID CONV Type

Description
When CO Service Type is set to ISDN DID/MSN(ADMIN 140), this value is used to decide DID digit
conversion type.
If this value is set to 0, incoming digits are converted as ADMINN 146.
If set to 1, there’s no digit conversion. If the caller dials valid station number, the station gets the call.
If set to 2, it refers Flexible DID Table(ADMIN 231).

Value : 0~2
- 0: convert digits by DID Digit Conversion (PGM146)
- 1: call to the valid extension.
- 2: convert digits by Flex DID Table (PGM231)

PROCEDURE

304
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 143 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(Conversion Type) +

4.2.4.5 DID Remove Number

Description
If this value is not 0, and the CO Line is DID Line, the system discard the incoming DID digits up to
amount of this value .
e.g. If this value is set to 02 and the outside caller dialed ‘01245’, then the first ‘01’ is removed.

Value : 00~99

PROCEDURE

+ 143 + CO LINE RANGE + + 02(Remove Number) +

4.2.4.6 ISDN Enblock Send

Description
If this value is set to ON, Enblock Sending Mode is applied at outgoing CO call.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

- ON: Enblock Sending Mode
- OFF: Overlap Sending Mode

PROCEDURE

+ 143 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(On) +

4.2.4.7 CLI Transit

Description
305
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

When using networking, If this value is set to ORI, the originate caller’s CLI is sent for CLI. Otherwise,
the call forwarded station’s CLI is sent.

Value : ORI=1 / CFW=0

- ORI: Send CLI as the originate caller’s CLI
- CFW: Send CLI as the call forwarded station’s CLI

PROCEDURE

+ 143 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(ORI) +

Reference
1. CO Transit – In : 2.16.12
2. CO Transit – Out : 2.16.13
4.2.4.8 Numbering Plan Id

Description
This value is used for Numbering Plan Id of ISDN called and calling party number.

Value : 0~7
- 0: unknown
- 1: ISDN / TELEPHONY
- 2: NOT USED
- 3: DATA
- 4: TELEX
- 5: NOT USED
- 6: NATIONAL STANDARD
- 7: PRIVATE

PROCEDURE

+ 143 + CO LINE RANGE + + +

FLEX 1 CALLING
FLEX 2 CALLED

1(ISDN/TELEPHONY) +

4.2.4.9 ISDN Call Deflection

Description
If this value is set to ON, ISDN call deflection service is available.

Value : ENABEL=1 / DISABEL=0

PROCEDURE

306
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 143 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(Enable) +

4.2.4.10 ISDN CP INBAND

Description

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 143 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(On) +

4.2.4.11 CLI TYPE

Description
If this value is set to 0, the CLI is made as before (refer PGM200/PGM114)
If this value is set to 1 or 2, the CLI is just as same as Long CLI (Station Long CLI 1 or 2).

Value : 0(Normal), 1(Long CLI 1), 2(Long CLI 2)

PROCEDURE

+ 143 + CO LINE RANGE + + 0 +

Reference
1. Station Long CLI 1 : 4.1.5.21
2. Station Long CLI 2 : 4.1.5.22

307
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.2.5 CO RING ASSIGNMENT (PGM 144)

Description
When CO Service Type(ADMIN 140) is set to Normal, CO incoming call goes to proper destination
according to this assignment.
Destination can be station or hunt group or VMIB announcement.
Ring assignment is applied separately by Day/Night Ring Mode by pressing FLEX 1~4.

FLEX ITEM DEST TYPE DEFAULT

1 Day
TYPE 1: Station Range + Delay
2 Night Station 101 (Attendant Station) is
TYPE 2: Hunt Group
3 Weekend assigned with delay 0.
TYPE 3: Voice Message
4 ON-Demand

Reference
1. Hunt Group : 2.6
2. Voice Service : 2.11
3. Day/Night Ring Mode : 2.13.8

4.2.5.1 Ring Assignment to Station

Description
To assign a call to the station, delay value must be entered.
If delay value is set, the call starts to ring after the delay time. To receive incoming call instantly, delay
value should be 0.
To delete CO ring assignment, press [SPEED] button instead of entering delay value.

PROCEDURE
To Assign Ring to Station at Day Mode,

+ 144 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1 + STATION RANGE

(Day)

308
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ VALUE +
(Delay Time:0~9)

4.2.5.2 Ring Assignment to Hunt Group

PROCEDURE
To Assign Ring to Station at Night Mode,

+ 144 + CO LINE RANGE + + 2

(Night)

+ HUNT GROUP +
(RANGE: 620~667)

4.2.5.3 Ring Assignment to VMIB Announcement

PROCEDURE
To Assign Ring to Station at Weekend Mode,

+ 144 + CO LINE RANGE + + 3

(Weekend)

+ VOICE MESSAGE +
(RANGE: 00~70)

309
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.2.6 CO LINE ASSIGNMENT DISPLAY (PGM 145)

Description
You can check the ring assignment destination of the CO line for each Day/Night Ring Mode.
If CO Call is assigned to the station at Day or Night Mode, you can see the delay value also.
e.g.) 100(1) means station 100 gets the ring with delay 1.
When there are too many stations, you can scroll data using volume up/down key.

Value : FLEX1 ~ FLEX4

- FLEX1: Day
- FLEX2: Night
- FLEX3: Weekend
- FLEX4: On-demand

PROCEDURE (When there are too many stations

to see, you can scroll data using
+ 145 + CO LINE RANGE + volume up/down key.)

310
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.2.7 CO LINE ATTRIBUTE Ⅲ (PGM 146)

4.2.7.1 Incoming prefix code Insertion

Description
If this value is set to ON, prefix code will be attached in front of incoming CLI.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 146 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(On) +

Reference
1. My Area Prefix Code : 4.8.1.6

4.2.7.2 Outgoing prefix code Insertion

Description
If this value is set to ON, prefix code will be attached in front of outgoing CLI.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 146 + CO LINE RANGE + + 0(Off) +

Reference

311
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

1. My Area Prefix Code : 4.8.1.6

4.2.7.3 ISDN Line Type

Description
This value is used to set ISDN CODEC Type.

Value : µ-Law=1 / A-Law= 0

PROCEDURE

+ 146 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(µ-Law) +

4.2.7.4 Calling Sub-address

Description
If this value is set to ON, calling party sub-address of the ISDN station is attached when an ISDN
station makes an outgoing CO Call through this CO Line.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 146 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(On) +

4.2.7.5 DID Digit Receive No

Description
This value is used as count of the received DID Digit number to route DID incoming Call.

Value : 2~4(Digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 146 + CO LINE RANGE + + 2 +

4.2.7.6 DID Digit Mask

Description
When DID Conversion Type(ADMIN 143 – FLEX4) is set to 0, The received DID digits are converted by

312
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

this value.
The number 0 ~ 9, #, * can be entered.
# means to ignore received digit, and * means to bypass the digit.
The length of DID Digit Mask is 4.

e.g.) ‘1234’ is received when DID Digit Mask is set as ‘#8**’, the digit is converted as ‘834’.

Value : 0~9 , # , * (4 digits)

Default value : #*** / ****(IP LDK-300E)

PROCEDURE

+ 146 + CO LINE RANGE + + VALUE +

(4digits)

4.3 SLOT PROGRAMMING

SLOT Programming is conducted to each board. Enter Slot Number in program mode.

4.3.1 BOARD ATTRIBUTE (PGM 155)

4.3.1.1 R2 CRC Check

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE, the R2 CRC is checked.

Value : ENABLE=1 / DISABLE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 155 + SLOT NUMBER + + 1(Enable) +

(R2 Board slot Number)

4.3.1.2 Distance Coefficient Setting

Description
When the switch for selection long loop on the board is set to ‘Long’, the gain value is set according to
the Distance Coefficient. (Applied to LCOB8/CLCOB4/CLCOB8/SLIB2E.)

Value : 0(0km), 1(3km), 2(5km), 3(7km)

PROCEDURE

+ 155 + SLOT NUMBER + + 0(default) +

(only the slot number of
LCOB8/CLCOB4/ 313
CLCOB8/SLIB2E)
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4 SYSTEM DATA PROGRAMMOMG

User can adjust the whole system configuration.

4.4.1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE - Ⅰ (PGM 160)

4.4.1.1 Attendant Call Queuing Ring Back Tone

Description
If this value is set to RBT, ring back tone is provided to the station when the station calls busy attendant.
Otherwise hold tone or VMIB-MOH(ADMIN 171 - FLEX2) is provided.

Value : RBT=1 / MOH=0

- RBT: The station user will hear ring back tone when calling busy attendant station.
- MOH: The station user will hear MOH, hold tone or VMIB-MOH by system database
(PGM 171-FLEX2)

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 1(RBT) +

Reference
1. MOH (Music On Hold) : 2.4.17

4.4.1.2 CAMP RBT/MOH

314
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Description
MOH or Ring Back tone is heard on camp-on.

Value : RBT=1 / MOH=0

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 1(RBT) +

Reference
1. MOH (Music On Hold) : 2.4.17

4.4.1.3 CO Line Choice

Description
In seizing a CO Line among CO line group, if this value is set to LAST CHOICE, Last available CO Line
is seized. Otherwise, CO line is seized round robin choice.

Value : LAST CHOICE=1 / ROUND ROBIN=0

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 0(Round Robin) +

4.4.1.4 DISA Retry Counter

Description
When the DISA user fails to call a station or access a feature, then DISA user can retry other calls or
features within this retry counter. If DISA user cannot access appropriately within this counter, this call is
routed according to DID/DISA destination (ADMIN 167).

Value : 0~9

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 4 +
(Retry Counter)

315
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4.1.5 ICM Continuous Dial-Tone

Description
This value sets whether ICM dial tone is continuous or not.

Value : CONTINUOUS=1 / DISCONTINUOUS=0

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 0(Discontinuous) +

4.4.1.6 CO Dial-Tone Detect

Description
When the speed dial is activated, if this value is set to ON, system detects dial tone using CPT instead
of pause timer.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 1(On) +

4.4.1.7 External Night Ring

Description
If this value is set to ON, when CO incoming call is received and UNA service is activated, the call is
sent to LBC1.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 0(On) +

Reference
1. UNA (UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER) : 2.1.7

316
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4.1.8 Hold Preference

Description
There are two types of Hold; System Hold and Exclusive Hold. If a call is held as System Hold, any
station can retrieve that call, Otherwise only holding station can retrieve that call.

Value : SYSTEM=1 / EXCLUSIVE=0

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 0(Exclusive) +

4.4.1.9 Multi-line Conference

Description
If this value is set to ON, a conference with multi-CO lines is available.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 0(Off) +

Reference
1. Conference – SLT (BROKERS Call) : 2.7.1

4.4.1.10 Print LCR Conversed Digit

Description
If this value is set to On, LCR conversed digits are showed on LCD and SMDR data. Otherwise original
dialed digits are showed.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 1(On) +

317
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Reference
1. LCR(Least Call Routing) : 2.2.7
2. SMDR : 2.12

4.4.1.11 Conference Warning Tone

Description
If this value is set to ON, other members will hear warning tone when a new member enters the
conference,

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 0(Off) +

4.4.1.12 Off-net Prompt Usage

Description
If this value is set to On, off-net VMIB announcement(prompt) will be heard when the call is Off-net call
forwarded,. It is only applied to CO-to-CO Transfer.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 0(Off) +

Reference
1. Call Forward, Incoming CO Off-net (ATD only) : 2.3.1.6

4.4.1.13 Off-net DTMF Tone

Description
If this value is set to ON, dialing DTMF tone will be heard to the outside caller when the call is Off-net
call forwarded. It is only applied to CO-to-CO Transfer.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

318
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 160 + + 0(Off) +

Reference
1. Call Forward, Incoming CO Off-net (ATD only) : 2.3.1.6

4.4.1.14 Voice Path Connect

Description
If this value is set to IMM(immediate), voice path is connected immediately at the CO outgoing call,
Otherwise It is connected after dialing any digits.

Value : IMM=1 / DGT=0

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 1(IMM) +

4.4.1.15 Transfer Tone

Description
While a call is transferred to destination station, if this value is set to RBT, transferred station will be
heard ring back tone. Otherwise MOH will be heard.

Value : RBT=0 / MOH=1

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 0(RBT) +

Reference
1. MOH (Music On Hold) : 2.4.17

4.4.1.16 CO – CO TRANSFER CPT DETECT

Description
If this value is set to ON, error and busy tones are detected by LCO CPTU. Then CO line is
disconnected.
This option is applied to LCO incoming & outgoing calls and CO-to-CO Transfer Call.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

319
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + OFF +

* Warning: If this option is set, the voice, music or noise can be detected as busy or error tone. As the
result of this, a user may have unexpected disconnection during conversation.

4.4.1.17 ACD PACKAGE USAGE

Description
If this value is set to ON, ACD Information is printable.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + ON +

4.4.1.18 CO – CO UC TIMER EXTEND

Description
If this value is set to on, the conference call user can extend Unsupervised Conference Timer by dialing
UC TIMER EXTEND Code.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + ON +

Reference
1. Conference : 2.7
2. UC Conference timer Extend Code : 2.7

4.4.1.19 CALL LOG LIST NUMBER

Description
Set the number of Call Log List per stations.

Value : 15 ~ 50 (2 digits)

320
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 160 + + 15 +

4.4.2 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE - Ⅱ (PGM 161)

4.4.2.1 Network Time/Date Setting

Description
If this value is set to ON, the system time/date are set by the network time/date.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 1(On) +

4.4.2.2 Off-Hook Ring Type

Description
The off-hook ring type in the system can be set to mute or one burst ring.

Value : MUTE=1 / BURST=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 0(Burst) +

321
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4.2.3 Override 1st CO Line Group

Description
If this value is set to ON, if there is no available CO Line in the first CO Line Group, system can access
the next accessible CO Line Group.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 0(Off) +

4.4.2.4 Page Warning Tone

Description
If this value is set to ON, page warning tone will be heard when paging starts.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 0(Off) +

4.4.2.5 Auto Privacy

Description
If this value is set to ON, the call is protected from override regardless of Station Override Privilege
(ADMIN 113-FLEX 4).

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 0(Off) +

322
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Reference
1. Attendant Override : 2.13.5

4.4.2.6 Privacy Warning Tone

Description
If this value is set to ON, privacy warning tone will be heard when the call is overridden.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 0(Off) +

Reference
1. Attendant Override : 2.13.5

4.4.2.7 Single Ring for CO Call

Description
The cadence of ICM ring is set to 1sec on/ 4sec off.
The cadence of CO ring is set to 0.4s on/ 0.2s off/ 0.4s on/ 4sec off.
If this value is set to YES, the ICM ring cadence and the CO ring cadence is reversed each other.

Value : YES=1 / NO=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 1(Yes) +

4.4.2.8 WTU Auto Release

Description
If this value is set to ON, WTU is released automatically.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 1(On) +

323
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4.2.9 ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Print Enable

Description
If this value is set to ON, ACD Print is available.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 1(On) +

Reference
1. ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) : 2.6.7

4.4.2.10 ACD Print Timer

Description
ACD database is printed per desired time interval.
(10 sec or 1 hour based : ADMIN 161-FLEX 14)

Value : 001 ~ 225(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 002 +
(RANGE: 001~225)

Reference
1. ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) : 2.6.7

4.4.2.11 ACD Clear Database after Print

Description
If this value is set to ON, ACD database is initialized after printed out.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE
324
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 161 + + 1(On) +

Reference
1. ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) : 2.6.7

4.4.2.12 VIMB Prompt Gain

Description
This value is gain of VMIB Announcement(Prompt). Whenever VMIB Announcement is played, this
value is applied.

Value : 00 ~ 31

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 00 +
(Range:00 - 31)

4.4.2.13 CLI Information at VM SMDI(Simplified Message Desk Interface)

Description
If this value is set to ON, CLI is added when Voice Mail information is printed through RS232 port by
SMDI.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 1(On) +

4.4.2.14 ACD Print Timer Unit

Description
This value determines the unit of ACD Print timer(ADMIN 161 - FLEX 10).
(1 hour or 10 seconds)

Value : HOUR=1 / SEC=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 1(Hour) +

325
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Reference
1. ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) : 2.6.7

4.4.2.15 Set VM SMDI Type

Description
This value sets VM SMDI type (Refer RS232 Spec).

Value : TYPE II=1 / TYPE I=0

PROCEDURE
To change the value, user can do as follows.

+ 161 + + 1(TypeⅡ) +

4.4.2.16 Incoming Toll Check

Description
If this value is set to ON, the system checks toll of incoming CO call.

Value : ON =1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 1(On) +

4.4.2.17 NO DSS Indication

Description
If this value is set to ENABLE, LED indication of {CO} button or {DSS} button is blocked.
(i.e. LED does not flash even if there is incoming call to the assigned CO Line or Station.)
This feature is not applied for direct call such as DID/DISA.

Value : Enable=1 / Disable=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 0(Disable) +

326
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4.2.18 UK Billing Mode

Description
If this value is set to ON, UK Billing Mode is applied. (UK only)

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 0(OFF) +

4.4.2.19 COS 7 When Authorization Fail

Description
If this value is set to ON, the station’ COS is changed to 7 when station enters invalid authorization
code.
(If authorization code is assigned, station’ COS is down to 7 temporarily when station enters invalid
authorization code. Then station can recover his COS by COS RESTORE.
If not assigned, day & night COS in PGM 116 are changed to 7 when station enters invalid authorization
code. To recover COS, day & night COS should be reassigned.)

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 0(OFF) +

Reference

1. Station COS : 4.1.7

4.4.2.20 5 Digit Authorization Code Usage

Description
327
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

If this value is set to ON, Auth code is 5 digit fixed length. If this value is set to OFF, Auth code is flexible
length of 3 ~ 11 digits.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 0(OFF) +

Reference
1. Authorization Code : 4.11.1

4.4.2.21 LCR Dial Tone Detect

Description
If this value is set to ON, IP LDK system first checks if the CO provides dial tone in case if analog CO is
seized for LCR dialing. If there’s no dial tone, the call is rerouted to Alternate DMT Index.
If LCR type is set to M13, LCR dial tone detect option is not applied.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 161 + + 0(OFF) +

4.4.3 ADMIN PASSWORD (PGM 162)

Description
ADMIN password can be assigned to enter ADMIN Programming mode for only Administrator who
knows the ADMIN password. It is not assigned by default.

Value : *, #, 0~9 (4 digits)

PROCEDURE

328
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

To change the value, user can do as follows.

+ 162 + PASSWORD +
(4digits)

If you want to delete the ADMIN password, press the [speed] button.

4.4.4 ALARM ATTRIBUTES (PGM 163)

FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 Alarm Enable ON/OFF OFF
2 Alarm Contact Type CLOSE/OPEN CLOSE Close, Open
3 Alarm Mode ALARM / BELL ALARM Alarm, Door Bell
4 Alarm Signal Mode RPT/ONCE RPT Repeat , Once

4.4.4.1 Alarm Enable

Description
If this value is set to ON, Alarm is available.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 163 + + 1(On) +

Reference
1. Alarm : 2.4.2

329
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4.4.2 Alarm Contact Type

Description

Value : CLOSE=1 / OPEN=0

PROCEDURE

+ 163 + + 0(Open) +

Reference
1. Alarm : 2.4.2

4.4.4.3 Alarm Mode

Description

Value : ALARM=1 / DOOR BELL=0

PROCEDURE
To change the value, user can do as follows.

+ 163 + + 0(Door Bell) +

Reference
1. Alarm : 2.4.2

4.4.4.4 Alarm Signal Mode

Description
If this value is set to REPEAT, the Alarm Signal is repeated until Alarm Reset.

Value : REPEAT=1 / ONCE=0

PROCEDURE

330
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 163 + + 0(Once) +

Reference
1. Alarm : 2.4.2

4.4.5 ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT (PGM 164)

Description
Maximum 5 Attendants can be assigned including the Main Attendants and System Attendant. The
system attendant is different from main attendant in aspect of the call handling and system
management priority. The system attendant has more powerful priority than main attendant. The system
and main attendants can be assigned to each 1 and maximum 4. So the sum of system and main
attendants should be less than 5. As default, the System Attendant is assigned to Station 101, and
others are not assigned.

Value : 1~5(IP LDK-300/300E) /1~3(IP LDK-100)

Procedure

4.4.5.1 SYSTEM ATTENTANT ASSIGNMENT

Procedure

+ 164 + + STATION NUMBER +

4.4.5.2 MAIN ATTENDANTS ASSIGNMENT

331
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Procedure

+ 164 + + STATION NUMBER +

(RANGE: FLEX2~5)

If you want to delete any system attendant, press the Flex. BTN, which want to delete and press the
[SPEED] button.
*Note: It is impossible to delete the first System Attendant.

4.4.6 AUTO ATTENDANT VMIB ANNC ASSIGNMENT (PGM 165)

User may set the number of the VMIB announcement for auto attendant.

FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 AUTO ATD USAGE ON/OFF OFF
2 VMIB ANNC 00 - 70 00

4.4.6.1 AUTO ATD USAGE

Description
If this value is set to ON, Auto Attendant is activated.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 165 + + 1(On) +

Reference
1. VMIB Announcement for Auto Attendant : 2.11.5

332
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4.6.2 VMIB ANNC

Description
This value is the number of VMIB announcement played when Auto Attendant is activated.

Value : 00~70

PROCEDURE

+ 165 + + 01 +

Reference
1. VMIB Announcement for Auto Attendant : 2.11.5

4.4.7 CO-TO-CO COS (PGM 166)

When an external user of DID/DISA/TIE line tries to access another CO Line in the system, CO-to-CO
COS is applied. The attributes of CO-to-CO COS are the same as the station COS.

FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 Day COS 1-9 1 Day Class-of-Service
2 Night/Weekend COS 1-9 1 Night/Weekend Class-of-Service

Reference
1. COS (Class Of Service) : 2.5.4

4.4.7.1 Day COS

Description
Class-of-Service of Day Mode

Value : 1~7

PROCEDURE

+ 166 + + 2 +

333
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Reference
1. Day/Night service : 2.13.8

4.4.7.2 Night / Weekend COS

Description
Class-of-Service of Night / Weekend Mode

Value : 1~7

PROCEDURE

+ 166 + + 2 +

Reference
1. Day/Night service : 2.13.8

4.4.8 DID/DISA DESTINATION (PGM 167)

When there is a DID/DISA incoming call, if the destination is not answer / invalid / busy, the call is
routed to Attendant / Hunt group / or the caller gets the proper tone.
If Attendant is assigned for DID/DISA destination, first, the call will check ring assignment(ADMIN 144),
if there exists ring assigned station the call is routed to that station. If there is not ring assigned station,
then the call is routed to Attendant.
If VMIB announcement usage is enabled, The proper announcement is presented to the caller before
the call is routed.
This destination is applied when DISA Retry Counter expired.
If the destination is set to attendant, system checks if there’s any ring assigned station and gives the
ring to assigned station first. If the ring assigned station does not answer also, then the attendant
receives the call.

Reference
1. DISA Retry Counter 4.4.1.4
2. Ring Assignment to Station 4.2.5.1

4.4.8.1 Busy Destination

Description
When there is a DID/DISA incoming call, and if the caller dialed busy destination, the call is routed to
Busy Destination (Tone / Attendant / Hunt).

Value : FLEX1~FLEX3
334
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

- FLEX1: Tone
- FLEX2: Attendant (Ring Assign)
- FLEX3: Forward to Hunt Group

PROCEDURE

+ 167 + + FLEX2 +

4.4.8.2 Error Destination

Description
When there is a DID/DISA incoming call, and if the caller dialed invalid number, the call is routed to
Error Destination (Tone / Attendant / Hunt).

Value : FLEX1~FLEX3
- FLEX1: Tone
- FLEX2: Attendant (Ring Assign)
- FLEX3: Forward to Hunt Group

PROCEDURE
To change the value, user can do as follows.

+ 167 + + FLEX2 +

4.4.8.3 No Answer Destination

Description
When there is a DID/DISA incoming call, and the destination is not answer, the call is routed to No
Answer Destination (Tone / Attendant / Hunt).

Value : F1~F3 (FLEX1~FLEX3)

335
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

- FLEX1: Tone
- FLEX2: Attendant (Ring Assign)
- FLEX3: Forward to Hunt Group

PROCEDURE

+ 167 + + FLEX2 +

4.4.8.4 VMIB PROMPT USAGE

Description
If the value is set to ON and VMIB is available, The proper VMIB announcement is presented to the
caller before the call is routed to each Destination.

Value : F1~F5 (FLEX1~FLEX5)

- FLEX1: Busy Prompt Usage
- FLEX2: Error Prompt Usage
- FLEX3: DND Prompt Usage
- FLEX4: No Answer Prompt Usage
- FLEX5: Attendant Transfer Prompt Usage

Reference
1. Voice Service : 2.11

4.4.8.4.1 Busy Prompt Usage

Description
If the value is set to ON, Busy announcement is presented to the caller before the call is routed to Busy
Destination.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

336
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 167 + + + 0(On) +
(Range: FLEX1~5)

4.4.8.4.2 Error Prompt Usage

Description
If the value is set to ON, Error announcement is presented to the caller before the call is routed to Error
Destination.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 167 + + + 0(Off) +
(Range: FLEX1~5)

4.4.8.4.3 DND Prompt Usage

Description
If the value is set to ON, Busy announcement is presented to the caller before the call is routed to Busy
Destination when the original destination is in DND.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

+ 167 + + + 0(Off) +
(Range: FLEX1~5)

Reference
1. DND(Do Not Disturb) : 2.4.9

4.4.8.4.4 No Answer Prompt Usage

Description
If the value is set to ON, No Answer announcement is presented to the caller before the call is routed to
No Answer Destination.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

337
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 167 + + + 0(Off) +
(Range: FLEX1~5)

4.4.8.4.5 Attendant Transfer Prompt Usage

Description
If the value is set to ON, Attendant Transfer announcement is presented to the caller before the call is
routed to Attendant.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 167 + + + 0(Off) +
(Range: FLEX1~5)

4.4.8.5 Reroute Busy Destination

Description
If Busy Destination is too busy, the call is rerouted to Reroute Busy Destination (Tone / Attendant /
Hunt).

Value : FLEX1~FLEX3
- FLEX1: Tone
- FLEX2: Attendant (Ring Assign)
- FLEX3: Forward to Hunt Group

PROCEDURE

+ 167 + + FLEX2 +

4.4.8.6 Reroute Error Destination

Description
If Error Destination is too busy, the call is rerouted to Reroute Error Destination (Tone / Attendant /
Hunt).

Value : FLEX1~FLEX3
- FLEX1: Tone

338
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

- FLEX2: Attendant (Ring Assign)

- FLEX3: Forward to Hunt Group

PROCEDURE

+ 167 + + FLEX2 +

4.4.8.7 Reroute No Answer Destination

Description
If No Answer Destination is too busy, the call is rerouted to Reroute No ANS Destination (Tone /
Attendant / Hunt).

Value : FLEX1~FLEX3
- FLEX1: Tone
- FLEX2: Attendant (Ring Assign)
- FLEX3: Forward to Hunt Group

PROCEDURE

+ 167 + + FLEX2 +

4.4.9 EXTERNAL CONTROL CONTACT (PGM 168)

The usage of External Relay is defined.

By default, External control contacts are not assigned at all.

FLEX ITEM VALUE DEFAULT REMARK

1 First Contact 1–5 - 1: LBC(STA #)

2 Second Contact 1–5 - 2: Door
3 Third Contact 1–5 - 3: Ext. 1
4 Forth Contact 1–5 - 4: Ext. 2
5 Fifth Contact 1–5 - 5: Ext. 3
6 Sixth Contact 1–5 -
7 Seventh Contact 1–5 - IP LDK-300/300E Only

- FLEX 1~7(IP LDK-300/300E)

- FLEX 1~6(IP LDK-100)

4.4.9.1 LBC(Loud Bell Control)

Description
If an External Control Contact is assigned to LBC, then it is activated when the station is ringing. Then
the ringing call of the station is notified loudly. In the night mode, LBC1 may be programmed to provide
external night ringing. In this case LBC1 does not follow its associated station’s ring.

339
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value : 1~5
1: LBC (STA #)
2: Door
3: Ext. 1
4: Ext. 2
5: Ext. 3

PROCEDURE

+ 168 + + 1 + STATION NUMBER +

(Range: FLEX1~7)

Reference
1. UNA (UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER) : 2.1.7

4.4.9.2 Door Open

Description
External Control Contact can be used at Door Opening.

Value : 1~5
- 1: LBC (STA #)
- 2: Door
- 3: Ext. 1
- 4: Ext. 2
- 5: Ext. 3

PROCEDURE

+ 168 + + 2 +
(Range: FLEX1~7)

4.4.9.3 External Relay (1~3)

Description
External Control Contact can be used at any External Relay.

Value: 1~5

340
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

- 1: LBC (STA #)
- 2: Door
- 3: Ext. 1
- 4: Ext. 2
- 5: Ext. 3

PROCEDURE

+ 168 + + 3 +
(Range: FLEX1~7) (Value: 3~5)

4.4.10 LCD TIME/DATE/LANGUAGE DISPLAY MODE (PGM 169)

The LCD Time/Date/Language display formats can be set.

4.4.10.1 LCD Time Display Mode

Description
Two LCD Time formats are Ordinary (12-hour)/Military (24-hour) mode

Value : 12H=1 / 24H=0

- 12H : 12-Hour Mode
- 24H : 24-Hour Mode

PROCEDURE

+ 169 + + 0(24H) +

4.4.10.2 LCD Date Display Mode

Description
Two LCD date formats are Day/Month/Year (DDMMYY) or Month/Day/Year (MMDDYY) mode.

341
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value : MMDDYY=1 / DDMMYY=0

PROCEDURE

+ 169 + + 1(MMDDYY) +

4.4.10.3 LCD Language Display Mode

Description
The LCD language format can be selected.

Value : 00~14
- 00: English
- 01: Italian
- 02: Finnish
- 03: Dutch
- 04: Swedish
- 05: Danish
- 06: Norwegian
- 07: Hebrew
- 08: Germany
- 09: French
- 10: Portuguese
- 11: Spanish
- 12: Korean
- 13: Estonia
- 14: Russian

PROCEDURE
To change the value, user can do as follows.

342
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 169 + + Value +
(Range: 00~14)

4.4.11 MODEM (PGM 170)

Modem service is available only when there’s MODU on MPB.

4.4.11.1 STA No.

Description
This value means the Modem-associated station. To use Modem line flexibly, associate one station with
Modem. Then incoming CO Call is connected to Modem device if the station gets the call.
The last station is assigned as Modem associated station.

Value :
- 1000~1599(IP LDK-300E)
- 100~399(IP LDK-300)
- 100~227(IP LDK-100)

Default value :
- STA1599(IP LDK-300E)
- STA399(IP LDK-300)
- STA227(IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 170 + + Station Number +

343
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4.11.2 CO No.

Description
If CO Line is associated with Modem, All of the incoming CO Call through this Line is connected to
Modem. The Modem-associated CO Line cannot be used to outgoing CO Call.

Value :
- 001 ~ 400(IP LDK-300E)
- 001 ~ 200(IP LDK-300)
- 01 ~ 40(IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 170 + + CO Number +

4.4.12 MUSIC Assignment (PGM 171)

4.4.12.1 BGM Type

Description

Value : 00~12(IP LDK-300/300E) , 00~11(IP LDK-100)

IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
00: Not Assignment 00: None
01: Int. Music 01: Int. Music
02 – 04: External Music 1-3 02 – 04: External Music 1-3
05 – 07: VMIB BGM1-3 05 – 06: VMIB BGM1-2
08 – 12: SLT MOH 07 – 11: SLT MOH1-5

PROCEDURE

+ 171 + + Value +
(BGM Type)

4.4.12.2 MOH Type

Description

344
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

When a CO line call is placed in the hold state (system, exclusive, transfer, conference, etc) the
external party will hear music. In this way, the CO line party can be notified that the connection is still
established.

Value : 00~13(IP LDK-300/300E) , 00~12(IP LDK-100)

IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
00: Not Assignment 00: None
01: Int. Music 01: Int. Music
02 – 04: External Music 1-3 02 – 04: External Music 1-3
05 – 07: VMIB BGM1-3 05 – 06: VMIB BGM1-2
08 – 12: SLT MOH 07 – 11: SLT MOH1-5
13: Hold Tone 12: Hold Tone

PROCEDURE

+ 171 + + Value +

Reference
1. MOH (Music On Hold) : 2.4.17

4.4.12.3 ICM Box Music Channel

Description

Value : 00~12(IP LDK-300/300E) , 00~11(IP LDK-100)

IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
00: No BGM 00: None
01: Int. Music 01: Int. Music
02 – 04: External Music 1-3 02 – 04: External Music 1-3
05 – 07: VMIB BGM1-3 05 – 06: VMIB BGM1-2
08 – 12: SLT MOH 07 – 11: SLT MOH1-5
12: Hold Tone

PROCEDURE

+ 171 + + Value +
(Music Channel)

Reference
1. ICM Box Music Selection 2.13.10

345
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4.12.4 Assign SLT MOH

Description
To assign SLT MOH, set this value and match the SLT station number of the SLT port.

Value : F1 ~ F5 (SLT MOH)

- FLEX1 : SLT MOH 1
- FLEX2 : SLT MOH 2
- FLEX3 : SLT MOH 3
- FLEX4 : SLT MOH 4
- FLEX5 : SLT MOH 5

PROCEDURE

+ 171 + + + SLT Station Number +

(Range: FLEX1~5)

Reference
1. SLT MOH : 2.4.17.1

4.4.12.5 DIAL TONE SOURCE

Description
To assign external dial tone, set the SLT station number of the SLT port.

Value : 1 ~ 5 (SLT MOH)

- 1 : SLT MOH 1
- 2 : SLT MOH 2
- 3 : SLT MOH 3
- 4 : SLT MOH 4
- 5 : SLT MOH 5

PROCEDURE

+ 171 + + 0 (Not Assigned) +

4.4.12.5 ICM RING BACK TONE

Description
To assign external ICM ring back tone, set the SLT station number of the SLT port.

346
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value : 1 ~ 5 (SLT MOH)

- 1 : SLT MOH 1
- 2 : SLT MOH 2
- 3 : SLT MOH 3
- 4 : SLT MOH 4
- 5 : SLT MOH 5

PROCEDURE

+ 171 + + 0 (Not Assigned) +

4.4.12.6 DID RING BACK TONE

Description
To assign external DID ring back tone, set the SLT station number of the SLT port.

Value : 1 ~ 5 (SLT MOH)

- 1 : SLT MOH 1
- 2 : SLT MOH 2
- 3 : SLT MOH 3
- 4 : SLT MOH 4
- 5 : SLT MOH 5

PROCEDURE

+ 171 + + 0 (Not Assigned) +

4.4.13 PBX ACCESS CODE (PGM 172)

Maximum 4 PABX Access Codes can be assigned. Each PABX Access Code is 1 or 2-digit number.

347
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

By default, PABX Access Codes are not assigned at all.

Description

Value : 1 or 2 digits

PROCEDURE

+ 172 + + 9(Max 2 digits) +

(Range: FLEX1~4) (Range: *,#,1~99)
DELETE: [SPEED]

4.4.14 PLA PRIORITY SETTING (PGM 173)

The PLA Priority among Transferred Call, Recalled Call, Incoming Call, Queued Call can be set.

FLEX ITEM VALUE DEFAULT REMARK

1 XFER (Transfer Call) 1–4 1
2 REC (Recall) 1–4 2
PLA priority is set exclusively
3 INC (Incoming Call) 1–4 3
4 QUE (Queued Call) 1–4 4

Description
PLA priority is set exclusively

VALUE : 1~4

Default value : XFER=1, REC=2, INC=3, QUE=4

PROCEDURE

ex) Answer Priority : QUE → INC → REC → XFER

+ 173 + + 4 + + 3 + + 2

348
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ + 1 +

Reference
1. PLA (Preferred Line Answer) : 2.1.2

4.4.15 RS-232C PORT SETTING (PGM 174)

FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 COM1 Port Setting FLEX 1-4
2 COM2 Port Setting FLEX 1-4
3 COM3 - MODU Port Setting FLEX 1-4
4 COM4 - MISB Port Setting FLEX 1-4 IP LDK-300/300E Only
5 COM5 - MISB Port Setting FLEX 1-4 IP LDK-300/300E Only
* Note1) Only COM2 port can use 57600-baud rate with setting the baud rate value ‘8’.

Description
Baud Rate, CTS/RTS, P-Break, LPP can be assigned at this feature to COM1 port, COM2 port, COM3
– MODU port, COM4 – MISB port, COM5 – MISB port respectively.

Value : FLEX1~FLEX4
FLEX ITEM VALUE DEFAULT REMARK
0: N/A 1: N/A
2: 1200 Baud 3: 2400 Baud
1 BAUDRATE 0-7(Note1) 19200
4: 4800 Baud 5: 9600 Baud
6: 19200 Baud 7: 38400 Baud
2 CTS/RTS ON/OFF OFF
3 P-BREAK ON/OFF OFF
4 LPP 001-199 060

349
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE
COM 1

+ 174 + + + 7(38400) +
(Range: FLEX1~4) (Baudrate)

COM 2

+ 174 + + + 7(38400) +
(COM 2) (Range: FLEX1~4) (Baudrate)

COM 3 (MODU Port)

+ 174 + + + 7(38400) +
(Range: FLEX1~4) (Baudrate)

COM 4 (MISB Port)

+ 174 + + + 7(38400) +
(Range: FLEX1~4) (Baudrate)

COM 5 (MISB Port)

+ 174 + + + 7(38400) +
(Range: FLEX1~4) (Baudrate)

4.4.16 PRINT PORT SELECTION (PGM 175)

RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

FLEX ITEM IP LDK- IP LDK- IP LDK- IP LDK-
IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
300/300E 100 300/300E 100
1 Off-line 01-14 01-12 COM2 COM1 01: COM1 01: COM1
SMDR/ 02: COM2 02: COM2
Statistics Print 03: COM3-MODU 03: COM3-MODU
2 ADMIN Print 01-14 01-12 COM2 COM1 04: COM4-MISB 04: TELNET 1
3 Traffic 01-14 01-12 COM2 COM1 05: COM5-MISB 05: TELNET 2
4 SMDI Print 01-14 01-12 COM2 COM1 06: TELNET 1 06: TELNET 3
5 Call 01-14 01-12 COM2 COM1 07: TELNET 2 07: Not Supported
Information 08: TELNET 3 08: NET_PCADM
6 Info/On-line 01-14 01-12 COM2 COM1 09: Not Supported 09: NET_PCATD
SMDR 10: Not Supported 10: NET_CTI
7 Trace 01-14 01-12 COM2 COM1 11: Not Supported 11: NET_REMOTE
12: Not Supported 12: Not Supported
8 Debug 01-14 01-12 COM2 COM1
13: Not Supported
9 PC ADMIN 01-14 01-12 NET_PCADM
14: Not Supported
10 PC Attendant 01-14 01-12 NET_PCATD
11 CTI 01-14 01-12 NET_CTI
12 Remote 01-14 01-12 NET_REMOTE
Diagnostic

350
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4.16.1 Off-line SMDR/Statistics Print

Description
Off-line SMDR data is printed through this port.

Value :
- 01~14 (IP LDK-300/300E)
- 01~11 (IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 175 + + Value +

Reference
1. SMDR : 2.12

4.4.16.2 ADMIN Data

Description
When ADMIN 451 is used, the ADMIN data is printed through this port.

Value :
- 01~14 (IP LDK-300/300E)
- 01~11 (IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 175 + + Value +

4.4.16.3 Traffic

Description
Traffic analysis data is printed through this port.

Value :
- 01~14 (IP LDK-300/300E)
- 01~11 (IP LDK-100)

351
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 175 + + Value +

Reference
1. Traffic Analysis : 2.18

4.4.16.4 SMDI Print

Description
SMDI data is printed through this port.

Value :
- 01~14 (IP LDK-300/300E)
- 01~11 (IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 175 + + Value +

4.4.16.5 Call Information

Description
Call information data(??) is printed through this port.

Value :
- 01~14 (IP LDK-300/300E)
- 01~11 (IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 175 + + Value +

4.4.16.6 Info/On-line SMDR

Description
On-line SMDR data is printed through this port.

Value :
- 01~14 (IP LDK-300/300E)
- 01~11 (IP LDK-100)

352
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 175 + + Value +

Reference
1. SMDR : 2.12

4.4.16.7 Trace
Description
Trace data is printed through this port.

Value :
- 01~14 (IP LDK-300/300E)
- 01~11 (IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 175 + + Value +

Reference
1. SMDR : 2.12
4.4.16.8 Debug

Description
Debug data is printed through this port.

Value :
- 01~14 (IP LDK-300/300E)
- 01~11 (IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 175 + + Value +

Reference
1. SMDR : 2.12

4.4.16.9 PC ADMIN

Description
PC Admin is connected through this port.

353
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value : 01~14(IP LDK-300)

- 01~14 (IP LDK-300/300E)
- 01~11 (IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 175 + + Value +

Reference
PC ADMIN programming manual

4.4.16.10 PC Attendant

Description
PC Admin is connected through this port.

Value : 01~14(IP LDK-300)

- 01~14 (IP LDK-300/300E)
- 01~11 (IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 175 + + Value +

Reference
PC ADMIN programming manual

4.4.16.11 CTI

Description
CTI is connected through this port.

354
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value : 01~14(IP LDK-300)

- 01~14 (IP LDK-300/300E)
- 01~11 (IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 175 + + Value +

4.4.16.12 Remote Diagnostic

Description
Remote Diagnostic data is printed through this port.

Value : 01~14(IP LDK-300)

- 01~14 (IP LDK-300/300E)
- 01~11 (IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 175 + + Value +

4.4.17 PULSE DIAL PATIO (PGM 176)

Description

In IP LDK-300/300E/100, pulse dial speed ratio is set only for 10 PPS.

Value : 0/ 1/ 2
- 1 : 10 PPS 66/33%
- 2 : 10 PPS 50/50%
- 0 : 10 PPS 60/40%

PROCEDURE

+ 175 + 0(10 PPS) +

355
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4.18 SMDR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 177)

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) will provide details on both incoming and outgoing calls. As
an assignable database option, If All Call record type is selected, incoming and outgoing local and long
distance calls are all provided. If only Long Distance is selected, then only outgoing calls that meet the
toll check status requirements listed below are provided.

4.4.18.1 SMDR Save Enable

Description
If this value is set to ON, maximum 5000 of SMDR data can be recorded at system memory.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + 1(On) +

4.4.18.2 SMDR Print Enable

356
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Description
If this value is set to ON, SDMR data can be printed real time through the serial/MODEM/LAN port.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + 1(On) +

4.4.18.3 Long Distance / All Call Recorded (SMDR Recording Call Type)
Description
If this value is set to LD, only long distance outgoing CO call is served SMDR.
If this value is set to ALL, all outgoing CO call is served SMDR.
The long distance call is defined that the call satisfy the condition of ADMIN program 177 – FLEX 4, or
ADMIN program 177 – FLEX 14.

Value : LD=1 / ALL CALL=0

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + 0(Call) +
4.4.18.4 SMDR Long Distance Call Digit Counter

Description
The long distance call is defined that the call satisfy the condition of ADMIN program 177 – FLEX 4, or
ADMIN program 177 – FLEX 14.
If digit counters of the outgoing CO call are more than this value, it is considered as long distance call.

Value : 07~15

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + Value +

4.4.18.5 Print Incoming Call

Description
If value is set to ON, all incoming calls are printed.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

357
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 177 + + 1(On) +

4.4.18.6 Print Lost Call

Description
If value is set to ON, lost calls are printed
The lost call is defined that the call is unanswered.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + 1(On) +

4.4.18.7 Records in Detail

Description
Due to limited system memory size, in places where many calls take place, the SMDR record buffer can
easily saturated. So, if the customer doesn't need the detailed call information but total call, total
metering count and total cost for individual station, then it is possible to save only the total accumulation,
rather than the whole detailed records.
If this value is set to ON, not only total call, total metering count and total cost for individual station, but
also the detail call records are saved maximum 5000.
If this value is set to OFF, only total call, total metering count and total cost for individual station
information are served.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + 0(Off) +

4.4.18.8 SMDR Dial Digit Hidden

Description
If this value is set non-zero value, the printed digits from right or left will be replace to ‘*’ symbol up to

358
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

this value.
The direction of right or left can be set at ADMIN program 177 – FLEX 13.

Value : 0~9

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + Value +

4.4.18.9 SMDR Currency Unit

Description
For easy identification of call cost, the currency unit can be entered with 3 alphabet characters to be
printed in front of call charge amount.

Value : 3 CHARACTERS

. – 13 A – 21 D – 31
Q – 11 B – 22 E – 32
Z – 12 C – 23 F – 33
1 – 10 2 – 20 3 – 30
G – 41 J – 51 M – 61
H – 42 K – 52 N – 62
I – 43 L – 53 O – 63
4 – 40 5 – 50 6 – 60
P – 71 W – 91
T – 81
R – 72 X – 92
U – 82
S – 73 Y – 93
V – 83
Q - 7½ Z – 9#
8 – 80
7 – 70 9 – 90
½1–Blank
½2 - : 0 – 00 #
½3 - ,

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + 3 Characters +

359
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4.18.10 SMDR Cost Per Unit Pulse

Description
This is the call cost unit per cost metering pulse, which is sent from the Central Office.

Value : 6 digits(0~9)

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + 001000 +
(Range: 6 digits)

4.4.18.11 SMDR Fraction

Description
This value means the decimal position point of the cost per unit pulse

Value : 0~5

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + Value +

4.4.18.12 SMDR Start Timer

Description
If this value is set non-zero value, only the outgoing CO call more than this value time is served SDMR.

Value : 000~250

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + Value(Timer) +

360
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.4.18.13 SMDR Hidden Digit

Description
If this value is set to RIGHT, SDMR digit hiding is executed the right-to-left direction.
At this case, if dialed ‘1234567890’, SDMR printed hidden digits are formatted ‘12345*****’.
If this value is set to LEFT, SDMR digit hiding is executed to left-to-right direction.
At this case, if dialed ‘1234567890’, SDMR printed hidden digits are formatted ‘*****67890’.

Value : RIGHT=1 / LEFT=0

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + 0(Left) +

4.4.18.14 SMDR Long Distance Codes

Description
The long distance call is defined that the call satisfy the condition of ADMIN program 177 – FLEX 4, or
ADMIN program 177 – FLEX 14.
Max. 5 SMDR long distance codes are available. SMDR long distance code is 1 or 2 digit number. By
default, SMDR long distance code is 0.

Value : 1 or 2 Digits
Max. 5 SMDR long distance codes : FLEX1 ~ FLEX5

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + + 1( Max 2 Digits) +

(Range: FLEX1~5) (Range: *,#,0~99)

4.4.18.15 MSN PRINT ON SMDR

Description
If this value is set to ON, the MSN number is printed instead of the station number when the
station made MSN outgoing call.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

361
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + 1 (enable) +

Reference
1. MSN : 2.14.7

4.4.18.16 PRINT CALLER NUMBER

Description
If this value is set to ON, the caller number is printed at incoming call SMDR.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 177 + + 1 (enable) +

4.4.19 SYSTEM TIME/DATE SETTING (PGM 178)

In this ADMIN program, date and time can be set.

4.4.19.1 System Time

Description
Hour/Min in sequence( ex. In case 11:30, enter 1130 )

Value : 4 digits

PROCEDURE

+ 178 + + Value(4 Digits) +

( HHMM)

4.4.19.2 System Date

Description
Month/Day/Year in sequence( ex. In case 27/January/2004, enter 270104)

362
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value : 6 digits

PROCEDURE

+ 178 + + Value +
(MMDDYY

4.4.20 LINKED STATION PAIRS TABLE (PGM 179)

Description
The linked station pair is defined section 2.9.2.
Review of the programmed linked station pairs can be accessed at flexible button 1 sub-menu.
Registration and delete of the linked station pairs can be set at flexible button 2 sub-menu.

* Note: If you assign linked pair with wired station (DKT or SLT) and wireless station (WHTU), please
assign wired station to be the master station.

Value : 100~399
- FLEX 1: VIEW
- FLEX 2: INPUT

PROCEDURE
Review Linked Station Pairs

When there are too many stations to see, you can

+ 179 +
scroll data using volume up/down key.

Linked Station Pair(Registration)

+ 179 + + Master Station Number + Slave Station Number +

363
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Linked Station Pair(Delete)

+ 179 + + Master Station Number + +

(PGM NUMBER)

4.4.21 CIDU SETTING (PGM 185)

CIDU is defined that analog CO line CLI information decoder unit.

By using this hardware device unit, IP LDK system can decode analog CO line CLI that is carried
through analog CO line, and serve the software feature that related caller ID service.

4.4.21.1 CID Usage

Description
If this value is set to ON, CIDU can be served.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 185 + + 1(On) +

4.4.21.2 CID Name Display

Description
364
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Analog CO line CLI carries the caller’s telephone number and name.
According to this ADMIN program value, LCD displayed data can be selected.
If this value is set to NAME, the caller’s name will be displayed on LCD.
If this value is set to TELEPHONE NUMBER, the caller’s telephone number will be displayed on LCD.

Value : NAME=1 / TELEPHONE NO.=0

PROCEDURE

+ 185 + + 1(Name) +

4.4.21.3 Serial Port Select

Description
This ADMIN program set the port connected to CIDU hardware device.

* Note : This ADMIN program is only needed, when the external CIDU hardware device is installed.
2(or 3~4)

Value :
- 1~4(IP LDK-300)
- 1~2(IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 185 + + Value(COM Port) +

4.4.21.4 CID/CO Line Port Mapping

Description
Set the CIDU port and the analog CO line port mapping.

365
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value : 00~39(IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 185 + + + CO Number +

When there are too many

COs to see, you can
scroll data using volume
up/down key.

4.4.21.5 Initialize CID Data

Description
Initialize ADMIN program 185, and recover the default value.

Value : None

PROCEDURE

+ 185 + +

4.4.21.6 CID type Ⅱ Usage

Description
Set the CIDU port and the analog CO line port mapping

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 185 + + 1 +

4.4.21.7 FAST CID MODE

Description
If this value is set to ON, system provides a ring signal to SLT and CID will be displayed after 1st ringing.
* Caution : if the CID SLT does not support non-standard CID, there can be a problem displaying
correct CID.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE
366
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 185 + + 0 +

4.4.22 IN ROOM INDICATION (PGM 183)

A supervisor press In-Room Indication button and [HOLD/SAVE] button at idle state. Then each LED of
In-Room Indication buttons of every members turned ON.
10 bins can be programmed. Each bins have at most 20 members excluding Supervisor.

4.4.22.1 In-Room Indication Supervisor

Description
This station can Turn ON or OFF In-Room Indication button of every members in the same bin.

BIN : 01 ~ 10

PROCEDURE

+ 183 + Bin no + + Station Number +

4.4.22.2 In-Room Indication Member

Description
367
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Each Members can see the status of In-Room Indication button according to the supervisor.

PROCEDURE

+ 183 + Bin no + + Station Range +

4.4.23 CHIME BELL (PGM 184)

If Chime Bell Activate Station press Chime Bell button, Chime Bell Receive Station starts to ring. The
ring stops when Chime Bell Timer expires.

4.4.23.1 Chime Bell Station Pair

Description
Former station is a Chime Bell Activate Station, and later station is a Chime Bell Receive Station.

BIN : 01 ~ 100(IP LDK-300E) / 01 ~ 50(IP LDK-300) / 01~ 14(IP LDK-50/100)

PROCEDURE

+ 184 + + Bin no + Station Pair +

4.4.23.2 Chime Bell Relay

Description
If Chime Bell Relay is assigned, the external relay makes signal at the same time like Loud Bell Control.

368
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

BIN : 01 ~ 100(IP LDK-300E) / 01 ~ 50(IP LDK-300) / 01~ 14(IP LDK-50/100)

VALUE : 1 ~ 7(IP LDK-300/300E) / 1 ~ 6(IP LDK-50/100)

PROCEDURE

+ 184 + + Bin no + Value +

4.4.23.3 Bell Timer

Description
Chime Bell Receive Station receives Chime bell ring until this timer expires.

VALUE : 01 ~ 20(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 184 + + Value +

4.4.23.4 Bell Frequency

Description
Chime Bell Frequency can be adjusted by this feature.

VALUE : 01 ~ 20

PROCEDURE

+ 184 + + + Value +

(Flex 1~2)

369
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.5 SYSTEM TIMERS

4.5.1 SYSTEM TIMERS –Ⅰ (PGM 180)

4.5.1.1 Attendant Recall Timer

Description
If a recalled call arrives to a attendant, the attendant may not answer the call. Then the system
disconnect the call if the attendant don’t answer the call for some time. This ADMIN program set the
amount of time before system disconnects the call.

Value : 00~60(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(min) +

4.5.1.2 Call Park Recall Timer

Description

370
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Setting the amount of time before a call placed in a call park location will recall the station placing the
park.

Value : 000~600(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.1.3 Camp On Recall Timer

Description
When a station transfers to busy station by Camp-On, if the transferred-to station don’t answer the call,
the call will recall to transferring station after setting time passes. Therefore This ADMIN program set
the appropriate time.

Value : 000~200(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.1.4 Exclusive Hold Recall Timer

Description
Select the amount of time before a call placed on system hold will recall the station placing the hold.

Value : 000~300(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.1.5 I-Hold Recall Timer

Description
When recalled call don’t answer, the call will recall to attendant after setting time passes. Therefore This
ADMIN program set the appropriate time.
Select the amount of time before a call recalls the attendant

Value : 000~300(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

371
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 180 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.1.6 System Hold Recall Timer

Description
Determines the amount of time before a call placed on system hold will recall the station placing the
hold.

Value : 000~300(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.1.7 Transfer Recall Timer

Description
Select the amount of time a transferred call will ring at the station receiving the transfer and how long it
will recall the station transferring the call.

Value : 000~300(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.1.8 ACNR Delay Timer

Description
When ACNR Pause Timer expires and there is no available CO Line in the group, ACNR trial is delayed
for this timer .

Value : 000~300(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

372
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 180 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.1.9 ACNR No Answer Timer

Description
This timer is invoked after system detects CO ring back tone from CO party. If the call isn’t answered,
system disconnect the call. And wait next ACNR trial.

Value : 10~50(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.1.10 ACNR Pause Timer

Description
When this timer is expired, ACNR is activated.

Value : 005~300(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.1.11 ACNR Retry Counter

Description
ACNR is executed up to this value. After trial of this retry counter, ACNR is canceled.

Value : 01~30(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(2 Digits) +

373
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.5.1.12 ACNR No Tone Retry Counter

Description
This ADMIN program can set the trial number of seizing the CO line for ACNR. If the CO line isn’t
seized, ACNR will be canceled.

Value : 1~9(1 digit)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(1 Digit) +

4.5.1.13 ACNR Tone Detect Timer

Description
This timer is invoked upon completion of dialing and system considers the CO party is busy when the
CPTU cannot detect the valid tone type until this timer expires.

Value : 001~300(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.1.14 Automatic CO Release Timer

Description
Uncompleted CO line call will be automatically released after this timer.

Value : 020~300(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

374
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 180 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.1.15 CCR Inter-digit Timer

Description
This timer is used for the CCR inter-digit timer in the DISA/DID CO line. In DID type 2, it is used for DID
inter-digit timer.

Value : 000~255(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(msec) +

4.5.1.16 CO Call Drop Warning Timer

Description
If prepaid money is going to expire during a CO call, system will give warning tone, and after this time,
the call will be disconnected. This timer is also used for call drop warning in Unsupervised Conference.

Value : 00~99(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.1.17 CO Call Restriction Timer

Description
If this value is set to 0, time of outgoing CO call is not restricted.
If this value is set to non-zero, outgoing CO call is disconnected after this time.

Value : 00~99(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

375
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 180 + + Value(min) +

4.5.1.18 CO Dial Delay Timer

Description
Voice connection to the outside party will be made after this timer. This can be used to prevent illegal
dialing in case of slow response from the Central Office Line or PBX.

Value : 00~99(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(100msec) +

4.5.1.19 CO Release Guard Timer

Description
This ADMIN program sets the amount of time before a CO line can be re-seized, after the CO call
disconnects,
This timer controls the time necessary to guarantee idle loop state when the line is released.

Value : 001~150(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(100msec) +

4.5.1.20 CO Ring Off Timer

Description
This timer is to secure time interval between incoming ringing signals so that the active ringing can be
lasted in the system until this timer is expired.

Value : 010~150(3 digits)

376
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(100msec) +

4.5.1.21 CO Ring On Timer

Description
This timer controls the time necessary to detect an incoming CO call as ringing into the system.

Value : 1~9(1 digit)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(100msec) +

4.5.1.22 CO Warning Tone Timer

Description
Determines the amount of time before receiving warning tone in order to remind the call elapsed time in
case of outgoing CO line conversation (Only for Korea).

Value : 060~900(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 180 + + Value(sec) +

377
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.5.2 SYSTEM TIMERS –Ⅱ (PGM 181)

4.5.2.1 Call Forward No Answer Timer

Description
This timer is used at the no answer call forward feature(Section 2.3.1.2, and 2.3.1.3). If station is set the
no answer call forward type, and if station don’t answer during this timer, then the call will be routed to
the forward destination.

Value : 000~255(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.2 DID/DISA No Answer Timer

Description
This timer is used at DID or DISA call routing. If station doesn’t answer about DID/DISA call during this
timer, the call will be routed to ADMIN program 167 – FLEX 3 value.

378
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value : 00~99(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.3 VMIB User Record Timer

Description
This is the maximum time that station user can record his VMIB announcement.

Value : 010~255(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.4 VMIB Valid User Message Timer

Description
This is the minimum time that station user must record his VMIB announcement.
If this value is set to 0, VMIB announcement can not be recorded.

Value : 0~9(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.5 Door Open Time

Description
Select the length of time that is needed to execute the door open relay for the setting time.

Value : 05~99(SEC)

PROCEDURE

379
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 181 + + Value(100msec) +

4.5.2.6 ICM Box Timer

Description
Select the ringing time of the ICM box associated stations, when ICM box user press [CALL] button.

Value : 00~60(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.7 ICM Dial Tone Timer

Description
This timer is used when the off-hooked station is heard the intercom dial tone. If station doesn’t dial a
digit within this timer, error tone is provided.

Value : 01~20(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.8 Inter-digit Timer

Description
This timer is used when station is dialing some digits. The time between digits cannot exceed Inter-digit
timer, or error tone is provided.

Ran Value : 01~20(SEC)

380
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.9 MSG Wait Reminder Tone Timer

Description
Select the amount of time between repeated reminder tones to station that it has a message waiting.

Value : 00~60(MIN)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.10 Paging Timeout Timer

Description
Select the maximum time of a page. The system will automatically disconnect the page at the end of
this time unless the caller has hung up earlier.

Value : 000~255(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.11 Pause Timer

Description
This timer is used at the speed dialing feature, LNR, and etc. In case of the speed dial or LNR, IP LDK
system sends the dial digits to the outgoing CO line, after this time.

381
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value : 1~9(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.12 Preset Call Forward Timer

Description
This timer is used at the preset call forward feature(Section 2.3.1.9). After this timer expires, incoming
call will be forwarded to a predetermined station.

Value : 00~99(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.13 SLT DTMF Release Timer

Description
DTMF RCVR will be released after this timer when SLT makes a outgoing CO call.

Value : 00~20(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.14 3SOFT Auto Release Timer

Description
This timer is used only in 3soft BTN DKTU(LKD-30DH). In 3soft menu, if there is no any digit within time,
the DKTU turn to Idle state.

382
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value : 01~30(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.15 VM Pause Timer

Description
In-band digit stream is sent to external VM after this timer.

Value : 01~09(100mSEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(100msec) +

4.5.2.16 Transit Connect Timer

Description
Master sends the connect message to slave system after this timer when the transit out CO type is a
pulse analog trunk.

Value : 01~30(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.17 VMIB Message Rewind Timer

Description
If the user press [REWIND] button while listening left VMIB message, the message is rewound as this

383
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

timer.

Value : 01~99(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.18 LCO Connect Timer

Description
If this timer expires after starting outgoing dial, the system regards that line as connected. So if there’s
any extra digits after this timer expires, the Pause is automatically added before the first added digit.
(CIS only)

Value : 00~20(SEC)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.2.19 LCO CPT Detect Timer

Description
To check LCO status after LCO is connected, system assigns CPT periodically with this timer.
To activate this, CO – CO XFER CPT detect (PGM160 – F16) should be set to ON.

Value : 00~20(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 181 + + Value (sec) +

384
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.5.3 SYSTEM TIMERS –Ⅲ (PGM 182)

4.5.3.1 SLT Hook Switch Bounce Timer

Description
This timer is used at SLT only. Select the length of time that is needed to regard as a valid on-hook or
off-hook (for SLT).

Value : 01~25(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 182 + + Value(100msec) +

385
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.5.3.2 SLT Maximum Hook Flash Timer

Description
This timer is used at SLT only. Select how long the user could press the hook switch in order for it to be
considered a FLASH (Timed-Break Recall) (for SLT).

Value : 01~25(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 182 + + Value(100msec) +

4.5.3.3 SLT Minimum Hook Flash Timer

Description
This timer is used at SLT only. The minimum bound time that system considers as hook flash for SLT.

Value : 000~250(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 182 + + Value(10msec) +

4.5.3.4 SLT Ring Phase Timer

Description
Select the ring phase(cadency) of SLT.
(5 SEC: 1SEC ON / 4SEC OFF)

Value : 2~5(1 digit)

PROCEDURE

+ 182 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.3.5 Station Auto Release Timer

386
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Description
If a station hears ring back tone and no action is taken, this timer is assigned. When this timer is
expired, the station is released.

Value : 020~300(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 182 + + Value(10msec) +

4.5.3.6 Unsupervised Conference Timer

Description
Select the amount of the time that an unsupervised conference can continue after the initiator of the
conference has exited the conference.

Value : 00~99(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 182 + + Value(min) +

4.5.3.7 Wake-Up Fail Ring Timer

Description
After a Wake-up fail ring invokes on system attendant, the alarm ring exists during this timer. If this
timer expires, the alarm ring will be disappeared.

Value : 00~99(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 182 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.3.8 Warm Line Timer

387
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Description
User takes no action after lifting handset or pressing the [MON] button and this timer is expired, then
idle line selection for warm line is executed.

Value : 01~20(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 182 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.3.9 Wink Timer

Description
The time duration of seize acknowledge signal to DID line.

Value : 010~200(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 182 + + Value(10msec) +

4.5.3.10 Enblock Digit Timer

Description
This timer is used at the enblock dialing sending feature. If station user make a call at the enblock
dialing mode, and if station user doesn’t dial within this time, then the enblock dialing is executed.

Value : 01~20(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 182 + + Value(sec) +

388
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.5.3.11 CCR Time Out Timer

Description
When this timer is expired, CCR is activated.

Value : 000~300(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 182 + + Value(sec) +

4.5.3.12 DID Inter Digit Timer

Description
This timer is used at DID type 2 feature. In DID type2, IP LDK system will be wait the new DID digit
receiving until this timer is expired. If this timer is expired, the call routing of DID type 2 is executed.

Value : 01~20(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 182 + + Value(sec) +

4.6 DCOB ATTRIBUTE

4.6.1 DCOB ATTRIBUTE–Ⅰ(PGM 186)

4.6.1.1 DCOB CO Type

Description
This ADMIN program is moved to ADMIN program 187 – FLEX 4.

Value : 0~2(1 digit)

- 0: Sweden/Cyprus
- 1: Italy
- 2: Korea/Australia

389
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + Value(Type) +

4.6.1.2 Metering Type

Description
Select DCO call metering signal type.

Value : 0 or 1(1 digit)

- 0: Not used
- 1: When received the Metering signal

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + Value(Type) +

4.6.1.3 R2 OUT Manage Timer

Description
In R2-DCO signaling, maximum time for waiting for forward signal from PX (1 sec)

Value : 01~50(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + Value(sec) +

4.6.1.4 R2 IN Manage Timer

Description
In R2 signaling, maximum time for waiting for forward signal from PX (1 sec)

Value : 01~50(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + Value(sec) +

390
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.6.1.5 R2 Disappear Timer

Description
1 sec

Value : 01~50(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + Value(sec) +

4.6.1.6 R2 Pulse Timer

Description
In R2 signaling, time duration to send pulse typed R2 signal (20 msec)

Value : 01~30(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + Value(20msec) +

4.6.1.7 R2 Ready Timer

Description
20mesc

Value : 000~500(3 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + Value(20msec) +

391
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.6.1.8 Dial Tone Delay Timer

Description

Value : 01~30(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + Value(2 digit) +

4.6.1.9 Line Status

Description
Free Line

Value : 1~9(1 digit)

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + Value(1 Digit) +

4.6.1.10 Calling Category

Description
User no priority

Value : 1~9(1 digit)

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + Value(1 Digit) +

392
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.6.1.11 DNIS Service

Description
Request the CID to the called party.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

-. Caller ID Service: ON/OFF

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + 1(On) +

4.6.1.12 CLI Digit Num

Description
Reserved

Value : 01~10(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + Value(2 Digits) +

4.6.1.13 R2 OUT DIGIT TIMER

Description
If outgoing dial is not performed within this timer, the R2 outgoing call is failed.

Value : 01~50(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + 05(2 Digits) +

393
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.6.1.14 R2 ERROR PROMT USAGE

Description
If R2 outgoing call is made and the ERROR signal is received(usually there’s error in the traffic or etc.. ),
the caller hear the error announce to call again. If there’s no available VMIB, the system error tone is
heard.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + OFF +

4.6.1.15 R2 BUSY PROMT USAGE

Description
If R2 outgoing call is made and the BUSY signal is received(the destination is busy), the caller hear the
busy announce. If there’s no available VMIB, the system busy tone is heard.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + OFF +

4.6.1.16 R2 ANNOUNCE PROMT USAGE

Description
If R2 outgoing call is made and the ANNOUNCE signal is received(if the destination number is invalid or
etc.. ), the caller hear the error announce to call again. If there’s no available VMIB, the system error
tone is heard.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 186 + + OFF +

394
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.6.2 DCOB CO LINE ATTRIBUTE–Ⅱ (PGM 187)

4.6.1.1 IN Digit Type

Description
Select the incoming digit information signaling type of DCO.

Value : PULSE=0 / DTMF=1 / R2MFC=2

PROCEDURE

+ 187 + CO LINE RANGE + + Value(Type) +

395
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.6.1.2 OUT Digit Type

Description
Select the outgoing digit information signaling type of DCO.

Value : PULSE=0 / DTMF=1 / R2MFC=2

PROCEDURE

+ 187 + CO LINE RANGE + + Value(Type) + .

4.6.1.3 CLI Digit Number

Description
Set the digit numbers received for CLI

Value : 01~15(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 187 + CO LINE RANGE + + Value(2 Digits) +

4.6.1.4 DCOB TYPE

Description
Select DCO CO line service type. According to the country, DCO CO service type is different.

Value : 0~2(1 digit)

- 0: Sweden/Cyprus
- 1: Italy
- 2: Korea/Australia

PROCEDURE

+ 187 + + Value(Type) +

396
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.6.1.5 SEND S-BLOCK COMMAND

Description
If this value is set to ON, the DCO line send S-Block command to PX.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 187 + + 1 (enable) +

4.7 STATION GROUP PROGRAMMING (PGM 190 – PGM 191)

The station group is defined the hunt group(Section 2.6) in IP LDK system. At ADMIN program 190 and
191, the hunt group programming can be set.
In IP LDK system, circular/terminal/UCD/ring/VM/pick-up/networking VM hunt group types are served.
At ADMIN program 190, the hunt group type, pick-up attribute, and member assignment can be set.
At ADMIN program 191, the selected hunt group attributes, that is programmed at ADMIN program 190
can be set.

4.7.1 STATION GROUP ASSIGN (PGM 190)

397
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.1.1 Group Type

Description
Hunt group type can be selected among circular/terminal/UCD/ring/VM/pick-up/networking VM.

Value : 0~7
- 0: Not Assigned
- 1: Circular
- 2: Terminal
- 3: UCD
- 4: Ring
- 5: VM
- 6: Pick up
- 7: Net VM

Value : 0(Not Assigned)

PROCEDURE

+ 190 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(Group Type) +

4.7.1.2 Pick up Attribute

Description
This value is used to assign the pick-up attribute at hunt group.
Except pick-up hunt group, all type of hunt group can be assigned the pick-up attribute optionally.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 190 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(On) +

4.7.1.3 Member Assignment

Description
This member assignment process can be executed in two ways.
The first way is assigning individually by pressing the Flexible Button which user want to assign and
then entering the station number. The other way is assigning successively by entering first station
number and last station number.

Value :
- 1000~1599: IP LDK-300E
- 100~399: IP LDK-300
- 100~227: IP LDK-100

398
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 190 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Station NUMBER +

When there are too many

STAs to see, you can scroll
data using volume up/down

4.7.2 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTE (PGM 191)

If the hunt group type is selected at ADMIN program 190, then the attributes of each hunt group can be
programmed at ADMIN program 191.

4.7.2.1 CIRCULAR/TERMINAL GROUP ATTRIBUTE

Description
If the hunt group type is selected to CIRCULAR or TERMINAL(Section 2.6.2, 2.6.3), then the following
attributes for CIRCULAR or TERMINAL hunt group can be programmed at ADMIN program 191.

399
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.1.1 VMIB Announce 1 Timer

Description
If the call doesn’t answered during this timer, the system plays VMIB announcement that is
programmed at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 3.

Value : 000~999

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.1.1.2 VMIB Announce 2 Timer

Description
The second VMIB announcement can be played if the call continues to wait beyond the 2nd
announcement timer. The played VMIB announcement can be programmed at ADMIN program 191 –
FLEX 4.

Value : 000~999

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.1.1.3 VMIB Announce 1 Location

Description
This is used to play VMIB announcement, when the VMIB announce 1 timer is expired.

Value : 00~70(VMIB Announcement Number)

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value +

400
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.1.1.4 VMIB Announce 2 Location

Description
This is used to play VMIB announcement, when the VMIB announce 2 timers is expired.
This second VMIB announcement can be played repeat, according to ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 5
and 6 value.

Value : 00~70(VMIB Announcement Number)

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value +

4.7.2.1.5 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer

Description
This is used to repeat VMIB announce 2 when the timer is expired. (000: Not assigned).

Value : 000~999

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.6.2.1.6 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Enable/Disable

Description
This value is used to enable or disable VMIB Announce 2 Repeat.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(On) +

401
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.6.2.1.7 Overflow Destination

Description
The call to a station in the group will continue to route until answered or each station in the group has
been tried. The call will remain at the last station in the group or will be passed to this overflow
station/group/ VMIB/System Speed bin, after overflow timer expiring. The overflow timer can be set at
ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 8.

Value : 1~4(Destination Type)

- 1: STA #
- 2: Hunt #
- 3: VMIB 00~70(00: Note Assigned)
- 4: System Speed # (2000~4999 : IP LDK-300 / 2000~3499 : IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(Destination Type)

(Range: 1~4)

+ Value (STA/Hunt Group/VMIB/Speed Bin) +

4.7.2.1.8 Overflow Timer

Description
If this timer expires after a call is received in the group, the call is routed to the overflow destination.
The overflow destination can be set at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 7.

Value : 000~600

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.1.9 Wrap-up Timer

Description
A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state during this timer value, after the end of received
call and outgoing call for the assigned wrap-up time.

Value : 002~999

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

402
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.1.10 No Answer Timer

Description
In circular/terminal hunt, if the incoming call is not answered during this time, the call is routed to the
next idle station in the group.

Value : 00~99

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.1.11 Pilot Hunt

Description
If this value is set ON, the call to the each hunt group member is processed as the call to hunt group.
A circular/terminal hunt group can be assigned with a pilot number (the station group) so that only calls
to the pilot number will hunt.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 0(Off) +

4.7.2.1.12 Alt If No Member

Description
If there is no member on duty, intercom call will be dropped and CO incoming call will be routed to
overflow destination, or to ring assigned station if overflow destination is not assigned.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(On) +

403
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.1.13 Music Source

Description
If music source is assigned, calling user will be heard music instead of ring back tone.

Value : 00~12(IP LDK-300) / 00~11(IP LDK-100)

IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
- 0: Not assigned by this field. - 0: Not assigned by this field.
- 1: Internal Music - 1: Internal Music
- 2 - 4: External Music - 2 - 4: External Music
- 5 - 7: VMIB MOH - 5 - 6: VMIB MOH
- 8 - 12: SLT MOH - 7 - 11: SLT MOH

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(Music Source) +

4.7.2.1.14 Alt DESTINATION

Description
If there is no member on duty or all member is busy, CO incoming call will be routed to alternative
destination.

Value : 1~2(Destination Type)

- 1: STA #
- 2: Hunt #

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(type) + station number + +

4.7.2.1.15 MAX QUEUE COUNT

Description
If there is no member on duty or all member is busy, CO incoming call will be queuing. Than Hunt
Group Supervisor can see the queued incoming call count until max queue count.

Value : : 00~99(2 digit)

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 99 +

404
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.1.16 MEMBER FORWARD

Description
If this value is set to OFF, this means member forward attribute is off, so Hunt member can receive
Hunt Call, Although Hunt member is forwarded to VMIB, off-net, other station.
If this value is set to ON, Hunt member can not receive Hunt Call, this means forwarded station is no
more hunt member.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(ON) +

4.7.2.2 UCD GROUP ATTRIBUTE

4.7.2.2.1 VMIB Announce 1 Timer

Description
If the call doesn’t answered during this timer, the system plays VMIB announcement that is
programmed at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 3.

Value : 000~999

PROCEDURE

405
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.2.2 VMIB Announce 2 Timer

Description
The second VMIB announcement can be played if the call continues to wait beyond the 2nd
announcement timer. The played VMIB announcement can be programmed at ADMIN program 191 –
FLEX 4.

Value : 000~999

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.2.3 VMIB Announce 1 Location

Description
This is used to play VMIB announcement, when the VMIB announce 1 timer is expired.

Value : 00~70(VMIB Announcement Number)

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value +

4.7.2.2.4 VMIB Announce 2 Location

Description
This is used to play VMIB announcement, when the VMIB announce 2 timers is expired.
This second VMIB announcement can be played repeat, according to ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 5
and 6 value.

Value : 00~70(VMIB Announcement Number)

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value +

406
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.2.5 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer

Description
This is used to repeat VMIB announce 2 when the timer is expired. (000: Not repeat).

Value : 000~999

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.2.6 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Enable/Disable

Description
This value is used to enable or disable VMIB Announce 2 Repeat.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(On) +

4.7.2.2.7 Overflow Destination

Description
The call to a station in the group will continue to route until answered or each station in the group has
been tried. The call will remain at the last station in the group or will be passed to this overflow
station/group/ VMIB/System Speed bin, after overflow timer expiring. The overflow timer can be set at
ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 8.

Value : 1~4(Destination Type)

- 1: STA #
- 2: Hunt #
- 3: VMIB 00~70(00: Note Assigned)
- 4: System Speed # (2000~4999 : IP LDK-300 / 2000~3499 : IP LDK-100)

407
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(Destination Type)

+ Value (STA/Hunt Group/VMIB/Speed Bin) +

4.7.2.2.8 Overflow Timer

Description
If this timer expires after a call is received in the group, the call is routed to the overflow destination.
The overflow destination can be set at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 7.

Value : 000~600

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.2.9 Wrap-up Timer

Description
A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state during this timer value, after the end of received
call and outgoing call for the assigned wrap-up time.

Value : 002~999

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.2.10 Alt If No Member

Description
If there is no member on duty, intercom call will be dropped and CO incoming call will be routed to
overflow destination, or to ring assigned station if overflow destination is not assigned.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(On) +

408
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.2.11 Music Source

Description
If music source is assigned, calling user will be heard music instead of ring back tone.

Value : 00~12(IP LDK-300) / 00~11(IP LDK-100)

IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
- 0: Not assigned by this field. - 0: Not assigned by this field.
- 1: Internal Music - 1: Internal Music
- 2 - 4: External Music - 2 - 4: External Music
- 5 - 7: VMIB MOH - 5 - 6: VMIB MOH
- 8 - 12: SLT MOH - 7 - 11: SLT MOH

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(Music Source) +

4.7.2.2.12 ACD Warning Tone

Description
When a call is received in the group and there is no available station in the group, then the call will be
routed to this destination if assigned.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 0(Off) +

4.7.2.2.13 Alternate destination

Description
When a call is received in the group and there is no available station in the group, then the call will be
routed to this destination if assigned.

Value : STA=1 / HUNT=2

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(1 or 2)

409
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ Value(STA / Hunt Group Number) +

4.7.2.2.14 Supervisor Timer

Description
If there is no idle member at hunt group, the incoming call will be queued.
If the total queued call count is more than the supervisor call count value, and ACD queued call ADMIN
program value is set to ON, and the queued time is longer than this timer, then the counts of queued
calls will be displayed onto supervisor's LCD.
The supervisor call count can be programmed at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 15.
The ACD queued call can be programmed at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 16.

Value : 000~999

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.2.15 Supervisor Call Count

Description
If the number of queued calls is more than this call count, the supervisor timer will be started.
The supervisor timer can be programmed at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 14.

Value : 00~99

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value +

4.7.2.2.16 ACD Queued Call

Description
If this value is set to ON, the count of queued call can be displayed on supervisor station LCD.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(On) +

410
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.2.17 Max Queued Call Count

Description
This value is the maximum call count that can be queued.
If the total queued call count is this value, the next queuing tried call will be disconnected.

Value : 00~99

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value +

4.7.2.2.18 Supervisor

Description
This value is used to set the supervisor station.

Value : STA Number

- 1000~1599 : IP LDK-300E
- 100~399 : IP LDK-300
- 100~227 : IP LDK-100

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(STA Number) +

4.7.2.2.19 UCD hunt Stations’ Priority

Description
This value is used to set UCD group member’s priority.
The value of 0 is the highest priority, and the value of 9 is the lowest priority.
If the station has high priority, it takes more priority to receive the incoming call.

Value : 0~9(1 digit)

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(1 Digit) +

411
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.2.20 MEMBER FORWARD

Description
If this value is set to OFF, this means member forward attribute is off, so Hunt member can receive
Hunt Call, Although Hunt member is forwarded to VMIB, off-net, other station.
If this value is set to ON, Hunt member can not receive Hunt Call, this means forwarded station is no
more hunt member.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(ON) +

4.7.2.2.21 UCD DND TIMER

Description
If this timer expired before a call received, that UCD member go to UCD DND state automatically.
If this value set to 000, then this timer is not working.
The Auto UCD DND Timer can be set at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 21.

Value : 00~60

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.3 RING GROUP ATTRIBUTE

If the hunt group type is selected to RING(Section 2.6.4), then the following attributes for RING hunt
group can be programmed at ADMIN program 191.

4.7.2.3.1 VMIB Announce 1 Timer

Description
If the call doesn’t answered during this timer, the system plays VMIB announcement that is programmed
at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 3.

Value : 000~999

412
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.3.2 VMIB Announce 2 Timer

Description
The second VMIB announcement can be played if the call continues to wait beyond the 2nd
announcement timer. The played VMIB announcement can be programmed at ADMIN program 191 –
FLEX 4.

Value : 000~999

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.3.3 VMIB Announce 1 Location

Description
This is used to play VMIB announcement, when the VMIB announce 1 timer is expired.

Value : 00~70(VMIB Announcement Number)

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value +

4.7.2.3.4 VMIB Announce 2 Location

Description
This is used to play VMIB announcement, when the VMIB announce 2 timers is expired.
This second VMIB announcement can be played repeat, according to ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 5
and 6 value.

Value : 00~70(VMIB Announcement Number)

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value +

413
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.3.5 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer

Description
This is used to repeat VMIB announce 2 when the timer is expired. (000: Not repeat).

Value : 000~999

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.3.6 VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Enable/Disable

Description
This value is used to enable or disable VMIB Announce 2 Repeat.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(On) +

4.7.2.3.7 Overflow Destination

Description
The call to a station in the group will continue to route until answered or each station in the group has
been tried. The call will remain at the last station in the group or will be passed to this overflow
station/group/ VMIB/System Speed bin, after overflow timer expiring. The overflow timer can be set at
ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 8.

Value : 1~4(Destination Type)

- 1: STA #
- 2: Hunt #
- 3: VMIB 00~70(00: Note Assigned)

414
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

- 4: System Speed # (2000~4999 : IP LDK-300 / 2000~3499 : IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(Destination Type)

+ Value (STA/Hunt Group/VMIB/Speed Bin) +

4.7.2.3.8 Overflow Timer

Description
If this timer expires after a call is received in the group, the call is routed to the overflow destination.
The overflow destination can be set at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 7.

Value : 000~600

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.3.9 Wrap Up Timer

Description
A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state during this timer value, after the end of received
call and outgoing call for the assigned wrap-up time.

Value : 002~999

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

415
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.3.10 Music Source

Description
If music source is assigned, calling user will be heard music instead of ring back tone.

Value : 00~12(IP LDK-300) / 00~11(IP LDK-100)

IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
- 0: Not assigned by this field. - 0: Not assigned by this field.
- 1: Internal Music - 1: Internal Music
- 2 - 4: External Music - 2 - 4: External Music
- 5 - 7: VMIB MOH - 5 - 6: VMIB MOH
- 8 - 12: SLT MOH - 7 - 11: SLT MOH

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(Music Source) +

4.7.2.3.11 Max. Queued Call Count

Description
This value is the maximum call count that can be queued.
If the total queued call count is this value, the next queuing tried call will be disconnected.

Value : 00~99

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value +

4.7.2.3.12 VMIB Supervisor

Description

Value : STA #
- 1000~1599: IP LDK-300E
- 100~399: IP LDK-300
- 100~227: IP LDK-100

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(STA Number) +

416
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.3.13 MEMBER FORWARD

Description
If this value is set to OFF, this means member forward attribute is off, so Hunt member can receive
Hunt Call, Although Hunt member is forwarded to VMIB, off-net, other station.
If this value is set to ON, Hunt member can not receive Hunt Call, this means forwarded station is no
more hunt member.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(ON) +

4.7.2.4 VM GROUP ATTRIBUTE

If the hunt group type is selected to VM(Ref Section 2.6.5), then the following attributes for VM hunt
group can be programmed at ADMIN program 191.

4.7.2.4.1 Wrap-up Timer

Description
A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state during this timer value, after the end of received
call and outgoing call for the assigned wrap-up time.

Value : 002~999

417
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

4.7.2.4.2 Put Mail Index

Description
This index is one of the voice mail dialing tables.

Value : 1~4

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value +

4.7.2.4.3 Get Mail Index

Description
This index is one of the voice mail dialing tables

Value : 1~4

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value +

4.7.2.4.4 Hunt Type

Description
This value is used to set the hunt type of the VM member.

Value : CIRC=1 / TERM=0

- 1 : Circular Hunt Group
- 2 : Terminal Hunt Group

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(Circular) +

418
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.4.5 SMDI Port

Description
This value is used to set SMDI print port.
SMDI is defined ‘Simplified Message Desk Interface’ that indicates the distribute information of VM.

Value : 01~14(IP LDK-300/300E) / 01~12(IP LDK-100)

RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

FLEX ITEM IP LDK- IP LDK- IP LDK- IP LDK-
IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
300/300E 100 300/300E 100
1 Off-line SMDR/ 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 01: COM1 01: COM1
Statistics Print 02: COM2 02: COM2
2 ADMIN Print 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 03: COM3-MODU 03: COM3-MODU
3 Traffic 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 04: COM4-MISB 04: TELNET 1
4 SMDI Print 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 05: COM5-MISB 05: TELNET 2
5 Call Information 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 06: TELNET 1 06: TELNET 3
6 Info/On-line 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 07: TELNET 2 07: ISDN
SMDR 08: TELNET 3 08: NET_PCADM
7 Trace 01-13 01-11 COM2 COM1 09: ISDN 09: NET_PCATD
10: NET_PCADM 10: NET_CTI
8 Debug 01-13 01-111 COM2 COM1
11: NET_PCATD 11:
9 PC ADMIN 01-13 01-11 NET_PCADM
12: NET_CTI NET_REMOTE
10 PC Attendant 01-13 01-11 NET_PCATD
13: 12: Not Supported
11 CTI 01-13 01-11 NET_CTI
NET_REMOTE
12 Remote 01-13 01-11 NET_REMOTE
14: Not Supported
Diagnostic

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(SMDI Port) +

4.7.2.4.6 Overflow Timer

Description
If this timer expires after a call is received in the group, the call is routed to the overflow destination.
The overflow destination can be set at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 7.

Value : 000~600

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(sec) +

419
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.7.2.4.7 Overflow Destination

Description
The call to a station in the group will continue to route until answered or each station in the group has
been tried. The call will remain at the last station in the group or will be passed to this overflow
station/group/ VMIB/System Speed bin, after overflow timer expiring. The overflow timer can be set at
ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 6.

Value : 1~4(Destination Type)

- 1: STA #
- 2: Hunt #
- 3: VMIB 00~70(00: Note Assigned)
- 4: System Speed # (2000~4999 : IP LDK-300 / 2000~3499 : IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + Value(Destination Type)

+ Value (STA/Hunt Group/VMIB/Speed Bin) +

4.7.2.5 PICK-UP GROUP ATTRIBUTE

If the hunt group type is selected to PICK-UP, then the following attributes for PICK-UP hunt group can
be programmed at ADMIN program 191.

Reference
1. Group Call Pick Up : 2.3.4.2

4.7.2.5.1 Auto Pickup

420
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Description
If this value is set to ON, and if there is ringing hunt member, other hunt member can pickup the call
automatically only by pressing [MON] button or off-hook.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(On) +

4.7.2.5.2 All Ring

Description
If this value is set to ON, and if a hunt group member receives an intercom call, then all hunt group
member is ringing. To set this value, ‘Auto Pickup’ ADMIN program value must be set to ON.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 191 + Hunt Group NUMBER + + 1(On) +

4.8 ISDN PROGRAM

To change ISDN system values, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial ADMIN program number. The
ISDN system ADMIN program number range is 200-202. When programming, LCD and LEDs indicate
current programmed data and programming status. The programmer enters correct data, then LCD and
LEDs show the entered data and the data is stored in the temporary buffer area. Pressing the
[HOLD/SAVE] button, all data in the temporary buffer (same as LCD/LEDs show their status) are stored
into permanent ISDN memory.

421
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.8.1 ISDN ATTRIBUTE (PGM 200)

At this ADMIN program, ISDN system attributes can be set.

4.8.1.1 Advice of Charge

Description
The AOC is the call cost information service that is provided by public ISDN.
According to the country, the standard of AOC type is different.
This value is used to set AOC type.

* Note : PGM 200 – FLEX 3 ~FLEX5, FLEX8: Reserved (Move to PGM 146)

Value : 0~6
- 0: Do not service AOC
- 1: Italy and Spain
- 2: Finland
- 3: Australia
- 4: Belgium
- 5: Standard
- 6: Netherlands

PROCEDURE

+ 200 + + Value +

Reference
1. AOC (Advice Of Charge) : 2.12.1

4.8.1.2 CO ATD Code

Description
This value is used when ISDN DID call incoming and outgoing case.
If the received DID digit is matched this value, then the call is routed to attendant station.
If ADMIN program 114 – FLEX 5 is set to CO ATD, and the station is make an outgoing CO call, then
this value is used as the outgoing station’s CLI data.

Value : *,#,0~9(Max 2 digits)

422
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 200 + + Value(Max 2 digits) +

4.8.1.3 CLI print

Description
This value is used to execute the CLI print about the incoming CO call.
If this value is set to ON, the CLI of the incoming CO call will be sent to serial/MODEM/LAN port.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 200 + + 1(On) +

4.8.1.4 International Access Code

Description
This value is used to modify the received CLI of the international incoming CO call.
If this value is set, and if station receives the international incoming CO call, then this value is inserted
in front of the CLI.

Value : 0~9(Max 4 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 200 + + Value(Max 4 digits) +

4.8.1.5 My Area Code

Description
This value is used to set the my area code.
The combination of this value and ADMIN program 200 – FLEX 10 is compared with the received CLI,
and the received CO call can be judged the local call or the long distance call.
This value is also used the outgoing CLI data, when station makes an outgoing CO call.

Value : 0~9(Max 6 digits)

423
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 200 + + Value(Max 6 digits) +

4.8.1.6 My Area Prefix Code

Description
This value is used to set the my area prefix code. (Normally zero value)
The combination of this value and ADMIN program 200 – FLEX 9 is compared with the received CLI,
and the received CO call can be judged the local call or the long distance call.
This value is also used the outgoing CLI data, when station makes an outgoing CO call.

Value : 0~9(Max 4 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 200 + + Value(Max 4 digits) +

4.8.1.7 Maintain DID Name

Description
This value is used at the CLI display of incoming DID CO call.
If the incoming DID call has CLI, it is displayed on station LCD only ringing time.
If this value is set to ON, CLI display is maintained when the call is answered.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 200 + + 1(On) +

4.8.1.8 PC Application DEST STN

Description
This value is used the valid destination station about PC application connection request.

Value : STA #
- 1000~1599: IP LDK-300E
- 100 ~399: IP LDK-300

424
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

- 100~227: IP LDK-100

PROCEDURE

+ 200 + + Value(Station Number) +

4.8.2 COLP TABLE (PGM 201)

Description
COLP table is used when makes the outgoing CLI
The method of making CLI is explained at ‘Section 2.14.2’.
At this ADMIN program, the maximum 50 CLI data can be programmed.
And this value is used at ADMIN program 143 – FLEX 1 and 2.

Value1 : 00~49(COLP Table Bin Number)

Value2 : COLP TABLE: Max 10 digits
- COLP TABLE: Max 10 digits

PROCEDURE

+ 201 + Value1(Bin Number) + Value2(Max 10 digits) +

Reference
1. CLI(Calling Line Identification Presentation) : 2.14.2

4.8.3 MSN TABLE (PGM 202)

MSN is defined one of ISDN CO line service.

In IP LDK system, maximum 250 MSN table entry can be programmed.
Each MSN table entry has MSN ‘CO line number’, ‘Index of flexible DID table’, ‘Subaddress number’,
and ‘Telephone number’.

Reference

425
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

1. MSN/Sub-Addressing : 2.14.7

4.8.3.1 CO Line Number

Description
This value is used to set CO line that is assigned MSN service.

Value1 : 000~249(MSN Table)

Value2 : CO Line Range

PROCEDURE

+ 202 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.8.3.2 Index of Flexible DID Table

Description
If the received digit of Incoming CO call is matched MSN telephone number(ADMIN PGM 202 – FLEX
4), it is MSN call.
This value is used to search the destination of MSN call routing.
This value indicates the entry index of flexible DID table(ADMIN program 231).

Value1 : 000~249(MSN Table)

Value2 : 000~999(DID Table)

PROCEDURE

+ 202 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.8.3.3 Sub Number

Description
This value is only used when the destination station type is ISDN telephone.
If the destination is ISDN telephone, this value is sent as the ISDN sub-address number of it.

Value1 : 000~249(MSN Table)

Value2 : 0~9

426
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 202 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.8.3.4 TEL Number

Description
This value is ISDN MSN number.
If the received digit of Incoming CO call is matched with this value, it is MSN call.

Value1 : 000~249(MSN Table)

Value2 : 0~9(Max 20 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 202 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.9 LCR
To enter LCR ADMIN program, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial LCR ADMIN program number.
The LCR ADMIN program number range is 220-223. There are 4 parts in the LCR table. User can
program general database, LCR access mode, day zone and time zone by PGM 220. PGM 221 is for
Leading Digit Table and PGM 222 is for Digit Modification Table. PGM 223 may initialize the stored
database for LCR.
The example of LCR is illustrated at ‘Section 2.2.7’.

427
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.9.1 LCR ATTRIBUTES (PGM 220)

FLEX Item Default Remark(Value)

FLEX1 LCR Access M00 M00: Disable LCR
M01: LCR shoes attribute is ‘COL’ can be
accessed only through common CO
access code(“9”/”0”)
M02: Internal LCR and Loop LCR are activated.
M11: Loop LCR and Direct CO LCR are
activated.
M12: All LCR type are activated. When the user
dial (“9”/”0”) or press loop button, IP LDK
does not seize a CO Line until LCR is
finished.
M13: All LCR type are activated. When the user
dial (“9”/”0”) or press loop button, IP LDK
first seize a CO Line and wait dial to
perform LCR.
FLEX2 Day of Week Zone : 1~3, Day : 1~7
FLEX1 Monday 1 - Monday(1)
FLEX2 Tuesday 1 - Tuesday(2)
FLEX3 Wednesday 1 - Wednesday(3)
FLEX4 Thursday 1 - Thursday(4)
FLEX5 Friday 1 - Friday(5)
FLEX6 Saturday 1 - Saturday(6)
FLEX7 Sunday 1 - Sunday(7)
FLEX3 Time of FLEX1 Zone 1 Zone: 3, Time: 00~24
DAY FLEX2 Zone 2 z IP LDK accepts it as same value for 00 and
Zone 1 FLEX3 Zone 3 24 changes to ‘00’ if input is 24 as starting
FLEX4 Time of FLEX1 Zone 1 value and vice versa
Zone 1 z Note: The time not belonging to any zone
DAY FLEX2 Zone 2
(00-24) will be considered as zone 1
Zone 2 FLEX3 Zone 3
FLEX5 Time of FLEX1 Zone 1 z Note: 10~13 means 10:00:00~12:59:59
DAY FLEX2 Zone 2
Zone 3 FLEX3 Zone 3

4.9.1.1 LCR Access

Description
This value is used to select LCR access mode.
Each access mode is explained at section 2.2.7.

Value : M00=1 / M01=2 / M02=3 / M11=4 / M12=5 / M13=6

- LCR Access Mode

428
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

- M00: Disable LCR

- M01: only Loop LCR.
- M02: Internal and Loop LCR.
- M11: Loop and Direct CO LCR
- M12: Internal, Loop and Direct CO LCR
- M13: Internal, Loop, Direct CO and Direct Loop LCR

PROCEDURE

+ 220 + + Value +

4.9.1.2 Day Zone

Description
Each day can use different LCR setting.
At this ADMIN program, each day can be grouped up to 3 zone.

Value1 : FLEX1~FLEX7( MON ~ SUN)

- FLEX 1: Monday
- FLEX 2: Tuesday
- FLEX 3: Wednesday
- FLEX 4: Thursday
- FLEX 5: Friday
- FLEX 6: Saturday
- FLEX 7: Sunday
Value2 : Zone 1~3 (1 Digit)

PROCEDURE

+ 220 + + Value1 + Value2 +

4.9.1.3 Time Zone of Day Zone1

Description
Each time of day zone1 can use different LCR setting.
At this ADMIN program, each time of day zone1 can be grouped up to 3 zone.

*Note: IP LDK accepts it as the same value for 00 and 24 and changes to “00”, if input is 24 as starting
value and vice versa.

429
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

*Note: The time not belonging to any zone will be considered as zone 1
*Note: 10 - 13 means 10:00:00(AM) - 01:00:00(PM)

Value1 : Time Zone 1 ~ 3

- FLEX 1: Time Zone1
- FLEX 2: Time Zone2
- FLEX 3: Time Zone3
Value2 : Time : HH~HH(4 Digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 220 + + + Value2 +
(Value1: Time Zone1)

4.9.1.4 Time Zone of Day Zone2

Description
Each time of day zone2 can use different LCR setting.
At this ADMIN program, each time of day zone2 can be grouped up to 3 zone.

*Note: IP LDK accepts it as the same value for 00 and 24 and changes to “00”, if input is 24 as starting
value and vice versa.
*Note: The time not belonging to any zone will be considered as zone 1
*Note: 10 - 13 means 10:00:00(AM) - 01:00:00(PM)

Value1 : Time Zone 1 ~ 3

- FLEX 1: Time Zone1
- FLEX 2: Time Zone2
- FLEX 3: Time Zone3
Value2 : Time : HH~HH(4 Digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 220 + + + Value2 +
(Value1: Time Zone2)

4.9.1.5 Time Zone of Day Zone3

Description
Each time of day zone3 can use different LCR setting.
At this ADMIN program, each time of day zone3 can be grouped up to 3 zone.

*Note: IP LDK accepts it as the same value for 00 and 24 and changes to “00”, if input is 24 as starting
value and vice versa.

430
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

*Note: The time not belonging to any zone will be considered as zone 1
*Note: 10 - 13 means 10:00:00(AM) - 01:00:00(PM)

Value1 : Time Zone 1 ~ 3

- FLEX 1: Time Zone1
- FLEX 2: Time Zone2
- FLEX 3: Time Zone3
Value2 : Time : HH~HH(4 Digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 220 + + + Value +
(Value1: Time Zone3)

4.9.2 LEADING DIGIT TABLE (PGM 221)

LDT(Leading Digit Table) is used to check whether digits that is dialed by user is LCR Code or not.
If digits that is dialed by user are equal to LCR Code(ADMIN program 221 – FLEX 2), the digits is
converted and CO line is seized according to DMT(ADMIN program 222).
In IP LDK system, maximum 250 LDT entry can be programmed. Each LDT entry has six sub-attributes,
‘LCR type’, ‘LCR code’, ‘DMT index for day zone 1/2/3’, and ‘Check password’.

431
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

FLEX Item Default Remark(Value)

FLEX 1 FLEX 2 LCR Type BOTH BOTH : Look up this entry for both ‘INT’ and
‘COL’
INT : Look up this entry for internal dialing.
COL : Look up this entry after dialing 3-way
toggle.
FLEX 2 FLEX 3 LCR Code(Up to 12 digits) None To be compared with the dialed digits by a user.
FLEX 3 FLEX 4 DMT index for Day Zone 1 Meaning of 6 digits : each pair(2 digits) is the
FLEX 4 FLEX 5 DMT index for DAY Zone 2 None index to the DMT for the each time Zone
(6 digits) 1/2/3.(The [SPEED] button is used to validate the
FLEX 5 FLEX 6 DMT index for Day Zone 3
remaining index)

4.9.2.1 LCR Type

Description
This value is used to select the LCR type.

Value1 : 000~249(LDT Table)

Value2 : INT=1 / COL=2 / BOTH=3
- 1: INT (look up this entry only for internal dialing)
- 2: COL (look up this entry only after dialing CO Access Code)
- 3: BOTH (look up this entry for both INT and COL)

PROCEDURE

+ 221 + Value1 + + Value2(LCR Type) +

4.9.2.2 LCR Code

Description
If digits that is dialed by user are equal to this value, the digits is converted and CO line is seized
according to DMT(ADMIN program 222).

Value1 : 000~249(LDT Table)

Value2 : *,#,0~9(Max 12 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 221 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.9.2.3 DMT index(Day Zone 1)

Description
This value is used to set the table index DMT(ADMIN program 222) of the day zone 1.
Because day zone 1 has 3 different time zone, three table index of each time must be selected.
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at ‘Section 2.2.7’.

432
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value1 : 000~249(LDT Table)

Value2 : 00~99 / DMT Index : 00~99(6 digits)
- FLEX 3: Day zone 1(DMT Index: 00~99(6 digits)
- FLEX 4: Day zone 2(DMT Index: 00~99(6 digits)
- FLEX 5: Day zone 3(DMT Index: 00~99(6 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 221 + Value1 + + Value2 +

(Day zone1)

4.9.2.4 DMT index(Day Zone 2)

Description
This value is used to set the table index DMT(ADMIN program 222) of the day zone 2.
Because day zone 2 has 3 different time zone, three table index of each time must be selected.
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at ‘Section 2.2.7’.

Value1 : 000~249(LDT Table)

Value2 : 00~99 / DMT Index : 00~99(6 digits)
- FLEX 3: Day zone 1(DMT Index: 00~99(6 digits)
- FLEX 4: Day zone 2(DMT Index: 00~99(6 digits)
- FLEX 5: Day zone 3(DMT Index: 00~99(6 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 221 + Value1 + + Value2 +

(Day zone2)

4.9.2.5 DMT index(Day Zone 3)

Description
This value is used to set the table index DMT(ADMIN program 222) of the day zone 2.
Because day zone 2 has 3 different time zone, three table index of each time must be selected.
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at ‘Section 2.2.7’.

433
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value1 : 000~249(LDT Table)

Value2 : 00~99 / DMT Index : 00~99(6 digits)
- FLEX 3: Day zone 1(DMT Index: 00~99(6 digits)
- FLEX 4: Day zone 2(DMT Index: 00~99(6 digits)
- FLEX 5: Day zone 3(DMT Index: 00~99(6 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 221 + Value1 + + Value2 +

(Day zone3)

4.9.2.6 FLEX Check Password

Description
If this value is set to ON, IP LDK system request the account code of user, when dialed digit is matched
LCR code.

Value1 : 000~249(LDT Table)

Value2 : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 221 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.9.3 DIGIT MODIFCATION TABLE (PGM 222)

DMT(Digit Modification Table) is used to convert the dialed digit and seize the outgoing CO line.
In IP LDK system, maximum 100 DMT entry can be programmed. Each DMT entry has six sub-
attributes, ‘Added digit stream’, ‘Removal position’, ‘Remove Number’, ‘Add position’, ‘CO Line Group’,
and ‘Alternative DMT index’.

434
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

FLEX Item Default Remark(Value)

DMT(Digit Modification Table) DMT index : 00~24(99)
FLEX 1 Added Digit Stream(A) None Up to 20 digits
FLEX 2 Removal Position(RP) 01 01~12
FLEX 3 Number of digits to be removed(RN) None 01~12
FLEX 4 Add Position(AP) 01 01~13
FLEX 5 CO Line Group© 01 01~07(01~24 for IP LDK-100)
FLEX 6 Alternative DMT index(ALT) None 00~24(99)

4.9.3.1 Added Digit Stream

Description
This value is used to add some digit stream at user dialed digits.
This value is added at the position of ‘Add Position’(ADMIN program 222 – FLEX 4).
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at ‘Section 2.2.7’.

*Note: The programmable normal digits and special characters are below:
z Normal digits (0 .. 9, * , #)
z Special characters
- [CALLBK]: Pause
- [DND/FOR]: Dial-tone-detection instead of pause
- [FLASH]: Billing code (Station Number)

Value1 : 00~99(DMT Table)

Value2 : 0~9,*,# ( Max 20 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 222 + Value1 + + Value2(Max 20 digits) +

4.9.3.2 Removal Position

Description
This value is used to set the removal position at user dialed digits.
Some digits are removed from the this position up to ‘Remove Number’ (ADMIN program 222 – FLEX
3).
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at ‘Section 2.2.7’.

435
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value1 : 00~99(DMT Table)

Value2 : 01~12(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 222 + Value1 + + Value2(2 digits) +

4.9.3.3 Remove Number

Description
This value is used to set the remove digit count at user dialed digits.
Some digits are removed as much as this value from the position of ‘Removal Position’ (ADMIN
program 222 – FLEX 2).
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at ‘Section 2.2.7’.

Value1 : 00~99(DMT Table)

Value2 : 01~12(2 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 222 + Value1 + + Value2(2 digits) +

4.9.3.4 Add Position

Description
This value is used to set the add position at user dialed digits.
Some digits are added from the this position with ‘Add Digit Stream’ (ADMIN program 222 – FLEX 1).
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at ‘Section 2.2.7’.

Value1 : 00~99(DMT Table)

Value2 : 00~13

PROCEDURE

+ 222 + Value1 + + Value2(2 digits) +

4.9.3.5 CO Line Group

Description
This value is used when LCR call seize the outgoing CO line.
The idle CO line within CO Line Group of this value is seized for LCR call.
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at ‘Section 2.2.7’.

436
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value1 : 00~99(DMT Table)

Value2 : 01~72(IP LDK-300) / 01~24(IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 222 + Value1 + + Value2(2 digits) +

4.9.3.6 Alternative DMT Index

Description
This value is used when LCR call can’t seize the idle CO line within ADMIN program 222 – FLEX 5.
If LCR call can’t seize the idle CO line within LCR CO Line Group, LCR call seize the idle CO within CO
Line Group of this value DMT index.

Value1 : 00~99(DMT Table)

Value2 : 00~99

PROCEDURE

+ 222 + Value1 + + Value2(2 digits) +

4.9.4 LCR TABLE INITIALIZATION (PGM 223)

This ADMIN program changes all LCR ADMIN table entry value to new value.

FLEX Item Default Remark(Value)

LCR Database change / Initialize None Each pair (2 digits) is the index to the DMT

437
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

FLEX 1 Day Zone 1 (6 digits) for the each time Zone 1/2/3.
FLEX 2 Day Zone 2
FLEX 3 Day Zone 3
Change all CO Line Groups in DMT table
FLEX 4 CO Line Group Change
with a new one
FLEX 5 ALT Change Change all ALT in DMT table with a new one.
FLEX 6 All LCR Database Initialize

4.9.4.1 Day zone 1

Description
This ADMIN program change the index of DMT value of day zone 1 to new value.

Value : 00~99(6 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 223 + + Value(6 digits) +

4.9.4.2 Day zone 2

Description
This ADMIN program change the index of DMT value of day zone 2 to new value.

Value : 00~99(6 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 223 + + Value(6 digits) +

4.9.4.3 Day zone 3

Description
This ADMIN program change the index of DMT value of day zone 3 to new value.

Value : 00~99(6 digits)

438
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 223 + + Value(6 digits) +

4.9.4.4 CO Line Group

Description
This ADMIN program change the all CO Line Group values of DMT entry to new value.

Value : CO Line Group

- 01~72: IP LDK-300
- 01~24: IP LDK-100

PROCEDURE

+ 223 + + Value(2 digits) +

4.9.4.5 Alternative DMT Index

Description
This ADMIN program change the all ‘Alternative DMT Index’ values of DMT entry to new value.

Value: 00~99

PROCEDURE

+ 223 + + Value(2 digits) +

4.9.4.6 Initialize All LCR

Description
This ADMIN program initialize the all LCR ADMIN data to default value.

439
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Value: None

PROCEDURE

+ 223 + +

4.10 TOLL TABLE

To enter TOLL TABLE ADMIN program, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial TOLL TABLE ADMIN
program number. The LCR ADMIN program number range is 224 - 226. Toll tables are used to have
access to certain toll free calls as well as being denied certain calls for the stations assigned Station

440
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

COS. Exception table A & B allow the station that is programmed in station COS 2, 3 & 4 to have
access to certain toll free calls as well as being denied certain calls.
This TOLL TABLE is used at COS feature.

Reference
1. COS (Class Of Service) : 2.5.4

4.10.1 TOLL EXCEPTION TABLE (PGM 224)

The Allow/Deny Tables are organized into 4 sets of tables to support 4 different toll plans at one installed
site. Each allow/deny table may contain up to 30 number strings. All bins of allow and deny tables have
no entries by default. Each number string can contain up to 14 entries including any number 0-9, *, #,
"Don't care".

The following rules should be remembered when setting up the Allow/Deny Tables:
(1) If the tables have no entries, no restriction is applied.
(2) If entries are made in the allow table and only there, then only those numbers are allowed.
(3) If entries are made in the deny table and only there, then only those numbers are denied.
(4) If there are entries in both tables, the allow table is searched at first and if number is found, it is
allowed. If not found, the deny table is searched and if number is found, it is denied. If it is not found
in either table, it is allowed.

ENTRY CONDITIONS & RESULT

RULE
ALLOW DENY ALLOW TABLE DENY TABLE
1 Not Exist Not Exist No Restriction No Restriction
Found - allowed
2 Exist Not Exist -
Not found - denied
Found - denied
3 Not Exist Exist -
Not found - allowed
Found - allowed Found - denied
4 Exist Exist
Not found – check deny table Not Found - allowed

4.10.1.1 Allow Table A

Description
This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the dialed digit by COS 2 and COS 4 station is matched
with the allowed toll pass digits or not.

441
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Allow table A is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 2 or 4.

Value : 01~30(Allow Table)

- Allow number: 0~9,*, #,”Don’t care”

PROCEDURE

+ 224 + + Value + Allow Number(Max 14 Digits) +

4.10.1.2 Deny Table A

Description
This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the dialed digit by COS 2 and COS 4 station is matched
with the denied toll pass digits or not.
Deny table A is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 2 or 4.

Value : 01~30(Deny Table)

- Deny number: 0~9,*, #

PROCEDURE

+ 224 + + Value + Deny Number(Max 14 Digits) +

4.10.1.3 Allow Table B

Description
This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the dialed digit by COS 3 and COS 4 station is matched
with the allowed toll pass digits or not.
Allow table B is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 3 or 4.

Value : 01~30(Allow Table)

- Allow number: 0~9,*, #

PROCEDURE

+ 224 + + Value + Allow Number(Max 14 Digits) +

4.10.1.4 Deny Table B

Description

442
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the dialed digit by COS 3 and COS 4 station is matched
with the denied toll pass digits or not.
Deny table B is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 3 or 4.

Value : 01~30(Deny Table)

- Deny number: 0~9,*, #

PROCEDURE

+ 224 + + Value + Deny Number(Max 14 Digits) +

4.10.1.5 Allow Table C

Description
This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the dialed digit by COS 8 station is matched with the
allowed toll pass digits or not.
Allow table A is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 8.

Value : 01~50(Allow Table)

- Allow number: 0~9,*, #,”Don’t care”

PROCEDURE

+ 224 + + Value + Allow Number(Max 14 Digits) +

4.10.1.6 Deny Table C

Description
This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the dialed digit by COS 8 station is matched with the
denied toll pass digits or not.
Deny table A is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 8.

Value : 01~50(Deny Table)

- Deny number: 0~9,*, #

PROCEDURE

+ 224 + + Value + Deny Number(Max 14 Digits) +

4.10.1.7 Allow Table D

Description

443
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the dialed digit by COS 9 station is matched with the
allowed toll pass digits or not.
Allow table B is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 9.

Value : 01~50(Allow Table)

- Allow number: 0~9,*, #

PROCEDURE

+ 224 + + Value + Allow Number(Max 14 Digits) +

4.10.1.8 Deny Table D

Description
This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the dialed digit by COS 9 station is matched with the
denied toll pass digits or not.
Deny table B is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 9.

Value : 01~50(Deny Table)

- Deny number: 0~9,*, #

PROCEDURE

+ 224 + + Value + Deny Number(Max 14 Digits) +

4.10.2 CANNED TOLL TABLES (PGM 225)

In addition to the basic toll restrictions, stations with a COS 5 or 6 are subject to dial restrictions based

444
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

on the “Canned” Allow and Deny Tables. This program permits entries in the Canned Toll Tables. Both
the Allow and Deny table have 20 bins up to 14 digits.

VALID DATA FUNCTION LCD DISPLAY

0 - 9, *, # Number as dialed
[DND/FWD] Don’t Care 'D'

4.10.2.1 Allow Table

Description
This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the dialed digit by COS 5 and COS 6 station is matched
with the allowed toll pass digits or not.
Allow table of canned toll is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 5 or 6.

Value : 01~20(Allow Table)

- Allow number: 0~9,*, #

PROCEDURE

+ 225 + + Value + Allow Number(Max 14 Digits) +

4.10.2.2 Deny Table

Description
This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the dialed digit by COS 5 and COS 6 station is matched
with the denied toll pass digits or not.
Deny table of canned toll is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 5 or 6.

Value : 01~20(Deny Table)

- Deny number: 0~9,*, #

PROCEDURE

+ 225 + + Value + Deny Number(Max 14 Digits) +

4.10.3 EMERGENCY SERVICE CALL (PGM 226)

The emergency code table is used for emergency call service. All stations, regardless of COS, can dial

445
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

the emergency codes in this table.

4.10.3.1 Emergency Service Call

Description
Maximum 10 emergency codes can be programmable.

Value1 : 01~10(Bin Number)

Value2 : *,#,0~9(Max 14 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 226 + Value1 + Value2 +

4.11 TABLES
To program TABLES, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial 227 - 235.

446
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.1 AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE (PGM 227)

Description
Authorization code table entries is consist of each station password and extra account codes. The table
entry from 001 to the maximum capacity of station numbers are saved the password of each station. And
the remains are the extra entries.
CO Line Groups can be marked to deny access until a matched Authorization code is entered. In this
case, DND warning tone is provided when the CO Line Group access code is dialed. If the dialed
Authorization code is verified, you will hear CO dial tone. Otherwise, you will hear error tone and cannot
access the group. Stations or ADMIN programming can enter the authorization codes. Authorization code
is flexible from 3 digits to 11 digits. Administrator can see and change station's password. There can be
no duplicate entries. By default, Authorization Codes are not assigned at all.

Value1 : Bin Number

- IP LDK-100: 001~500
- IP LDK-300: 0001~1000
- IP LDK-300E: 0001~2000
Value2 : 0~9(from 3 digits to 11 digits)
Value3 : 1~9(Class of Service)

4.11.1.1 Authorization Code

Description

PROCEDURE

+ 227 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.11.1.2 Day COS of Authorization Code

Description
Day COS of stations are viewed only. But Day COS of extra entries can also be assigned.

PROCEDURE

+ 227 + Value1 + + Value3 +

Reference
1. Station COS : 4. 1. 7

4.11.1.3 Night COS of Authorization Code

447
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Description
Night COS of stations are viewed only. But Night COS of extra entries can also be assigned.

PROCEDURE

+ 227 + Value1 + + Value3 +

Reference
1. Station COS : 4. 1. 7

4.11.2 CUSTOM CALL ROUTING (PGM 228)

448
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

This ADMIN program is used at CCR feature, that the caller can select the destination according to the
guiding VMIB announcement.
In IP LDK system, maximum 70 VMIB announcement can be used, and 8 different destination type can
be selected.

TYPE (DIGIT) TYPE VALUE DEFAULT REMARK

01 Station STA # -
02
Hunt Group HUNT # -

03 VMIB Announce Announce -

04 VMIB Announce Announce #
2000-6999 (IP LDK-300E)
05 System Speed 2000-4999 (IP LDK-300) -
2000-3499 (IP LDK-100)
06 Internal Page 01 - 10 -
07 External Page 1–3 -
08 1: INT All Page
All Call Page 1–3 - 2: EXT All Page
3: All Page
09 Net Number Net Number -
10 Conference
1–9 -
Room

Reference
1. CCR(Customer Call Routing) with VMIB : 2.1.5

4.11.2.1 Station

Description
If CCR destination type is the STATION, the call is ringing at station of this value.

Value1 : 01~70(CCR Table Number)

Value2 : FLEX01~FLEX10(Bin Number)
Value3 : 01~10(Destination Type)

PROCEDURE

+ 228 + Value1 + (Value2) + 1(Value3) + Station Number +

4.11.2.2 Hunt Group

449
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Description
If CCR destination type is the HUNT GROUP, the call is ringing at member station of this value hunt
group.

Value1 : 01~70(CCR Table Number)

Value2 : FLEX01~FLEX10(Bin Number)
Value3 : 01~10(Destination Type)

PROCEDURE

+ 228 + Value1 + (Value2) + 2(Value3) + Hunt Group Number +

4.11.2.3 VMIB

Description
If CCR destination type is the VMIB, VMIB announcement of this value is played to the caller.

Value1 : 01~70(CCR Table Number)

Value2 : FLEX01~FLEX10(Bin Number)
Value3 : 01~10(Destination Type)

PROCEDURE

+ 228 + Value1 + (Value2) + 3(Value3) + VMIB Anno. Number +

4.11.2.4 VMIB Drop

Description
If CCR destination type is the VMIB DROP, VMIB announcement of this value is played to the caller and
the call is disconnected when VMIB announcement ended.

Value1 : 01~70(CCR Table Number)

Value2 : FLEX01~FLEX10(Bin Number)
Value3 : 01~10(Destination Type)

PROCEDURE

+ 228 + Value1 + (Value2) + 4(Value3) + VMIB Anno. Number +

450
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.2.5 System Speed

Description
If CCR destination type is the SYSTEM SPEED, the call is routed to the system speed telephone
number.

Value1 : 01~70(CCR Table Number)

Value2 : FLEX01~FLEX10(Bin Number)
Value3 : 01~10(Destination Type)

PROCEDURE

+ 228 + Value1 + (Value2) + 5(Value3) + System Speed Number +

4.11.2.6 Internal Page

Description
If CCR destination type is the INTERNAL PAGE, the call can page to the internal page zone of this
value.

Value1 : 01~70(CCR Table Number)

Value2 : FLEX01~FLEX10(Bin Number)
Value3 : 01~10(Destination Type)

PROCEDURE

+ 228 + Value1 + (Value2) + 6(Value3) + Internal Page Number +

IP LDK-300
(Range: 01~30)

4.11.2.7 External Page

Description
If CCR destination type is the EXTERNAL PAGE, the call can page to the external page zone of this
value.

Value1 : 01~70(CCR Table Number)

Value2 : FLEX01~FLEX10(Bin Number)
Value3 : 01~10(Destination Type)

PROCEDURE

+ 228 + Value1 + (Value2) + 7(Value3) + External Page Number +

(Range: 1~3)

451
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.2.8 All Call Page

Description
If CCR destination type is the ALL CALL PAGE, the call can page to the all page zone.

Value1 : 01~70(CCR Table Number)

Value2 : FLEX01~FLEX10(Bin Number)
Value3 : 01~10(Destination Type)
Value4 : INT ALL PAGE=1 / EXT ALL PAGE=2 / ALL PAGE=3

PROCEDURE

+ 228 + Value1 + (Value2) + 8(Value3) + Value4 +

4.11.2.9 NET NUMBER

Description

Value1 : 01~70(CCR Table Number)

Value2 : FLEX01~FLEX10(Bin Number)
Value3 : 01~10(Destination Type)

PROCEDURE

+ 228 + Value1 + (Value2) + 7(Value3) + NET Number +

4.11.2.10 CONFERENCE ROOM

Description

Value1 : 01~70(CCR Table Number)

Value2 : FLEX01~FLEX10(Bin Number)
Value3 : 01~10(Destination Type)

PROCEDURE

+ 228 + Value1 + (Value2) + 7(Value3) + Conf Room Number +

452
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.3 EXECUTIVE / SECRETARY TABLE (PGM 229)

This ADMIN program is used at EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY feature.

When the executive designated station is in DND state, intercom and transfer calls will be automatically
routed to the designated secretary station. By default, EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY pairs are not
assigned at all. In IP LDK-300/300E(100), system supports 36(12) EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY pairs.

Reference
1. Executive/Secretary : 2.9.1

4.11.3.1 Executive/Secretary Pair

Description
This Admin Program sets Executive/Secretary pair.

Value : 01~36(IP LDK-300/300E) / 01~12(IP LDK-100)

PROCEDURE

+ 229 + Value + + Executive STA + Secretary STA +

(Bin No.)

4.11.3.2 CO Call to Secretary

Description
If this feature is set to ON, each incoming CO call to Exec is automatically forwarded to Sec regardless
of Exec state.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 229 + Bin no + + Value +

453
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.3.3 Call Executive if Secretary DND

Description
If this feature is set to ON, each call to Exec is not forwarded to Sec if Sec is in DND state.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 229 + Bin no + + Value +

4.11.3.4 Executive Grade

Description
Each Exec has its own grade. An Exec calls other Exec of lower or same grade directly regardless of
any Admin programming.

Value : 1 ~ 12

PROCEDURE

+ 229 + Bin no + + Value +

454
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.4 FLEXIBLE DID TABLE (PGM 231)

This ADMIN program is used at DID feature – DID type2. The example of ADMIN programming is
illustrated at Section 2.1.3, too.
In IP LDK system, maximum 1000 Flexible DID Table entry can be programmed. Each Flexible DID
Table entry has five attributes ‘DID Name’, ’Day Destination’, ’Night Destination’, ’Weekend Destination’
and ’Reroute Destination’.

Reference
1. DID(Direct Inward Dialing) : 2.1.3

4.11.4.1 DID Name

Description
This value is used to save the name of incoming DID call.
This value is displayed on station LCD, when station receive the DID call.

Max. 11 characters

. – 13 A – 21 D – 31
Q – 11 B – 22 E – 32
Z – 12 C – 23 F – 33
1 – 10 2 – 20 3 – 30
G – 41 J – 51 M – 61
H – 42 K – 52 N – 62
I – 43 L – 53 O – 63
4 – 40 5 – 50 6 – 60
P – 71 W – 91
T – 81
R – 72 X – 92
U – 82
S – 73 Y – 93
V – 83
Q - 7½ Z – 9#
8 – 80
7 – 70 9 – 90
(1–Blank
(2 - : 0 – 00 #
(3 - ,

Value1 : F1=Input / F2=Initial / F3=Delete

Value2 : 000~999(DID Conversion table)
Value3 : 1~11 Characters(Name)

PROCEDURE

+ 231 + (Value1) + Value2 + + Value3 +

455
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.4.2 Day Destination

Description
This value is used to set the destination, when route DID call during day ring mode. The nine different
destination type can be selected.

Value1 : F1=Input / F2=Initial / F3=Delete

Value2 : 000~999(DID Conversion table)
Value3 : 1~9(Destination Type)
- 1: STA #
- 2: Hunt #
- 3: VMIB 00~70 (00: Note Assigned)
- 4: VMIB 00~70 Drop (00: Note Assigned)
- 5: SPD (2000~6999:IP LDK-300E / 2000~4999:IP LDK-300 / 2000~3499:IP LDK100)
- 6: Internal Page (01~30:IP LDK-300 / 01~10:IP LDK-100)
- 7: External Page (1~3)
- 8: External Page (1~3)
- 9: Net Number (Network station number)

PROCEDURE

+ 231 + (Value1) + Value2 + + Value3(1~9)

+ Value3(STA/Group/ VMIB/SPD/PAGE ZONE) +

456
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.4.3 Night Destination

Description
This value is used to set the destination, when route DID call during night ring mode. The nine different
destination type can be selected.

Value1 : F1=Input / F2=Initial / F3=Delete

Value2 : 000~999(DID Conversion table)
Value3 : 1~9(Destination Type)
- 1: STA #
- 2: Hunt #
- 3: VMIB 00~70 (00: Note Assigned)
- 4: VMIB 00~70 Drop (00: Note Assigned)
- 5: SPD (2000~6999:IP LDK-300E / 2000~4999:IP LDK-300 / 2000~3499:IP LDK100)
- 6: Internal Page (01~30:IP LDK-300 / 01~10:IP LDK-100)
- 7: External Page (1~3)
- 8: External Page (1~3)
- 9: Net Number (Network station number)

PROCEDURE

+ 231 + (Value1) + Value2 + + Value3(1~9)

+ Value3(STA/Group/ VMIB/SPD/PAGE ZONE) +

457
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.4.4 Weekend Destination

Description
This value is used to set the destination, when route DID call during weekend ring mode. The nine
different destination type can be selected.

Value1 : F1=Input / F2=Initial / F3=Delete

Value2 : 000~999(DID Conversion table)
Value3 : 1~9(Destination Type)
- 1: STA #
- 2: Hunt #
- 3: VMIB 00~70 (00: Note Assigned)
- 4: VMIB 00~70 Drop (00: Note Assigned)
- 5: SPD (2000~6999:IP LDK-300E / 2000~4999:IP LDK-300 / 2000~3499:IP LDK100)
- 6: Internal Page (01~30:IP LDK-300 / 01~10:IP LDK-100)
- 7: External Page (1~3)
- 8: External Page (1~3)
- 9: Net Number (Network station number)

PROCEDURE

+ 231 + (Value1) + Value2 + + Value3(1~9)

+ Value3(STA/Group/ VMIB/SPD/PAGE ZONE) +

4.11.4.5 Reroute Destination

Description
This value is used to set the second destination, when routed DID call destination is busy.

Value1 : F1=Input / F2=Initial / F3=Delete

Value2 : 000~999(DID Conversion table)
Value3 : 1~6(Destination Type)
- 1: STA #
- 2: Hunt #
- 3: VMIB 00~70 (00: Note Assigned)
- 4: VMIB 00~70 Drop (00: Note Assigned)
- 5: SPD (2000~6999:IP LDK-300E / 2000~4999:IP LDK-300 / 2000~3499:IP LDK100)
- 6: Net Number (Network station number)

PROCEDURE

+ 231 + (Value1) + Value2 + + Value3(1~9)

458
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ Value3(STA/Group/ VMIB/SPD/PAGE ZONE) +

4.11.5 SYSTEM SPEED ZONE (PGM 232)

This ADMIN program is used at SYSTEM SPEED ZONE feature (Ref Section 2.5.5).

4.11.5.1 Speed Bin Range in Zone

Description
The system speed zone can be grouped the maximum 10 system speed zone.
About each system speed zone, the accessibility can be set at ADMIN program 232 – FLEX 2.
The toll check of each system speed zone can be set at ADMIN program 232 – FLEX 3.
And the account code to access each system speed zone can be set at ADMIN program 232 – FLEX 4.
But, the system speed bin section between 2000 and 2199 is defined the toll free zone.
The system speed dial within this zone isn’t checked by the toll table.

Value1 : 01~10 (Speed Zone Number)

Value 2 : F1=Zone / F2=Station / F3=Toll Check/F4=AUTH Check
Value 3 : Zone Range
-2200~3499(IP LDK-100)
-2200~4999(IP LDK-300)

PROCEDURE

+ 232 + Value1 + (Value2) + Value3 +

4.11.5.2 Station Range to Access Zone

Description
The accessibility of the system speed zones can be assigned to each station.

Value1 : 01~10 (Speed Zone Number)

Value2 : F1=Zone / F2=Station / F3=Toll Check/F4=AUTH Check
Value3 : Station Number Range
- 1000~599: IP LDK-300E
- 100~399: IP LDK-300
- 100~227: IP LDK-100

PROCEDURE

+ 232 + Value1 + (Value2) + Value3 +

When there are too many Stations

to see, you can scroll data using
volume up/down key.

459
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.5.3 Toll Checking

Description
If this value is set to ON, the speed dial of this zone is checked by the toll table.

Value1 : 01~10 (Speed Zone Number)

Value2 : F1=Zone / F2=Station / F3=Toll Check/F4=AUTH Check
Value3 : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 232 + Value1 + (Value2) + 0(Value3) +

4.11.5.4 Authorization Check

Description
If this value is set, the station user must enter this value to use the speed dial of each system speed
zone.

Value1 : 01~10 (Speed Zone Number)

Value2 : F1=Zone / F2=Station / F3=Toll Check/F4=AUTH Check
Value3 : ON=1 / OFF=0

Default value : Not Assigned

PROCEDURE

+ 232 + Value1 + (Value2) + 0(Value3) +

460
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.6 WEEKLY TIME TABLE (PGM 233)

Description
This ADMIN program is used at the ring assignment feature.
The WEEKLY TIME TABLE can manage the ring mode changes automatically.
The use of WEEKLY TIME TABLE is executed by the system attendant and each intercom tenancy
group attendant.
Maximum 16 WEEKLY TIME TABLE is exist. The first table is for the system attendant, and the others
are for the intercom tenancy group attendant.
The table is consist of 7 days, Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday/Sunday.
On each day, the time zone of DAY/NIGHT/WEEKEND mode can be programmed.
For example, the office work starts at 9:00(AM) and finishes at 5:00(PM) during week day. And the
weekend starts at 5:00(PM) from Friday to Sunday. In this case, the WEEKLY TIME TABLE can be set
as the following ADMIN program value.

WEEKLY TBL : MON WEEKLY TBL : TUE WEEKLY TBL : WED WEEKLY TBL : THU
D:09:00 N:17:00 W: D:09:00 N:17:00 W: D:09:00 N:17:00 W: D:09:00 N:17:00 W:
WEEKLY TBL : FRI WEEKLY TBL : SAT WEEKLY TBL : SUN
D:09:00 N: W:17:00 D: N: W:00:00 D: N: W:00:00

Value1 : 0~15(Weekly Time Table)

- 0~5 : IP LDK-100
- 0~15 : IP LDK-300/300E

Value2 : FLEX1~FLEX7 (Day mode) / FLEX1~FLEX3 (Day, Night, Weekend)

FLEX ITEM REMARK
1 Monday Refer Table 12.7.2
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
7 Sunday

Value3 : FLEX1~FLEX3 (Day, Night, Weekend)

FLEX ITEM DEFAULT REMARK
1 Day Day ring mode start time (HH:MM)
2 Night Night ring mode start time (HH:MM)
3 Weekend Weekend ring mode start time (HH:MM)

Default value : None

PROCEDURE

+ 233 + Value1 + (Value2) + (Value3) + Enter Time +

(Range: HH/MM)

461
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Reference
1. Ring Assignment : 2.1.1
4.11.7 VOICE MAIL DIALING TABLE (PGM 234)

Description
This ADMIN program is used at the VM hunt group feature. This VOICE MAIL DIALING TABLE value
defines the interface of dialing command between IP LDK and the external VM device.

Value1 : 1~9(Voice Mail Table),

Value2 : PREFIX=1 / SUFFIX=2

Default value :

DIGIT ITEM VALUE DEFAULT REMARK

Prefix: P#
1 VM Table 1 Put Mail
Suffix: -
Prefix: P##
2 VM Table 2 Get Mail
Suffix: -
Prefix: P#*3P
3 VM Table 3 Busy Table
Suffix: -
Prefix: P#*4P
4 VM Table 4 No Answer Table
Suffix: -
Prefix: P#*5P
5 VM Table 5 Error Table
Suffix: -
Prefix: P#*6P
6 VM Table 6 DND Table
Suffix: -
Prefix:
7 VM Table 7
Suffix: -
Prefix:
8 VM Table 8
Suffix: -
*****
9 VM Table 9 Disconnect Table

PROCEDURE

+ 234 + Value1 + Value2 + Prefix code/Suffix code +

(MAX 12 digits)

Reference
1. Voice Mail Group : 2.6.5

462
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.8 TIE ROUTING TABLE (PGM 235)

Maximum 30 Tie Line routings can be programmed. Maximum 6 CO lines are assignable to each
Routing. By default, Tie Line Routings are not assigned at all.

4.11.8.1 Tie Routing Table (1-30)

Description

Value : 01~30(Routing table)

PROCEDURE

+ 235 + Value + CO LINE RANGE +

When there are too many COs

to see, you can scroll data
using volume up/down key.

463
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.9 MOBILE EXTENSION (PGM 236)

A mobile user is able to use the phone as extension of system. So he can receive the incoming call and
make the outgoing call when a user registers the mobile phone number.

4.11.9.1 Activate Mobile Extension

Description
If this value is set to ON, the mobile extension feature is available.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 236 + + 1(On) +

4.11.9.2 Mobile Extension CO Group

Description
This value is used to assign the CO group to route the call to the mobile extension.

Value : CO Group

PROCEDURE

+ 236 + + CO GROUP +

4.11.9.3 Mobile Extension Telephone Number

Description
This value is the telephone number of mobile extension when mobile extension feature is activated.

Value : 0 ~ 9(Max 24 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 236 + + Mobile Phone Number +

464
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.11.9.4 Mobile Extension CLI

Description
This value is used as the CLI of Mobile Extension.

Value : 0 ~ 9(Max 16 digits)

PROCEDURE

+ 236 + + CLI digits (Max 16) +

465
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.12 NETWORKING ATTRIBUTE

To program NETWORKING ATTRIBUTE, press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial 320 - 324.
At the section 2.16, the networking features that is supported by IP LDK system is explained.

4.12.1 Networking Basic Attribute (PGM 320)

4.12.1.1 Networking Enable

Description
This ADMIN program value is used to enable the networking feature.
To set this ADMIN value to ON, the networking software lock-key must be installed at IP LDK system.
If station user enter the software lock-key check dialing command ‘[TRANS/PGM] + 78’, then the
installed software lock-key is displayed on station LCD.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 320 + + 1(On) +

4.12.1.2 Networking Retry Count

Description
This ADMIN value is used to retry the connection when IP LDK system detect the error during
networking connection signaling. This value is only used when the networking feature is executed
through the public switching network. This value is not used at the networking feature between direct
connected LDK systems.

Value : 00~99(Net Retry count)

PROCEDURE

+ 320 + + Value(2 Digit) +

466
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.12.1.3 Networking CNIP Enable

Description
The name of calling station is sent to the called system between IP LDK systems. CNIP is displayed on
called party station LCD according to ADMIN programming. If the CNIP and CLI are received together,
CNIP is prior to CLI.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 320 + + 0(Off) +

4.12.1.4 Networking CONP Enable

Description
The name of answered station is sent to the calling system between IP LDK systems. CONP is
displayed on calling party station LCD according to ADMIN programming.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 320 + + 1(On) +

4.12.1.5 Networking Signal Method

Description
Select the information element type for networking supplementary service message. FACILITY/USER-
TO-USER information element can be used for networking supplementary service message.

Value : FAC=1 / UUS=0

PROCEDURE

+ 320 + + 0(UUS) +

467
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.12.1.6 Networking CAS Enable

Description
Not Used.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 320 + + 1(On) +

Reference
1. Attendant Call Service(CAS) : 2.16.16

4.12.1.7 Networking VPN Enable

Description
Reserved

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 320 + + 1(On) +

4.12.1.8 Networking CC Retain Mode

Description
This value is used to set the networking supplementary signaling type of the call completion.
If this value is set to ON, the signaling of call completion retain mode is executed.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 320 + + 1(On) +

Reference

468
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

1. Call Completion : 2.16.10

4.12.2 Networking Supplementary Attribute (PGM 321)

4.12.2.1 Networking Transfer Mode

Description
At international standard of the networking transfer signaling, two kinds of signaling type are exist. The
name of each signaling type is REROUTE and JOIN.
This value is used to select the signaling type of networking transfer.

Value : RERT=1 / JOIN=0

PROCEDURE

+ 321 + + 0(Join) +

4.12.2.2 TCP Port

Description
The BLF is explained at Section 2.16.19.
This ADMIN program is used to set the TCP port for BLF message.

Value : 0000~9999(4 digits)

Default value : 9000

PROCEDURE

+ 321 + + Value(4 Digits) +

Reference
1. BLF(Busy Lamp Field) Presentation : 2.16.19

469
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.12.2.3 UDP Port

Description
The BLF is explained at Section 2.16.19.
This ADMIN program is used to set the UDP port for BLF message

Value : 0000~9999(4 digits)

Default value : 9001

PROCEDURE

+ 321 + + Value(4 Digits) +

Reference
1. BLF(Busy Lamp Field) Presentation : 2.16.19

4.12.2.4 BLF Manager IP Address

Description
The BLF is explained at Section 2.16.19.
This ADMIN program is used to set the IP Address of BLF manager for BLF service.

Value : 12 digits(Enter BLF Manager IP Address)

PROCEDURE

+ 321 + + Value(12 Digits) +

Reference
1. BLF(Busy Lamp Field) Presentation : 2.16.19

470
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.12.2.5 Duration of BLF status

Description
The BLF is explained at Section 2.16.19.
This ADMIN program is used to set the duration of BLF status message

Value : 01~20(sec)

PROCEDURE

+ 321 + + Value(sec) +

Reference
1. BLF(Busy Lamp Field) Presentation : 2.16.19

4.12.2.6 Multicast IP Address : Reserved

Description
The BLF is explained at Section 2.16.19.
This ADMIN program is used to set the IP address of multicast for BLF service

Value : 12 digits(Enter Multicast IP Address)

PROCEDURE

+ 321 + + Value(12 Digits) +

Reference
1. BLF(Busy Lamp Field) Presentation : 2.16.19

4.12.2.7 Net Trans Fault Recall Timer

Description
If the transferring station does not receive ACK message for the transfer setup message within this
timer, and then the transfer will be canceled.

Value : 001~300(sec)

471
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 321 + + Value(sec) +

4.12.3 Networking CO Line Attribute (PGM 322)

4.12.3.1 Networking CO Line Group

Description
This ADMIN program is used to select CO Line Group for networking call.

Value : 00~24(Net CO Line Group)

PROCEDURE

+ 322 + CO LINE RANGE + + Value +

4.12.3.2 Use Gatekeeper

Description
This ADMIN program determines to use under gatekeeper mode or not.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 322 + CO LINE RANGE + + value +

4.12.3.3 Networking CO Line Type

Description
This ADMIN program is used to select the type of system that is connected through the networking CO
line.
The system type can be separated two type. The first one is NET type, that is the networking software
installed private system. The second one is PSTN type, that is the public switching network system.

Value : NET=1 / PSTN=0

PROCEDURE

+ 322 + CO LINE RANGE + + 1(NET) +

472
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.12.4 Networking Routing Table (PGM 324)

At this ADMIN program, the numbering routing table for the networking connection can be set.
NETWORKING ROUTING TABLE has 72 entries, and each entry is consisted of 7 attributes, ‘SYSTEM
USAGE’, ‘NETWORKING NUMBERING CODE’, ‘NETWORKING NUMBER CO LINE GROUP’, CPN or
IP INFORMATION’, ‘ALTERNATE SPEED DIAL BIN’, ‘DESTINATION MPB IP’, and ‘DIGIT REPEAT’

4.12.4.1 System Usage

Description
This ADMIN program is used to set the networking connection type of the selected table entries.
If PSTN is directly connected, this value must be set to PSTN.
If the networking software installed system is directly connected, this value must be set to NET.
The example of NETWORKING ADMIN program is illustrated at ‘Section 2.16.1’.

Value1 : 00~71(Net Numbering Plan Table)

Value2 : NET=0 / PSTN=1

PROCEDURE

+ 324 + Value1 + + 1(PSTN) +

4.12.4.2 Net Numbering Code

Description
This ADMIN program is used to set the networking number code of the selected table entries.
‘*’ means any digits can be inserted between 0 ~ 9.
The digits followed by ‘#’ is a internal station number.
The example of NETWORKING ADMIN program is illustrated at ‘Section 2.16.1’.

Value1 : 00~71(Net Numbering Plan Table)

Value2 : Max 16 digits(Numbering Plan Code)

PROCEDURE

+ 324 + Value1 + + Value2 +

473
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.12.4.3 Net Number CO Line Group

Description
This ADMIN program is used to select CO line group for networking call.
If networking call number corresponding NET NUMBERING CODE is entered, the networking call route
to the destination through this CO Line Group.
The example of NETWORKING ADMIN program is illustrated at ‘Section 2.16.1’.

Value1 : 00~71(Net Numbering Plan Table)

Value2 : 00~24(Net CO Line Group)

PROCEDURE

+ 324 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.12.4.4 CPN or IP Information

Description
CPN information for ISDN, IP address for VoIP (CPN info 1 ~ CPN info 4)
The example of NETWORKING ADMIN program is illustrated at ‘Section 2.16.1’.

Value1 : 00~71(Net Numbering Plan Table)

Value2 : FLEX1~FLEX4 (4 IP address)

PROCEDURE

+ 324 + Value1 + + + IP address +

(Range: 12 digits)

4.12.4.5 Alternate Dial Bin

Description
Alternative Dial Number (System SPD Bin) when the networking path has a fatal problem.
The example of NETWORKING ADMIN program is illustrated at ‘Section 2.16.1’.

Value1 : 00~71(Net Numbering Plan Table)

Value2 : SPEED BIN #
- 2000~4999(IP LDK-300)
- 2000~6999(IP LDK-300E)
- 2000~3499(IP LDK-100)

474
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 324 + Value1 + + Value2(Speed Bin Number) +

4.12.4.6 Destination MPB IP

Description
IP Address of destination system to support DECT mobility service.
DECT mobility service is explained at section 2.16.17.

Value1 : 00~71(Net Numbering Plan Table)

Value2 : IP address

PROCEDURE

+ 324 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.12.4.7 Digit Repeat

Description
If this PSTN number is not connected with PSTN line directly but connected by another networking
system, make ‘Digit Repeat’ to YES.
The example of NETWORKING ADMIN program is illustrated at ‘Section 2.16.1’.

Value1 : 00~71(Net Numbering Plan Table)

Value2 : YES=1 / NO=0

Default value : No

PROCEDURE

+ 324 + Value1 + + 1(Value2) +

4.12.4.8 CO ATD CODE CLI

Description
If this value is set to ON, the CO ATD code is sent to PX as CLI During transit-out.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

475
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 324 + + 1(CO ATD CLI) + +

4.13 VOIB Attribute

4.13.1 VOIP IP Setting (PGM 340)

This ADMIN program is used at setting VOIP board’s attributes.

4.13.1.1 IP Address (Skip:#)

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the IP address of VOIP board.

Value : 12 digits(IP Address)

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.1.2 Gateway Address (Skip:#)

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the gateway address of VOIP board.

Value : 12 digits(IP Address)

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.1.3 SUBNET Mask (Skip:#)

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the subnet mask of VOIP board.

Value : 12 digits(Subnet Mask)

Default value : 255.255.255.0

PROCEDURE

476
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.1.4 DNS Address (Skip:#)

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the DNS address of VOIP board.

Value : 12 digits(DNS Address)

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.1.5 Trace Password

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the password which need to contact to VOIP board for trace.

Value : 10 Characters(Password)

. – 13 A – 21 D – 31
Q – 11 B – 22 E – 32
Z – 12 C – 23 F – 33
1 – 10 2 – 20 3 – 30
G – 41 J – 51 M – 61
H – 42 K – 52 N – 62
I – 43 L – 53 O – 63
4 – 40 5 – 50 6 – 60
P – 71 W – 91
T – 81
R – 72 X – 92
U – 82
S – 73 Y – 93
V – 83
Q - 7½ Z – 9#
8 – 80
7 – 70 9 – 90
½1–Blank
½2 - : 0 – 00 #
½3 - ,

Default value : None

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value(10 Characters) +

477
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.13.1.6 Default Codec

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the default codec of VOIP board.

Value : G.723.1=0 / G.729=1 / G.711_ALAW=2 / G.711_ULAW=3

Default value : 0(G.723.1)

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.1.7 Default Gain

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the default gain of VOIP board.

Value : 1~62

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.1.8 No Delay(TOS)

Description
This ADMIN program is used at selecting whether the response of VOIP board will be delayed or not.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + 1(On) +

478
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.13.1.9 Throughput(TOS)

Description
This ADMIN program is used at selecting whether the throughput of VOIP board is high or normal.

Value : HIGH=1 / NORMAL=0

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + 1(High) +

4.13.1.10 Reliability(TOS)

Description
This ADMIN program is used at selecting whether the reliability of VOIP board is high or normal.

Value : HIGH=1 / NORMAL=0

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + 1(High) +

4.13.1.11 Firewall IP Address

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the NAT Firewall IP address of VOIP board

Value : 12 digits(Firewall IP address)

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

479
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.13.1.12 VOIB mode

Description
This ADMIN program is used at selecting whether the mode of VOIP board is H.323 or SIP.

Value : SIP=1 / H.323=0

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.1.13 Silence Detection

Description
This ADMIN program is used at selecting whether the Silence Detection of VOIP board is On or Off.

Value : On=1 / Off=0

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.1.14 ECHO CANCELER

Description
This ADMIN program is used at selecting whether the Echo Canceller of VOIP board is On or Off.

Value : On=1 / Off=0

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

480
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.13.1.15 DTMF Mode

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the DTMF mode of VOIP board.

Value : 2~4

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.1.16 Jitter Buffer

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the Jitter buffer of VOIP board.

Value : 050~300

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.1.17 Voice Monitor [reserved]

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the Voice Monitor of VOIP board.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 340 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

481
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.13.2 Gatekeeper Setting (PGM 341)

The Gatekeeper ADMIN program is consisted of 16 attributes, ‘GK USAGE’, ‘GK CALL MODE, ‘GK
OPEN H245’, ‘GK H245 TUNNELING’, ‘GK PREGRANTED ARQ’, ‘GK OUT OF BAND FLASH’, ‘GK
TIME TO LIVE’, ‘GK ADDR’, ‘GK FIND ADDR’, ‘GK FIND PORT’, ‘GK RAS SIGNAL PORT’, ’GK
SIGNAL PORT’, ’VOIB GK ID’, ’VOIB H323 ID’, ’VOIB E164 ADDR’ and ’VOIB TERMINAL ALIAS’.

4.13.2.1 GK Usage

Description
This ADMIN program determines to use GK or not.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.2.2 GK Call Mode

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the Call Mode.

Value : GK Reroute=1 / Direct=0

PROCEDURE

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.2.3 GK Open H245

Description

482
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

This ADMIN program determines to open H245 port or not.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.2.4 GK H245 Tunneling

Description
Reserved

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.2.5 GK Pre-granted ARQ

Description
Reserved

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.2.6 GK Out of Band Flash

Description
Reserved

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

483
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.2.7 GK Time to Live

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the interval of RRQ message.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

PROCEDURE

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.2.8 GK Address

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the GK IP address to register.

Value : 12 digits(IP Address)

PROCEDURE

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + +Value +

4.13.2.9 GK Find Address

Description
Reserved

Value : 12 digits(IP Address)

PROCEDURE

484
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.2.10 GK Find Port

Description
Reserved

Value : 4 digits (Port Number)

PROCEDURE

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + +Value +

4.13.2.11 GK RAS Signal Port

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the GK RAS signal port.

Value : 4 digits (Port Number)

PROCEDURE

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.2.12 GK Signal Port

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the GK call signal port.

Value : 4 digits (Port Number)

PROCEDURE
485
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.2.13 VoIB GK ID

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting a Unique GK’s ID.

Value : up to 23 characters

PROCEDURE

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.2.14 VoIBH323 ID

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting a Unique VOIB’s ID.

Value : up to 23 characters

PROCEDURE

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.2.15 VoIB E164 Address

Description
This ADMIN program is used at setting the station number.

Value : 23 digits

PROCEDURE
486
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

4.13.2.16 VoIB Terminal Alias

Description
Reserved

Value : 20 digits

PROCEDURE

+ 341 + VOIB SLOT Number + + Value +

487
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14 RSG/IP Phone Programming

4.14.1 VOIB SLOT ASSIGNMENT for RSG/IP Phone (PGM 380)

The VOIB slot and VOIB channel for RSG/IP Phone can be assigned. The RSG is serviced through
VOIB. So, the VOIB for RSG should be assigned.
Enter the ‘99’ on STA/COL Board in PGM 103/BTN 1 & 2. And reset the system for board configuration.
(‘99’ means virtual slot for RSG/IP Phone)

4.14.1.1 VOIB Slot For RSP/IP Phone

Description
VOIB slot assignment for RSG/IP Phone

PROCEDURE

+ 380 + + VOIB SLOT Number +

4.14.1.2 VOIB Slot For RSP/IP Phone

Description
VOIB Channel number used for RSG/IP Phone

Channel Range : 00 ~ 24

PROCEDURE

+ 380 + + VOIB Slot Number + Channel Number +

488
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.2 RSG/IP Phone Port Number ASSIGNMENT (PGM 381)

The port number for RSG /IP Phone can be assigned.

4.14.2.1 RSG Number

Description
The RSG number to be serviced from system

Value : RSG No.

- 00~96(IP LDK-300/300E)
- 00~32(IP LDK-100)

Default Value : 08(08)

PROCEDURE

+ 381 + + Value +

4.14.2.2 IP Phone No

Description
The IP Phone number to be serviced from system

Value : RSG No.

- 00~96(IP LDK-300/300E)
- 00~64(IP LDK-100)

Default Value : 00(00)

PROCEDURE

+ 381 + + Value +

489
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.3 RSG / IP Phone ATTRIBUTE (PGM 382)

4.14.3.1 Transfer Mode

Value : MAC=1 / IP=0

Default Value : IP

PROCEDURE

+ 382 + + 0(IP) +

4.14.3.2 Casting Mode

Value : MULTI=1 / UNI=0

Default Value : UNI

PROCEDURE

+ 382 + + 0(UNI) +

4.14.3.3 Tone Source

Value : LDK=1 / REMOTE(RSGM/IP Phone)=0

Default Value : REMOTE

490
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 382 + + 0(REMOTE) +

4.14.3.4 Peer to Peer

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

Default Value : ON

PROCEDURE

+ 382 + + 1(ON) +

4.14.3.5 Codec Type

Value : 0~3
- 0 : G.711_ALAW
- 1 : G.711_ULAW
- 2 : G.723.1
- 3 : G.729

Default value : 0

PROCEDURE

+ 382 + + value +

4.14.3.6 First Access RSG CO

Description
If the field is set, the station on RSG can access a CO line on his RSG by dialing CO Line access code

491
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

in the 1st available CO group (ex] 9).

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

Default Value : ON

PROCEDURE

+ 382 + + 1(ON) +

4.14.3.7 RING without CO Ring Assign

Description
If the field is set, stations on RSG will receive the incoming CO ring even though the CO ring is not
assigned.

Value : ON=1 / OFF=0

Default Value : ON

PROCEDURE

+ 382 + + 1(ON) +

492
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.4 RSGM ATTRIBUTE 1 (PGM 383)

4.14.4.1 Set MAC Address

Description
For registration of RSG to the IP LDK system, enter the MAC of RSG after VOIB Configuration.
You can input the hex digits (A ~ F) by pressing following buttons.

BTN DIGIT BTN DIGIT

* A [MUTE] D
# B [DND] E
[CB] C [FLASH] F

At LDP-7000 series Navi Key

BTN DIGIT BTN DIGIT
[Left] C [Up] E
[Right] D [Down] F

Value1 : BIN No.(01~96)

Value2 : MAC address

Default Value2 : 00-00-00-00-00-00

PROCEDURE

+ 383 + Value1 + + Value2 +

493
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.4.2 IP Address Display

Value : BIN No.(01~96)

Default Value : 0.0.0.0

PROCEDURE

+ 383 + Value +

4.14.4.3 RSG Port View

Description
D : DKT S : SLT C : CO line

Value : BIN no.(01~96)

Default Value : D(…) S(…) C(…)

PROCEDURE

+ 383 + Value +

4.14.4.4 Port Number View

Value : BIN no.(01~96)

PROCEDURE

+ 383 + Value +

494
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.4.5 NAT IP Address Display

Value : BIN no.(01~96)

Default Value : 0.0.0.0

PROCEDURE

+ 383 + Value +

4.14.4.6 NAT Port Number View

Value : BIN no.(01~96)

PROCEDURE

+ 383 + Value +

4.14.4.7 STUN Enabled

Value : BIN no.(01~96)

Default Value : NONE

PROCEDURE

+ 383 + Value +

495
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.5 RSGM ATTRIBUTE 2 (PGM 384)

4.14.5.1 RTP Port number of Internal MOH

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : Port No.

Default Value2 : 8186

PROCEDURE

496
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 384 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.14.5.2 RTP Port number of External MOH

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : Port No.

Default value2 : 8188

PROCEDURE

+ 384 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.14.5.3 MOH Type

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : MUSIC=1/Hold Tone=0

Default Value2 : Hold Tone

PROCEDURE

+ 384 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.14.5.4 Music Source

Description
The RSG has one internal and one external MOH source. RSG associated devices use their local MOH
source in the RSG. The music will be heard when RSG devices on RSG are held or digital keyset on
RSG activates the BGM.

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : EXT1=1/INT=0

Default Value2 : INT

497
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

PROCEDURE

+ 384 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.14.5.5 External Contact 1

Description
By default, External Contacts are not assigned at all.

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : LBC=1/Door Open=2
Value3 : Station number when 1(LBC) is pressed

PROCEDURE

+ 384 + Value1 + + Value2 + (Value3) +

Reference
1. Expanded Flexible Numbering Plan : 3.6.9

4.14.5.6 External Contact 2

Description
By default, External Contacts are not assigned at all.

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : LBC=1/Door Open=2
Value3 : Station number when 1(LBC) is pressed

PROCEDURE

498
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 384 + Value1 + + Value2 + (Value3) +

Reference
1. Expanded Flexible Numbering Plan : 3.6.9

4.14.5.7 Alarm Enable

Description
When Alarm Signal is detected from RSG, the IP LDK system gives the Alarm Ring to the Alarm assign
station. And the alarm will be stop by Alarm Reset code.

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : ON=1/OFF=0

Default Value2 : OFF

PROCEDURE

+ 384 + Value1 + + 0(OFF) +

4.14.5.8 Alarm Contact Type

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : CLOSE=1/OPEN=0

Default Value2 : CLOSE

PROCEDURE

+ 384 + Value1 + + 1(CLOSE) +

4.14.5.9 Alarm / Door Bell Mode

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : ALARM=1/BELL=0

Default Value2 : ALARM

PROCEDURE

+ 384 + Value1 + + 1(ALARM) +

499
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.5.10 Alarm Signal

Description
RPT means the repetition.

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : RPT=1/ONCE=0

Default Value2 : RPT

PROCEDURE

+ 384 + Value1 + + 1(RPT) +

4.14.5.11 CTI Port

Description
CTI port to be assigned in RSG

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : 0~2
- 0 : NOT USED
- 1 : DKTU in RSG
- 2 : SLT in RSG

Default Value2 : NOT USED

PROCEDURE

+ 384 + Value1 + + 1(DKT) +

4.14.5.12 RSG Nation Code

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : Nation Code

Default Value2 : NOT USED

PROCEDURE

500
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 384 + Value1 + + 82(KOREA) +

4.14.5.13 IPSEC

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : ON=1/OFF=0

Default Value2 : OFF

PROCEDURE

+ 384 + Value1 + + 0(OFF) +

4.14.6 RSG Alarm Assignment (PGM 385)

501
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

Description
The station can receive the alarm ring when the alarm on RSG is detected.

Range / Default Value

FLEX DEFAULT RANGE REMARK

1 - 1-24 RSG BIN 01-24 (Toggle)
2 - 1-24 RSG BIN 25-48 (Toggle) : IP LDK-300/300E Only
3 - 1-24 RSG BIN 49-72 (Toggle) : IP LDK-300/300E Only
4 - 1-24 RSG BIN 73-96 (Toggle) : IP LDK-300/300E Only

PROCEDURE

+ 385 + STATION RANGE + + +

FLEX 1 (BIN:01~24) (Range: LEX1~FLEX24)
FLEX 2 (BIN:25~48) - Toggle
FLEX 3 (BIN:49~72)
FLEX 4 (BIN:73~96)

502
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.7 IP Phone ATTRIBUTE (PGM 386)

4.14.7.1 Set MAC Address

Description
For registration of IP Phone to the IP LDK system, enter the MAC of IP Phone.
You can input the hex digits (A ~ F) by pressing following buttons.

BTN DIGIT BTN DIGIT

* A [MUTE] D
# B [DND] E
[CB] C [FLASH] F

At LDP-7000 series Navi Key

BTN DIGIT BTN DIGIT
[Left] C [Up] E
[Right] D [Down] F

Value1 : BIN No.(01~96)

Value2 : MAC address

Default Value2 : 00-00-00-00-00-00

PROCEDURE

+ 386 + Value1 + + Value2 +

4.14.7.2 IP Address Display

Value : BIN No.(01~96)

Default Value : 0.0.0.0

PROCEDURE

+ 386 + Value +

503
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.7.3 Port View

Value : BIN no.(01~96)

PROCEDURE

+ 386 + Value +

4.14.7.4 Port Number View

Value : BIN no.(01~96)

PROCEDURE

+ 386 + Value +

4.14.7.5 NAT IP Address Display

Value : BIN no.(01~96)

Default Value : 0.0.0.0

PROCEDURE

+ 386 + Value +

4.14.7.6 NAT Port Number

Value : BIN no.(01~96)

PROCEDURE

504
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

+ 386 + Value +

4.14.7.7 STUN Enabled

Description
None, PAT, NAT or NAT/PAT is displayed.

Value : BIN no.(01~96)

Default Value : NONE

PROCEDURE

+ 386 + Value +

4.14.7.8 CTI Port

Description
CTI IP Address to support the first party CTI

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : 0~2
- 0 : NOT USED
- 1 : DKT
- 2 : SLT

Default Value2 : NOT USED

PROCEDURE

+ 386 + Value1 + + 1(DKT) +

4.14.7.9 IPSEC
Description

505
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

If this feature is set to ON, VOIB serves IPSEC.

Value1 : Range of BIN (01~96)

Value2 : ON=1/OFF=0

Default Value2 : OFF

PROCEDURE

+ 386 + Value1 + + 0(OFF) +

4.14.8 RSG DKT RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 390)

Description
The RX gain of DKT on RSG can be adjusted.

Value : Gain range

PROCEDURE

+ 390 + (~ ) + Value +

FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 RSG_DKT RX from DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_DKT RX from SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_DKT RX from CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_DKT RX from WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_DKT RX from ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_DKT RX from CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_DKT RX from DCO 00 – 63
8 RSG_DKT RX from VMIB 00 – 63
9 RSG_DKT RX from DTMF 00 – 63
10 RSG_DKT RX from TONE 00 – 63
11 RSG_DKT RX from MUSIC 1 00 – 63
12 RSG_DKT RX from MUSIC 2 00 – 63
13 RSG_DKT RX from RSG_DKT 00 – 63
14 RSG_DKT RX from RSG_SLT 00 – 63
15 RSG_DKT RX from RSG_LCO 00 – 63
16 RSG_DKT RX from IP Phone 00 – 63

506
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.9 RSG DKT TX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 391)

Description
The TX gain of DKT on RSG can be adjusted.

Value : Gain range

PROCEDURE

+ 391 + (~ ) + Value +

FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 RSG_DKT RX to DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_DKT RX to SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_DKT RX to CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_DKT RX to WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_DKT RX to ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_DKT RX to CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_DKT RX to DCO 00 – 63
8 RSG_DKT RX to DVU 00 – 63

507
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.10 RSG SLT RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 392)

Description
The RX gain of SLT on RSG can be adjusted.

Value : Gain range

PROCEDURE

+ 392 + (~ ) + Value +

FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 RSG_SLT RX from DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_SLT RX from SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_SLT RX from CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_SLT RX from WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_SLT RX from ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_SLT RX from CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_SLT RX from DCO 00 – 63

508
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

8 RSG_SLT RX from VMIB 00 – 63

9 RSG_SLT RX from DTMF 00 – 63
10 RSG_SLT RX from TONE 00 – 63
11 RSG_SLT RX from MUSIC 1 00 – 63
12 RSG_SLT RX from MUSIC 2 00 – 63
13 RSG_SLT RX from RSG_DKT 00 – 63
14 RSG_SLT RX from RSG_SLT 00 – 63
15 RSG_SLT RX from RSG_LCO 00 – 63
16 RSG_SLT RX from IP Phone 00 – 63

4.14.11 RSG SLT TX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 393)

Description
The TX gain of SLT on RSG can be adjusted.

Value : Gain range

PROCEDURE

+ 393 + (~ ) + Value +

FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

509
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

1 RSG_SLT RX to DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_SLT RX to SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_SLT RX to CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_SLT RX to WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_SLT RX to ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_SLT RX to CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_SLT RX to DCO 00 – 63
8 RSG_SLT RX to DVU 00 – 63

4.14.12 RSG LCO RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 394)

Description

510
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

The RX gain of LCO on RSG can be adjusted.

Value : Gain range

PROCEDURE

+ 394 + (~ ) + Value +

FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 RSG_LCO RX from DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_LCO RX from SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_LCO RX from CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_LCO RX from WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_LCO RX from ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_LCO RX from CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_LCO RX from DCO 00 – 63
8 RSG_LCO RX from VMIB 00 – 63
9 RSG_LCO RX from DTMF 00 – 63
10 RSG_LCO RX from TONE 00 – 63
11 RSG_LCO RX from MUSIC 1 00 – 63
12 RSG_LCO RX from MUSIC 2 00 – 63
13 RSG_LCO RX from RSG_DKT 00 – 63
14 RSG_LCO RX from RSG_SLT 00 – 63
15 RSG_LCO RX from RSG_LCO 00 – 63
16 RSG_LCO RX from IP Phone 00 – 63

511
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.13 RSG LCO TX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 395)

Description
The TX gain of LCO on RSG can be adjusted.

Value : Gain range

PROCEDURE

+ 395 + (~ ) + Value +

FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 RSG_LCO RX to DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_LCO RX to SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_LCO RX to CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_LCO RX to WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_LCO RX to ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_LCO RX to CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_LCO RX to DCO 00 – 63
8 RSG_LCO RX to DVU 00 – 63

512
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.14 RSG IP Phone RX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 396)

Description
The RX gain of IP Phone on RSG can be adjusted.

Value : Gain range

PROCEDURE

+ 396 + (~ ) + Value +

FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 RSG_IP PHONE RX from DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_IP PHONE RX from SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_IP PHONE RX from CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_IP PHONE RX from WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_IP PHONE RX from ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_IP PHONE RX from CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_IP PHONE RX from DCO 00 – 63
8 RSG_IP PHONE RX from VMIB 00 – 63
9 RSG_IP PHONE RX from DTMF 00 – 63
10 RSG_IP PHONE RX from TONE 00 – 63
11 RSG_IP PHONE RX from MUSIC 1 00 – 63
12 RSG_IP PHONE RX from MUSIC 2 00 – 63
13 RSG_IP PHONE RX from RSG_DKT 00 – 63
14 RSG_IP PHONE RX from RSG_SLT 00 – 63
15 RSG_IP PHONE RX from RSG_IP PHONE 00 – 63
16 RSG_IP PHONE RX from IP Phone 00 – 63

513
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.14.15 RSG IP Phone TX GAIN CONTROL (PGM 397)

Description
The TX gain of IP Phone on RSG can be adjusted.

Value : Gain range

PROCEDURE

+ 397 + (~ ) + Value +

FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

1 RSG_IP PHONE TX to DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_IP PHONE TX to SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_IP PHONE TX to CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_IP PHONE TX to WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_IP PHONE TX to ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_IP PHONE TX to CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_IP PHONE TX to DCO 00 – 63
8 RSG_IP PHONE TX to DVU 00 – 63

514
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.15 The others

4.15.1 Nation Specific (PGM 400 ~ 424)

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

400 DTIB RX Gain Korean version
1 DTIB/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 DTIB/SLT 00 – 63 33
3 DTIB/CTR SL 00 – 63 22
4 DTIB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 DTIB/ACO 00 – 63 33
6 DTIB/CTR CO 00 – 63 22
7 DTIB/DCO 00 – 63 33
8 DTIB/VMIB 00 – 63 29
9 DTIB/DTMF 00 – 63 8
10 DTIB/TONE 00 – 63 32
11 DTIB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 29
12 DTIB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 29
13 DTIB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 29
401 SLIB RX Gain
1 SLIB/DKT 00 – 63 12
2 SLIB/SLT 00 – 63 23 IP LDK-100 : Default 27
3 SLIB/CTR SL 00 – 63 12 IP LDK-100 : Default 16
4 SLIB/WTU 00 – 63 12
5 SLIB/ACO 00 – 63 21
401 6 SLIB/CTR CO 00 – 63 20
7 SLIB/DCO 00 – 63 24
8 SLIB/VMIB 00 – 63 20
9 SLIB/DTMF 00 – 63 8
10 SLIB/TONE 00 – 63 18
11 SLIB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 20
12 SLIB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 20
13 SLIB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 20
402 CTR SLIB RX Gain
1 CTRSL2/DKT 00 – 63 32
2 CTRSL2/SLT 00 – 63 43 IP LDK-100 : Default 47
3 CTRSL2/ CTR SL 00 – 63 32 IP LDK-100 : Default 36
4 CTRSL2/WTU 00 – 63 32
5 CTRSL2/ACO 00 – 63 41
6 CTRSL2/ATR CO 00 – 63 32
7 CTRSL2/DCO 00 – 63 44
8 CTRSL2/VMIB 00 – 63 40
9 CTRSL2/DTMF 00 – 63 28
10 CTRSL2/TONE 00 – 63 38

515
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

11 CTRSL2/MUSIC1 00 – 63 40
12 CTRSL2/MUSIC2 00 – 63 40
13 CTRSL2/MUSIC3 00 – 63 40

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

403 WTIB RX Gain
1 WTIB/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 WTIB/SLT 00 – 63 33
3 WTIB/CTR SL 00 – 63 22
4 WTIB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 WTIB/ACO 00 – 63 38
6 WTIB/CTR CO 00 – 63 29
7 WTIB/DCO 00 – 63 33
8 WTIB/VMIB 00 – 63 29
9 WTIB/DTMF 00 – 63 8
10 WTIB/TONE 00 – 63 37
11 WTIB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 29
12 WTIB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 29
13 WTIB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 29
404 ACOB RX Gain
1 ACOB/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 ACOB/SLT 00 – 63 37
3 ACOB/CTR SL 00 – 63 27
4 ACOB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 ACOB/ACO 00 – 63 36
6 ACOB/STR CO 00 – 63 27
7 ACOB/DCO 00 – 63 33
8 ACOB/VMIB 00 – 63 32
9 ACOB/DTMF 00 – 63 32
10 ACOB/TONE 00 – 63 32
11 ACOB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 32
12 ACOB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 32
13 ACOB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 32
14 ACOB/MODEM 00 – 63 37
405 CTR ACOB RX Gain
1 CTRCO8/DKT 00 – 63 28
2 CTRCO8/SLT 00 – 63 43
3 CTRCO8/CTR SL 00 – 63 32
4 CTRCO8/WTU 00 – 63 31
5 CTRCO8/ACO 00 – 63 41
6 CTRCO8/CTR CO 00 – 63 32
7 CTRCO8/DCO 00 – 63 38
8 CTRCO8/VMIB 00 – 63 37
9 CTRCO8/DTMF 00 – 63 37
10 CTRCO8/TONE 00 – 63 37
405 11 CTRCO8/MUSIC1 00 – 63 37
12 CTRCO8/MUSIC2 00 – 63 37
13 CTRCO8/MUSIC3 00 – 63 37
14 CTRCO8/MODEM 00 – 63 44

516
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

406 DCOB RX Gain

1 DCOB/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 DCOB/SLT 00 – 63 37
3 DCOB/CTR SL 00 – 63 26
PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
406 4 DCOB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 DCOB/ACO 00 – 63 24
6 DCOB/CTR CO 00 – 63 15
7 DCOB/DCO 00 – 63 32
8 DCOB/VMIB 00 – 63 32
9 DCOB/DTMF 00 – 63 32
10 DCOB/TONE 00 – 63 32
11 DCOB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 32
12 DCOB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 32
13 DCOB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 32
14 DCOB/MODEM 00 – 63 37
407 VMIB RX Gain
1 VMIB/DKT 00 – 63 21
2 VMIB/SLT 00 – 63 32
3 VMIB/CTR SL 00 – 63 21
4 VMIB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 VMIB/ACO 00 – 63 32
6 VMIB/CTR CO 00 – 63 23
7 VMIB/DCO 00 – 63 32
8 VMIB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 32
9 VMIB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 32
408 DTMF RC Gain
1 DTMF/SLT 00 – 63 28
2 DTMF/CTR SL 00 – 63 17
3 DTMF/ACO 00 – 63 24
4 DTMF/CTR CO 00 – 63 15
5 DTMF/DCO 00 – 63 24
409 EXT PAGE Gain
1 EXT PAGE/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 EXT PAGE/SLT 00 – 63 37
3 EXT PAGE/CTR SL 00 – 63 26
4 EXT PAGE/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 EXT PAGE/ACO 00 – 63 37
6 EXT PAGE/CTR CO 00 – 63 28
7 EXT PAGE/DCO 00 – 63 37
8 EXT PAGE/VMIB 00 – 63 37
9 EXT PAGE/MUSIC1 00 – 63 37
10 EXT PAGE/MUSIC2 00 – 63 37
11 EXT PAGE/MUSIC3 00 – 63 37
410 CPT Gain
1 CPT/ACO 00 – 63 24
2 CPT/CTR CO 00 – 63 15
3 CPT/DCO 00 – 63 24
411 MODEM Gain
1 MODEM/ACO 00 – 63 24

517
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

2 MODEM/CTR CO 00 – 63 20
3 MODEM/DCO 00 – 63 24

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

412 Short SLIB Gain
1 Shot ACO 00 – 63 32 SAF only
2 Long ACO 00 – 63 32
413 Long SLIB Gain
1 Shot ACO 00 – 63 40 SAF only
2 Long ACO 00 – 63 40
414 Far SLIB Gain
1 Shot ACO 00 – 63 44 SAF only
2 Long ACO 00 – 63 44
415 Short ACO Gain
1 Short SLIB 00 – 63 37
2 Long SLIB 00 – 63 46 SAF only
3 Far SLIB 00 – 63 50
4 DTIB 00 – 63 26
416 Long ACO Gain
1 Short SLIB 00 – 63 37
2 Long SLIB 00 – 63 46 SAF only
3 Far SLIB 00 – 63 50
4 DTIB 00 – 63 32
420 System Tone Frequency
1 Dial Tone 4digits 0425, 0000 Nation specific
2 Ring Back Tone 4digits 0425, 0000 Nation specific
3 Busy Tone 4digits 0425, 0000 Nation specific
4 Error Tone 4digits 0620, 000 Nation specific
5 Dummy Dial Tone 4digits 0350, 440 Nation specific
421 Differential Ring Frequency
1 Ring 1 4digits 1000, 1020 Nation specific
2 Ring 2 4digits 0890, 0910 Nation specific
3 Ring 3 4digits 1260, 1280 Nation specific
4 Ring 4 4digits 0800, 0820 Nation specific
422 Distinct Ring Frequency
1 Ring 1 4digits 0480, 0000 Nation specific
2 Ring 2 4digits 0400, 0000 Nation specific
3 Ring 3 4digits 0620, 0000 Nation specific
4 Ring 4 4digits 0770, 0000 Nation specific
423 ACNR Tone Cadence
1 Ring-Back Tone 000-255 ON: 050 / OFF: 100 20msec base
2 Busy Tone 000-255 ON: 025 / OFF: 025 20msec base
3 Error Tone 000-255 ON: 012 / OFF: 012 20msec base
4 S –Dial Tone 000-255 ON: 070 / OFF: 000 20msec base
424 DTIB ACO Rx Gain
1 Short ACO 00 – 63 37 SAF only
2 Long ACO 00 – 63 42

518
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.15.2 Initialization (PGM 450)

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
450 Initialization
1 Flexible Numbering Plan Initialization PGM105, PGM106, PGM107
2 Station Database Initialization PGM110, PGM111, PGM112, PGM113,
PGM114, PGM 116, PGM117, PGM118,
PGM119, PGM121,PGM122, PGM123,
PGM124, PGM179
3 CO Line Database Initialization PGM140, PGM141, PGM142, PGM143,
PGM144
4 System Feature Database Initialization PGM160 – PGM 177, PGM108
5 Station Group Database Initialization PGM190, PGM191
6 ISDN Tables Database Initialization PGM201, PGM202, PGM230, PGM231
7 Reserved None(Reserved)
8 System Timer Database Initialization PGM180 – PGM182
9 Toll Table Database Initialization PGM224, PGM225
10 LCR Database Initialization PGM220 – PGM222
11 Tables Initialization PGM227 – PGM229,
PGM232 – PGM235
12 Flexible Button Program Initialization PGM115
13 Networking Database Initialization PGM 320, PGM321,PGM322,PGM323, PGM
324
14 All Database Initialization Above All
15 System Reset By Software

519
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

4.15.3 Print Prot Database (PGM 451)

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

451 Print Prot Data
1 Flexible Numbering Plan Print
2 Station Database Print STN_R
3 CO Line Database Print CO_R
4 System Feature Database Print
5 Station Group Database Print
6 ISDN Tables Database Print
7 System Timer Database Print
8 Toll Table Database Print
9 LCR Database Print
10 Other Tables Print
11 Nation Specific Database Print
12 Flexible Button Program Print STN_R
13 Networking Data Print
14 All Database Print
15 LCD Message Print
1 Language 00 – 12 Nation specific 00:ENG 01:ITA 02:FIN
03:DUT 04:SWE 05:DAN
06:NOR 07:HUN 08:GER
09:FRE 10:POR 11:SPA 12:KOR
2 Station Type 0–2 0 0: NORMAL
1: LG-GAP
2: LARGE
16 Quit Print

4.15.4 Init By MPB Version (PGM 452)

When Upgrading IP LDK system to later version, added database can be initialized according to MPB
version.
For example, if you upgraded to version 3.0, then initialize database by ADMIN 452 – FLEX 5 with DIP
switch 8 protected. By doing this, you need not to initialize the whole database.

PGM FLEX ITEM REMARK

451 1 Init Version 2.2 Press Hold to Init.
2 Init Station Name Press Hold to Init.
3 Init Version 2.3 Press Hold to Init.
4 Init Version 2.5 Press Hold to Init.

520
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual ADMIN Programming

5 Init Version 3.0 Press Hold to Init.

6 Init Version 3.2 Press Hold to Init.
7 Init Version 3.3 Press Hold to Init.

521
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

Section 5. Quick Reference ADMIN. Programming Table

5.1 NUMBERING PLAN
5.1.1 Flexible Numbering Plan
The following numbering plan can be changed by ADMIN Programming 104-107 depending on the user's
needs.

NUMBER
ITEM REMARK
IP LDK-300 IP LDK-300E IP LDK-100
100 – 399 1000-1599 100-227 Intercom Call
620 – 667 620-634 Group Pilot Number
501 – 535 501-515 Internal Page Zone
543 543 Internal All Call Page
544 544 Meet Me Page
545 545 External Page Zone 1
546 546 External Page Zone 2
547 547 External Page Zone 3
548 548 External All Call Page
549 549 All Call Page (Int & Ext)
550 550 SMDR Account Code Enter SLT
551 551 Flash Command to CO Line SLT
552 552 Last Number Redial SLT
553 553 DND (Toggle On/Off) SLT
554 554 Call Forward SLT
555 555 Speed Dial Programming SLT
556 556 Message Wait/Callback Enable SLT
557 557 Message Wait/Callback Return SLT
558 558 Speed Dial Access SLT
559 559 Cancel DND/FWD/Pre-MSG SLT
560 560 System Hold SLT
561 561 Reserved
562 562 Reserved
563 563 Programming Mode Enter Code SLT
564 564 ACD Reroute
565 565 Alarm Reset
566 566 Group Call Pickup
568 568 HUNT DND
569 569 Night Answer
571~579 571~579 Conference Room Enter
58 58 SLT Conference Paging
601 - 619 601-610 Call Parking Locations
7 7 Direct Call Pickup
801-872 801-824 CO Line Group Access
88001-88200 8801-8840 Individual CO Access
8901 8901 Tie Routing Access

522
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

NUMBER
ITEM REMARK
IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
8* 8* Retrieve Held CO Line
8#xxx 8#xx Retrieve Held Individual CO Line
9 9 Access CO Line In the 1st available
CO Line Group
0 0 Attendant Call
#*1 #*1 1st Door Open
#*2 #*2 2nd Door Open
#*3 #*3 3rd Door Open
#*4 #*4 4th Door Open
#*5 #*5 5th Door Open
#*6 #*6 6th Door Open
#*7 N/A 7th Door Open IP LDK-300/300E Only
*8 *8 VM Message Waiting Enable Activate a message wait
indication by VM group of external
voice messaging system.
*9 *9 VM Message Waiting Disable Deactivate a message wait
indication by VM group of external
voice messaging system.
„ To enter user programming mode, press the [TRANS/PGM] button in a keyset or dial 5 6 3 (Programming
enter code) in a SLT.
„ The following numbering plan is fixed, so it cannot be changed by ADMIN Programming.

523
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.1.2 Station Programming

NUMBER ITEM REMARK

11 Differential Ring Keyset
12 Intercom Answer Mode (1 HF / 2 TONE / 3 PV) Keyset
13 SMS Message Display LDP Keyset
14 Enblock Mode LDP Keyset
15 SMS/ Notice Display LDP Keyset
16 Scroll Speed LDP Keyset
17 Ear-Mic Headset LDP Keyset
18 ICM Ring LDP Keyset
19 CO Ring LDP Keyset
21 Station COS Down
22 Station COS Restore
23 Walking COS Keyset
31 Authorization Code Registration
32 Authorization Code Change
33 Registration Mobile - Extension
34 Active Mobile - Extension
41 Wake-up Time Registration (One-time/ Continuous)
42 Wake-up Time Cancel
43 Active Conference Room
44 Deactivate Conference Room
51 Pre-selected MSG Activation
52 Set Custom Message
61 Record VMIB User Greeting
62 Listen VMIB Time & Date
63 Listen VMIB Station Number
64 Listen VMIB Station Status
65 Record VMIB Page Message
66 Erase VMIB User Greeting
67 Erase VMIB Page Message
71 LCD Display Mode (English/Domestic Language) Keyset
72 MPB Version Display Keyset
73 Background Music Keyset
74 Station User Name Registration
75 Headset/Speakerphone Mode Keyset
76 Headset Ring Mode Keyset
77 WTU Station Number Receive Keyset
78 Serial No/SW Packages Keyset with LCD
79 PC – Phone Lock Key
7* USB ALWAYS CALL RECORD LDP 7000keyset with USB module
** HOTDESK Logout
*0 HOTDESK Login
*1 Relocation Out
*2 Relocation IN
*3 Register Bluetooth
*4 Bluetooth Usage

524
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.1.3 Attendant Programming

NUMBER ITEM REMARK

0111 Print SMDR (Station Base) System Attendant
0112 Delete SMDR (Station Base) System Attendant
0113 Print SMDR (Group Base) System Attendant
0114 Delete SMDR (Group Base) System Attendant
0115 Display Call Charge System Attendant
0116 Abort Printing System Attendant
0117 Print Lost Call System Attendant
0118 Delete Lost Call System Attendant
0121 Print All Summary System Attendant
0122 Print All Periodically System Attendant
0123 Abort Periodic Printing System Attendant
0124 Print ATD Traffic System Attendant
0125 Print Call Summary System Attendant
0126 Print All Hourly System Attendant
0127 Print H/W Usage System Attendant
0128 Print CO Summary System Attendant
0129 Print CO Hourly System Attendant
021 Station COS Down (COS 7) Attendant
022 Station COS Restore Attendant
031 Authorization Code Cancel System Attendant
041 System Date/Time Setting Attendant
042 Wake-up Time Registration (One-time /Continuous) Attendant
043 Wake-up Time Cancel System Attendant
044 LCD Date Mode Change System Attendant
045 LCD Time Mode Change System Attendant
046 Use Network Time & Date System Attendant
047 Monitor Conference Room Attendant
048 Forced Delete Conference Room Attendant
051 Pre-select MSG Activation Attendant
052 Pre-select MSG Deactivation Attendant
053 Custom Display Message Program (11-20) System Attendant
054 Erase VM MSG Attendant
06 Record VMIB System Greeting System Attendant
071 DND/Call Forward/Pre-selected MSG Cancel Attendant
072 Register Station Name Attendant
073 Disable CO Outgoing System Attendant
074 Day/Night SVC Mode Program Attendant
075 ICM BOX BGM Channel select Attendant
076 External Page Music -1 Assignment/Cancel Attendant
077 External Page Music -2 Assignment/Cancel Attendant
078 External Page Music -3 Assignment/Cancel Attendant
079 Prepaid Call
07* LCD Display Language
091 Set Call Forward Attendant
0# WHTU Subscription

525
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.1.4 Flexible Button Programming Code

NUMBER ITEM REMARK

11 Differential Ring
21 Station COS Down
22 Station COS Restore
23 Walking COS
31 Authorization Code Registration
32 Authorization Code Change
41 Wake-up Time Registration (One-time /Continuous)
42 Wake-up Time Cancel
51 Pre-selected MSG Activation
52 Set Custom Message
53 CLIR Key
54 Two Way Recording
55 Attendant DND Networking Only
56 Attendant Camp On(Queue) BTN Assignment Attendant
57 Call Log Display
61 Record VMIB User Greeting
64 Listen VMIB Station Status
66 Erase VMIB User Greeting
71 LCD Display Mode (English/Domestic Language)
73 Background Music
74 Station User Name Registration
75 Headset/Speakerphone Mode
76 Headset Ring Mode
80 Account Code Activation
81 DID Call Wait
83 [ICM Hold] BTN Assignment
84 [LOOP] BTN Assignment
85 [Camp-on] BTN Assignment
86 [INTRUSION] BTN Assignment System Attendant
87 [UCD DND] BTN Assignment + Hunt Group No.
89 Keypad Facility Key
8* {ACD STATUS} BTN Assignment Supervisor
91 [CONF] BTN Assignment
92 [CALLBK] BTN Assignment
93 [DND/FWD] BTN Assignment
94 [FLASH] BTN Assignment
95 [MUTE] BTN Assignment
96 [MON] BTN Assignment 2/8 BTN Keyset
97 [REDIAL] BTN Assignment
98 DID Restriction
99 DISA Restriction
9* Call Recording via USB

526
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.2 ADMIN PROGRAMMING INDEX

MAIN MENU PGM ITEM
PRE-PROGRAMMED DATABASE 100 Location Program
101 Rack Slot Assignment
102 WTIB Port number Assignment
103 Logical Slot Assignment
104 Numbering Plan Type
105 Flexible Number Plan – Station Number
106 Flexible Number Plan A
107 Flexible Number Plan B
108 IP Setting
109 Flexible Number Plan C
250 Hot Desk Attribute
STATION BASE PROGRAM 110 Station ID
111 Station Attribute I
112 Station Attribute II
113 Station Attribute III
114 ISDN Station Attribute
115 Flex Button Assignment
116 Station COS
117 CO Line Group Access
118 Internal Page Zone
119 Conference Page Zone
120 ICM Tenancy Group
121 Preset Call Forward
122 Hot/Warm Line Selection
123 CTI Station Attribute
124 SMDR Account Group
125 Copy DSS Button
130 Display Stations by COS
131 Display Stations by CO Line Group Access
CO LINE BASE PROGRAM 140 CO Service Type
141 CO Line Attribute I
142 CO Line Attribute II
143 ISDN CO Line Attribute I
144 CO Ring Assignment
145 CO Ring Assignment Display
146 CO Line Attribute III
SLOT BASE PROGRAM 155 Slot Attribute
SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 160 System Attribute – I
161 System Attribute – II
162 ADMIN Password
163 Alarm Attributes
164 Attendant Assignment
165 Auto Attendant VMIB Announcement Assignment
166 CO-to-CO COS
167 DID/DISA Destination
168 External Control Contact
169 LCD Date/Time/Language Display Mode

527
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

MAIN MENU PGM ITEM

SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 170 Modem
171 Music
172 PBX Access Code
173 PLA Priority Setting
174 RS-232C Port Setting
175 Print Port Selection
176 Pulse Dial Ratio
177 SMDR Attributes
178 System Date/Time Setting
179 Linked Station Pairs Table
180 System Timers – I
181 System Timers – II
182 System Timers – III
185 CIDU Setting
183 In Room Indication
184 Chime Bell Attribute
DCOB 186 DCOB System attribute
187 DCOB CO Line Attribute
STATION GROUP 190 Station Group Assign
191 Station Group Attribute
ISDN SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 200 ISDN Attributes
201 COLP Table
202 MSN Table
TABLES 220 LCR Attributes
221 LCR – Leading Digit Table
222 LCR – Digit Modification Table
223 LCR Table Initialization
224 Toll Exception Table – Allow A (Entry no:01-30)
Toll Exception Table – Deny A (Entry no:01-30)
Toll Exception Table – Allow B (Entry no:01-30)
Toll Exception Table – Deny B (Entry no:01-30)
225 Canned Toll Table –Allow (Entry no:01-10)
Canned Toll Table –Deny (Entry no:01-10)
226 Emergency Code Table
227 Authorization Code Table
228 Customer Call Routing
229 Executive/Secretary Table
231 Flexible DID Table
232 System Speed Zone
233 Weekly Time Table
234 Voice Mail Dialing Table
235 Tie Routing Table
236 Mobile Extension
NETWORKING 320 Networking Basic Attribute
321 Networking Supplementary Attribute
322 Networking CO Line Attribute
324 Networking Routing Table
VOIB 340 VOIB IP Setting
341 GK Setting ( Not Supported yet )

528
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

MAIN MENU PGM ITEM

RSG 380 VOIB Slot For RSG/IP
381 RSG/IP No Assign
382 RSG/IP Attribute
383 RSG Attribute 1
384 RSG Attribute 2
385 RSG Alarm Attribute
386 IP Phone Attribute
390 RSG DKT RX GAIN
391 RSG DKT TX GAIN
392 RSG SLT RX GAIN
393 RSG SLT TX GAIN
394 RSG LCO RX GAIN
395 RSG LCO TX GAIN
396 IP Phone RX GAIN
397 IP Phone TX GAIN
NATION SPECIFIC 400 DTIB Rx Gain Control
401 SLIB Rx Gain Control
402 SLIB12 Rx Gain Control
403 WTIB Rx Gain Control
404 ACOB Rx Gain Control
405 ACOB8 Rx Gain Control
406 DCOB Rx Gain Control
407 VMIB Rx Gain Control
408 DTMF Receiver Rx Gain Control
409 EXT Page Rx Gain Control
410 CPTU Rx Gain Control
411 Modem Rx Gain Control
412 Short SLIB Gain Control
413 Long SLIB Gain Control
414 Far SLIB Gain Control
415 Short ACO Gain Control
416 Long ACO Gain Control
420 System Tone Frequency
421 Differential Ring Frequency
422 Distinct CO Ring Frequency
423 ACNR Tone Cadence
424 DTIB Rx From ACO Gain Control
425 Singular Table (Korea Only)
INITIALIZATION (DB INIT) 450 Initialization
452 Initialization By MPB Version
PRINT DATABASE 451 Print Prot Database

529
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3 DEFAULT VALUES

5.3.1 LOCATION PROGRAM

PGM FLEX ITEM DEFAULT REMARK

100 1 Nation Code 82 Max 4 digits
2 Customer Site Name . Max 24 digits

5.3.2 RACK SLOT ASSIGNMENT

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

101 - Slot Assignment Refer to Note 2 Refer to Note 1 In case of PRIB assignment, it is
possible to program logical port
number.
* Note1) If the DIP switch of the manual board detection (DIP Switch 8) is ON, system will detect the
installed board type automatically. If the DIP switch 8 is OFF, the board type code must be entered
at each slot. After manual Rack Slot assignment, user should reset the system manually.
* Note2) Board Type Code Table:

STA CODE COL CODE STA & COL CODE Etc CODE
DTIB12 11 PRIB 31 STIB 51 VMIB 61
DTIB24 12 BRIB 32 MISB 71
SLIB6 13 LCOB4 33
SLIB12 14 LCOB8 34
WTIB 15 DIDB 35
SLIB2E 16 BWDIDB 36
DSIB 18 TLIB 37
EMIB 38
AC15 39
CSLIB12 19 DCOB 40
VOIB 41
NPRIB 42(IP LDK-100)
NBRIB(8) 43(IP LDK-100)
NBRIB(4) 44(IP LDK-100)
CLCOB8 45
RDIB 46
EMIB8 47
CLCOB4 49

5.3.3 WTIB PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT

RANGE
PGM FLEX ITEM DEFAULT REMARK
LDK-300/300E LDK-100

530
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

WTIB Port 008 – 192 08-80 8 When IP LDK-100 has one rack :
102 - Number (Multiple of 8) (Multiple of 8) 08-40
Assignment
5.3.4 LOGICAL SLOT ASSIGNMENT

PGM FLEX ITEM DEFAULT REMARK

103 1 COL Board Refer to Note
2 STA Board Refer to Note
3 VMIB Not Assigned
* Note) If the DIP switch of the manual board detection DIP Switch 8) is ON, system will detect the logical
slot assign in sequence as increase order automatically. If the DIP switch 8 is OFF, the logical slot
assignment must be entered at each board type. After manual logical slot assignment, user should
reset the system manually.

5.3.5 NUMBERING PLAN TYPE

STA RANGE
PGM ITEM DEFAULT REMARK
IP LDK-300E IP LDK-300 IP LDK-100
st
104 Number Set As the basic type, the 1 digit of
1000 – 1599 100 – 399 100 – 227
Type 1 station number should be 1 – 4.
Number Set The station number can be
1000 – 1599 100 – 399 100 – 227
Type 2 changed within 799.
Number Set
1000 – 1599 100 – 399 100 – 227
Type 3
Number Set
7000 – 7599 700 – 999 700 – 827
Type 4
Number Set
2000 – 2599 200 – 499 200 – 327 Type 1
Type 5
Max Station Ports: 60
Number Set
21 – 79 21 – 79 21 – 79 Stations above Max ports will be
Type 6
displayed “***”
Max Station Ports: 200
Number Set
1000 – 1299 100 – 299 100 – 227 Stations above Max ports will be
Type 7
displayed “***”
Number Set The station number can be
1000 – 1599 100 – 399 100 – 227
Type 8 changed within 999.

531
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3.6 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER REMARK
PGM FLEX FIELD
SET1 SET2 SET3 SET4 SET5 SET6 SET7 SET8
1000 - 1599 1000 - 1599 100 - 1599 7000 - 7599 2000 - 2599 10 - 79 1000 - 1299 1000 - 1599 IP LDK-300E
100 - 399 100 - 399
105 - Intercom Call 100 - 399 100 - 399 700 - 999 200 - 499 10 - 79 100 - 299 IP LDK-300
(100 - 799) (100 - 999)
100 - 227 100 - 227
100 -227 100 - 227 700 - 827 200 - 327 10 - 79 100 - 227 IP LDK-100
(100 - 799) (100 - 999)
620 - 667 *620 - *667 620 - 667 620 - 667 620 - 667 *620 - *667 620 - 667 *620 - *667 IP LDK-300E
1 Group Pilot Number
620 - 634 *620 - *634 620 - 634 620 - 634 620 - 634 *620 - *634 620 - 634 *620 - *634 IP LDK-100
501 - 535 *501 - *535 #01 - #35 #01 - #35 #01 - #35 *501 - *535 401 - 419 *501 - *535 IP LDK-300E
2 Internal Page Zone
501 - 515 *501 - *515 #01 - #15 #01 - #15 #01 - #15 *501 - *515 401 - 415 *501 - *515 IP LDK-100
3 Internal All Call Page 543 *543 #5 #7 #5 *543 43 *543
4 Meet Me Page 544 *544 ## ## ## *544 44 *544
5 External Page Zone 1 545 *545 #6 #41 #6 *545 45 *545
6 External Page Zone 2 546 *546 #7 #42 #7 *546 46 *546
7 External Page Zone 3 547 *547 #8 #43 #8 *547 47 *547
8 External All Call Page 548 *548 #9 #5 #9 *548 48 *548
9 All Call Page (Int & Ext) 549 *549 #00 #6 #00 *549 49 *549
10 SMDR Account Code Enter 550 *550 550 550 50 *550 50 *550 SLT
106 11 Flash Command to CO Line 551 *551 551 551 51 *551 51 *551 SLT
12 Last Number Redial 552 *552 552 552 52 *552 52 *552 SLT
13 DND (Toggle On/Off) 553 *553 553 553 53 *553 53 *553 SLT
14 Call Forward 554 *554 554 554 54 *554 54 *554 SLT
15 Speed Dial Programming 555 *555 555 *40 55 *555 55 *555 SLT
16 Message Wait/Callback Enable 556 *556 556 *66 56 *556 56 *556
17 Message Wait/Callback Return 557 *557 557 *67 57 *557 57 *557 SLT
18 Speed Dial Access 558 *558 558 *7 58 *558 58 *558 SLT
19 Cancel DND/FWD/Pre-MSG 559 *559 559 559 59 *559 59 *559 SLT
20 System Hold 560 *560 560 560 690 *560 30 *560 SLT
21 Station Relocation Backup 561 *561 561 561 691 *561 … *561
22 Station Relocation Retrieve 562 *562 562 562 692 *562 … *562
Programming Mode Enter
23 563 *563 563 563 693 *3 33 *3 SLT
Code
24 ACD Reroute 564 *564 564 564 694 *4 34 *4

532
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER REMARK

PGM FLEX FIELD
SET1 SET2 SET3 SET4 SET5 SET6 SET7 SET8
1 Alarm Reset 565 *565 565 *565 695 *565 35 *565
2 Group Call Pickup 566 *566 ** *1 ** *566 36 *566
3 UCD DND 568 *568 568 568 698 *568 68 *568
4 Night Answer 569 *569 577 2 699 *569 69 *569
601 - 619 *601 -* 619 601 – 619 601-619 601 - 619 *601 -* 619 601 - 619 *601 -* 619 IP LDK-300/300E
5 Call Parking Locations
601 - 610 *601 -* 610 601 – 610 601-610 601 - 610 *601 -* 610 601 - 610 *601 -* 610 IP LDK-100
6 Direct Call Pickup 7 *7 *7 *42 7 *7 7 *7
801-872 801-872 801-872 401-472 801-872 801-872 801-872 #801-#872 IP LDK-300/300E
7 CO Line Group Access
801-824 801-824 801-824 401-424 801-824 801-824 801-824
#801-#824 IP LDK-100
#88001-
88001-88400 88001-8840088001-8840048001-48400 88001-88400 88001-8840088001-88400 IP LDK-300E
#88400
8 Individual CO Access #88001-
88001-88200 88001-8820088001-8820048001-48200 88001-88200 88001-8820088001-88200 IP LDK-300
#88200
8801-8840 8801-8840 8801-8840 4801-4840 8801-8840 8801-8840 8801-8840 #8801-#8840 IP LDK-100
9 Tie Routing Access 8901 8901 8901 4901 89 8901 8901 #401
107 10 Retrieve Held CO Line 8* 8* 8* 4* 8* 8* 8* #8*
Retrieve Held Individual CO 8#xxx 8#xxx 8#xxx 4#xxx 8#xxx 8#xxx 8#xxx #8#xxx IP LDK-300/300E
11
Line 8#xx 8#xx 8#xx 4#xx 8#xx 8#xx 8#xx #8#xx IP LDK-100
Access CO Line In the 1st
12 9 9 9 1 0 9 9 0
available CO Line Group
13 Attendant Call 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 #9
14 1st Door Open #*1 #*1 #*1 #*1 #*1 #*1 #*1 #*1
15 2nd Door Open #*2 #*2 #*2 #*2 #*2 #*2 #*2 #*2
16 3rd Door Open #*3 #*3 #*3 #*3 #*3 #*3 #*3 #*3
17 4th Door Open #*4 #*4 #*4 #*4 #*4 #*4 #*4 #*4
18 5th Door Open #*5 #*5 #*5 #*5 #*5 #*5 #*5 #*5
19 6th Door Open #*6 #*6 #*6 #*6 #*6 #*6 #*6 #*6
#*7 #*7 #*7 #*7 #*7 #*7 #*7 #*7 IP LDK-300/300E
20 7th Door Open
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A IP LDK-100
21 VM Message Waiting Enable *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8
22 VM Message Waiting Disable *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9

533
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER REMARK

PGM FLEX FIELD
SET1 SET2 SET3 SET4 SET5 SET6 SET7 SET8
1 MCID Request *0 *0 *0 *0 *0 *0 *0 *0
2 RSG Door Open 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
3 RSG Door Open 2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
4 Conference Room 57 *57 *57 57 *57 *57 *57 *57
109
5 SLT Conference Page Join 58 *58 *58 58 *58 *58 *58 *58
Unsupervised Conf Timer
6 ## ## *## *## *## ## ## ##
Extend
7 Reserved … … … … … … … …

534
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3.7 IP SETTING
PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
108 1 IP Name Max 16
2 Server IP Address 12 Digits 192.168.1.1 Skip : #
3 CLI IP Address 12 Digits
4 Gateway Address 12 Digits
5 Subnet Mask 12 Digits 255.255.255.0
6 PPP Usage ON/OFF OFF

5.3.8 STATION ID ASSIGNMENT

RANGE
PGM FLEX ITEM DEFAULT REMARK
IP LDK-300/300E IP LDK-100
1 ID 01-16 01-11
110
2 DSS/DLS MAP – Associate STA STA # STA #

5.3.9 STATION ATTRIBUTE I/II/III

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
111 1 Auto Speaker ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, Station user can
Selection access a CO line or make a DSS call by
pressing appropriate {CO} or {DSS} button
without lifting handset or pressing the [MON]
button.
2 Call Forward ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, an incoming call can
be forwarded to the other destination.
3 DND ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, an incoming call can
be denied.
4 Data Line Security ON / OFF OFF
If this value is set to ON, override and camp-
on from other stations are prohibited when this
station is busy.
5 Howling Tone to SLT ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, System gives
howling tone to SLT.
In SLT, user keep off-hook state continually,
system gives error tone first, then off-hook
state still continue, system gives very noisy
error tone. This noisy error tone is howling
tone.
6 ICM Box Signaling ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, This station can
receive intercom box signal.
7 No Touch Answer ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, the station can be
responded to the transferred CO call
automatically when station mode is H/P.

535
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

111 8 Page Access ON / OFF ON / OFF If this value is set to ON, This station can
page to other station.
9 Ring Type 0-4 0 If this value is not 0, this ring type is heard to
called party station of intercom call.
10 Speaker Ring 1:Speaker, 2: Headset. Speaker- This feature determines the ringing path
3:BOTH Phone whether Speaker or Headset and even both.
11 Speakerphone ON/OFF ON If this value is set to ON, Speakerphone can
be used.
12 VMIB Slot 0 - 2(LDK-300/300E) 0 Up to 3 VMIB cards could be installed in
0 – 1(LDK-100) main system. This ADMIN program can
assign the VMIB card by entering sequential
value 0 to 2 according to their slot number
order.
13 ICM Group 01 - 15(LDK-300/300E) 01 This feature selects intercom Tenancy Group,
01 - 05(LDK-100) which this station belongs to.
14 Error Tone for TAD ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, and TAD is used in
SLT port, when the caller hangs up, busy
tone will be provided to TAD instead of error
tone.
15 SLT Flash Drop ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, CO Call is dropped
by pressing [FLASH] button or Hook Flashing
16 Loop LCR Account ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, station user must
Code enter Account Code to use Loop LCR.
17 VMIB Message Type FIFO/LIFO LIFO In FIFO state, the first recorded VMIB
message can play. Oppositely in LIFO state,
the latest message plays.
18 Off-net Call Forward ENABLE/DISABLE ENABLE If this value is set to ON, Off-net call forward
can be used.
19 Forced HF Mode ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, a caller can make
called party with tone mode to answer forcedly
like hand-free mode.
20 CIDSLT CAS GAIN 00-20 5
CAS gain for CID SLT

21 CIDSLT FSK GAIN 00-20 5 FSK gain for CID SLT

22 CALLER Voice Over ON/OFF OFF Facility to make Voice-Over to busy station.

23 SIP U-ID Tbl bin 00-32 00 UID table index for SIP outgoing call
VOIB make “From” Header if this value is
00 : Use COLP
01~32 : Use SIP UID (PGM 351 – 1)

536
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

112 1 CO Warning Tone ON / OFF OFF In case of restricting outgoing CO call time, if
this value is set to ON, the station user receives
warning tone during CO call after the timer
expires(ADMIN 180-FLEX 22).
2 Automatic Hold ON / OFF OFF While seizing a CO line, the station user seizes
another CO line by pressing the {CO} button. If
this value is set to ON, the previous seized CO
line goes on hold automatically. In case of
Attendant , default value is ON.
3 CO Call Time ON / OFF OFF If this flag is set to ON, station’s outgoing CO
Restriction call may be disconnected when CO call
restriction timer (PGM 180-FLEX 17) expires.
4 Individual CO Line ENABLE ENABLE If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user
Access /DISABLE can access individual CO line by dialing
Individual CO access code(ADMIN 107-FLEX
8)
5 CO Line Queuing ENABLE ENABLE When a user of station receives a busy signal
/DISABLE during an attempt to access a CO line, the user
may request a call back (queue) when the CO
Line is available. If this value is set to ENABLE,
the user gets the recalling from the CO Line
when it’s available.
When a user of station receives a busy signal
during an attempt to access a CO line, the user
may request a call back (queue) when the CO
Line is available. If this value is set to ENABLE,
the user gets the recalling from the CO Line
when it’s available.
6 CO PGM ENABLE DISABLE
/DISABLE If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user
can program CO button at its Flexible button.

7 PLA ENABLE ENABLE If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user
/DISABLE can answer calls according to the priority
(ADMIN 173).
8 Prepaid Call ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the station user can
use Prepaid Call feature (ADMIN 180-FLEX
16).
9 Speed Dial Access ENABLE ENABLE If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user
/DISABLE can use system speed dial call.

537
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

10 Two Way Record ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the station user can
record the incoming and outgoing voice during
conversation.
11 Fax Mode ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, single ring is provided
and Attendant recall is not operated.
12 OFFNET Call Mode EXTERNAL ALL If this value is set to EXT, the station user can
/ALL only forward CO call to Off-net(ex mobile
phone). Otherwise both CO call and ICM call
can be forwarded to Off-net.
PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
112 13 UCD Group Service ON / OFF OFF This feature is used when a station gets
DID/DISA call.
If this value is set to ON, the UCD Group, which
the station belongs to, gets the incoming call
and if this value is set to OFF, the station gets
the incoming call directly whether the station is
busy or not.
14 Ring Group Service ON / OFF OFF This feature is used when a station in Ring
Group gets a DID/DISA call.
If this value is set to ON, the Ring Group, which
the station belongs to, gets the incoming call
and if this value is set to OFF, the station gets
the incoming call directly
15 Stop Camp On Tone ENABLE DISABLE If this value is set to ENABLE, Camp on Tone is
/DISABLE not heard.
16 Line Length SHORT / SHORT This feature is used to distinguish the line
LONG / FAR (Short:0km, length when the distance between the stations
Long:0~3km, and the station boards is too variable. (SAF
Far:3~7.5km) only)
17 MSG SCROLL 0-7 3 This value means the scroll speed of SMS or
SPEED broadcasting notice message. (Only for LKD-
30DH)
18 BLOCK BACK CALL ON/OFF ON If this value is set to ON, SLT recalling is
for SLT blocked after pressing [FLASH] button.
19 I-TIME RST ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the conversation time
of incoming CO call is limited.
After CO Call Restriction Timer is expired, the
call is forced to disconnected.
20 STA Account ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, an authorization code
is required when she accesses CO line.
21 CID Type 2 Service ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, CLI type 2 is serviced
for CID SLT.
22 Door Open ENABLE DISABLE If this value is set to ON, the station can open
/DISABLE the door using the door open code.
23 Dummy Station ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, an hot-desk agent can
login at the dummy station.

538
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

24 Emergency ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, this station can make
Supervisor Emergency Intrusion call to other station.

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

113 1 ADMIN ENABLE DISABLE If this value is set to ENABLE, the assigned
/DISABLE station users can program ADMIN Database.
This feature is only available at DKTU.
2 VMIB Access ENABLE DISABLE If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user
/DISABLE can use VMIB.
3 Group Listening ENABLE DISABLE If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user
/DISABLE can use group listening. While you are talking
on handset, by pressing the [MON] button,
other people around you may hear the
conversation through the speaker. Although the
voice of other people is not sent by microphone.
4 Override Privilege ENABLE DISABLE If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user
/DISABLE can override CO Call.
5 SMDR Hidden Dialed ENABLE DISABLE If this value is set to ENABLE, Dialed number of
Digits /DISABLE CO Call is not showed on SMDR record.
6 Voice Over ENABLE DISABLE If this value is set to ENABLE, the station user
/DISABLE can talk alternately a call to the other call.
7 Warm Line HOT/WARM WARM If this value is set to HOT, the station user can
use Hot Line. (Ref ADMIN 122).
Otherwise in Warm Line state, Warm Line Timer
starts when the user lifts handset or presses the
[MON] button.
8 VMIB MSG Retrieve ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the station user must
Password enter password to retrieve VMIB Message.
9 VMIB MSG Retrieve ON/OFF ON If this value is set to ON, Date and time will be
Date/Time heard when VMIB Message is retrieved.
10 Alarm Attribute FLEX 1 OFF If this value is set to ON, the station gets the
ON/OFF alarm signal.
FLEX 2 OFF
ON/OFF
FLEX 3 OFF
ON/OFF
11 Mute Ring Service ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the station can get mute
ring.

539
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3.10 ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTE

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
114 1 CLIP LCD ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, the CLI is displayed on the
Display station’s LCD.
2 COLP LCD ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the connected party’s CLI is
Display displayed on station’s LCD.
3 CLI / REDIRECT CLI / CLI When using networking, If this value is set to RED, the
Display REDIRECT redirected CLI is displayed. Otherwise, the original CLI is
displayed
4 CLI MSG Wait ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the station can receive CLI
message from CO Incoming call, when the station doesn’t
answer.
5 EXT or CO ATD ATD/EXT EXT If this value is set to ATD, CO ATD code(ADMIN 200) is
used to outgoing CLI information. Otherwise, station
number is used as CLI information
6 Keypad Facility KEYPAD / DTMF
If this value is set to KEYPAD, ISDN station sends digit in
DTMF
keypad facility after connected. Otherwise DTMF is used.
7 Long / Short LONG / SHORT If this value is set to LONG, ISDN station acts in LONG
SHORT passive mode.
8 CPN Type 0-2 0(Not used)
This value set CPN IE type of SETUP message.
(If this value is set to 0, all S0 stations of the S port get the
incoming call. in case of 1 & 2, only one specific station
gets the call.)
9 S0 Sub-address 0-2 0(Not used) This value indicates how the sub-address is used in
SETUP message.
If this value is set to 0, station sub-address not used. Else
if set to 1, sub-address is filled in the CPN field of SETUP
message. Otherwise, sub-address is filled in the CPSN
(Called Party Sub-address Number) field of SETUP
message.
10 DISA Restriction ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the station is restricted to receive
the DISA incoming call.
11 CLI Name ON / OFF OFF If this field is ON, the system checks whether the received
Display CLI is matched with the speed dial data or not. If it is
matched, the speed dial name is displayed.

540
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

12 ISDN CLI Station Max 4 digits This value is used as outgoing CLI When outgoing CLI is
Number active and CLI type is Station
13 Progress ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the Progress Indicator can notice
Indication non-ISDN device.
14 ISDN CLIR ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the CLI information is restricted
by PABX .
15 ISDN COLR ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the connect party’s CLI
information is restricted by PABX.
16 DID Restriction ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the station is restricted to receive
the DID incoming call.
17 DID Call Wait ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, when the station is busy, another
DID call could be waiting.
PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
114 18 CLI Type LONG/SRT SHORT This value selects CLI type.
19 Long Station CLI Max 12 Logical STA If outgoing CLI is activated and CLI type is Station, this
digits Number value is used as outgoing CLI.
20 MSN Call Wait ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, she receives a call waiting via
MSN.
21 LONG CLI 1 Max 16 If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 1, Long CLI 1 is
digits sent.
22 LONG CLI 2 Max 16 If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 2, Long CLI 2 is
digits sent.

5.3.11 FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
115 01-24 Flex. Buttons Assignment FLEX 01-44 Each Flexible Button in a station can
be assigned as desired
1: User Key User can program by button
-
programming procedure. (empty)
2: {CO} Button 001-400 (IP LDK-300E) CO Line
3: {CO Line Group} Button 001(IP
01-72 200 (LDK 300)
LDK-300/300E) CO Line Group
01-24 (IP LDK-100)
4: {LOOP} Button -
5: {STA xxx} Button STA No. Station No.
6: STA PGM Button 11 – 99 Station Programming Code
7: {STA SPD xxx} Button STA SPD Bin No. Speed Bin
8: {SYS SPD xxxx} Button SYS SPD Bin No. System Speed Bin
9: FLEX NUMBER Number Plan Code Number Plan Code
10: Networking DSS Button Networking No. Networking DSS Number
11: MSN Button MSN No. MSN No.

541
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3.12 STATION BASE PROGRAM

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAUL REMARK
116 1 Station COS : Day 1–9 1 Day Class-Of-Service
2 Station COS : Night 1-9 1 Night / Weekend Class-Of-Service
117 CO Line Group Access
1 CO Line Group 01~24 01-24 CO line Group 01-24 (Toggle)
2 CO Line Group 25~48 25-48 CO line Group 25-48 (Toggle):
: IP LDK-300/300E Only
3 CO Line Group 49~72 49-72 CO line Group 49-72 (Toggle)
: IP LDK-300/300E Only
118 Internal Page Zone Access Each station can be assigned to internal
page zone.
In IP LDK-300/300E(100) system supports
30(10) internal paging zones.
1 Internal Page Zone 01~24 1 – 24( IP LDK- 1 Internal Page Zone 01 – 24(10) (Toggle)
300/300E)
1 –10 (IP LDK-100)
2 Internal Page Zone 25~30 1-6 - Internal Page Zone 25 - 30 (Toggle)
: IP LDK-300/300E Only
119 1-5 Conference Page Zone 31 - 35 (IP LDK- Each station can be assigned to
Access 300/300E) conference page zone.
11 - 15 (IP LDK-100)
IP LDK-300/300E and IP LDK-100
support 5 conference page zones.
120 ICM Tenancy Group number Each Intercom Tenancy Group can be
operated independently and the stations
in the group can be assigned an
individual CO Line Group to use. Each
group can be assigned with attendant
and can be programmed to allow or deny
calls to other groups.
IP LDK-300/300E system supports 15(IP
LDK-100 5) ICM Tenancy Groups and
Tenancy ATDs.
1 ICM Tenancy Group STATION No. - Each ICM group may have one
Attendant attendant.
Day / Night Mode of ICM Group is set by

ICM Group attendant.

542
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

2 ICM Tenancy Access Group 01 - 15 (IP LDK-

GROUP Each group can be programmed to allow
300/300E)
01 or deny calls to other groups.
01 - 05 (IP LDK-100)
121 ICM Preset Call Forward - When this feature is programmed, If the
station does not answer the incoming
CO call within Preset Call Forward timer,
then this call is forwarded to preset
destination.
No station is assigned as default.

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAUL REMARK

122 IDLE LINE SELECTION - This feature assigns the destination of
Hot Line and Warm Line.
1: Flexible Button 01 – 44 - To activate a feature on a flex button as if
pressed.
2: CO Line 001-400 (IP LDK-300E) - To seize a CO Line
001-200 (IP LDK-300)
01-40 (IP LDK-100)
3: CO Line Group 01-72 (IP LDK- - To seize a CO Line Group
300/300E)
4: Station 1000-1599(IP LDK- - To call an another station
300E)
100-399(IP LDK-300)
123 1 CTI Station Mode 0–2 1 Determines the CTI station mode
0: Inactive, 1: CTI Mode, 2: At Mode
2 CTI Station’s Baud Rate 0–2 0 Determines the baud rate of the CTI
Station.0: 1200, 1: 2400, 2: 4800
124 SMDR Account Group Assign 00 – 99(IP LDK- Stations can be assigned as a member
00(Not
300/300E) of call account group on SMDR. A station
Assigned)
00 – 23(IP LDK-100) belongs to only one group.

125 Copy DSS Button 01 – 15(IP LDK- The assigned DSS button can be copied
300/300E) to another station or ICM group.
01 – 05(IP LDK-100)
1 Copy DSS from station
2 Copy DSS from ICM Group
130 Display Stations by COS COS stands for Class of Service. It
means, defends on the grade of COS,
1 Show station by day COS the service could be limited.
The certain COS of station could be
2 Show station by night COS checked.
131 Display station number 00 – 73(IP LDK- System can display station by CO access
by CO access Gr. 300/300E) group.
00 – 25(IP LDK-100)

543
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3.13 CO LINE BASE PROGRAM

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

140 CO Service Type In this program mode, you can

program the following items.
1 CO Type 1-5 1(Normal) 1:Normal, 2:A_DID,
3:ISDN DID/MSN, 4: TIE,
5: DCO DID
2 Detailed Attribute of the type

DISA(D/N/W) Day / Night / Weekend

DISA SVC ON /OFF OFF

VMIB ANNC 00-70 00(NOT_ASG)

Analog DID

SIGNAL 1-3 1 1: Immediate 2: Wink

3: Delayed Dial

INFO NO 00-70 00(NOT_ASG)

TIE Attribute

TIE SIG 1-5 1 1:RD 2:LD 3:EM-C 4:EM-D

5:EM-I

141 CO Line Attributes –I 1-9

1 CO Line Group Assignment 00-72 01 Each CO Line must be a member of CO

(IP LDK-300/300E) Line Group.
00-25 Groups may be assigned according to
(IP LDK-100) CO type and Class-Of-Service.
Group 00 means private group, and
group 73(25 in IP LDK-100) means not
used group.
2 CO Line COS 1-5 1 COS is assigned to each CO lines.

544
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

3 DISA Account Code ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, when the
incoming CO caller tries to access
another CO Line by dialing CO Line
access code, the caller should enter
authorization code.
This is applied only when this CO
Service type is DISA.
4 CO Line Assign POL/LOOP LOOP If this value is set to ON, Polarity
Reverse is applied to the CO Line,
otherwise, Loop Start is applied to.
5 CO Line Type PBX/CO CO If this value is set to PBX, the opposite
system is PBX. Oppositely if it is set to
CO, the system is Central Office.

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

141 6 CO Line Signal Type DTMF/PULSE DTMF If this value is set to DTMF, the CO
Line signaling type is set to DTMF.
Otherwise, signaling type is set to
Pulse.
7 Flash Type GROUND/LOOP LOOP This value is applied to analogue CO
Line only.
8 UNA ON / OFF OFF If this feature is set to ON, Universal
Night Answer service is applied to this
CO Line.
9 CO Line Group Account ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the CO Line
user should enter authorization code to
access this CO Line.
10 CO Tenancy Group 00-15 05 This value means ICM Tenancy group
(IP LDK-300/300E) number the station belongs to. This
0-5 station receives the CO Call.
(IP LDK-100) If this value is set, separated Day/Night
ring mode is applied to the incoming
CO Call according to each ICM
tenancy group attendant’s Day/Night
ring mode.
142 CO Line Attributes – II 1-13

1 CO Line Name Display ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON and the CO
Line Name is assigned, the Name is
displayed on the station LCD when the
station gets the CO incoming call
through this CO Line.
2 CO Line Name Assign Max 12 char - This value means the name of the CO
Line.
3 Metering Unit 00-06 0 This value determines the Unit used to
perceive a pulse from CO Line.

545
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

4 Line Drop using CPT ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, CPT checks
the incoming CO Line when answered
and if CPT detects dial tone, then
system drops the line for toll restriction.
5 CO Distinct Ring 0-4 0 If this value is not set to 0, the
designated ring tone is heard to the
station when the station gets the
incoming CO Call so that the user can
distinguish incoming CO Call and ICM
Call with its different ring tone.
Each ring tone can be adjusted at
ADMIN 422
6 CO Line MOH 0-13 (IP LDK- 1 This value is used at MOH of the CO
300/300E) Line.
0-12 (IP LDK-100)

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

142 7 PABX CO Dial Tone YES / NO YES If this value is set to YES, PX or PABX
provides CO Dial Tone.
Otherwise PX or PABX does not
provide CO Dial Tone. Instead, IP LDK
system provides it.
8 PABX CO Ring Back Tone YES / NO NO If this value is set to YES, PX or PABX
provides CO Ring Back Tone.
Otherwise PX or PABX does not
provide CO Ring Back Tone. Instead,
IP LDK system provides it.
9 PABX CO Error Tone YES / NO NO If this value is set to YES, PX or PABX
provides CO Error Tone.
Otherwise PX or PABX does not
provide CO Error Tone. Instead, IP
LDK system provides it.
10 PABX CO Busy Tone YES / NO NO If this value is set to YES, PX or PABX
provides CO Busy Tone.
Otherwise PX or PABX does not
provide CO Busy Tone. Instead, IP
LDK system provides it.
11 PABX CO Announce Tone YES / NO NO If this value is set to YES, PX or PABX
provides CO Announce Tone.
Otherwise PX or PABX does not
provide CO Announce Tone. Instead,
IP LDK system provides it.
12 CO Flash Timer 000 – 300 050 This value provides the length of time
limit of CO Flash.
CO Flashing is available within this
timer. Otherwise, the CO Line is
released.
10msec base

546
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

13 Open Loop Detect Timer 0 – 20 0 This value provides the time limit of
CO Open Loop.
100msec base
14 Line Length LONG / SHORT SHORT This feature is used to distinguish the
line length when the CO Line length is
too variable. (SAF only)
15 DISA Answer Timer 1-9 5 After this timer, IP LDK answers the
DISA call. (India / CIS only)
16 DISA Delay Timer 1-9 2 After this timer, DTMF Receiver is
attached after DISA line
answered.(CIS only)

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

143 ISDN CO Line Attribute 1-6
1 COLP Table Index 00 ~ 50 Not Assigned To know connected party number
information, CLI refer this value.
If this value is set to 50, the CLI of this
CO Line refers to ADMIN114-FLEX5.
Else if this value is set to 00 ~ 49, the
CLI of this CO Line refers COLP
Table(ADMIN201).
2 CLIP Table Index 00 ~ 50 Not To know calling party number
Assigned information, CLI refer this value.
If this value is set to 50, the CLI of this
CO Line refers to ADMIN114-FLEX5.
Else if this value is set to 00 ~ 49, the
CLI of this CO Line refers COLP
Table(ADMIN201).
3 Type of Calling Number 0-4 2 This value is used to set the call type
of ISDN CO line CLI.
4 DID Conversion Type 0~2 0 When CO Service Type is set to ISDN
DID/MSN(ADMIN 140), this value is
used to decide DID digit conversion
type.
If this value is set to 0, incoming digits
are converted as ADMINN 146.
If set to 1, there’s no digit conversion.
If the caller dials valid station number,
the station gets the call.
If set to 2, it refers Flexible DID
Table(ADMIN 231).

547
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5 DID Remove No. 00-99 Not Assigned If this value is not 0, and the CO Line
is DID Line, the system discard the
incoming DID digits up to amount of
this value .
e.g. If this value is set to 02 and the
outside caller dialed ‘01245’, then the
first ‘01’ is removed.
6 ISDN enblock send ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, Enblock
Sending Mode is applied at outgoing
CO call.
7 CLI Transit ORI(1)/CFW(0) CFW(0) When using networking, If this value is
set to ORI, the originate caller’s CLI is
sent for CLI. Otherwise, the call
forwarded station’s CLI is sent.
8 Numbering Plan ID F1: 0-7 0 Calling Party/Called Party Numbering
F2: 0-7 Plan ID setting.
F1 : Calling NPI / F2 : Called NPI
9 ISDN SS CD ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, ISDN call
deflection service is available.

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

143 10 RESERED
11 ISDN CP INBAND ON/OFF OFF Request to PX sending the Inband
Signaling in Call Progess Message.
12 LONG CLI TYPE 0-2 If this value is set to 0, the CLI is made
as before (refer PGM200/PGM114)
If this value is set to 1 or 2, the CLI is
just as same as Long CLI (Station
Long CLI 1 or 2).
144 CO Ring Assignment STA Range (Delay : 0 – 9),
1 Day STA_R / HUNT / VMIB Hunt Group, VMIB Message
2 Night STA_R / HUNT / VMIB
3 Weekend STA_R / HUNT / VMIB
4 On-demand STA_R / HUNT / VMIB
145 CO Ring Assignment You can check the ring assignment
Display destination of the CO line for each
1 Day Day/Night Ring Mode.
2 Night If CO Call is assigned to the station at
3 Weekend Day or Night Mode, you can see the
delay value also.
4 On-demand e.g.) 100(1) means station 100 gets
the ring with delay 1.
When there are too many stations, you
can scroll data using volume up/down
key.
146 1 Incoming Prefix Code ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, prefix code
Insertion will be attached in front of incoming
CLI.

548
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

2 Outgoing Prefix Code ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, prefix code
Insertion will be attached in front of outgoing
CLI.
3 ISDN Line Type µ-Law/ A-Law This value is used to set ISDN CODEC
A-Law (OFF) Type.
4 Calling Sub-address ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, calling party
(NO) sub-address of the ISDN station is
attached when an ISDN station makes
an outgoing CO Call through this CO
Line.
5 DID DGT Receive 2–4 4 This value is used as count of the
Number received DID Digit number to route
DID incoming Call.
6 DID Digit Mask 4 digits #*** When DID Conversion Type(ADMIN
(d.*,#) 143 – FLEX4) is set to 0, The received
DID digits are converted by this value.
The number 0 ~ 9, #, * can be entered.
# means to ignore received digit, and *
means to bypass the digit.
The length of DID Digit Mask is 4.

e.g.) ‘1234’ is received when DID Digit

Mask is set as ‘#8**’, the digit is
converted as ‘834’.

5.3.14 SLOT BASE PROGRAM

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
155 1 R2 CRC Check ON/OFF ON If this value is set to ENABLE, the R2 CRC is
checked.
2 Set Distance coefficient 0-3 0 Gain value is set according to the Distance
Coefficient.

5.3.15 SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
160 System Attributes-I 1-15
1 Attendant Call Queuing RBT / MOH MOH If this value is set to RBT, ring back tone is
Ringback Tone provided to the station when the station
calls busy attendant. Otherwise hold tone
or VMIB-MOH(ADMIN 171 - FLEX2) is
provided.
2 CAMP RBT/MOH RBT / MOH MOH MOH or Ring Back tone is heard on camp-
on.
3 CO Line Choice LAST / ROUND ROUND In seizing a CO Line among CO line
group, if this value is set to LAST
CHOICE, Last available CO Line is seized.
Otherwise, CO line is seized round robin
choice.

549
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

4 DISA Retry Counter 0-9 3 When the DISA user fails to call a station
or access a feature, then DISA user can
retry other calls or features within this retry
counter. If DISA user cannot access
appropriately within this counter, this call is
routed according to DID/DISA destination
(ADMIN 167).
5 ICM Continuous Dial-Tone CONT / CONT This value sets whether ICM dial tone is
DISCONT continuous or not.
6 CO Dial-Tone Detect ON / OFF OFF When the speed dial is activated, if this
value is set to ON, system detects dial
tone using CPT instead of pause timer.
7 External Night Ring ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, when CO
incoming call is received and UNA service
is activated, the call is sent to LBC1.
8 Hold Preference SYS/EXEC SYS There are two types of Hold; System Hold
and Exclusive Hold. If a call is held as
System Hold, any station can retrieve that
call, Otherwise only holding station can
retrieve that call.
9 Multi-line Conference ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, a conference with
multi-CO lines is available.
10 Print LCR Conversion Digit ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to On, LCR conversed
digits are showed on LCD and SMDR
data. Otherwise original dialed digits are
showed.
PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
160 11 Conference Warning Tone ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, other members
will hear warning tone when a new
member enters the conference,
12 Off-net Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON If this value is set to On, off-net VMIB
announcement(prompt) will be heard when
the call is Off-net call forwarded,. It is only
applied to CO-to-CO Transfer.
13 Off-net DTMF Tone ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, dialing DTMF
tone will be heard to the outside caller
when the call is Off-net call forwarded. It is
only applied to CO-to-CO Transfer.
14 CO Voice Path Connect IMM / DGT DGT If this value is set to IMM(immediate),
voice path is connected immediately at the
CO outgoing call, Otherwise It is
connected after dialing any digits.
15 Transfer Tone RBT / MOH MOH While a call is transferred to destination
station, if this value is set to RBT,
transferred station will be heard ring back
tone. Otherwise MOH will be heard.
16 CO-CO XFER CPT DETECT ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, error tone
and busy tone are detected by LCO
CPTU, so LCO line is disconnected.
This option is applied to LCO
incoming call, LCO outgoing call, and
CO to CO Transfer Call.

550
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

17 ACD PACKAGE USAGE ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, ACD
rd
Information is provided to 3 party
application.
Not support yet
18 CO-to-CO UC TIMER ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to on, the conference
EXTEND call user can extend Unsupervised
conference room Timer by dialing UC
TIMER EXTEND Code
CALL LOG LIST NUMBER 15-50 15 Set the number of Call Log List per
19
stations.
161 System Attributes-II 1-18
1 Network Time/Date Setting ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the system
time/date are set by the network time/date.
2 Off-Hook Ring Signal Type MUTE / BURST MUTE The off-hook ring type in the system can
be set to mute or one burst ring.
3 Override 1st CO Line Group ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, if there is no
available CO Line in the first CO Line
Group, system can access the next
accessible CO Line Group.
4 Page Warning Tone ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, page warning tone

will be heard when paging starts.

5 Auto Privacy ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, the call is
protected from override regardless of
Station Override Privilege (ADMIN 113-
FLEX 4).

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

161 6 Privacy Warning Tone ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, privacy warning
tone will be heard when the call is
overridden.
7 Single Ring for CO Call YES / NO YES The cadence of ICM ring is set to 1sec on/
4sec off.
The cadence of CO ring is set to 0.4s on/
0.2s off/ 0.4s on/ 4sec off.
If this value is set to YES, the ICM ring
cadence and the CO ring cadence is
reversed each other.
8 WTU Auto Release ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, WTU is released
automatically.
9 ACD Print Enable ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, ACD Print is
available.
10 ACD Print Timer 001 – 255 001 ACD database is printed per desired time
(3 digits) interval.(10 sec or 1 hour based : ADMIN
161-FLEX 14)
11 ACD clear Database after ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, ACD database is
Print initialized after printed out.
12 VMIB PROMPT GAIN 00 - 31 08 This value is gain of VMIB
Announcement(Prompt). Whenever VMIB
Announcement is played, this value is
applied.

551
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

13 CLI Information of VM SMDI ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, CLI is added
when Voice Mail information is printed
through RS232 port by SMDI.
14 ACD Print Timer Unit HOUR / SEC SEC This value determines the unit of ACD
Print timer(ADMIN 161 - FLEX 10).
(1 hour or 10 seconds)
15 Set VM SMDI Type TYPE II / TYPE I TYPE I This value sets VM SMDI type.
16 Incoming Toll Check ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the system
checks toll of incoming CO call.
17 Reserved - - -
18 DSS Indication Enable / Disable Disable If this value is set to ENABLE, LED
indication of {CO} button or {DSS} button
is blocked.
(i.e. LED does not flash even if there is
incoming call to the assigned CO Line or
Station.)
This feature is not applied for direct call
such as DID/DISA.
19 UK billing mode ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, UK Billing Mode
is applied. (UK only)
20 COS 7 when auth fail ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, station’ COS will
be changed to 7 when invalid authorization
code is entered.
21 5 DGT Auth Code Usage ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, Auth Code is 5
digit fixed length. Otherwise, Auth Code
can be set from 3 digits to 11 digits.

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

161 22 LCR Dial Tone Detect ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, IP LDK system
first checks if the CO provides dial tone in
case if analog CO is seized for LCR
dialing. If there’s no dial tone, the call is
rerouted to Alternate DMT Index.
If LCR type is set to M13, LCR dial tone
detect option is not applied.
162 - ADMIN Password 4 Digits - ADMIN password can be assigned to enter
ADMIN Programming mode for only
Administrator who knows the ADMIN
password. It is not assigned by default.
163 1 Alarm Enable ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, Alarm is
available.
2 Alarm Contact Type CLOSE / OPEN CLOSE
3 Alarm Mode ALARM / BELL ALARM
4 Alarm Signal Mode RPT / ONCE RPT If this value is set to REPEAT, the Alarm
Signal is repeated until Alarm Reset.

552
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

164 1-5 Attendant Assignment STA No. 1 : 100 Maximum 5 Attendants can be assigned
including the Main Attendants and System
Attendant. The system attendant is
different from main attendant in aspect of
the call handling and system management
priority. The system attendant has more
powerful priority than main attendant. The
system and main attendants can be
assigned to each 1 and maximum 4. So
the sum of system and main attendants
should be less than 5. As default, the
System Attendant is assigned to Station
101, and others are not assigned.
165 - Auto Attendant User may set the number of the VMIB
announcement for auto attendant.
1 Auto Attendant Usage ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, Auto Attendant is
activated.
2 Auto Attendant VMIB 00-70 00 This value is the number of VMIB
Announcement # (not_asgn) announcement played when Auto
Attendant is activated.
166 CO-to-CO COS 1-9 When an external user of DID/DISA/TIE
line tries to access another CO Line in the
system, CO-to-CO COS is applied. The
attributes of CO-to-CO COS are the same
as the station COS.
1 Day COS 1-9 7 Class-of-Service of Day Mode
2 Night/Weekend COS 1-9 7 Class-of-Service of Night / Weekend Mode

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

553
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

167 DID/DISA Destination F1-F4 When there is a DID/DISA incoming call, if

the destination is not answer / invalid /
busy, the call is routed to Attendant / Hunt
group / or the caller gets the proper tone.
If Attendant is assigned for DID/DISA
destination, first, the call will check ring
assignment(ADMIN 144), if there exists
ring assigned station the call is routed to
that station. If there is not ring assigned
station, then the call is routed to Attendant.
If VMIB announcement usage is enabled,
The proper announcement is presented to
the caller before the call is routed.
This destination is applied when DISA
Retry Counter expired.
If the destination is set to attendant,
system checks if there’s any ring assigned
station and gives the ring to assigned
station first. If the ring assigned station
does not answer also, then the attendant
receives the call.
1 Busy Destination F1-F3 F1 When there is a DID/DISA incoming call,
and if the caller dialed busy destination,
the call is routed to Busy Destination (Tone
/ Attendant / Hunt).
2 Error Destination F1-F3 F1 When there is a DID/DISA incoming call,
and if the caller dialed invalid number, the
call is routed to Error Destination (Tone /
Attendant / Hunt).
3 No Answer Destination F1-F3 F1 When there is a DID/DISA incoming call,
and the destination is not answer, the call
is routed to No Answer Destination (Tone /
Attendant / Hunt).
4 VMIB PROMPT USAGE F1-F5 F1 If the value is set to ON and VMIB is
available, The proper VMIB announcement
is presented to the caller before the call is
routed to each Destination.
1 Busy Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON If the value is set to ON, Busy
announcement is presented to the caller
before the call is routed to Busy
Destination.
2 Error Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON If the value is set to ON, Error
announcement is presented to the caller
before the call is routed to Error
Destination.
3 DND Prompt Usage ON / OFF ON If the value is set to ON, Busy
announcement is presented to the caller
before the call is routed to Busy
Destination when the original destination is
in DND.

554
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

167 4 No Answer Prompt ON / OFF ON If the value is set to ON, No Answer
Usage announcement is presented to the caller
before the call is routed to No Answer
Destination.
5 Attendant transfer ON / OFF ON If the value is set to ON, Attendant
Prompt Usage Transfer announcement is presented to
the caller before the call is routed to
Attendant.
5 Reroute Busy Destination F1-F3 F1 If Busy Destination is too busy, the call is
rerouted to Reroute Busy Destination.
6 Reroute Error Destination F1-F3 F1 If Error Destination is too busy, the call is
rerouted to Reroute Error Destination.
7 Reroute No Answer F1-F3 F1- If No ANS Destination is too busy, the call
Destination is rerouted to Reroute No ANS
Destination.
168 1 First Contact 1-5 - 1: LBC(STA #)
2 Second Contact 1-5 - 2: Door
3 Third Contact 1-5 - 3: Ext. 1
4 Forth Contact 1-5 - 4: Ext. 2
5 Fifth Contact 1-5 -
5: Ext. 3
6 Sixth Contact 1-5 -
7 Seventh Contact 1-5 -
IP LDK-300/300E Only
169 1 LCD Time Display Mode 12H / 24H 12H Two LCD Time formats are Ordinary (12-
hour)/Military (24-hour) mode
2 LCD Date Display Mode MMDD / DDMM DDMMYY Two LCD date formats are
Day/Month/Year (DDMMYY) or
Month/Day/Year (MMDDYY) mode.
3 LCD Language Display 00-14 12(Korean) The LCD language format can be
Mode selected.
170 Modem Associated Device Modem service is available only when
there’s MODU on MPB.
1 Station Number 1000-1599 STA1599 This value means the Modem-associated
(IP LDK-300E) (IP LDK-300E) station. To use Modem line flexibly,
100-399 STA 399
associate one station with Modem. Then
(IP LDK-300) (IP LDK-300)
incoming CO Call is connected to Modem
100-227 STA 227
device if the station gets the call.
(IP LDK-100) (IP LDK-100)
The last station is assigned as Modem
associated station.
2 CO Number 001-400 - If CO Line is associated with Modem, All of
(IP LDK-300E) the incoming CO Call through this Line is
001-200
connected to Modem. The Modem-
(IP LDK-300)
associated CO Line cannot be used to
01-40
outgoing CO Call.
(IP LDK-100)

555
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

171 1 BGM Type 0-12 01
(IP LDK-
300/300E)
0-11
(IP LDK-100)
2 MOH Type 0-13 01 When a CO line call is placed in the hold
(IP LDK- state (system, exclusive, transfer,
300/300E) conference, etc) the external party will
0-12 (LDK-100) hear music. In this way, the CO line party
can be notified that the connection is still
established.
3 ICM Box Music Channel 0-12 01
(IP LDK-
300/300E)
0-11
(IP LDK-100)
4 Assign MOH via SLT F1 – F5 To assign SLT MOH, set this value and
match the SLT station number of the SLT
port.
To assign external dial tone, set the SLT
5 DIAL TONE SOURCE 0-5 0 (Not Assign)
station number of the SLT port.
To assign external ICM ring back tone, set
6 ICM RING BACK TONE 0-5 0(Not Assign)
the SLT station number of the SLT port.
To assign external DID ring back tone, set
7 DID RING BACK TONE 0-5 0(Not Assign)
the SLT station number of the SLT port.
172 1 - 4 PBX Access Code Max. 2 digits - Maximum 4 PABX Access Codes can be
assigned. Each PABX Access Code is 1 or
2-digit number.
By default, PABX Access Codes are not
assigned at all.
173 PLA Priority Setting PLA priority is set exclusively
1 Transfer CO 1–4 1
2 Recalling CO 1–4 2
3 Incoming CO 1–4 3
4 Queued CO 1–4 4
174 RS-232 PORT Setting Baud Rate, CTS/RTS, P-Break, LPP can
be assigned at this feature to COM1 port,
COM2 port, COM3 – MODU port, COM4 –
MISB port, COM5 – MISB port
respectively.
1 BAUDRATE 0-7(Note1) 19200 0: UNKNOWN
1: UNKNOWN
2: 1200 BAUD
3: 2400 BAUD
4: 4800 BAUD
5: 9600 BAUD
6: 19200 BAUD
7: 38400 BAUD
2 CTS/RTS ON / OFF OFF
3 P-BREAK ON / OFF OFF

556
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

4 LPP 001-199 060

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
175 1 Off-line SMDR/Statistics 01-14 COM2(02) : Off-line SMDR data is printed through this
Print (IP LDK- IP LDK- port.
2 ADMIN Data 300/300E) 300/300E
When ADMIN 451 is used, the ADMIN
01-12
data is printed through this port.
(IP LDK-100) COM1(01) :
3 Traffic Print Traffic analysis data is printed through this
IP LDK-100
port.
4 SMDI Print SMDI data is printed through this port.
5 CALL Info Print Call information data(??) is printed through
this port.
6 On-line SMDR Print On-line SMDR data is printed through this
port.
7 Trace Print Trace data is printed through this port.
8 Debug Print Debug data is printed through this port.
9 PC_ADM NET_PCADM PC Admin is connected through this port.
10 PC_ATD NET_PCATD PC Admin is connected through this port.
11 CTI NET_CTI CTI is connected through this port.
12 REMOTE_DIAG NET_REMOTE Remote Diagnostic data is printed through
this port.
176 - Pulse Dial/Speed Ratio 66/33 66/33 In IP LDK-300/300E/100, pulse dial speed
60/40 ratio is set only for 10 PPS.
177 SMDR Attributes 1-14 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
will provide details on both incoming and
outgoing calls. As an assignable database
option, If All Call record type is selected,
incoming and outgoing local and long
distance calls are all provided. If only Long
Distance is selected, then only outgoing
calls that meet the toll check status
requirements listed below are provided.
1 SMDR Save Enable ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, maximum 5000
of SMDR data can be recorded at system
memory.
2 SMDR Print Enable ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, SDMR data can
be printed real time through the
serial/MODEM/LAN port.
3 SMDR Recording Call Type LD / ALL Call ALL If this value is set to LD, only long distance
outgoing CO call is served SMDR.
If this value is set to ALL, all outgoing CO
call is served SMDR.
The long distance call is defined that the
call satisfy the condition of ADMIN
program 177 – FLEX 4, or ADMIN
program 177 – FLEX 14.

557
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

177 4 SMDR Long Distance Call 07-15 07 The long distance call is defined that the
Digit Counter call satisfy the condition of ADMIN
program 177 – FLEX 4, or ADMIN
program 177 – FLEX 14.
If digit counters of the outgoing CO call are
more than this value, it is considered as
long distance call.
5 Print Incoming Call ON / OFF OFF If value is set to ON, all incoming calls are
printed.
6 Print Lost Call ON / OFF OFF If value is set to ON, lost calls are printed
The lost call is defined that the call is
unanswered.
7 Records in Detail ON / OFF ON Due to limited system memory size, in
places where many calls take place, the
SMDR record buffer can easily saturated.
So, if the customer doesn't need the
detailed call information but total call, total
metering count and total cost for individual
station, then it is possible to save only the
total accumulation, rather than the whole
detailed records.
If this value is set to ON, not only total call,
total metering count and total cost for
individual station, but also the detail call
records are saved maximum 5000.
If this value is set to OFF, only total call,
total metering count and total cost for
individual station information are served.
8 SMDR Dial Digit Hidden 0-9 0 If this value is set non-zero value, the
printed digits from right or left will be
replace to ‘*’ symbol up to this value.
The direction of right or left can be set at
ADMIN program 177 – FLEX 13.
9 SMDR Currency Unit 3 English - For easy identification of call cost, the
Characters currency unit can be entered with 3
alphabet characters to be printed in front
of call charge amount.
10 SMDR Cost Per Unit Pulse 6 digits - This is the call cost unit per cost metering
pulse, which is sent from the Central
Office.

558
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

11 SMDR Fraction 0-5 0 This value means the decimal position

point of the cost per unit pulse
12 SMDR Start Timer 0 – 250 0 If this value is set non-zero value, only the
outgoing CO call more than this value time
is served SDMR.

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

177 13 SMDR Hidden Digit Right/Left Right If this value is set to RIGHT, SDMR digit hiding
is executed the right-to-left direction.
At this case, if dialed ‘1234567890’, SDMR
printed hidden digits are formatted
‘12345*****’.
If this value is set to LEFT, SDMR digit hiding
is executed to left-to-right direction.
At this case, if dialed ‘1234567890’, SDMR
printed hidden digits are formatted
‘*****67890’.
14 SMDR Long Distance FLEX 1-5 0 The long distance call is defined that the call
Codes satisfy the condition of ADMIN program 177 –
FLEX 4, or ADMIN program 177 – FLEX 14.
Max. 5 SMDR long distance codes are
available. SMDR long distance code is 1 or 2
digit number. By default, SMDR long distance
code is 0.
15 MSN PRINT ON ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the MSN number is
SMDR printed instead of the station number when the
station made MSN outgoing call.
16 PRINT CALLER ON/OFF ON If this value is set to ON, the caller number is
NUMBER printed at incoming call SMDR.
178 1 System Time Setting 4 digits - Hour/Min in sequence( ex. In case 11:30, enter
1130 )
2 System Date Setting 6 digits - Month/Day/Year in sequence( ex. In case
27/January/2004, enter 270104)
179 1 Review Linked Station 1000- None The linked station pair is defined section 2.9.2.
Pairs 1599(LDK0300E Review of the programmed linked station pairs
100-399(LDK-300)
can be accessed at flexible button 1 sub-
100-227(LDK-100)
menu.
2 Linked station pair 2 STA # -
Registration and delete of the linked station
delete
pairs can be set at flexible button 2 sub-menu.

559
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3.16 SYSTEM TIMER PROGRAM

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
180 1 Attendant Recall Timer 00 – 60 01 If a recalled call arrives to a attendant, the
(2 digits) (min) attendant may not answer the call. Then the
system disconnect the call if the attendant don’t
answer the call for some time. This ADMIN
program set the amount of time before system
disconnects the call
2 Call Park Recall Timer 000 – 600 120 Setting the amount of time before a call placed
(3digits) (sec) in a call park location will recall the station
placing the park
3 Camp-on Recall Timer 000 – 200 030 When a station transfers to busy station by
(3 digits) (sec) Camp-On, if the transferred-to station don’t
answer the call, the call will recall to transferring
station after setting time passes. Therefore This
ADMIN program set the appropriate time.
4 Exclusive Hold Recall Timer 000 – 300 060 Select the amount of time before a call placed
(3 digits) (sec) on system hold will recall the station placing the
hold.
5 I-Hold Recall Timer 000 – 300 030 When recalled call don’t answer, the call will
(3 digits) (sec) recall to attendant after setting time passes.
Therefore This ADMIN program set the
appropriate time.
Select the amount of time before a call recalls
the attendant
6 Sys Hold Recall Timer 000 – 300 030 Determines the amount of time before a call
(3 digits) (sec) placed on system hold will recall the station
placing the hold.
7 Transfer Recall Timer 000 – 300 030 Select the amount of time a transferred call will
(3 digits) (sec) ring at the station receiving the transfer and how
long it will recall the station transferring the call.
8 ACNR Delay Timer 000 – 300 030 When ACNR Pause Timer expires and there is
(3 digits) (sec) no available CO Line in the group, ACNR trial is
delayed for this timer .
9 ACNR No Answer Timer 10 – 50 30 This timer is invoked after system detects CO
(2 digits) (sec) ring back tone from CO party. If the call isn’t
answered, system disconnect the call. And wait
next ACNR trial.
10 ACNR Pause Timer 005 – 300 005 When this timer is expired, ACNR is activated.
(3 digits) (sec)

560
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

11 ACNR Retry Counter 01 – 30 10 ACNR is executed up to this value. After trial of

(2 digits) this retry counter, ACNR is canceled.
12 ACNR No Tone Retry 1–9 3 This ADMIN program can set the trial number of
Counter (1 digit) seizing the CO line for ACNR. If the CO line isn’t
seized, ACNR will be canceled.

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

180 13 ACNR Tone Detect 001-300 030 This timer is invoked upon completion of dialing
Timer (3 digits) (sec) and system considers the CO party is busy
when the CPTU cannot detect the valid tone
type until this timer expires.
14 Automatic CO Release 020 – 300 030 Uncompleted CO line call will be automatically
Timer. (3 digits) (sec) released after this timer.
15 CCR Inter-Digit Timer 000 – 255 030 This timer is used for the CCR inter-digit timer
(3 digits) (100ms) in the DISA/DID CO line. In DID type 2, it is
used for DID inter-digit timer.
16 CO Call Drop Warning Timer 00 – 99 10 If prepaid money is going to expire during a CO
(2 digits) (sec) call, system will give warning tone, and after
this time, the call will be disconnected. This
timer is also used for call drop warning in
Unsupervised Conference.
17 CO Call Restriction Timer 00 – 99 0 If this value is set to 0, time of outgoing CO call
(2 digits) (min) is not restricted.
If this value is set to non-zero, outgoing CO call
is disconnected after this time.
18 CO Dial Delay Timer 00 – 99 01 Voice connection to the outside party will be
(2 digits) (100ms) made after this timer. This can be used to
prevent illegal dialing in case of slow response
from the Central Office Line or PBX.
19 CO Release Guard Timer 001 – 150 020 This ADMIN program sets the amount of time
(3 digits) (100ms) before a CO line can be re-seized, after the CO
call disconnects,
This timer controls the time necessary to
guarantee idle loop state when the line is
released.
20 CO Ring Off Timer 010 – 150 060 This timer is to secure time interval between
(3 digits) (100ms) incoming ringing signals so that the active
ringing can be lasted in the system until this
timer is expired.
21 CO Ring On Timer 1–9 2 This timer controls the time necessary to detect
(1 digit) (100ms) an incoming CO call as ringing into the system.
22 CO Warning Tone Timer 060 – 900 180 Determines the amount of time before receiving
(3 digits) (sec) warning tone in order to remind the call elapsed
time in case of outgoing CO line conversation
(Only for Korea).

561
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

181 1 Call FWD No Answer Timer 000 – 255 015 This timer is used at the no answer call forward
(3 digits) (sec) feature(Section 2.3.1.2, and 2.3.1.3). If station
is set the no answer call forward type, and if
station don’t answer during this timer, then the
call will be routed to the forward destination.
2 DID/DISA No Answer Timer 00 – 99 00 This timer is used at DID or DISA call routing. If
(2 digits) (sec) station doesn’t answer about DID/DISA call
during this timer, the call will be routed to
ADMIN program 167 – FLEX 3 value.
3 VMIB User Record Timer 010 – 255 020 This is the maximum time that station user can
(3 digits) (sec) record his VMIB announcement.
PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
181 4 VMIB Valid User Message 0-9 4 This is the minimum time that station user must
Timer (1 digit) (sec) record his VMIB announcement.
If this value is set to 0, VMIB announcement
can not be recorded.
5 Door Open Timer 05 – 99 20 Select the length of time that is needed to
(2 digits) (100ms) execute the door open relay for the setting
time.
6 ICM Box Timer 00 – 60 30 Select the ringing time of the ICM box
(2 digits) (sec) associated stations, when ICM box user press
[CALL] button.
7 ICM Dial Tone Timer 01 – 20 10 This timer is used when the off-hooked station
(2 digits) (sec) is heard the intercom dial tone. If station
doesn’t dial a digit within this timer, error tone is
provided.
8 Inter Digit Timer 01 – 20 05 This timer is used when station is dialing some
(2 digits) (sec) digits. The time between digits cannot exceed
Inter-digit timer, or error tone is provided.
9 MSG Wait Reminder Tone 00 – 60 00 Select the amount of time between repeated
Timer (2 digits) (min) reminder tones to station that it has a message
waiting.
10 Paging Timeout Timer 000 – 255 000 Select the maximum time of a page. The
(3 digits) (sec) system will automatically disconnect the page
at the end of this time unless the caller has
hung up earlier.
11 Pause Timer 1–9 3 This timer is used at the speed dialing feature,
(1 digit) (sec) LNR, and etc. In case of the speed dial or LNR,
IP LDK system sends the dial digits to the
outgoing CO line, after this time.
12 Preset Call Forward Timer 00 – 99 10 This timer is used at the preset call forward
(2 digits) (sec) feature(Section 2.3.1.9). After this timer expires,
incoming call will be forwarded to a
predetermined station.
13 SLT DTMF Release Timer 00 – 20 00 DTMF RCVR will be released after this timer
(2 digits) (sec) when SLT makes a outgoing CO call.
14 3 soft auto release timer 01 – 30 05 This timer is used only in 3soft BTN DKTU(LKD-
(2 digits) (sec) 30DH). In 3soft menu, if there is no any digit
within time, the DKTU turn to Idle state.
15 VM pause timer 01 – 90 30 In-band digit stream is sent to external VM after
(2 digits) (100ms) this timer.

562
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

16 TRANSIT CONNECT 1-30 4 Master sends the connect message to slave

TIMER system after this timer when the transit out CO
type is a pulse analog trunk.
17 VMIB MSG Rewind 1-99 5 (sec) VMIB message is rewound as this timer.
18 LCO Connect Timer 0 – 20 0 (sec) If this timer expires after starting outgoing dial,
the system regards that line as connected. So if
there’s any extra digits after this timer expires,
the Pause is automatically added before the
first added digit. (CIS only)
19 LCO CPT Detect Timer 0 – 20 5 (sec) To check LCO status after LCO is connected,
system assigns CPT periodically with this timer.
To activate this, CO – CO XFER CPT detect
(PGM160 – F16) should be set to ON.
PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
182 1 SLT Hook Switch Bounce 01 – 25 01 This timer is used at SLT only. Select the length
Timer (2 digits) (100ms) of time that is needed to regard as a valid on-
hook or off-hook (for SLT).
2 SLT Maximum Hook Flash 01-25 06 This timer is used at SLT only. Select how long
Timer (2 digits) (100ms) the user could press the hook switch in order
for it to be considered a FLASH (Timed-Break
Recall) (for SLT).
3 SLT Minimum Hook Flash 000 – 250 020 This timer is used at SLT only. The minimum
Timer (3 digits) (10ms) bound time that system considers as hook flash
for SLT.
4 SLT Ring Phase Timer 2–5 4 Select the ring phase(cadency) of SLT.
(1 digit) (sec) (5 SEC: 1SEC ON / 4SEC OFF)
5 Station Auto Release Timer 020 – 300 060 If a station hears ring back tone and no action
(3 digits) (sec) is taken, this timer is assigned. When this timer
is expired, the station is released.
6 Unsupervised Conference 00 – 99 10 Select the amount of the time that an
Timer (2 digits) (min) unsupervised conference can continue after the
initiator of the conference has exited the
conference.
7 Wake-Up Fail Ring Timer 00 – 99 20 After a Wake-up fail ring invokes on system
(2 digits) (sec) attendant, the alarm ring exists during this
timer. If this timer expires, the alarm ring will be
disappeared.
8 Warm Line Timer 01 – 20 05 User takes no action after lifting handset or
(2 digits) (sec) pressing the [MON] button and this timer is
expired, then idle line selection for warm line is
executed.
9 Wink Timer 010 – 200 010 The time duration of seize acknowledge signal
(3 digits) (10ms) to DID line.
10 Enblock Digit timer 01-20 15 This timer is used at the enblock dialing
(2 digits) (sec) sending feature. If station user make a call at
the enblock dialing mode, and if station user
doesn’t dial within this time, then the enblock
dialing is executed.
11 CCR Time Out Timer 000-300 015 When this timer is expired, CCR is activated.
(3 digits) (sec)
12 DID Inter Digit Timer 01-20 03 This timer is used at DID type 2 feature. In DID
(2 digits) (sec) type2, IP LDK system will be wait the new DID
digit receiving until this timer is expired. If this
timer is expired, the call routing of DID type 2 is
executed.

563
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

183 In Room Indication

1 In Room Ind Supervisor Station - Supervisor Activates In-Room Indication button
2 In Room Ind Member Station - Members can check if In-Room Ind button is
On or OFF.
184 Chime Bell Attribute
1 Chime Bell Pair Station Pair - If Master station Press Chime Bell button, slave
station receives the ring.
2 Chime Bell Relay 7(IP LDK- - If Chime Bell Relay is set, LBC is activated
300/300E) when slave gets Chime Bell Ring.
/6(IP LDK-
100)
3 Chime Bell Timer 1-20 Chime Bell Ring stops when this timer expires.
4 Chime Bell Frequency F1-F2 Chime Bell Frequency can be adjusted.
PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
185 CIDU Setting
1 CIDU USAGE ON / OFF ON If this value is set to ON, CIDU can be served
2 CID Name Display NAME(1)/ TEL NO(0) According to this ADMIN program value, LCD
TEL NO(0) displayed data can be selected.
3 Serial Port Select 1-4 - Set the port connected to CIDU hardware
device.
4 CID/ Co Port Mapping 000-063 - Set the CIDU port and the analog CO line port
mapping
5 Initialize CID Data
6 CID Type2 Usage ON/OFF OFF Set the CIDU port and the analog CO line port
mapping.
7 Fast CID Mode ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, system provides a
ring signal to SLT and CID will be displayed
after 1st ringing.

564
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3.17 DCOB ATTRIBUTE

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
186 DCOB System Attributes 1-12
1 DCOB CO Type This ADMIN program is moved to ADMIN
program 187 – FLEX button 4.
2 Metering Type 0-1 0 Select DCO call metering signal type.
3 R2 OUT Manage Timer 01-50 14 In R2-DCO signaling, maximum time for waiting
for forward signal from PX (1 sec)
4 R2 IN Manage Timer 01-50 14 In R2 signaling, maximum time for waiting for
forward signal from PX (1 sec)
5 R2 Disappear Timer 01-50 14 1 sec
6 R2 Pulse Timer 01-30 7 In R2 signaling, time duration to send pulse
typed R2 signal (20 msec)
7 R2 Ready Timer 000-500 7 20mesc
8 Dial Tone Delay Timer 01-30 20
9 Line Status 1-9 6 Free Line
10 Calling Category 1-9 1 User no priority
11 DNIS Service ON/OFF OFF Select the caller ID service enable.
12 CLI Digit Num 01-10 4 Reserved
13 R2 OUT DIGIT TIMER 01-50 5 If outgoing dial is not performed within this
timer, the R2 outgoing call is failed.
14 R2 ERROR PROMPT ON/OFF OFF If R2 outgoing call is made and the error signal
USAGE is received, then the caller hear the error
announce via VMIB.
15 R2 BUSY PROMPT USAGE ON/OFF OFF If R2 outgoing call is made and the busy signal
is received, then the caller hear the busy
announce via VMIB.
16 R2 ANNC PRIOMPT USAGE ON/OFF OFF If R2 outgoing call is made and the
announcement signal is received, then the
caller hear the error announce via VMIB.
187 DCOB CO Line Attributes CO Line
range
1 IN Digit Type 0-2 2 Select the incoming digit information signaling
type of DCO.
2 OUT Digit Type 0-2 2 Select the outgoing digit information signaling
type of DCO.

565
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

3 CLI Digit Num 01-15 10 Set the digit numbers received for CLI
4 DCOB CO Type 0-2 2 Select DCO CO line service type. According to
the country, DCO CO service type is different.
5 SND S-BLOCK CMD ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the DCO line send S-
Block command to PX.

5.3.18 STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
190 Station Group Number STA Group # -
1 Group Type 0-6 0 Hunt group type can be selected among
circular/terminal/UCD/ring/VM/pick-
up/networking VM.
2 Pick-up Attribute ON/OFF OFF This value is used to assign the pick-up attribute
at hunt group.
Except pick-up hunt group, all type of hunt
group can be assigned the pick-up attribute
optionally.
3 Member Assignment Not Assigned - This member assignment process can be
executed in two ways.
The first way is assigning individually by
pressing the Flexible Button which user want to
assign and then entering the station number.
The other way is assigning successively by
entering first station number and last station
number.

566
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3.19 STATION GROUP PROGRAM

PGM ITEM FLEX SUB ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
191 Circular 1 VMIB Announce 000-999 015 If the call doesn’t answered during this
Group 1 Timer (sec) timer, the system plays VMIB
/
announcement that is programmed at
Terminal
ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 3.
Group
2 VMIB Announce 000-999 000 The second VMIB announcement can
2 Timer (sec) be played if the call continues to wait
beyond the 2nd announcement timer.
The played VMIB announcement can
be programmed at ADMIN program
191 – FLEX 4.
3 VMIB Announce 00-70 00 This is used to play VMIB
1 Location (Not Assigned) announcement, when the VMIB
announce 1 timer is expired.
4 VMIB Announce 00-70 00 This is used to play VMIB
2 Location (Not Assigned) announcement, when the VMIB
announce 2 timers is expired.
This second VMIB announcement can
be played repeat, according to ADMIN
program 191 – FLEX 5 and 6 value.
5 VMIB Announce 000-999 000 This is used to repeat VMIB announce
2 Repeat timer (sec) 2 when the timer is expired. (000: Not
assigned).
6 VMIB Announce ON / OFF OFF This value is used to enable or disable
2 Repeat E/D VMIB Announce 2 Repeat.

567
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

7 Overflow STA #/HUNT#/ - The call to a station in the group will

Destination VMIB #/SYS SPD# continue to route until answered or
each station in the group has been
tried. The call will remain at the last
station in the group or will be passed
to this overflow station/group/
VMIB/System Speed bin, after
overflow timer expiring. The overflow
timer can be set at ADMIN program
191 – FLEX 8.
8 Overflow Timer 000-600 180 If this timer expires after a call is
(sec) received in the group, the call is routed
to the overflow destination.
The overflow destination can be set at
ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 7.
9 Wrap-up Timer 002-999 002 A station in a hunt group is maintained
(sec) in a busy state during this timer value,
after the end of received call and
outgoing call for the assigned wrap-up
time.

PGM ITEM FLEX SUB ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

191 Circular 10 No Answer Timer 00-99 15 In circular/terminal hunt, if the incoming
Group (sec) call is not answered during this time, the
/
call is routed to the next idle station in the
Terminal
group.
Group 11 Pilot Hunt ON / OFF ON If this value is set ON, the call to the each
hunt group member is processed as the
call to hunt group.
A circular/terminal hunt group can be
assigned with a pilot number (the station
group) so that only calls to the pilot
number will hunt.
12 Alt If No Member ON / OFF OFF If there is no member on duty, intercom
call will be dropped and CO incoming call
will be routed to overflow destination, or to
ring assigned station if overflow destination
is not assigned.
13 Music Source 00 - 13(IP LDK- 00 If music source is assigned, calling user will
300/300E) (Not be heard music instead of ring back tone.
00 - 12(IP LDK-100) Assigned)
14 Alternate Station/Hunt Grp - When a call is received in the group and
Destination there is no available station in the group,
then the call will be routed to this destination
if assigned

568
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

15 Max Queue Call 00-99 99 This value is the maximum call count that
Count can be queued.
If the total queued call count is this value,
the next queuing tried call will be
disconnected.
16 Hunt Member ON/OFF OFF OFF is receive Hunt Call,
forward ON is not receive Hunt Call.
UCD 1 VMIB Announce 000-999 015 If the call doesn’t answered during this
Group 1 Timer (3 digits) (sec) timer, the system plays VMIB
announcement that is programmed at
ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 3.
2 VMIB Announce 000-999 000 The second VMIB announcement can be
2 Timer (3 digits) (sec) played if the call continues to wait beyond
the 2nd announcement timer. The played
VMIB announcement can be programmed
at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 4.
3 VMIB Announce 00-70 00 This is used to play VMIB announcement,
Location 1 (Not when the VMIB announce 1 timer is
Assigned)
expired.
4 VMIB Announce 00-70 00 This is used to play VMIB announcement,
Location 2 (Not when the VMIB announce 2 timers is
Assigned)
expired.
This second VMIB announcement can be
played repeat, according to ADMIN
program 191 – FLEX 5 and 6 value.

PGM ITEM FLEX SUB ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

191 UCD 5 VMIB Announce 2 000-999 000 This is used to repeat VMIB announce 2
Group Repeat (sec) when the timer is expired. (000: Not
repeat).
6 VMIB Announce 2 ON / OFF OFF This value is used to enable or disable
Repeat E/D VMIB Announce 2 Repeat.
7 Overflow STA #/ - The call to a station in the group will
Destination HUNT#/ continue to route until answered or each
VMIB#/
station in the group has been tried. The
SYS SPD#
call will remain at the last station in the
group or will be passed to this overflow
station/group/ VMIB/System Speed bin,
after overflow timer expiring. The overflow
timer can be set at ADMIN program 191 –
FLEX 8.
8 Overflow Timer 000-600 180 If this timer expires after a call is received
(3 digits) (sec) in the group, the call is routed to the
overflow destination.
The overflow destination can be set at
ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 7.

569
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

9 Wrap Up Timer 002-999 002 A station in a hunt group is maintained in a

(3 digits) (sec) busy state during this timer value, after the
end of received call and outgoing call for
the assigned wrap-up time.
10 Alt If No Member ON / OFF OFF If there is no member on duty, intercom
call will be dropped and CO incoming call
will be routed to overflow destination, or to
ring assigned station if overflow destination
is not assigned.
11 Music Source 00 - 13(IP LDK- 00 If music source is assigned, calling user
300/300E) will be heard music instead of ring back
00 - 12(IP LDK-100)
tone.
12 ACD Warning ON / OFF ON Determine that ACD supervisor monitors
Tone agents with or without warning tone.
13 Alternate STA No / HUNT # - When a call is received in the group and
Destination there is no available station in the group,
then the call will be routed to this
destination if assigned.

PGM ITEM FLEX SUB ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

191 UCD 14 Supervisor Timer 000-999 030 If there is no idle member at hunt group,
Group (3 digits) (sec) the incoming call will be queued.
If the total queued call count is more than
the supervisor call count value, and ACD
queued call ADMIN program value is set
to ON, and the queued time is longer than
this timer, then the counts of queued calls
will be displayed onto supervisor's LCD.
The supervisor call count can be
programmed at ADMIN program 191 –
FLEX 15.
The ACD queued call can be
programmed at ADMIN program 191 –
FLEX 16.
15 Supervisor Call 00-99 00 If the number of queued calls is more
Count (2 digits) than this call count, the supervisor timer
will be started.
The supervisor timer can be programmed
at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 14.

570
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

16 ACD Queued Call ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the count of
queued call can be displayed on
supervisor station LCD.
17 MAX Queue Call 00-99 99 This value is the maximum call count that
Count can be queued.
If the total queued call count is this value,
the next queuing tried call will be
disconnected.
18 Supervisor STA # - This value is used to set the supervisor
station.
19 UCD hunt Stations' 0-9 0 This value is used to set UCD group
Priority (1 digit) member’s priority.
The value of 0 is the highest priority, and
the value of 9 is the lowest priority.
If the station has high priority, it takes
more priority to receive the incoming call.

20 Hunt Member ON/OFF OFF OFF is receive Hunt Call,

forward ON is not receive Hunt Call.
21 UCD DND Timer 00-60 00 If this timer set to 00 sec, this timer is
(sec) not operated.
If this timer is set to 10, after 10 sec
ringing UCD member is automatically
UCD DND state.

PGM ITEM FLEX SUB ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

191 Ring 1 VMIB Announce 1 000-999 015 If the call doesn’t answered during this
Group Timer (sec) timer, the system plays VMIB
announcement that is programmed at
ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 3.
2 VMIB Announce 2 000-999 000 The second VMIB announcement can be
Timer (sec) played if the call continues to wait beyond
the 2nd announcement timer. The played
VMIB announcement can be programmed
at ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 4.
3 VMIB Announce 1 00-07 00 This is used to play VMIB announcement,
Location (Not when the VMIB announce 1 timer is
Assigned) expired.
4 VMIB Announce 2 00-07 00 This is used to play VMIB announcement,
Location (Not when the VMIB announce 2 timers is
Assigned) expired.
This second VMIB announcement can be
played repeat, according to ADMIN
program 191 – FLEX 5 and 6 value.

571
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5 VMIB Announce 2 000-999 000 This is used to repeat VMIB announce 2

Repeat timer (sec) when the timer is expired. (000: Not
repeat).
6 VMIB Announce 2 ON / OFF OFF This value is used to enable or disable
Repeat E/D VMIB Announce 2 Repeat.
7 Overflow STA #/HUNT#/ - The call to a station in the group will
Destination VMIB #/SYS SPD# continue to route until answered or each
station in the group has been tried. The
call will remain at the last station in the
group or will be passed to this overflow
station/group/ VMIB/System Speed bin,
after overflow timer expiring. The overflow
timer can be set at ADMIN program 191 –
FLEX 8.
8 Overflow Timer 000-600 180 If this timer expires after a call is received
(sec) in the group, the call is routed to the
overflow destination.
The overflow destination can be set at
ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 7.
9 Wrap Up Timer 002-999 002 A station in a hunt group is maintained in
(sec) a busy state during this timer value, after
the end of received call and outgoing call
for the assigned wrap-up time.
10 Music Source 00 - 13(IP LDK- 00 If music source is assigned, calling user
300/300E) will be heard music instead of ring back
00 - 12(LDK-100) tone.
11 Max. Queued Call 00-99 99 This value is the maximum call count that
Count can be queued.
If the total queued call count is this value,
the next queuing tried call will be
disconnected.
12 Supervisor STA # - This value is used to set the supervisor
station.
13 Hunt Member ON/OFF OFF OFF is receive Hunt Call,
forward ON is not receive Hunt Call.

PGM ITEM FLEX SUB ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

191 VM 1 Wrap-up Timer 002-999 002 A station in a hunt group is maintained in
Group (3 digits) (sec) a busy state during this timer value, after
the end of received call and outgoing call
for the assigned wrap-up time.
2 Put Mail Index 1-4 1 This index is one of the voice mail dialing
tables
3 Get Mail Index 1-4 2 This index is one of the voice mail dialing
tables
4 Hunt Type Cir/Term Term This value is used to set the hunt type of
the VM member.
5 SMDI Port 01-14 (IP LDK- 02(COM2) This value is used to set SMDI print port.
300/300E) 01(COM1) SMDI is defined ‘Simplified Message
01-12 (IP LDK-100) Desk Interface’ that indicates the
distribute information of VM.

572
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

6 Overflow Timer 000-600 180 If this timer expires after a call is received
(3 digits) (sec) in the group, the call is routed to the
overflow destination.
The overflow destination can be set at
ADMIN program 191 – FLEX 7.
7 Overflow STA #/HUNT#/ - The call to a station in the group will
Destination VMIB #/SYS SPD# continue to route until answered or each
station in the group has been tried. The
call will remain at the last station in the
group or will be passed to this overflow
station/group/ VMIB/System Speed bin,
after overflow timer expiring. The overflow
timer can be set at ADMIN program 191 –
FLEX 6.
Pick- 1 Auto Pick-up ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, and if there is
up ringing hunt member, other hunt member
Group
can pickup the call automatically only by
pressing [MON] button or off-hook.
2 All Group Member ON / OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, and if a hunt
Ringing group member receives an intercom call,
then all hunt group member is ringing. To
set this value, ‘Auto Pickup’ ADMIN
program value must be set to ON..

5.3.20 ISDN ATTRIBUTES

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
200 1 Advice of Charge 0-6 0 The AOC is the call cost information service
that is provided by public ISDN.
According to the country, the standard of
AOC type is different.
This value is used to set AOC type

573
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

2 CO ATD Code Max. 2 Digits This value is used when ISDN DID call
incoming and outgoing case.
If the received DID digit is matched this value,
then the call is routed to attendant station.
-
If ADMIN program 114 – FLEX 5 is set to CO
ATD, and the station is make an outgoing CO
call, then this value is used as the outgoing
station’s CLI data.
3 Reserved - - -
4 Reserved - - -
5 Reserved - - -
6 CLI Print ON/OFF OFF This value is used to execute the CLI print
about the incoming CO call.
If this value is set to ON, the CLI of the
incoming CO call will be sent to
serial/MODEM/LAN port.
7 International Access Code Max 4 digits - This value is used to modify the received CLI
of the international incoming CO call.
If this value is set, and if station receives the
international incoming CO call, then this value
is inserted in front of the CLI.
8 Reserved - - Moved to PGM 146
9 My Area Code Max 6 digits - This value is used to set the my area code.
The combination of this value and ADMIN
program 200 – FLEX 10 is compared with the
received CLI, and the received CO call can
be judged the local call or the long distance
call.
This value is also used the outgoing CLI data,
when station makes an outgoing CO call.
10 My Area Prefix Code Max 4 digits - This value is used to set the my area prefix
code. (Normally zero value)
The combination of this value and ADMIN
program 200 – FLEX 9 is compared with the
received CLI, and the received CO call can
be judged the local call or the long distance
call.
This value is also used the outgoing CLI data,
when station makes an outgoing CO call.

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

200 11 Maintain DID Name ON/OFF OFF This value is used at the CLI display of
incoming DID CO call.
If the incoming DID call has CLI, it is
displayed on station LCD only ringing time.
If this value is set to ON, CLI display is
maintained when the call is answered.

574
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

12 This value is used the valid destination

PC APPLICATION
STN 100 station about PC application connection
DESTINATION STATION
request.
201 - COLP Table Max. 10 digits - COLP table is used when makes the outgoing
CLI
The method of making CLI is explained at
‘Section 2.14.2’.
At this ADMIN program, the maximum 50 CLI
data can be programmed.
And this value is used at ADMIN program 143
– FLEX 1 and 2.
202 - MSN Table Entry No.(000-249) - MSN(Ref Section 2.14.7 and 2.14.8) is
defined one of ISDN CO line service.
In LDK system, maximum 250 MSN table
entry can be programmed.
Each MSN table entry has MSN ‘CO line
number’, ‘Index of flexible DID table’,
‘Subaddress number’, and ‘Telephone
number’.
1 CO Line number 001-400(IP LDK- - This value is used to set CO line that is
300E) assigned MSN service.
001-200 (IP LDK-
300)
01-40 (IP LDK-100)
2 Index of Flexible DID 000-999 - If the received digit of Incoming CO call is
Table matched MSN telephone number(ADMIN
PGM 202 – FLEX 4), it is MSN call.
This value is used to search the destination of
MSN call routing.
This value indicates the entry index of flexible
DID table(ADMIN program 231).
3 SUB Number 0-9 - This value is only used when the destination
station type is ISDN telephone.
If the destination is ISDN telephone, this
value is sent as the ISDN sub-address
number of it.
4 TEL number 20 digits - This value is ISDN MSN number.
If the received digit of Incoming CO call is
matched with this value, it is MSN call.

5.3.21 LCR TABLE ASSIGNMENT

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
220 1 LCR Access Mode M00/M01/M02/M Disable This value is used to select LCR access mode.
11/M12/M13 (M00) Each access mode is explained at section 2.2.7.

575
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

2 Set the Day of week 1234567 Each day can use different LCR setting.
zone At this ADMIN program, each day can be grouped up to 3
zone.
1 MON 1–3 1
2 TUE 1–3 1
3 WED 1–3 1
4 THUR 1–3 1
5 FRI 1–3 1
6 SAT 1–3 1
7 SUN 1–3 1
3 Set the Time Zone
of Day zone 1
1 Time Zone1 00 – 24 0024 Each time of day zone1 can use different LCR setting.
At this ADMIN program, each time of day zone1 can be
grouped up to 3 zone.
2 Time Zone2 00 – 24 - Each time of day zone2 can use different LCR setting.
At this ADMIN program, each time of day zone2 can be
grouped up to 3 zone.
3 Time Zone3 00 – 24 - Each time of day zone3 can use different LCR setting.
At this ADMIN program, each time of day zone3 can be
grouped up to 3 zone.
4 Set the Time Zone
of Day zone 2
1 Time Zone1 00 – 24 0024 Each time of day zone1 can use different LCR setting.
At this ADMIN program, each time of day zone1 can be
grouped up to 3 zone.
2 Time Zone2 00 – 24 Each time of day zone2 can use different LCR setting.
At this ADMIN program, each time of day zone2 can be
grouped up to 3 zone.
3 Time Zone3 00 – 24 Each time of day zone3 can use different LCR setting.
At this ADMIN program, each time of day zone3 can be
grouped up to 3 zone.
5 Set the Time Zone
of Day zone 3
1 Time Zone1 00 – 24 0024 Each time of day zone1 can use different LCR setting.
At this ADMIN program, each time of day zone1 can be
grouped up to 3 zone.
2 Time Zone2 00 – 24 Each time of day zone2 can use different LCR setting.
At this ADMIN program, each time of day zone2 can be
grouped up to 3 zone.
3 Time Zone3 00 – 24 Each time of day zone3 can use different LCR setting.
At this ADMIN program, each time of day zone3 can be
grouped up to 3 zone.

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

221 Leading Digit Table 000-249
1 LCR Type 1–3 3 This value is used to select the LCR type.

576
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

2 LCR Code Max 12 digits - If digits that is dialed by user are equal to this value, the
(leading digit) digits is converted and CO line is seized according to
DMT(ADMIN program 222).
3 Day Zone 1 DMT 6digits - This value is used to set the table index DMT(ADMIN
program 222) of the day zone 1.
Because day zone 1 has 3 different time zone, three table
index of each time must be selected.
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at
‘Section 2.2.7’.
4 Day Zone 2 DMT 6digits - This value is used to set the table index DMT(ADMIN
program 222) of the day zone 2.
Because day zone 2 has 3 different time zone, three table
index of each time must be selected.
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at
‘Section 2.2.7’.
5 Day Zone 3 DMT 6digits - This value is used to set the table index DMT(ADMIN
program 222) of the day zone 2.
Because day zone 2 has 3 different time zone, three table
index of each time must be selected.
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at
‘Section 2.2.7’.
6 Check password ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, IP LDK system request the
account code of user, when dialed digit is matched LCR
code.
222 Digit Modification 00-99
Table
1 Added Digit Max 25 digits This value is used to add some digit stream at user dialed
digits.
This value is added at the position of ‘Add
Position’(ADMIN program 222 – FLEX 4).
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at
‘Section 2.2.2.7’.
2 Removal Position 01 – 12 1 This value is used to set the removal position at user
dialed digits.
Some digits are removed from the this position up to
‘Remove Number’ (ADMIN program 222 – FLEX 3).
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at
‘Section 2.2.7’.
3 Number Of Remove 01 – 12 00 This value is used to set the remove digit count at user
dialed digits.
Some digits are removed as much as this value from the
position of ‘Removal Position’ (ADMIN program 222 –
FLEX 2).
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at
‘Section 2.2.7’.

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

577
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

222 4 Add Position 1 – 13 1 This value is used to set the add position at user dialed
digits.
Some digits are added from the this position with ‘Add
Digit Stream’ (ADMIN program 222 – FLEX 1).
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at
‘Section 2.2.7’.
5 CO Line Group 1 – 72(IP LDK- 1 This value is used when LCR call seize the outgoing CO
300/300E)
line.
1 – 24 (IP LDK-
The idle CO line within CO Line Group of this value is
100)
seized for LCR call.
The example of this ADMIN programming is illustrated at
‘Section 2.2.7’.
6 Alternative DMT 00 – 99 - This value is used when LCR call can’t seize the idle CO
Index line within ADMIN program 222 – FLEX 5.
If LCR call can’t seize the idle CO line within LCR CO
Line Group, LCR call seize the idle CO within CO Line
Group of this value DMT index.
223 LCR Table This ADMIN program changes all LCR ADMIN table entry
Initialization value to new value.
1 DMT Of 6 digits This ADMIN program change the index of DMT value of
Day_zone_1 day zone 1 to new value.
2 DMT Of 6 digits This ADMIN program change the index of DMT value of
Day_zone_2 day zone 2 to new value.
3 DMT Of 6 digits This ADMIN program change the index of DMT value of
Day_zone_3 day zone 3 to new value.
4 CO Group 1 – 72(IP LDK- This ADMIN program change the all CO Line Group
Initialization 300/300E) values of DMT entry to new value.
1 – 24
(IP LDK-100)
5 Alt Index 0 - 99 This ADMIN program change the all ‘Alternative DMT
Initialization Index’ values of DMT entry to new value.
6 Init All LCR This ADMIN program initialize the all LCR ADMIN data to
default value.

578
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3.22 TOLL TABLE ASSIGNMENT

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
224 Toll Table
1 Allow Table A (01-30) Max 14 digits - This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the
dialed digit by COS 2 and COS 4 station is
matched with the allowed toll pass digits or not.
Allow table A is only used when the COS of dialed
station is COS 2 or 4.
2 Deny Table A (01-30) Max 14 digits - This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the
dialed digit by COS 2 and COS 4 station is
matched with the denied toll pass digits or not.
Deny table A is only used when the COS of dialed
station is COS 2 or 4.
3 Allow Table B (01-30) Max 14 digits - This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the
dialed digit by COS 3 and COS 4 station is
matched with the allowed toll pass digits or not.
Allow table B is only used when the COS of dialed
station is COS 3 or 4.
4 Deny Table B (01-30) Max 14 digits - This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the
dialed digit by COS 3 and COS 4 station is
matched with the denied toll pass digits or not.
Deny table B is only used when the COS of dialed
station is COS 3 or 4.
5 Allow Table C (01-50) Max 14 digits - This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the
dialed digit by COS 8 station is matched with the
allowed toll pass digits or not.
6 Deny Table C (01-50) Max 14 digits - This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the
dialed digit by COS 8 station is matched with the
allowed toll pass digits or not.
7 Allow Table D (01-50) Max 14 digits - This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the
dialed digit by COS 9 station is matched with the
allowed toll pass digits or not.
8 Deny Table D (01-50) Max 14 digits - This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the
dialed digit by COS 9 station is matched with the
allowed toll pass digits or not.
225 Canned Toll Table
1 Allow Table (01-20) Max 14 digits - This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the
dialed digit by COS 5 and COS 6 station is
matched with the allowed toll pass digits or not.
Allow table of canned toll is only used when the
COS of dialed station is COS 5 or 6.
2 Deny Table (01-20) Max 14 digits - This ADMIN value is used to check, whether the
dialed digit by COS 5 and COS 6 station is
matched with the denied toll pass digits or not.
Deny table of canned toll is only used when the
COS of dialed station is COS 5 or 6
226 Emergency service Max 14 digits Maximum 10 emergency codes can be
call (01-10) programmable.

579
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3.23 OTHER TABLES

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
227 Author Code Table 0001 - 2000 Authorization code table entries is consist of each
(IP LDK-300E) station password and extra account codes. The
0001 - 1000 table entry from 001 to the maximum capacity of
(IP LDK-300) station numbers are saved the password of each
001 - 500 station. And the remains are the extra entries.
(IPLDK-100) CO Line Groups can be marked to deny access
until a matched Authorization code is entered. In
this case, DND warning tone is provided when the
CO Line Group access code is dialed. If the dialed
Authorization code is verified, you will hear CO dial
tone. Otherwise, you will hear error tone and cannot
access the group. Stations or ADMIN programming
can enter the authorization codes. Authorization
code is flexible from 3 digits to 11 digits.
Administrator can see and change station's
password. There can be no duplicate entries. By
default, Authorization Codes are not assigned at all.
Table entry Max 5 digits
(001-600)
228 CCR Table 1-70
1 Station STA # - If CCR destination type is the STATION, the call is
ringing at station of this value.
2 Hunt Group HUNT # - If CCR destination type is the HUNT GROUP, the
call is ringing at member station of this value hunt
group.
3 VMIB Announce # - If CCR destination type is the VMIB, VMIB
announcement of this value is played to the caller.
4 VMIB Drop Announce # If CCR destination type is the VMIB DROP, VMIB
announcement of this value is played to the caller
and the call is disconnected when VMIB
announcement ended.
5 System Speed 2000-6999 - If CCR destination type is the SYSTEM SPEED, the
(IP LDK-300E) call is routed to the system speed telephone
2000-4999
number.
(IP LDK-300)
2000-3499
(IP LDK-100)
6 Internal Page 1 - 30 (IP LDK- - If CCR destination type is the INTERNAL PAGE,
300/300E) the call can page to the internal page zone of this
1 - 10 (IP LDK-100) value.
7 External Page 1–3 - If CCR destination type is the EXTERNAL PAGE,
the call can page to the external page zone of this
value.
8 All Call Page 1–3 - If CCR destination type is the ALL CALL PAGE, the
call can page to the all page zone.
9 Net Number Net Number If CCR destination type is NET NUMBER, the call
can be routed to another net station.
10 Conference Room 1–9 - If CCR destination type is the CONFERENCE
ROOM, the call can join the conference room.

580
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

229 Exec/Sec Table 01-36 This ADMIN program is used at EXECUTIVE/
(IP LDK-300/300E) SECRETARY feature.
01-12 (IP LDK-100)
When the executive designated station is in DND
Table entry(01-36) STA #/STA #
state, intercom and transfer calls will be
automatically routed to the designated secretary
station. By default, EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY
pairs are not assigned at all. In IP LDK-300/300E
(100), system supports 36(12) EXECUTIVE/
SECRETARY pairs.
231 - Flexible DID Table Entry No.(000-999) -
1 DID Name Max 11 chars. - This value is used to save the name of incoming
DID call.
This value is displayed on station LCD, when
station receive the DID call.
2 Day Destination STA # / Hunt # / STA # This value is used to set the destination, when
VMIB # / Or route DID call during day ring mode. The nine
VMIB # drop Null
different destination type can be selected.
SPD

Internal Page
External Page
All Page
Net Number
Conf Room
3 Night Destination STA # / Hunt # / ATD STA # This value is used to set the destination, when
VMIB # / route DID call during night ring mode. The nine
VMIB # drop
different destination type can be selected.
SPD

Internal Page
External Page
All Page
Net Number
Conf Room
4 Weekend STA # / Hunt # / ATD STA # This value is used to set the destination, when
Destination VMIB # / route DID call during weekend ring mode. The
VMIB # drop
nine different destination type can be selected.
SPD

Internal Page
External Page
All Page
Net Number
Conf Room
5 Reroute STA # / Hunt # / ATD STA # This value is used to set the second destination,
Destination VMIB # / when routed DID call destination is busy.
VMIB # drop
SPD

581
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

System Speed
232 01-10
Zone
1 Speed Bin Range 2200 – 6999 The system speed zone can be grouped the
in Zone (IP LDK-300E) maximum 10 system speed zone.
2200 – 4999
About each system speed zone, the accessibility
(IP LDK-300)
can be set at ADMIN program 232 – FLEX 2.
2200 – 3499
The toll check of each system speed zone can
(IP LDK-100)
be set at ADMIN program 232 – FLEX 4.
And the account code to access each system
speed zone can be set at ADMIN program 232 –
FLEX 5.
But, the system speed bin section between 2000
and 2199 is defined the toll free zone.
The system speed dial within this zone isn’t
checked by the toll table.
2 Station Range STA No. 1000 – 1599 The accessibility of the system speed zones can
(IP LDK-300E) be assigned to each station.
100 – 399(IP LDK-300)
100 – 227(IP LDK-100)
3 Toll Checking ON/OFF ON If this value is set to ON, the speed dial of this
zone is checked by the toll table.
4 Authorization If this value is set, the station user must enter
check this value to use the speed dial of each system
speed zone.
233 Weekly Time 1–7 - This ADMIN program is used at the ring
Table assignment feature(Ref Section 2.1.1).
1 Day Start Time 0000 – 2359 0900 The WEEKLY TIME TABLE can manage the ring
2 Night Start Time 0000 – 2359 1800 mode changes automatically.
3 Weekend Start 0000 – 2359 The use of WEEKLY TIME TABLE is executed
Time
by the system attendant and each intercom
tenancy group attendant.
Maximum 16 WEEKLY TIME TABLE is exist.
The first table is for the system attendant, and
the others are for the intercom tenancy group
attendant.
The table is consist of 7 days,
Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/
Saturday/Sunday.
On each day, the time zone of
DAY/NIGHT/WEEKEND mode can be
programmed.
For example, the office work starts at 9:00(AM)
and finishes at 5:00(PM) during week day. And
the weekend starts at 5:00(PM) from Friday to
Sunday. In this case, the WEEKLY TIME TABLE
can be set as the following ADMIN program value.

582
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

234 Voice Mail Dial-Table 1-9 This ADMIN program is used at the VM hunt
1 Prefix Index 12 Digits - group feature. This VOICE MAIL DIALING TABLE
2 Suffix Index 12 Digits - value defines the interface of dialing command
between IP LDK and the external VM device.
235 TIE Line Routing 001 – 400 -
Table (IP LDK-300E)
001 – 200
(IP LDK-300)
01 – 40
(IP LDK-100)
236 Mobile Extension
Table
1 Mobile Extension ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON, the station can use the
Enable mobile extension feature.
2 Mobile Extension CO 1 – 72 Assign CO group when a call routes to a mobile
Group. 1 – 24 extension.
3 Mobile Extension Tel Max 24 Assign the telephone number of mobile extension.
No
4 Mobile EXT CLI No - - This value is used as the CLI of Mobile Extension

583
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3.24 NETWORKING ATTRIBUTE

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
320 Networking Basic Attributes F1-F7
1 Networking Enable ON / OFF OFF This ADMIN program value is used to enable the
networking feature.
To set this ADMIN value to ON, the networking
software lock-key must be installed at IP LDK
system.
If station user enter the software lock-key check
dialing command ‘[TRANS/PGM] + 78’, then the
installed software lock-key is displayed on station
LCD.
2 Networking Retry Count 00 – 99 00 This ADMIN value is used to retry the connection
when IP LDK system detect the error during
networking connection signaling. This value is
only used when the networking feature is
executed through the public switching network.
This value is not used at the networking feature
between direct connected IP LDK systems.
3 Networking CNIP Enable ON / OFF ON The name of calling station is sent to the called
system between IP LDK systems. CNIP is
displayed on called party station LCD according
to ADMIN programming. If the CNIP and CLI are
received together, CNIP is prior to CLI.
4 Networking CONP Enable ON / OFF OFF The name of answered station is sent to the
calling system between IP LDK systems. CONP
is displayed on calling party station LCD
according to ADMIN programming.
5 Networking Signal Method FAC / UUS FAC Select the information element type for
networking supplementary service message.
FACILITY/USER-TO-USER information element
can be used for networking supplementary
service message.
6 Networking CAS Enable ON / OFF OFF Not Used
7 Networking VPN Enable ON / OFF OFF Reserved
8 NET CC Retain Mode ON / OFF OFF This value is used to set the networking
supplementary signaling type of the call
completion.
If this value is set to ON, the signaling of call
completion retain mode is executed.

584
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

321 Supplementary Attributes F1-F7
1 Networking Transfer Mode REROUT REROUT At international standard of the networking
/ JOIN transfer signaling, two kinds of signaling type are
exist. The name of each signaling type is
REROUTE and REJOIN.
This value is used to select the signaling
type of networking transfer.
2 TCP port 4 digits 9000 The BLF is explained at Section 2.16.19.
This ADMIN program is used to set the TCP
port for BLF message.
3 UDP port 4 digits 9001 The BLF is explained at Section 2.16.19.
This ADMIN program is used to set the UDP
port for BLF message
4 BLF Manager IP Address 12 digits 0.0.0.0 The BLF is explained at Section 2.16.19.
This ADMIN program is used to set the IP
Address of BLF manager for BLF service.
5 Duration of BLF status 01 ~ 20 sec 02 The BLF is explained at Section 2.16.19.
This ADMIN program is used to set the
duration of BLF status message
6 Multicast IP Address 12 digits 0.0.0.0 Reserved
7 Net Trans Fault Recall Timer 1 ~ 300 10 If the transferring station does not receive
ACK message for the transfer setup
message within this timer, and then the
transfer will be canceled.
322 Networking CO Line CO Line range
Attributes
1 Networking CO Line Group 00 – 24 00 This ADMIN program is used to select CO
Line Group for networking call.
2 Reserved
3 Use Gatekeeper ON / OFF OFF Determines to use under GK or not
4 Net Co Line Type QSIG / PSTN PSTN This ADMIN program is used to select the type of
system that is connected through the networking
CO line.
The system type can be separated two type. The
first one is NET type, that is the networking
software installed private system. The second
one is PSTN type, that is the public switching
network system.

585
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

324 Networking Routing 00-71
Table
1 System Usage NET / PSTN NET This ADMIN program is used to set the
networking connection type of the selected table
entries.
If PSTN is directly connected, this value must be
set to PSTN.
If the networking software installed system is
directly connected, this value must be set to
NET.
The example of NETWORKING ADMIN
program is illustrated at ‘Section 2.16.1’.
2 Net Numbering 16 digits - This ADMIN program is used to set the
Code networking number code of the selected table
entries.
‘*’ means any digits can be inserted between 0 ~
9.
The digits followed by ‘#’ is a internal station
number.
The example of NETWORKING ADMIN
program is illustrated at ‘Section 2.16.1’.
3 Net Number CO 00-24 - This ADMIN program is used to select CO line
Line Group group for networking call.
If networking call number corresponding NET
NUMBERING CODE is entered, the networking
call route to the destination through this CO Line
Group.
The example of NETWORKING ADMIN program
is illustrated at ‘Section 2.16.1’.
4 CPN or IP 16 digits at QSIG, …. CPN information for ISDN, IP address for VoIP
Information 4 IP Address at VoIP / 0.0.0.0 (CPN info 1 ~ CPN info 4)
The example of NETWORKING ADMIN program
is illustrated at ‘Section 2.16.1’.
5 Alternate Dial Bin 2000-6999(LDK-300E) - Alternative Dial Number (System SPD Bin) when
2000-4999(LDK-300) the networking path has a fatal problem.
2000-3499(LDK-100)
The example of NETWORKING ADMIN program
is illustrated at ‘Section 2.16.1’.
6 Destination IP address - IP Address of destination system to support
MPB IP DECT mobility service.
DECT mobility service is explained at section
2.16.17.

586
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

7 Digit Repeat YES / NO NO If this PSTN number is not connected with PSTN
line directly but connected by another networking
system, make ‘Digit Repeat’ to YES.
The example of NETWORKING ADMIN program
is illustrated at ‘Section 2.16.1’.
8 CO ATD Code CLI YES / NO NO During transit-out, this admin value determines
which CLI should send to PX.

5.3.25 VOIB NET ATTRUBUTE

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
340 VOIB IP SETTING
1 IP Addressing(SKIP:#) 12 digits 0.0.0.0 This ADMIN program is used at
setting the IP address of VOIP board.
2 GATEWAY Addressing (SKIP:#) 12digits 0.0.0.0 This ADMIN program is used at
setting the gateway address of VOIP
board.
3 SUBNET Mask(SKIP:#) 12digits 255.255.255.0 This ADMIN program is used at
setting the subnet mask of VOIP
board.
4 DNS Addressing (SKIP:#) 12digits 0.0.0.0 This ADMIN program is used at
setting the DNS address of VOIP
board.
5 TRACE Password 10digits .... This ADMIN program is used at
setting the password which need to
contact to VOIP board for trace.
6 Default CODEC 0–3 0 This ADMIN program is used at
setting the default codec of VOIP
board.
7 Default GAIN 1 - 62 31 This ADMIN program is used at
setting the default gain of VOIP board.
8 NO Delay (TOS) ON / OFF OFF This ADMIN program is used at
selecting whether the response of
VOIP board will be delayed or not.
9 Throughput (TOS) HIGH / NORMAL This ADMIN program is used at
NORMAL selecting whether the throughput of
VOIP board is high or normal.
10 Reliability (TOS) HIGH / NORMAL This ADMIN program is used at
NORMAL selecting whether the reliability of
VOIP board is high or normal.
11 Firewall IP Address IP Address 0.0.0.0 This ADMIN program is used at
setting the NAT Firewall IP address of
VOIP board
12 VOIB MODE 0-1 0 Selecting the trunk signaling protocol
of VOIP board
0 : H.323
1 : SIP
13 Silence Detection 0-1 0 This ADMIN program is used at
selecting whether the Silence
Detection of VOIP board is On or Off.

587
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

14 Echo Canceller 0-1 1 This ADMIN program is used at

selecting whether the Echo Canceller
of VOIP board is On or Off.
15 DTMF Mode 2-4 2 Setting the DTMF mode of VOIP
board.
2 : Inband DTMF
3 : RFC 2833
4 : Outband DTMF
16 Jitter Buffer 50-300 (ms) 150 This ADMIN program is used at
setting the Jitter buffer of VOIP board.

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

340 17 Voice Monitor ON/OFF OFF This ADMIN program is used at
setting the Voice Monitor of VOIP
board. [reserved]
341 Gatekeeper SETTING
1 GK Usage ON/OFF OFF Determines to use GK or not.
2 GK Call Mode Direct Reroute Select method to send the Q.931
/Reroute message of VOIP board to GK.
3 GK Open H245 ON/OFF OFF Determines to open H245 port or not.
4 GK H245 Tunneling ON/OFF OFF Reserved
5 GK Pre-granted ARQ ON/OFF OFF Reserved
6 GK Out-Of-Band Flash ON/OFF OFF Reserved
7 GK Time To Live 0 - 250(sec) 30 Set interval of RRQ message.
8 GK Address(SKIP:#) 12digits 0.0.0.0 Set GK IP address to register
9 GK Find Address (SKIP:#) 12digits 224.0.1.41 Reserved
10 GK Find Port 0 - 9999 1718 Reserved
11 GK RAS Signal Port 0 - 9999 1719 Set GK RAS signal port
12 GK Signal Port 0 - 9999 1720 Set GK call signal port.
13 VOIB GK ID 23 Set unique GK ID.
Characters
14 VOIBH323 ID 23 Set unique VOIB’s ID.
Characters
15 VOIB E164 Address 23 Digits Set station number under GK
16 VOIB Terminal Alias 20 Digits Reserved

588
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3.26 SIP Setting (PC Admin Only)

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
350 SIP SETTING
SIP Proxy Server Address 0.0.0.0 Set SIP Proxy address
SIP Proxy Server Port 5060 Set SIP Proxy signaling port
Proxy Registration Timer 1800 Set Proxy Registration Timer value
Use Outbound Proxy 0-1 1 Determine outbound proxy usage
Primary DNS Address Set primary DNS address
Secondary DNS Address Set secondary DNS address which is
used when primary DNS is down
Called Party Domain Set called party domain name. VOIB
makes ”TO” header of “INVITE”
message using dialed number and
this field.
(ex: dialed_no@calledparty.domain )
Connection Mode 0-1 0 Set SIP transport protocol
0 : UDP
1 : TCP
100rel support 0-1 0 Usage of SIP “100rel” extension
(reliable transfer of SIP protocol)
Use rport method 0-1 0 Usage of SIP “rport” extension
(to support NAT)
Use single codec only 0-1 0 If this value is true, VOIB suggests
default codec only through a SDP
codec negotiation.
Or this value is false, VOIB suggests
all available codec through a SDP
codec negotiation.
351 SIP UID Table
User ID 64 ASCII Set SIP user ID which is used “From”
character Header
(ex: caller@caller.domain)
Authentication User Name 64 ASCII Set authentication user name if
character authentication is used.
Authentication Password 64 ASCII Set authentication user password if
character authentication is used.

589
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

Contact Number Maximum 8 VOIB use “Contact” header using this

digit field and VOIB IP address. Usually set
station number or DID number to route
this SIP UID.
User ID Register 0-1 0 Determine registration of this SIP UID
Associate Station Station To support a SIP supplement service
Number - Click to dial
- Click to answer
- Voice Mail notify
(only for the BroadWorks soft switch)
User ID Usage 0-1 0 Determine this SIP UID bin is valid or
not

5.3.26 RSG/IP Phone Setting

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
380 VOIB SLOT FOR RSG/IP
1 SLOT assign - -
2 CHANEL assign 00 – 24 00
381 RSG/IP No Assign
1 RSG NUMBER 00~96 08
2 IP PHONE NUMBER 00~96 00
382 RSG/IP Attribute
1 Transfer Mode IP / MAC IP
2 Casting Mode Unicast / Multicast Unicast
3 Tone Source LDK / Remote Remote
(RSG/IP Phone)
4 Peer to Peer ON/OFF ON If this value is set ON,
RSG/IP phone converses
each other without
accessing VOIB channel
when STUN is not
enabled.
5 Codec Type G.711_ALAW(0)/ G.711_ALAW
G.711_ULAW(1)/ (0)
G.723.1(2)
G.729.(3)
6 First Access RSG CO ON/OFF ON
7 Ring without CO Ring Assign ON/OFF ON
383 RSG Attribute 1
1 SET MAC ADDRESS 00-00-00-00-
00-00
2 IP Address DISPLAY 0.0.0.0
3 PORT VIEW
4 PORT NUM IP Port number when
system communicates
with RSG.

590
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5 NAT IP ADDR 0.0.0.0

DISPLAY
6 NAT PORT NUM 0 NAT Port number when
system communicates
with RSG.
7 STUN ENABLED NONE
384 RSG Attribute 2
1 Internal MOH RTP Port 8186
2 External MOH RTP Port 8188
3 MOH Type MUSIC/Hold Tone Hold Tone
4 Music Source EXT1/INT INT
5 External Contact 1 LBC/Door Open N/A
6 External Contact 2 LBC/Door Open N/A

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

384 7 Alarm Enable ON/OFF OFF
8 Alarm Contact Close/Open Close
9 Alarm Mode Alarm/Door Bell Alarm
10 Alarm Signal RPT/ONCE RPT
11 CTI Port 0-2 NOT_USED CTI port to be assigned
in RSG
( 0 – Not Used,
1 – DKTU in RSG,
2 – SLT in RSG)
12 RSG NATION CODE System
Nation
13 IPSEC ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON,
the IP security is
supported.
385 RSG Alarm Attribute
1 RSG 01~24 None
2 RSG 25~48 None
3 RSG 49~72 None
4 RSG 73~96 None
386 IP Phone Attribute
1 SET MAC ADDR 00-00-00-00-
00-00
2 IP Address DISPALY 0.0.0.0
3 PORT VIEW N/A
4 PORT NUM N/A
5 NAT IP ADDR
0.0.0.0
DISPLAY
6 NAT PORT NUM 0
7 STUN ENABLED NONE The network environment
of IP Phone can be
checked.

591
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

8 CTI IP ADDR(SKIP : #) 0.0.0.0 To support the CTI at the

IP phone, IP address for
CTI can be assigned.
9 IPSEC ON/OFF OFF If this value is set to ON,
the IP security is
supported
390 RSG_DKT RX Gain
1 RSG_DKT RX from DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_DKT RX from SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_DKT RX from CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_DKT RX from WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_DKT RX from ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_DKT RX from CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_DKT RX from DCO 00 – 63
8 RSG_DKT RX from VMIB 00 – 63

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

390 9 RSG_DKT RX from DTMF 00 – 63
10 RSG_DKT RX from TONE 00 – 63
11 RSG_DKT RX from MUSIC 1 00 – 63
12 RSG_DKT RX from MUSIC 2 00 – 63
13 RSG_DKT RX from RSG_DKT 00 – 63
14 RSG_DKT RX from RSG_SLT 00 – 63
15 RSG_DKT RX from RSG_LCO 00 – 63
16 RSG_DKT RX from IP Phone 00 – 63
391 RSG_DKT TX Gain
1 RSG_DKT RX to DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_DKT RX to SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_DKT RX to CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_DKT RX to WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_DKT RX to ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_DKT RX to CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_DKT RX to DCO 00 – 63
8 RSG_DKT RX to DVU 00 – 63
392 RSG_SLT RX Gain
1 RSG_SLT RX from DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_SLT RX from SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_SLT RX from CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_SLT RX from WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_SLT RX from ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_SLT RX from CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_SLT RX from DCO 00 – 63
8 RSG_SLT RX from VMIB 00 – 63
9 RSG_SLT RX from DTMF 00 – 63
10 RSG_SLT RX from TONE 00 – 63
11 RSG_SLT RX from MUSIC 1 00 – 63

592
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

12 RSG_SLT RX from MUSIC 2 00 – 63

13 RSG_SLT RX from RSG_DKT 00 – 63
14 RSG_SLT RX from RSG_SLT 00 – 63
15 RSG_SLT RX from RSG_LCO 00 – 63
16 RSG_SLT RX from IP Phone 00 – 63
393 RSG_SLT TX Gain
1 RSG_SLT TX to DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_SLT TX to SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_SLT TX to CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_SLT TX to WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_SLT TX to ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_SLT TX to CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_SLT TX to DCO 00 – 63
8 RSG_SLT TX to VMIB 00 – 63

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

394 RSG_LCO RX Gain
1 RSG_LCO RX from DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_LCO RX from SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_LCO RX from CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_LCO RX from WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_LCO RX from ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_LCO RX from CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_LCO RX from DCO 00 – 63
8 RSG_LCO RX from VMIB 00 – 63
9 RSG_LCO RX from DTMF 00 – 63
10 RSG_LCO RX from TONE 00 – 63
11 RSG_LCO RX from MUSIC 1 00 – 63
12 RSG_LCO RX from MUSIC 2 00 – 63
13 RSG_LCO RX from RSG_DKT 00 – 63
14 RSG_LCO RX from RSG_SLT 00 – 63
15 RSG_LCO RX from RSG_LCO 00 – 63
16 RSG_LCO RX from IP Phone 00 – 63
395 RSG_LCO TX Gain
1 RSG_LCO TX to DKTU 00 – 63
2 RSG_LCO TX to SLT 00 – 63
3 RSG_LCO TX to CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 RSG_LCO TX to WKT 00 – 63
5 RSG_LCO TX to ACO 00 – 63
6 RSG_LCO TX to CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 RSG_LCO TX to DCO 00 – 63
8 RSG_LCO TX to VMIB 00 – 63
396 IP PHONE RX Gain
1 IP PHONE RX from DKTU 00 – 63
2 IP PHONE RX from SLT 00 – 63

593
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

3 IP PHONE RX from CTR_SLT 00 – 63

4 IP PHONE RX from WKT 00 – 63
5 IP PHONE RX from ACO 00 – 63
6 IP PHONE RX from CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 IP PHONE RX from DCO 00 – 63
8 IP PHONE RX from VMIB 00 – 63
9 IP PHONE RX from DTMF 00 – 63
10 IP PHONE RX from TONE 00 – 63
11 IP PHONE RX from MUSIC 1 00 – 63
12 IP PHONE RX from MUSIC 2 00 – 63
13 IP PHONE RX from RSG_DKT 00 – 63
14 IP PHONE RX from RSG_SLT 00 – 63
15 IP PHONE RX from RSG_LCO 00 – 63
16 IP PHONE RX from IP Phone 00 – 63

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

397 IP PHONE TX Gain
1 IP PHONE TX to DKTU 00 – 63
2 IP PHONE TX to SLT 00 – 63
3 IP PHONE TX to CTR_SLT 00 – 63
4 IP PHONE TX to WKT 00 – 63
5 IP PHONE TX to ACO 00 – 63
6 IP PHONE TX to CTR_ACO 00 – 63
7 IP PHONE TX to DCO 00 – 63
8 IP PHONE TX to VMIB 00 – 63

594
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

5.3.27 NATION SPECIFIC

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
400 DTIB RX Gain Korean version
1 DTIB/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 DTIB/SLT 00 – 63 33
3 DTIB/CTR SL 00 – 63 22
4 DTIB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 DTIB/ACO 00 – 63 33
6 DTIB/CTR CO 00 – 63 22
7 DTIB/DCO 00 – 63 33
8 DTIB/VMIB 00 – 63 29
9 DTIB/DTMF 00 – 63 8
10 DTIB/TONE 00 – 63 32
11 DTIB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 29
12 DTIB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 29
13 DTIB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 29
401 SLIB RX Gain
1 SLIB/DKT 00 – 63 12
2 SLIB/SLT 00 – 63 23 IP LDK-100 : Default 27
3 SLIB/CTR SL 00 – 63 12 IP LDK-100 : Default 16
4 SLIB/WTU 00 – 63 12
5 SLIB/ACO 00 – 63 21
401 6 SLIB/CTR CO 00 – 63 20
7 SLIB/DCO 00 – 63 24
8 SLIB/VMIB 00 – 63 20
9 SLIB/DTMF 00 – 63 8
10 SLIB/TONE 00 – 63 18
11 SLIB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 20
12 SLIB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 20
13 SLIB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 20
402 CTR SLIB RX Gain

595
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

1 CTRSL2/DKT 00 – 63 32
2 CTRSL2/SLT 00 – 63 43 IP LDK-100 : Default 47
3 CTRSL2/ CTR SL 00 – 63 32 IP LDK-100 : Default 36
4 CTRSL2/WTU 00 – 63 32
5 CTRSL2/ACO 00 – 63 41
6 CTRSL2/ATR CO 00 – 63 32
7 CTRSL2/DCO 00 – 63 44
8 CTRSL2/VMIB 00 – 63 40
9 CTRSL2/DTMF 00 – 63 28
10 CTRSL2/TONE 00 – 63 38
11 CTRSL2/MUSIC1 00 – 63 40
12 CTRSL2/MUSIC2 00 – 63 40
13 CTRSL2/MUSIC3 00 – 63 40

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

403 WTIB RX Gain
1 WTIB/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 WTIB/SLT 00 – 63 33
3 WTIB/CTR SL 00 – 63 22
4 WTIB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 WTIB/ACO 00 – 63 38
6 WTIB/CTR CO 00 – 63 29
7 WTIB/DCO 00 – 63 33
8 WTIB/VMIB 00 – 63 29
9 WTIB/DTMF 00 – 63 8
10 WTIB/TONE 00 – 63 37
11 WTIB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 29
12 WTIB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 29
13 WTIB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 29
404 ACOB RX Gain
1 ACOB/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 ACOB/SLT 00 – 63 37
3 ACOB/CTR SL 00 – 63 27
4 ACOB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 ACOB/ACO 00 – 63 36
6 ACOB/STR CO 00 – 63 27
7 ACOB/DCO 00 – 63 33
8 ACOB/VMIB 00 – 63 32
9 ACOB/DTMF 00 – 63 32
10 ACOB/TONE 00 – 63 32
11 ACOB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 32
12 ACOB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 32
13 ACOB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 32
14 ACOB/MODEM 00 – 63 37
405 CTR ACOB RX Gain
1 CTRCO8/DKT 00 – 63 28
2 CTRCO8/SLT 00 – 63 43

596
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

3 CTRCO8/CTR SL 00 – 63 32
4 CTRCO8/WTU 00 – 63 31
5 CTRCO8/ACO 00 – 63 41
6 CTRCO8/CTR CO 00 – 63 32
7 CTRCO8/DCO 00 – 63 38
8 CTRCO8/VMIB 00 – 63 37
9 CTRCO8/DTMF 00 – 63 37
10 CTRCO8/TONE 00 – 63 37
405 11 CTRCO8/MUSIC1 00 – 63 37
12 CTRCO8/MUSIC2 00 – 63 37
13 CTRCO8/MUSIC3 00 – 63 37
14 CTRCO8/MODEM 00 – 63 44
406 DCOB RX Gain
1 DCOB/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 DCOB/SLT 00 – 63 37
3 DCOB/CTR SL 00 – 63 26
4 DCOB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 DCOB/ACO 00 – 63 24

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

406 6 DCOB/CTR CO 00 – 63 15
7 DCOB/DCO 00 – 63 32
8 DCOB/VMIB 00 – 63 32
9 DCOB/DTMF 00 – 63 32
10 DCOB/TONE 00 – 63 32
11 DCOB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 32
12 DCOB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 32
13 DCOB/MUSIC3 00 – 63 32
14 DCOB/MODEM 00 – 63 37
407 VMIB RX Gain
1 VMIB/DKT 00 – 63 21
2 VMIB/SLT 00 – 63 32
3 VMIB/CTR SL 00 – 63 21
4 VMIB/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 VMIB/ACO 00 – 63 32
6 VMIB/CTR CO 00 – 63 23
7 VMIB/DCO 00 – 63 32
8 VMIB/MUSIC1 00 – 63 32
9 VMIB/MUSIC2 00 – 63 32
408 DTMF RC Gain
1 DTMF/SLT 00 – 63 28
2 DTMF/CTR SL 00 – 63 17
3 DTMF/ACO 00 – 63 24
408 4 DTMF/CTR CO 00 – 63 15
5 DTMF/DCO 00 – 63 24
409 EXT PAGE Gain
1 EXT PAGE/DKT 00 – 63 26
2 EXT PAGE/SLT 00 – 63 37
3 EXT PAGE/CTR SL 00 – 63 26
4 EXT PAGE/WTU 00 – 63 26
5 EXT PAGE/ACO 00 – 63 37

597
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

6 EXT PAGE/CTR CO 00 – 63 28
7 EXT PAGE/DCO 00 – 63 37
8 EXT PAGE/VMIB 00 – 63 37
9 EXT PAGE/MUSIC1 00 – 63 37
10 EXT PAGE/MUSIC2 00 – 63 37
11 EXT PAGE/MUSIC3 00 – 63 37
410 CPT Gain
1 CPT/ACO 00 – 63 24
2 CPT/CTR CO 00 – 63 15
3 CPT/DCO 00 – 63 24
411 MODEM Gain
1 MODEM/ACO 00 – 63 24
2 MODEM/CTR CO 00 – 63 20
3 MODEM/DCO 00 – 63 24
412 Short SLIB Gain
1 Shot ACO 00 – 63 31 SAF only
2 Long ACO 00 – 63 31

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK

413 Long SLIB Gain
1 Shot ACO 00 – 63 37 SAF only
2 Long ACO 00 – 63 37
414 Far SLIB Gain
1 Shot ACO 00 – 63 45 SAF only
2 Long ACO 00 – 63 45
415 Short ACO Gain
1 Short SLIB 00 – 63 35
2 Long SLIB 00 – 63 41 SAF only
3 Far SLIB 00 – 63 26
4 DTIB 00 – 63 47
416 Long ACO Gain
1 Short SLIB 00 – 63 39
2 Long SLIB 00 – 63 45 SAF only
3 Far SLIB 00 – 63 51
4 DTIB 00 – 63 32
420 System Tone Frequency
1 Dial Tone 4digits 0425, 0000 Nation specific
2 Ring Back Tone 4digits 0425, 0000 Nation specific
3 Busy Tone 4digits 0425, 0000 Nation specific
4 Error Tone 4digits 0620, 000 Nation specific
5 Dummy Dial Tone 4digits 0350, 440 Nation specific
421 Differential Ring Frequency
1 Ring 1 4digits 1000, 1020 Nation specific
2 Ring 2 4digits 0890, 0910 Nation specific
3 Ring 3 4digits 1260, 1280 Nation specific
4 Ring 4 4digits 0800, 0820 Nation specific
422 Distinct Ring Frequency
1 Ring 1 4digits 0480, 0000 Nation specific

598
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

2 Ring 2 4digits 0400, 0000 Nation specific

3 Ring 3 4digits 0620, 0000 Nation specific
4 Ring 4 4digits 0770, 0000 Nation specific
423 ACNR Tone Cadence
1 Ring-Back Tone 000-255 ON: 050 / OFF: 100 20msec base
2 Busy Tone 000-255 ON: 025 / OFF: 025 20msec base
3 Error Tone 000-255 ON: 012 / OFF: 012 20msec base
4 S –Dial Tone 000-255 ON: 070 / OFF: 000 20msec base
424 DTIB Rx ACO Gain
1 Short ACO 00 – 63 37 SAF only
2 Long ACO 00 – 63 42

5.3.28 INITIALIZATION
PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
450 Initialization
1 Flexible Numbering Plan Initialization PGM105, PGM106, PGM107
2 Station Database Initialization PGM110, PGM111, PGM112, PGM113,
PGM114, PGM 116, PGM117, PGM118,
PGM119, PGM121,PGM122, PGM123,
PGM124, PGM179
3 CO Line Database Initialization PGM140, PGM141, PGM142, PGM143,
PGM144
4 System Feature Database Initialization PGM160 – PGM 177, PGM108
5 Station Group Database Initialization PGM190, PGM191
6 ISDN Tables Database Initialization PGM201, PGM202, PGM230, PGM231
7 Reserved None(Reserved)
8 System Timer Database Initialization PGM180 – PGM182
9 Toll Table Database Initialization PGM224, PGM225
10 LCR Database Initialization PGM220 – PGM222
11 Tables Initialization PGM227 – PGM229,
PGM232 – PGM235
12 Flexible Button Program Initialization PGM115
13 Networking Database Initialization PGM 320, PGM321,PGM322,PGM323,
PGM 324
14 All Database Initialization Above All
15 System Reset By Software
16 DID Reroute Table
17 Board DATA

599
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

PGM FLEX ITEM REMARK

452 1 Init Version 2.2 Initialize DB added from V2.2 to
current version.
2 Init Station Name
3 Init Version 2.3 Initialize DB added from V2.3 to
current version.
4 Init Version 2.5 Initialize DB added from V2.5 to
current version.
5 Init Version 3.0 Initialize DB added from V3.0 to
current version.
6 Init Version 3.2 Initialize DB added from V3.2 to
current version.
7 Init Version 3.3 Initialize DB added from V3.3 to
current version.
8 Init Version 3.5 Initialize DB added from V3.5 to
current version.

5.3.29 PRINT PROT DATABASE

PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
451 Print Prot Data
1 Flexible Numbering Plan Print
2 Station Database Print STN_R
3 CO Line Database Print CO_R
4 System Feature Database Print
5 Station Group Database Print
6 ISDN Tables Database Print
7 System Timer Database Print
8 Toll Table Database Print
9 LCR Database Print
10 Other Tables Print
11 Nation Specific Database Print
12 Flexible Button Program Print STN_R
13 Networking Data Print
14 All Database Print
15 LCD Message Print
00 – 12 Nation specific 00:ENG 01:ITA 02:FIN
03:DUT 04:SWE 05:DAN
1 Language
06:NOR 07:HUN 08:GER
09:FRE 10:POR 11:SPA 12:KOR
0–2 0 0: NORMAL
2 Station Type 1: LG-Nortel-GAP
2: LARGE
16 Quit Print

600
IP LDK-100/300/300E Programming Manual Quick ADMIN Programming Table

601